OMTR129420

*DCY*
9RT Tractors (Serial No. 926001-)

European Edition G2
*OMTR129420*
OPERATOR'S MANUAL
9RT Tractors (Serial No. 926001-)

European Edition
OMTR129420 ISSUE G2 (ENGLISH)
*omtr129420*
John Deere Waterloo Works

European Edition
PRINTED IN U.S.A.
Introduction
Foreword particular characteristics and acquainted with the
READ THIS MANUAL carefully to learn how to operate relevant safety rules (accident prevention). The accident
and service your machine correctly. Failure to do so prevention regulations, all other generally recognized
could result in personal injury or equipment damage. regulations on safety and occupational medicine and
This manual and safety signs on your machine may also the road traffic regulations must be observed at all
be available in other languages (see your John Deere times. Any arbitrary modifications carried out on this
dealer to order). tractor will relieve the manufacturer of all liability for any
resulting damage or injury.
THIS MANUAL SHOULD BE CONSIDERED a
permanent part of your machine and should remain with REGISTER USED PRODUCTS. If you purchased used
the machine when you sell it. John Deere products from an authorized John Deere
dealer, the warranty registration information was
MEASUREMENTS in this manual are given in both updated by the dealer and requires no further
metric and customary U.S. unit equivalents. Use only information on your part.
correct replacement parts and fasteners. Metric and
inch fasteners may require a specific metric or inch If you purchased any used John Deere product from an
wrench. auction, through a trader or from a farmer, please
register it now. John Deere and John Deere dealers
RIGHT-HAND AND LEFT-HAND sides are determined value their customer’s safety and satisfaction. Your local
by facing the direction of forward travel. John Deere dealer is best equipped and anxious to
WRITE PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION NUMBERS (P.I. provide you superior levels of support for your machine.
N.) in the Specification or Identification Numbers Please enter your product details and your address
section. Accurately record all the numbers to help in online, using the John Deere website corresponding to
tracing the machine should it be stolen. Your dealer also your country. Then select the dealer of your choice.
needs these numbers when you order parts. File the RW29387,00000CC-19-22JUL19
identification numbers in a secure place off the machine.
SETTING FUEL DELIVERY BEYOND PUBLISHED
factory specifications or otherwise overpowering will Emissions Performance and Tampering
result in loss of warranty protection for this machine.
Operation and Maintenance
BEFORE DELIVERING THIS MACHINE, your dealer The engine, including the emissions control system,
performed a predelivery inspection. After operating for shall be operated, used, and maintained in accordance
an agreed upon period, schedule an after-sale with the instructions provided in this manual to maintain
inspection with your John Deere dealer to ensure best the emissions performance of the engine within the
performance. requirements applicable to the engine's category/
THIS TRACTOR IS DESIGNED SOLELY for use in certification.
customary agricultural or similar operations
("INTENDED USE"). Use in any other way is considered Tampering
as contrary to the intended use. The manufacturer No deliberate tampering with or misuse of the engine
accepts no liability for damage or injury resulting from emissions control system shall take place; in particular
this misuse, and these risks must be borne solely by the with regard to deactivating or not maintaining an
user. Compliance with and strict adherence to the exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) or a DEF dosing
conditions of operation, service and repair as specified system. Tampering with an engine’s emissions control
by the manufacturer also constitute essential elements system will void the European Union (EU) type approval
for the intended use. and applicable emissions-related warranties.
THIS TRACTOR SHOULD BE OPERATED, serviced DX,EMISSIONS,PERFORM-19-12JAN18
and repaired only by persons familiar with all its
Trademarks
Trademarks
ACS™ (ActiveCommand Steering) Trademark of Deere & Company
ActiveSeat™ Trademark of Deere & Company
AirCushion™ Trademark of Deere & Company
iPhone and Siri are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and
Apple CarPlay®
other countries. Apple CarPlay is a trademark of Apple Inc.
AutoLoad™ Trademark of Deere & Company
AutoPowr™ Trademark of Deere & Company
Introduction
Trademarks
AutoTrac™ Trademark of Deere & Company
Bio Hy-Gard™ Trademark of Deere & Company
Bluetooth® Trademark of Bluetooth SIG
Break-In Plus™ Trademark of Deere & Company
CommandARM™ Trademark of Deere & Company
CommandCenter™ Trademark of Deere & Company
CommandPRO™ Trademark of Deere & Company
Cool-Gard™ Trademark of Deere & Company
DURABUILT™ Trademark of Camoplast Inc.
e18™ Trademark of Deere & Company
e23™ Trademark of Deere & Company
eAutoPowr™ Trademark of Deere & Company
Efficiency Manager™ Trademark of Deere & Company
ExactRate™ Trademark of Deere & Company
GreenStar™ Trademark of Deere & Company
Hy-Gard™ Trademark of Deere & Company
HydraCushion™ Trademark of Deere & Company
ILS™ (Independent-Link Suspension) Trademark of Deere & Company
iTEC™ Trademark of Deere & Company
IVT™ (Infinitely Variable Transmission) Trademark of Deere & Company
JDLink™ Trademark of Deere & Company
PLUS-50™ Trademark of Deere & Company
PowerShift™ Trademark of Deere & Company
PowerTech™ Trademark of Deere & Company
PowerZero™ Trademark of Deere & Company
QUICK METAL™ Trademark of Henkel Corporation
Quik-Tatch™ Trademark of Deere & Company
Service ADVISOR™ Trademark of Deere & Company
SERVICEGARD™ Trademark of Deere & Company
iPhone and Siri are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and
Siri®
other countries. Apple CarPlay is a trademark of Apple Inc.
SprayMaster™ Trademark of Deere & Company
StarFire™ Trademark of Deere & Company
StellarSupport™ Trademark of Deere & Company
TEFLON™ Trademark of DuPont Co.
TLS™ (Triple-Link Suspension) Trademark of Deere & Company
TouchSet™ Trademark of Deere & Company
RX33672,0000DEE-19-11JUL22
Contents
Page Page
Glossary Avoid High-Pressure Fluids .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 05-17

Glossary of Terms . .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 00-1 Do Not Open High-Pressure Fuel System .. .. .. .. 05-17
Store Attachments Safely .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 05-17
Safety Decommissioning — Proper Recycling and
Recognize Safety Information .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 05-1 Disposal of Fluids and Components .. .. .. .. .. .. 05-17
Understand Signal Words ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 05-1
Follow Safety Instructions ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 05-1 Safety Signs
Prepare for Emergencies . ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 05-1 Operator's Manual . .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 05A-1
Wear Protective Clothing . ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 05-2 Seat Belt . .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 05A-1
Protect Against Noise . .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 05-2 Passenger Seat .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 05A-2
Handle Fuel Safely—Avoid Fires . .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 05-2 Rear Hitch Remote Switch (If Equipped) [Ag] .. . 05A-2
Fire Prevention .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 05-2 Park Brake (Stored Energy) . .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 05A-3
In Case of Fire .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 05-3 Track Accumulators .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 05A-3
Avoid Static Electricity Risk When Refueling .. .. .. 05-3 Rear SCVs—With Hitch [Ag] .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 05A-4
Use Foldable ROPS and Seat Belt Properly .. .. .. 05-4 Rear SCVs—Without Hitch and with
Stay Clear of Rotating Drivelines .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 05-4 Standard Drawbar [Ag] .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 05A-4
Use Steps and Handholds Correctly . .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 05-5 Rear SCVs—Without Hitch and with Wide-
Read Operator’s Manuals for ISOBUS Swing Drawbar [Ag] .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 05A-5
Controllers .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 05-5
Use Seat Belt Properly . .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 05-5 Vehicle Overview
Vibration . .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 05-5 9RT Series Tractor . .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. . 10-1
Operating the Tractor Safely .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 05-6
Avoid Backover Accidents .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 05-7
Limited Use in Forestry Operation . .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 05-7 Engine Operation
Operating the Loader Tractor Safely . .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 05-7 Engine Settings—Access .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. . 20-1
Engine Settings . .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. . 20-1
Keep Riders Off Machine ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 05-8
Passenger Seat . .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 05-8 Engine Settings—Engine Power .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. . 20-3
Use Safety Lights and Devices . .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 05-8 Engine Settings—Max Engine Speed ... .. .. .. .. .. . 20-3
Towing Trailers/Implements Safely . .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 05-8 Engine Settings—Exhaust Filter System
Overview .. ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. . 20-4
Use Caution on Slopes, Uneven Terrain, and
Rough Ground .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 05-9 Engine Settings—AUTO Exhaust Filter
Freeing a Mired Machine . ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 05-9 Cleaning . .. ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. . 20-5
Avoid Contact with Agricultural Chemicals . .. .. .. . 05-10 Engine Settings—Disable AUTO Exhaust
Handle Agricultural Chemicals Safely . ... .. .. .. .. . 05-10 Filter Cleaning . .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. . 20-5
Handling Batteries Safely ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 05-11 Engine Settings—Parked Filter Cleaning . .. .. .. .. . 20-6
Avoid Heating Near Pressurized Fluid Lines .. .. . 05-12 Engine Settings—Decelerator . .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. . 20-7
Engine Settings—Advanced . .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. . 20-7
Remove Paint Before Welding or Heating . .. .. .. . 05-12
Handle Electronic Components and Brackets Required Machine Stop Warning .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. . 20-8
Safely . .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 05-12 Engine Fuel System and Power Rating . .. .. .. .. .. . 20-9
Practice Safe Maintenance . .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 05-13 Battery Disconnect Switch . .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. . 20-9
Start the Engine .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. . 20-9
Avoid Hot Exhaust .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 05-13
Clean Exhaust Filter Safely . .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 05-13 Theft Deterrent Systems ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 20-10
Work In Ventilated Area .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 05-14 Run the Engine . .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 20-11
Support Machine Properly .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 05-14 Stop the Engine .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 20-11
Prevent Machine Runaway . .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 05-15 Restart Engine That Has Run Out of Fuel .. .. .. .. 20-11
Park Machine Safely .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 05-15 Reduce Fuel Consumption . .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 20-11
Transport Tractor Safely .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 05-15 Battery Booster or Charger .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 20-12
Service Cooling System Safely . .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 05-15
Service Accumulator Systems Safely .. ... .. .. .. .. . 05-16 Cold Weather Operation
Service Tires Safely . .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 05-16 Cold Weather Starting—With Starting Aid .. .. .. . 20A-1
Service Front-Wheel Drive Tractor Safely .. .. .. .. . 05-16 Change Starting Fluid Canister .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 20A-1
Tightening Wheel Retaining Bolts/Nuts ... .. .. .. .. . 05-16 Engine Coolant Heater Use .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 20A-1
Continued on next page
Original Instructions. All information, illustrations and specifications in this

manual are based on the latest information available at the time of publication.
The right is reserved to make changes at any time without notice.
COPYRIGHT © 2022
DEERE & COMPANY
Moline, Illinois
All rights reserved.
i
Contents
Page Page
Emissions Equipment Perform Sequence . .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. . 40-5

Aftertreatment Indicators Overview .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 20B-1 Recommendations (AutoLearn) . .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. . 40-5
Selective Catalytic Reduction (SCR) System iTEC Functions—Efficiency Manager . ... .. .. .. .. .. . 40-6
Overview . ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 20B-3
Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) Service ... .. .. .. .. 20B-4 Tractor-Implement Automation (TIA)
Restored Operation Option . .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 20B-5 TIA—General Information .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 40A-1
Activate TIA Equipment . ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 40A-1
Front Console Operate TIA .. ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 40A-1
Front Console . .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 30-1 PTO Requirements [Ag] . ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 40A-2
Adjust Steering Wheel and Column .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 30-1 SCV Requirements .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 40A-2
Operate Horn .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 30-1 PowerShift Transmission Requirements . .. .. .. .. . 40A-2
Operate Wipers and Washers .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 30-1 AutoTrac Guidance Requirements .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 40A-2
Key Switch .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 30-2 Rear Hitch Requirements [Ag] . .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 40A-3
Operate Turn Signals . .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 30-2
Pedals . .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 30-2 Drivetrain
Operate Lights . .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 30-3 Drivetrain Overview .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. . 50-1
Differential Lock Switch . .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 30-4 Drivetrain Protection . .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. . 50-1
Corner Post Display Brakes

Corner Post Display .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 30A-1 Trailer Brake System Settings—Access . .. .. .. .. . 50A-1
Trailer Brake System Settings . .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 50A-1
CommandARM Controls Trailer Brake System Settings—Brake Gain .. .. . 50A-2
CommandARM .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 30B-1 Trailer Brake System Settings—Pre-Brake
CommandARM Hitch Controls [Ag] .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 30B-1 Offset .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 50A-2
CommandARM SCV Control Levers . .. ... .. .. .. .. 30B-2 Trailer Brake System Settings—Trailer Brake
CommandARM PTO Control Levers [Ag] .. .. .. .. 30B-2 Test .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 50A-3
CommandARM Climate, Radio, and Lighting Trailer Brake System Settings—Advanced .. .. .. . 50A-3
Controls .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 30B-2 Brake Use .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 50A-3
CommandARM Controls—Left Side . .. ... .. .. .. .. 30B-4 Hydraulic Trailer Brakes (If Equipped) ... .. .. .. .. . 50A-4
CommandARM Secondary Brake Lever . .. .. .. .. 30B-6
CommandARM Navigation Bar . .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 30B-6 Transmission—General Information
Adjust CommandARM Position . .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 30B-7 Transmission Settings—Access Advanced . .. .. . 50B-1
Transmission Settings—Advanced .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 50B-1
CommandCenter Warm-Up Transmission-Hydraulic System .. .. .. . 50B-3
Generation 4 Display . .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 30C-1 Backup Alarm ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 50B-4
Rear Hitch or PTO Availability .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 30C-1
Machine Settings Overview . .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 30C-1 e18 PowerShift Transmission
Navigate Generation 4 CommandCenter .. .. .. .. 30C-3 Operate Transmission—e18 . .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 50G-1
Compatible Universal Displays . .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 30C-4 Shift Transmission—e18 ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 50G-1
Power Display On and Off .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 30C-4 e18 Set Speeds and Efficiency Manager . .. .. .. . 50G-3
Change Pages and Values .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 30C-4 e18 Transmission Settings—Access .. ... .. .. .. .. . 50G-4
Factory and Service ADVISOR Installed e18 Transmission Settings . .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 50G-4
Onscreen Help . .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 30C-5 e18 Transmission Settings—Mode .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 50G-6
Radar Calibration .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 30C-5 e18 Transmission Settings—Custom . ... .. .. .. .. . 50G-6
Slip Calibration .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 30C-5 e18 Transmission Settings—Droop . .. ... .. .. .. .. . 50G-6
Steering Settings—Access .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 30C-6 e18 Transmission Settings—ECO . .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 50G-7
Steering Settings .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 30C-6 e18 Transmission Settings—Max Speeds .. .. .. . 50G-7
Steering Settings—Manual Steering
Sensitivity ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 30C-7
Controls Setup . .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 30C-7 PTO—General Information [Ag]
Install Video Display Camera . .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 30C-8 PTO Settings—Access .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 60A-1
PTO Settings ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 60A-1
PTO Settings—Advanced .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 60A-2
Intelligent Total Equipment Control (iTEC) PTO Settings—Engagement Rate .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 60A-3
CommandARM Control Functions . .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 40-1 PTO Settings—Rear PTO Speed Limit .. .. .. .. .. . 60A-3
iTEC Station Description (EU 1322/2014) . .. .. .. .. 40-1 PTO Settings—PTO Out-of-Seat .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 60A-3
CommandCenter Pages Descriptions and Operating Instructions (EU 1322-2014) . .. .. .. .. . 60A-4
Functions . ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 40-1 Operate PTOs .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 60A-5
Status Area . ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 40-2 External PTO Switches .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 60A-5
All Sequence Page . .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 40-2 Select Correct Engine Speed .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 60A-6
Add New Sequence . .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 40-2
Sequence Step Status .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 40-3
Edit or Remove Sequence .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 40-4 Rear PTO [Ag]
Sequence Sets Page . .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 40-4 Use PTO Shield (If Equipped) . .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 60C-1
Attach PTO-Driven Implement [Ag] . .. ... .. .. .. .. . 60C-1
ii
Contents
Page Page
Rear Hitch [Ag] SCV Settings—Automation .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 70A-6

Hitch Lift Capacities . .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 60E-1 SCV Settings—Assignment .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 70A-6
Rear Hitch Settings—Access . .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 60E-1 SCV Settings—Flow Adjustment Sensitivity .. .. . 70A-7
Rear Hitch Settings . .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 60E-1 SCV Settings—Flow Assist .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 70A-7
Rear Hitch Settings—Upper Limit .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 60E-3 SCV Control Lever Adjustments .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 70A-7
Rear Hitch Settings—Drop Rate . .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 60E-3 Total SCV Flow . .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 70A-9
Rear Hitch Settings—Raise Rate .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 60E-3 Flow Sharing . ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 70A-10
Rear Hitch Settings—Load Depth .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 60E-4
Rear Hitch Settings—Slip Sensitivity .. ... .. .. .. .. 60E-4 Hydraulic Connections
Rear Hitch Settings—Position .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 60E-5 Connect/Disconnect Hydraulic Hoses ... .. .. .. .. . 70B-1
Rear Hitch Settings—Position Control . ... .. .. .. .. 60E-6 Implements Requiring Large Volumes of
Rear Hitch Settings—Draft Control .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 60E-6 Hydraulic Oil . .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 70B-2
Hitch Control Lever Adjustments . .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 60E-7 Using Load-Sensing Hydraulic System—
Hitch Depth Set Point . .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 60E-8 Power-Beyond . .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 70B-2
Float Operation .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 60E-8 Component Identification and Location [Ag] .. .. . 70B-4
Rear Hitch Components .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 60E-8 Using Hydraulic Spray Pumps [Ag] . .. ... .. .. .. .. . 70B-7
External Hitch Switches .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 60E-9 Implement Connection Example [Ag]: Closed
Hitch Manual Lowering . .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 60E-9 Center Valve and Pump at High Pressure
Adjust Sway Blocks . .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 60E-9 —Less Hitch . .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 70B-8
Attach Implement to Quick-Hitch . .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 60E-10 Implement Connection Example [Ag]: Planter
Adjust Implement Level .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 60E-10 with Vacuum Motor and Return Line to
Adjust Lateral Float . .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 60E-11 SCV Using Motor Return Tip . .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 70B-9
Detach Implement from Quick-Hitch . .. ... .. .. .. . 60E-11 Implement Connection Example [Ag]: Planter
Hitch Conversion—Category 4/4N/3 with Vacuum Motor and Return Line to
Convertible Quick-Hitch .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 60E-11 Motor Return—With Hitch and Implement
Convert Category 4N/3 Convertible Quick- Lift Assist .. ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 70B-10
Hitch Lower Hooks . .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 60E-12 Implement Connection Example [Ag]:
Convert Category 4N/3 Convertible Quick- Pressure Control Valve Applications—
Hitch Upper Hook .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 60E-13 Less Hitch (Grain Drills or Air Seeders with
Constant Down-Pressure System) . ... .. .. .. .. 70B-12
Drawbar Implement Connection Example—High-Flow
Drawbar Load Limitations [Ag] . .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 60F-2 Hydraulics [Ag]: Implement Control Valves
Using Correct Drawbar Pin—Category 5 to 4 —Less Hitch . .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 70B-13
[Ag] . .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 60F-3 Component Identification and Location
Scraper Applications [Scraper] . .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 60F-3 [Scraper] .. ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 70B-13
Calculate Static Vertical Drawbar Load Scraper Hydraulic Hose Tips [Scraper] .. .. .. .. .. 70B-14
[Scraper] . ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 60F-4 Implement Connection Example [Scraper]:
Calculate Vertical Drawbar Load Distance Pulling 1, 2, and 3 Scrapers .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 70B-15
Behind Rear Axle [Scraper] .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 60F-4
Adjust Drawbar [Ag] .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 60F-4 TouchSet Depth Control
Adjust Wide Swing Drawbar [Ag] (If TouchSet Depth Control Settings and
Equipped) ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 60F-5 Adjustments .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 70C-1
Install Drawbar or Quick-Attach in Short Connect/Disconnect the Implement Position
Drawbar Support [Scraper] .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 60F-5 Connector . ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 70C-1
Short Scraper Drawbar Conversion [Scraper] . .. . 60F-6
Tow Cable [Scraper] .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 60F-7
Install and Use Clevis Assembly [Ag] . ... .. .. .. .. . 60F-7 Laser Scraper Control [Ag]
Category 5 Heavy-Duty Drawbar Load Laser Scraper—Scrapers Equipped with
Limitations [Ag] (If Equipped) .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 60F-8 Scraper Control Unit .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 70D-1
Hydraulics—General Information Scraper Information [Scraper]

Hydraulic System Overview . .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 70-1 Scraper Operation Cycle ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 70E-1
Hydraulic Option Connector .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 70-1 Weight Transfer Limits . .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 70E-2
Scraper/Tractor Attachment .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 70E-2
Loading Techniques .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 70E-2
Selective Control Valves Connect AutoLoad Harness . .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 70E-3
SCV Settings—Access . .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 70A-1 AutoLoad Settings—Access . .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 70E-3
SCV Settings .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 70A-1 AutoLoad Settings . .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 70E-4
SCV Settings—Standard Mode . .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 70A-3 AutoLoad Settings—Scraper Status .. ... .. .. .. .. . 70E-5
SCV Settings—Independent Mode . .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 70A-3 AutoLoad Settings—Initial Draft . .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 70E-6
SCV Settings—Feature Mode .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 70A-4 AutoLoad Settings—Scraper Position ... .. .. .. .. . 70E-6
SCV Settings—Flow Adjustment . .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 70A-4 AutoLoad Settings—Average Draft . .. ... .. .. .. .. . 70E-7
SCV Settings—Time Adjustment . .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 70A-5 AutoLoad Settings—Advanced .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 70E-7
SCV Settings—Advanced ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 70A-5 AutoLoad Settings—Scraper Dimensions . .. .. .. . 70E-7
SCV Settings—Activating Independent Mode . .. 70A-6
iii
Contents
Page Page
Tracks—General Information Wheel Weight Holding Wrench(JDG10958) .. .. .. 100-6

General Track Use Guidelines . .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 80-1 Implement Guidelines .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 100-6
Tracks Service . .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 80-1 Calculate Tractor Ballast Package .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 100-6
Unballasted Tractor Weight Chart . .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 100-8
Seats Worksheet to Calculate Ballast Changes . .. .. .. 100-10
Adjust Air Seat .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 90-1
Adjust ActiveSeat II . .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 90-3 Transport
Operator Presence Sensor .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 90-5 Driving Tractor on Roads ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 110-1
Adjust Passenger Seat . .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 90-6 Towed Mass (EU 1322/2014) .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 110-1
Towed Loads and Transport with Ballast .. .. .. .. .. 110-1
Mirrors Transporting Rear Mounted Implements with
Adjust Mirrors .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 90A-1 Ballast . .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 110-2
Transport Towed Equipment at Safe Speeds . .. .. 110-2
Safety Chain Use .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 110-3
Lights Tow Points . .. ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 110-3
Light Identification . .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 90C-1 Tow Mode—Engine Will Start .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 110-3
Lights Settings—Access .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 90C-1 Tow Mode—Engine Will Not Start . .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 110-4
Lights Settings . .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 90C-2 Emergency Brake Steering .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 110-4
Lights Settings—Field Lights Presets .. ... .. .. .. .. 90C-3 Carrier Transport . .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 110-5
Lights Settings—Hood/Belt Line Lights ... .. .. .. .. 90C-3 Freeing a Mired Tractor . ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 110-7
Lights Settings—Advanced . .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 90C-3
Hazard and Extremity Lights .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 90C-4
Beacon Light ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 90C-4 Fuel, Lubricants, and Coolant—General
7-Pin Outlet . ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 90C-4 Information
Determine Tractor Engine Type . .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 200-1
Minimizing the Effect of Cold Weather on
Accessories Diesel Engines .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 200-1
Right-Hand Side Console ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 90D-1 Oil Filters . .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 200-2
CommandARM Storage .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 90D-1
Right-Hand Front Corner Post .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 90D-2
Left-Hand Rear Corner Post .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 90D-2 Fuel
Right-Hand Rear Corner Post .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 90D-3 Diesel Fuel . .. ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 200A-1
Refrigerator and Cool/Storage Box .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 90D-3 Supplemental Diesel Fuel Additives .. ... .. .. .. .. 200A-1
Sunshade . .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 90D-4 Biodiesel Fuel .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 200A-2
Storage Compartments . .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 90D-4 Lubricity of Diesel Fuel .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 200A-3
Monitor Bracket Mounts .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 90D-4 Handling and Storing Diesel Fuel . .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 200A-3
Emergency Exit .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 90D-4 Fill Fuel Tank ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 200A-3
Install Business Band/Citizens Band (CB) Testing Diesel Fuel . .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 200A-4
Antenna and/or Radio . ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 90D-5 Fuel Filters . .. ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 200A-4
Mount StarFire Receiver . ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 90D-6
Mount RTK (Real-Time Kinematic) Radio .. .. .. .. 90D-6 Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF)
Implement Connector . .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 90D-7 Refilling Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Tank .. .. .. 200B-1
RS232 Serial Communication Connection . .. .. .. 90D-7 Fill DEF Tank—Final Tier 4/Stage V Engine .. .. 200B-1
AutoLoad Harness Connector [Scraper] .. .. .. .. .. 90D-8 Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) — Use in
Chain Box . .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 90D-8 Selective Catalytic Reduction (SCR)
Equipped Engines .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 200B-2
HVAC Storing Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) . .. ... .. .. .. .. 200B-2
HVAC Settings—Access . ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 90E-1 Testing Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) . .. ... .. .. .. .. 200B-3
HVAC Settings . .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 90E-1 Disposal of Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) . .. .. .. .. 200B-3
HVAC Settings—Climate Control Automation . .. 90E-2
HVAC Settings—Set Temperature . .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 90E-2 Engine Oil
HVAC Settings—Air Flow Mode .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 90E-3 Diesel Engine Oil Service Interval for
HVAC Settings—Fan Speed .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 90E-3 Operation at High Altitude .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 200C-1
HVAC Settings—Air Conditioning .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 90E-3 John Deere Break-In Plus Engine Oil —
Interim Tier 4, Final Tier 4, Stage IIIB,
Performance Ballasting Stage IV, and Stage V ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 200C-1
General Ballasting Information . .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 100-1 Diesel Engine Oil — Interim Tier 4, Final Tier
General Guidelines . .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 100-1 4, Stage IIIB, Stage IV, and Stage V . .. .. .. .. 200C-1
General Weight Split Guidelines . .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 100-2 Engine Oil and Filter Service Intervals —
Ballast Options .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 100-2 Interim Tier 4, Final Tier 4, Stage IIIB,
Ballasting Recommendations With Stage IV, and Stage V Engines .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 200C-2
Implements . .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 100-3
Measuring Slip . .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 100-4 Engine Coolant
Quik-Tatch Weight Use . .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 100-4 Diesel Engine Coolant (Engine with Wet
Idler Weight Use .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 100-5 Sleeve Cylinder Liners) . .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 200D-1
iv
Contents
Page Page
John Deere Cool-Gard II Coolant Extender .. .. . 200D-1 Water Separator .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 220B-1
Operating in Warm Temperature Climates . .. .. . 200D-2 Tracks .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 220B-2
Water Quality for Mixing with Coolant Engine and Exhaust Compartments .. ... .. .. .. .. 220B-2
Concentrate . .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 200D-2 Air Conditioning System . ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 220B-2
Testing Coolant Freeze Point . .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 200D-2 Engine Water Pump Weep Hole .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 220B-3
Disposing of Coolant .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 200D-3 Fuel Tank Sump .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 220B-3
Engine Oil Level .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 220B-3
Other Lubricants Hydraulic System Oil Level .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 220B-4
Transmission and Hydraulic Oil .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 200E-1 Track Alignment .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 220B-5
Transmission and Hydraulic Oil Use . .. ... .. .. .. . 200E-1 Track Tension ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 220B-5
Multipurpose Extreme Pressure (EP) Grease . . 200E-1 Drive and Idler Wheels and Mid-Rollers . .. .. .. .. 220B-8
Lubricant Storage . .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 200E-2 Track Wear and Trash Buildup .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 220B-8
Mixing of Lubricants .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 200E-2 Secondary Brake . .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 220B-9
Alternative and Synthetic Lubricants . .. ... .. .. .. . 200E-2 Transmission PARK System . .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .220B-10
AirCushion Suspension System . .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .220B-10
Engine Air Intake System—13.6 L Final Tier
Service—General Information 4/Stage V . ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .220B-12
Service Sections Overview .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 210-1 Seat Belts .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .220B-12
Service Tasks Performed As Required ... .. .. .. .. . 210-1 Engine Auxiliary Drive Belt and Drive Belt
Identify Tractor Engine Emissions Status .. .. .. .. . 210-1 Tensioner .. ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .220B-12
Open Hood .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 210-1 Drive Wheel Hub Housing, Mid-Rollers, and
Open Hood (If Equipped) ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 210-2 Idler Wheel Hub Oil Level . .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .220B-13
Remove Engine Access Panel . .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 210-2 Engine Valve Clearance . ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .220B-14
Remove Front Engine Side Shield . .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 210-2 Drawbar Sensor Calibration [Scraper] ... .. .. .. .220B-14
Remove Rear Engine Side Shield . .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 210-2 Drawbar Wear .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .220B-15
Remove Cab Rear Panel ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 210-3 Engine Brake ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .220B-15
Access Battery Compartment . .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 210-3
Jack Up Tractor—Lifting Points and Support
Stand Placement (EU 1322/2014) .. ... .. .. .. .. . 210-3 Service—Tighten
Service and Connect STC (Snap-to- Drive Wheel Nuts, Idler Wheel, and Mid-
Connect) Fittings . .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 210-5 Roller Cap Screws .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 220C-1
Transmission Calibration . ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 210-6 Drawbar Support Cap Screws . .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 220C-1
Abort Transmission Calibration . .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 210-9
Do Not Modify Fuel System .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 210-9 Service—Change
Bleed Fuel System .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 210-9 Engine Auxiliary Drive Belt . .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 220D-1
Identify Zinc-Flake Coated Fasteners . ... .. .. .. .. . 210-9 Engine Oil and Filter . .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 220D-1
Metric Bolt and Screw Torque Values . ... .. .. .. .. . 210-9 Fuel Filters—13.6 L Engine .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 220D-2
Unified Inch Bolt and Screw Torque Values . .. . 210-10 Optional Fuel Water Separator Filter Element .. 220D-3
Fuel Tank Vent Filters . .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 220D-4
Service—Break-In (100 Hours or Less) Cab Filters . .. ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 220D-4
Perform Break-In Services .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 210A-1 Walking Beam Bumper Stops . .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 220D-6
Perform Track Systems Break-In . .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 210A-1 Engine Primary and Secondary Air Filters .. .. .. 220D-6
SCV Pilot Valve Filter .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 220D-7
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Tank Vent Filter .. .. 220D-8
Service—Record Charts Access Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) In-Line
Service Record Chart Overview .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 210B-1 Filter . .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 220D-8
Service Interval Chart . .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 210B-1 Change Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) In-Line
Service Record Chart . .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 210B-2 Filter . .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 220D-9
Access Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Dosing
Service—Clean Unit Filter .. ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 220D-11
Cleaning Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Tank .. .. . 220A-1 Change Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Dosing
DEF Tank Filler Neck Filter . .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 220A-1 Unit Filter .. ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 220D-11
Tractor Exterior .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 220A-2 Hydraulic System Oil and Filters .. .. .. ... .. .. .. 220D-12
Clean Display .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 220A-2 AirCushion Suspension System Air
Engine Cooling System—13.6 L Engine . .. .. .. . 220A-2 Compressor Air Inlet Fitler .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. 220D-16
Dual Beam Radar Sensor ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 220A-3 Engine Coolant . .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. 220D-16
Optional Fuel Water Separator . .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 220A-3 Engine Crankshaft Damper .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. 220D-19
AirCushion Suspension System Air
Compressor Pump and Inlet Filter and Air Service—Lubricate
Bags .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 220A-4 Rear Hitch .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 220E-1
Implement Connector . .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 220A-4 Heavy Duty Lift Link Pins (Optional) .. ... .. .. .. .. 220E-1
Lift Cylinders and Rockshaft . .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 220E-1
Service—Check Track Tension Cylinder .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 220E-2
Engine Coolant Level . .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 220B-1
Engine Coolant Freeze Point . .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 220B-1
v
Contents
Page Page
Service—Electrical Ground Speeds—e18 PowerShift

Service—Electrical Overview . .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 220F-1 Transmission .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 500A-9
Welding Near Electronic Control Units ... .. .. .. . 220F-1 Required Emission-Related Information . .. .. .. .. 500A-9
Keep Electronic Control Unit Connectors Carbon Dioxide Emissions (CO₂) . .. .. ... .. .. .. .500A-10
Clean . .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 220F-1 Third-Party Software Notifications and
Compressed Air Use .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 220F-2 Licenses . .. ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .500A-10
High-Pressure Washer Use . .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 220F-2
Disconnect Battery .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 220F-2 Identification Numbers
Service Batteries and Connections .. .. ... .. .. .. . 220F-2 Identification Plates .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 500B-1
Load Center—Cab .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 220F-3 Product Identification Number . .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 500B-1
Load Center—Front . .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 220F-4 Engine Serial Number . .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 500B-2
Access Master Fuses . .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 220F-6 Cab Serial Number .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 500B-2
Access Implement Power Relay Module Transmission Serial Number . .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 500B-2
Relays .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 220F-6 Axle Serial Number .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 500B-3
Handle Halogen Light Bulbs Safely .. .. ... .. .. .. . 220F-7 PTO Clutch Serial Number [Ag] . .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 500B-3
Change Halogen Bulbs . .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 220F-7 PTO Drop Box Serial Number [Ag] . .. ... .. .. .. .. 500B-3
Change Front HID/LED Light Assembly .. .. .. .. . 220F-8 Track Serial Numbers . .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 500B-3
Adjust Front Grille Lights . ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 220F-8 Keep Proof of Ownership .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 500B-4
Aim Headlights .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 220F-8 Keep Machines Secure .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 500B-4
Change Cab Roof Light .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. 220F-10
Change Rear Fender Light—Rear Indicator . .. 220F-10
Change Extremity Light—Cab .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. 220F-11 Change of Ownership
Change Cab Dome Light . ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. 220F-11 Subsequent Ownership .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 600A-1
Troubleshooting—Procedures Predelivery
Predelivery Checklist .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 700-1
Troubleshooting Features ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 300A-1
Electrical System .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 300A-1 Delivery Checklist and Certificate . .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 700-3
Engine . .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 300A-2
Hitch . .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 300A-5
Hydraulic System .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 300A-7
Operator’s Station . .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 300A-7
Selective Control Valve (SCV) .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 300A-8
Steering System . .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. 300A-10
Tractor Operation . .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. 300A-11
Transmission ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. 300A-11
Troubleshooting—Diagnostic Trouble
Codes (DTC)
STOP, Service, and Information Alerts on
CommandCenter . .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 300B-1
Access Diagnostic Trouble Codes . .. .. ... .. .. .. . 300B-1
Service—Storage
Place Tractor in Storage . ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 400-1
Remove Tractor from Storage .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 400-1
Specifications
Engine . .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 500A-1
Capacities . .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 500A-2
Fluorinated Greenhouse Gas—13.6 L
Engine .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 500A-3
Hydraulic System .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 500A-3
Transmission and Drivetrain .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 500A-3
PTO [Ag], Hitch [Ag], and Drawbar .. .. ... .. .. .. . 500A-5
Electrical System .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 500A-5
Integrated Technology .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 500A-5
Overall Dimensions . .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 500A-6
Tractor Loads/Weights .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 500A-7
Sound Level (EU 1322/2014) . .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 500A-8
Cab Classification According to EN 15695-1
(for Application of Crop Protection
Chemicals and Liquid Fertilizer) (EU 1322/
2014) . .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 500A-8
vi
Glossary
Glossary of Terms
ITEM ABBREVIATION DESCRIPTION
Agriculture Tractor [AG] Tractor primary application
Scraper Tractor [Scraper] Tractor primary application
Air Conditioning A/C System used for conditioning the air in the cab
Automatic PowerShift APS Transmission feature
Controller Area Network CAN A communication system linking on-board electronics
Cold Cranking Amperes CCA Refers to a battery's capability to perform during cold-weather operation
Chassis Control Unit CCU Computerized system for tractor monitoring
Diesel Exhaust Fluid DEF Abbreviation
Diesel Particulate Filter DPF Filter that prevents ash and soot from entering the atmosphere
Diagnostic Trouble Codes DTC Codes that inform the operator of stop, service, or information alerts
Economy Mode ECO Abbreviation
Engine Control Unit ECU Abbreviation
Engine Revolutions Per Minute erpm Abbreviation
Gallons per Minute gpm Fluid flow measured over a period of 1 minute
Global Positioning System GPS Abbreviation
Heavy Duty HD Abbreviation
High Intensity Discharge HID Type of Xenon working light used for front lighting
Heating Ventilating Air Conditioning HVAC Abbreviation
International Standards Organization ISO Abbreviation
John Deere Central Tire Inflation
John Deere CTIS Abbreviation
System
Left-Hand LH Abbreviation
Liters per Minute L/min Fluid flow measured over a period of 1 minute
Light Emitting Diode LED Abbreviation
Low Temperature Circuit LTC Abbreviation
Maximum Ballast Weight MBW Abbreviation
Mechanical Front Wheel Drive MFWD Powered front axle which is driven mechanically from the transmission
Product Identification Number PIN Serial number relating to tractor identification
PowerShift Transmission PST Abbreviation
EVT/eAutoPowr Transmission
PTE Abbreviation
Control Unit
IVT/AutoPowr Transmission Control
PTI Abbreviation
Unit
Power Take-Off PTO Abbreviation
PowerShift Transmission Control Unit PTP Computerized system used to control IVT transmission shift functions
Roll-Over Protective Structure ROPS Abbreviation
Right-Hand RH Abbreviation
Revolutions per Minute rpm Abbreviation
Society of Automotive Engineers SAE Engineering Standards Organization
Selective Control Valve SCV Device used to control remote hydraulic functions
Tire Pressure System TPS Abbreviation
Voltage Class-B VC-B Abbreviation
RX32825,000179D-19-29JUN22
00-1
Safety
Recognize Safety Information Follow Safety Instructions
T81389—UN—28JUN13 TS201—UN—15APR13
This is a safety-alert symbol. When you see this symbol Carefully read all safety messages in this manual and
on your machine or in this manual, be alert to the on your machine safety signs. Keep safety signs in good
potential for personal injury. condition. Replace missing or damaged safety signs. Be
sure new equipment components and repair parts
Follow recommended precautions and safe operating
include the current safety signs. Replacement safety
practices.
signs are available from your John Deere dealer.
DX,ALERT-19-29SEP98
There can be additional safety information contained on
parts and components sourced from suppliers that is not
reproduced in this operator's manual.
Understand Signal Words
Learn how to operate the machine and how to use
controls properly. Do not let anyone operate without
instruction.
Keep your machine in proper working condition.
Unauthorized modifications to the machine may impair
the function and/or safety and affect machine life.
If you do not understand any part of this manual and
need assistance, contact your John Deere dealer.
DX,READ-19-16JUN09
TS187—19—30SEP88
Prepare for Emergencies
DANGER; The signal word DANGER indicates a
hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in
death or serious injury.
WARNING; The signal word WARNING indicates a
hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in
death or serious injury.
CAUTION; The signal word CAUTION indicates a
hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in
minor or moderate injury. CAUTION may also be used
to alert against unsafe practices associated with events
which could lead to personal injury.
A signal word—DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION—is TS291—UN—15APR13
used with the safety-alert symbol. DANGER identifies Be prepared if a fire starts.
the most serious hazards. DANGER or WARNING
Keep a first aid kit and fire extinguisher handy.
safety signs are located near specific hazards. General
precautions are listed on CAUTION safety signs. Keep emergency numbers for doctors, ambulance
CAUTION also calls attention to safety messages in this service, hospital, and fire department near your
manual. telephone.
DX,SIGNAL-19-05OCT16 DX,FIRE2-19-03MAR93
05-1
Safety
Wear Protective Clothing Handle Fuel Safely—Avoid Fires
TS206—UN—15APR13 TS202—UN—23AUG88
Wear close fitting clothing and safety equipment Handle fuel with care: it is highly flammable. Do not
appropriate to the job. refuel the machine while smoking or when near open
flame or sparks.
Operating equipment safely requires the full attention of
the operator. Do not wear radio or music headphones Always stop engine before refueling machine. Fill fuel
while operating machine. tank outdoors.
DX,WEAR2-19-03MAR93 Prevent fires by keeping machine clean of accumulated
trash, grease, and debris. Always clean up spilled fuel.
Use only an approved fuel container for transporting
Protect Against Noise flammable liquids.
Never fill fuel container in pickup truck with plastic bed
liner. Always place fuel container on ground before
refueling. Touch fuel container with fuel dispenser
nozzle before removing can lid. Keep fuel dispenser
nozzle in contact with fuel container inlet when filling.
Do not store fuel container where there is an open
flame, spark, or pilot light such as within a water heater
or other appliance.
DX,FIRE1-19-12OCT11
TS207—UN—23AUG88 Fire Prevention

There are many variables that affect the sound level To reduce the risk of fire, your tractor should be regularly
range, including machine configuration, condition and inspected and cleaned.
maintenance level of the machine, ground surface,
operating environmental, duty cycles, ambient noise, ● Birds and other animals may build nests or bring
and attachments. other flammable materials into the engine
compartment or onto the exhaust system. The tractor
Exposure to loud noise can cause impairment or loss of should be inspected and cleaned prior to the first use
hearing. each day.
Always wear hearing protection. Wear a suitable ● A build up of grass, crop material and other debris
hearing protective device such as earmuffs or earplugs may occur during normal operation. This is especially
to protect against objectionable or uncomfortable loud true when operating in very dry conditions or
noises. conditions where airborne crop material or crop dust
DX,NOISE-19-03OCT17
is present. Any such build up must be removed to
ensure proper machine function and to reduce the
risk of fire. The tractor must be inspected and
cleaned periodically throughout the day.
● Regular and thorough cleaning of the tractor
combined with other routine maintenance
procedures listed in the Operator’s Manual greatly
reduce the risk of fire and the chance of costly
downtime.
05-2
Safety
● Do not store fuel container where there is an open pointing away from you, and release the locking
flame, spark, or pilot light such as within a water mechanism.
heater or other appliance.
2. Aim low. Point the extinguisher at the base of the fire.
● Check fuel lines, tank, cap, and fittings frequently for
damage, cracks or leaks. Replace if necessary. 3. Squeeze the lever slowly and evenly.
4. Sweep the nozzle from side-to-side.
Follow all operational and safety procedures posted on DX,FIRE4-19-22AUG13
the machine and the Operator’s Manual. Be careful of
hot engine and exhaust components during inspection
and cleaning. Before carrying out any inspection or
cleaning, always shut OFF the engine, place the Avoid Static Electricity Risk When
transmission in PARK or set parking brake, and remove Refueling
the key. Removal of the key will prevent others from
starting the tractor during inspection and cleaning.
DX,WW,TRACTOR,FIRE,PREVENTION-19-12OCT11
In Case of Fire
RG22142—UN—17MAR14
TS227—UN—15APR13
CAUTION: Avoid personal injury.
Stop machine immediately at the first sign of fire. Fire

may be identified by the smell of smoke or sight of
flames. Because fire grows and spreads rapidly, get off
the machine immediately and move safely away from RG21992—UN—21AUG13
the fire. Do not return to the machine! The number one The removal of sulfur and other compounds in Ultra-Low
priority is safety. Sulfur Diesel (ULSD) fuel decreases its conductivity and
increases its ability to store a static charge.
Call the fire department. A portable fire extinguisher can
put out a small fire or contain it until the fire department Refineries may have treated the fuel with a static
arrives; but portable extinguishers have limitations. dissipating additive. However, there are many factors
Always put the safety of the operator and bystanders that can reduce the effectiveness of the additive over
first. If attempting to extinguish a fire, keep your back to time.
the wind with an unobstructed escape path so you can
Static charges can build up in ULSD fuel while it is
move away quickly if the fire cannot be extinguished.
flowing through fuel delivery systems. Static electricity
Read the fire extinguisher instructions and become discharge when combustible vapors are present could
familiar with their location, parts, and operation before a result in a fire or explosion.
fire starts. Local fire departments or fire equipment
Therefore, it is important to ensure that the entire
distributors may offer fire extinguisher training and
system used to refuel your machine (fuel supply tank,
recommendations.
transfer pump, transfer hose, nozzle, and others) is
If your extinguisher does not have instructions, follow properly grounded and bonded. Consult with your fuel
these general guidelines: or fuel system supplier to ensure that the delivery
1. Pull the pin. Hold the extinguisher with the nozzle
05-3
Safety
system is in compliance with fueling standards for Stay Clear of Rotating Drivelines
proper grounding and bonding practices.
DX,FUEL,STATIC,ELEC-19-12JUL13
Use Foldable ROPS and Seat Belt Properly
TS1644—UN—22AUG95
TS1729—UN—24MAY13
Avoid crushing injury or death during rollover.
● If this machine is equipped with a foldable rollover
protective structure (ROPS), keep the ROPS in the
fully extended and locked position. USE a seat belt
when you operate with a ROPS in the fully extended
position.
- Hold the latch and pull the seat belt across the
body.
- Insert the latch into the buckle. Listen for a click.
- Tug on the seat belt to make sure that the belt is
securely fastened.
- Snug the seat belt across the hips.
● If this machine is operated with the ROPS folded (for
example, to enter a low building), drive with extreme H96219—UN—29APR10
caution. DO NOT USE a seat belt with the ROPS Entanglement in rotating driveline can cause serious
folded. injury or death.
● Return the ROPS to the raised, fully extended
position as soon as the machine is operated under Keep tractor master shield and driveline shields in place
normal conditions. at all times. Make sure rotating shields turn freely.
Only use power take-off driveshafts with adequate
DX,FOLDROPS-19-22AUG13
guards and shields.
Wear close fitting clothing. Stop the engine and be sure
that PTO driveline is stopped before making
adjustments, connections, or cleaning out PTO driven
equipment.
Do not install any adapter device between the tractor
and the primary implement PTO driveshaft that will allow
a 1000 rpm tractor shaft to power a 540 rpm implement
at speeds higher than 540 rpm.
Do not install any adapter device that results in a portion
of the rotating implement shaft, tractor shaft, or the
adapter to be unguarded. The tractor master shield shall
overlap the end of the splined shaft and the added
adaptor device as outlined in the table.
The angle at which the primary implement PTO
05-4
Safety
driveshaft can be inclined may be reduced depending are the responsibility of the ISOBUS Controller
on the shape and size of the tractor master shield and manufacturer.
the shape and size of the guard of the primary
implement PTO driveshaft. Some of these functions could pose hazard to either the
operator or a bystander. Read the Operator’s Manual
Do not raise implements high enough to damage the provided by the ISOBUS Controller manufacturer and
tractor master shield or guard of primary implement observe all safety messages in manual and on ISOBUS
PTO driveshaft. Detach the PTO driveline shaft if it is Controller product before use.
necessary to increase implement height. (See Attching/
Detaching PTO Driveline) NOTE: ISOBUS refers to the ISO Standard 11783.
When using Type 3/4 PTO, inclination and turning DX,WW,ISOBUS(T)-19-04APR22
angles may be reduced depending on type of PTO
master shield and coupling rails.
PTO Type Diameter Splines n ± 5 mm (0.20 in.)

Use Seat Belt Properly
1 35 mm (1.378 6 85 mm (3.35 in.)
in.)
2 35 mm (1.378 21 85 mm (3.35 in.)
in.)
3 45 mm (1.772 20 100 mm (4.00 in.)
in.)
4 57.5 mm (2.264 22 100 mm (4.00 in.)
in.)
DX,PTO-19-28FEB17
Use Steps and Handholds Correctly TS1729—UN—24MAY13

Avoid crushing injury or death during rollover.
This machine is equipped with a rollover protective
structure (ROPS). USE a seat belt when you operate
with a ROPS.
● Hold the latch and pull the seat belt across the body.
● Insert the latch into the buckle. Listen for a click.
● Tug on the seat belt latch to make sure that the belt is
securely fastened.
T133468—UN—15APR13 ● Snug the seat belt across the hips.
Prevent falls by facing the machine when getting on and
off. Maintain 3-point contact with steps, handholds, and
handrails. Replace entire seat belt if mounting hardware, buckle,
belt, or retractor show signs of damage.
Use extra care when mud, snow, or moisture present
slippery conditions. Keep steps clean and free of grease Inspect seat belt and mounting hardware at least once a
or oil. Never jump when exiting machine. Never mount year. Look for signs of loose hardware or belt damage,
or dismount a moving machine. such as cuts, fraying, extreme or unusual wear,
discoloration, or abrasion. Replace only with
DX,WW,MOUNT-19-12OCT11 replacement parts approved for your machine. See your
John Deere dealer.
DX,ROPS1-19-22AUG13
Read Operator’s Manuals for ISOBUS
Controllers
In addition to GreenStar Applications, this display can Vibration
be used as a display device for any ISOBUS Controller
All operator‘s seats approved by John Deere are
that meets ISO 11783 standard. The display includes
component type-approved in accordance with 78/764/
capability to control ISOBUS implements. When used in
EEC or (EU) 1322/2014 Annex XIV, being allocated an
this manner, information and control functions placed on
average of the vibration acceleration actually measured
the display are provided by the ISOBUS Controller and
at the seat (awS), equivalent to ≤ 1.25 m/s2.
05-5
Safety
This value must NOT be used to calculate vibration ● Never ride on a tractor unless seated on a John
stress as per 2002/44/EC! Local John Deere dealers Deere approved seat with a seat belt.
can provide assistance in assessing vibration stress. ● Keep all shields/guards in place.
Measures to reduce vibration may include: ● Use appropriate visual and audible signals when
operating on public roads.
● Appropriate style of driving, e.g. not too fast
● Move to side of road before stopping.
● Suspended front axle
● Reduce speed when turning, applying individual
● Suspended cab brakes, or operating around hazards on rough
● Correctly adjusted operator‘s seat ground or steep slopes.
● Correct tire pressure ● Stability degrades when attached implements are at
high position.
DX,VIBRATION,EU-19-28FEB17
● Couple brake pedals together for road travel.
● Pump brakes when stopping on slippery surfaces.
Operating the Tractor Safely ● Regularly clean fenders and fender valances (mud
flaps) if installed. Remove dirt before driving on
You can reduce the risk of accidents by following these public roadways.
simple precautions:
Heated and Ventilated Operator’s Seat
● Use your tractor only for jobs it was designed to
perform, for example, pushing, pulling, towing, ● An overheated seat heater can cause a burn injury or
actuating, and carrying a variety of interchangeable damage to the seat. To reduce the risk of burns, use
equipment designed to conduct agricultural work. caution when using the seat heater for extended
periods of time, especially if the operator cannot feel
● Operators must be mentally and physically capable
temperature change or pain to the skin. Do not place
of accessing the operator’s station and/or controls,
objects on the seat, such as a blanket, cushion,
and operating the machine properly and safely.
cover, or similar item, which can cause the seat
● Never operate machine when distracted, fatigued, or heater to overheat.
impaired. Proper machine operation requires the
operator’s full attention and awareness. Towing Loads
● This tractor is not intended to be used as a
● Be careful when towing and stopping heavy loads.
recreational vehicle.
Stopping distance increases with speed and weight
● Read this operator’s manual before operating the of towed loads, and on slopes. Towed loads with or
tractor and follow operating and safety instructions in without brakes that are too heavy for the tractor or
the manual and on the tractor. are towed too fast can cause loss of control.
● Follow operation and ballasting instructions found in ● Consider the total weight of the equipment and its
the operator’s manual for your implements/ load.
attachments, such as front loaders.
● Hitch towed loads only to approved couplings to
● Follow the instructions outlined in the operator’s avoid rearward upset.
manual of any mounted or trailed machinery or
trailer. Do not operate a combination of tractor- Parking and Leaving the Tractor
machine or tractor-trailer unless all instructions have
been followed. ● Before dismounting, shut off SCVs, disengage PTO,
stop engine, lower implements/attachments to
● Make sure that everyone is clear of machine,
ground, place implement/attachment control devices
attached equipment, and work area before starting
in neutral, and securely engage park mechanism,
engine or operation.
including the park pawl and park brake. In addition, if
● Stay clear of the three-point linkage and pickup hitch the tractor is left unattended, remove key.
(if equipped) when controlling them.
● Leaving transmission in gear with engine off will NOT
● Keep hands, feet, and clothing away from power- prevent the tractor from moving.
driven parts.
● Never go near an operating PTO or an operating
Driving Concerns implement.
● Never get on or off a moving tractor. ● Wait for all movement to stop before servicing
● Complete any required training prior to operating machinery.
vehicle.
Common Accidents
● Keep all children and nonessential personnel off
tractors and all equipment. Unsafe operation or misuse of the tractor can result in
accidents. Be alert to hazards of tractor operation.
05-6
Safety
The most common accidents involving tractors are: Operating the Loader Tractor Safely
● Tractor rollover
● Collisions with motor vehicles
● Improper starting procedures
● Entanglement in PTO shafts
● Falling from tractor
● Crushing and pinching during hitching
DX,WW,TRACTOR-19-08MAY19
Avoid Backover Accidents

TS1692—UN—09NOV09
When operating a machine with a loader application,
reduce speed as required to ensure good tractor and
loader stability.
To avoid tractor rollover and damage to front tires and
tractor, do not carry load with your loader at a speed
over 10 km/h (6 mph).
To avoid tractor damage do not use a front loader or a
sprayer tank if the tractor is equipped with a 3 Meter
Front Axle.
Never allow anyone to walk or work under a raised
PC10857XW—UN—15APR13 loader.
Before moving machine, be sure that all persons are
clear of machine path. Turn around and look directly for Do not use loader as a work platform.
best visibility. Use a signal person when backing if view Do not lift or carry anyone on loader, in bucket, or on
is obstructed or when in close quarters. implement or attachment.
Do not rely on a camera to determine if personnel or Lower loader to ground before leaving operators station.
obstacles are behind the machine. The system can be
limited by many factors including maintenance The Rollover Protective Structure (ROPS) or cab roof, if
practices, environmental conditions, and operating equipped, may not provide sufficient protection from
range. load falling onto the operators station. To prevent loads
from falling onto the operators station, always use
DX,AVOID,BACKOVER,ACCIDENTS-19-30AUG10 appropriate implements for specific applications (that is,
manure forks, round bale forks, round bale grippers,
and clampers).
Limited Use in Forestry Operation Ballast tractor in accordance to Ballast
The intended use of John Deere tractors when used in Recommendations in PREPARE TRACTOR section.
forestry operations is limited to tractor-specific DX,WW,LOADER-19-18SEP12
applications like transport, stationary work such as log
splitting, propulsion, or operating implements with PTO,
hydraulic, or electrical systems.
These are applications where normal operation does
not present a risk of falling or penetrating objects. Any
forestry applications beyond these applications, such as
forwarding and loading, requires fitment of application-
specific components including Falling Object Protective
Structure (FOPS) and/or Operative Protective
Structures (OPS). Contact John Deere dealer for
special components.
DX,WW,FORESTRY-19-12OCT11
05-7
Safety
Keep Riders Off Machine Use Safety Lights and Devices
Only allow the operator on the machine. Keep riders off.
Riders on machine are subject to injury such as being
struck by foreign objects and being thrown off of the
machine. Riders also obstruct the operator’s view
resulting in the machine being operated in an unsafe TS951—UN—12APR90
manner. Prevent collisions between other road users, slow
DX,RIDER-19-03MAR93 moving tractors with attachments or towed equipment,
and self-propelled machines on public roads. Frequently
check for traffic from the rear, especially in turns, and
use turn signal lights.
Passenger Seat
Use headlights, flashing warning lights, and turn signals
day and night. Follow local regulations for equipment
lighting and marking. Keep lighting and marking visible,
clean, and in good working order. Replace or repair
lighting and marking that has been damaged or lost. An
implement safety lighting kit is available from your John
Deere dealer.
DX,FLASH-19-07JUL99
Towing Trailers/Implements Safely
The passenger seat is intended only for transport of a
passenger in on-road operations (that is, transport from
farm to field).
If it is necessary to transport a passenger, the
passenger seat is the only means of transporting a
passenger provided by John Deere.
DX,SEAT,EU-19-28FEB17
Stopping distance increases with speed and mass of
trailer/implement, and when transporting on slopes.
Towed mass with or without brakes that is too heavy for
the tractor or is towed too fast can cause loss of control.
Consider the total weight of the equipment and its load.
When towing a trailer, become familiar with the braking
characteristics and ensure the compatibility of the
05-8
Safety
tractor/trailer combination in regard to the deceleration Never drive near the edge of a gully, drop-off, ditch,
rate. steep embankment, or a body of water. The machine
could suddenly roll over if a wheel goes over the edge or
Stay clear of area between tractor and trailed vehicle. the ground caves in
Trailer/Implement Brake System Top Speed

Choose a low ground speed so you will not have to stop
or shift while on a slope.
Unbraked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 km/h (15.5 mph)
Independent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 km/h (15.5 mph) Avoid starting, stopping, or turning on a slope. If the tires
Overrun brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 km/h (15.5 mph) lose traction, disengage the PTO and proceed slowly,
Single-line hydraulic brake . . . . . . . . . 25 km/h (15.5 mph) straight down the slope.
Dual-line hydraulic brake . . . . . . . . . . 40 km/h (25 mph) Keep all movement on slopes slow and gradual. Do not
Single-line air brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 km/h (15.5 mph) make sudden changes in speed or direction, which
Dual-line air brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maximum design speed could cause the machine to roll over.
DX,WW,SLOPE-19-28FEB17
There may be legal limits in force that restrict travel
speeds to figures lower than those quoted here.
Use additional caution when towing loads under Freeing a Mired Machine
adverse surface conditions, when turning, and on
inclines.
DX,TOW3,EU-19-28FEB17
Use Caution on Slopes, Uneven Terrain,

and Rough Ground
TS1645—UN—15SEP95
RXA0103437—UN—01JUL09
Avoid holes, ditches, and obstructions which cause the
tractor to tip, especially on slopes. Avoid sharp uphill
turns.
Driving forward out of a ditch, mired condition, or up a
steep slope could cause the tractor to tip over rearward.
Back out of these situations if possible.
Attempting to free a mired machine can involve safety
Danger of overturn increases greatly with narrow tread hazards such as the mired tractor tipping rearward, the
setting, at high speed. towing tractor overturning, and the tow chain or tow bar
(a cable is not recommended) failing and recoiling from
Not all conditions that can cause a tractor to overturn
its stretched condition.
are listed. Be alert for any situation in which stability
may be compromised. Back your tractor out if it gets mired down in mud.
Unhitch any towed implements. Dig mud from behind
Slopes are a major factor related to loss-of-control and
the rear wheels. Place boards behind the wheels to
tip-over accidents, which can result in severe injury or
provide a solid base and try to back out slowly. If
death. Operation on all slopes requires extra caution.
necessary, dig mud from the front of all wheels and drive
Uneven terrain or rough ground can cause loss-of- slowly ahead.
control and tip-over accidents, which can result in
If necessary to tow with another unit, use a tow bar or a
severe injury or death. Operation on uneven terrain or
long chain (a cable is not recommended). Inspect the
rough ground requires extra caution.
05-9
Safety
chain for flaws. Make sure all parts of towing devices Handle Agricultural Chemicals Safely
are of adequate size and strong enough to handle the
load.
Always hitch to the drawbar of the towing unit. Do not
hitch to the front pushbar attachment point. Before
moving, clear the area of people. Apply power smoothly
to take up the slack: a sudden pull could snap any
towing device causing it to whip or recoil dangerously.
DX,MIRED-19-07JUL99
Avoid Contact with Agricultural Chemicals

A34471—UN—11OCT88
Chemicals used in agricultural applications such as
fungicides, herbicides, insecticides, pesticides,
rodenticides, and fertilizers can be harmful to your
health or the environment if not used carefully.
Always follow all label directions for effective, safe, and
legal use of agricultural chemicals.
Reduce risk of exposure and injury:
● Wear appropriate personal protective equipment as
recommended by the manufacturer. In the absence
of manufacturer's instructions, follow these general
TS272—UN—23AUG88 guidelines:
This enclosed cab does not protect against inhaling
- Chemicals labeled 'Danger': Most toxic.
vapor, aerosol or dust. If pesticide use instructions
Generally require use of goggles, respirator,
require respiratory protection, wear an appropriate
gloves, and skin protection.
respirator inside the cab.
- Chemicals labeled 'Warning': Less toxic.
Before leaving the cab, wear personal protective Generally require use of goggles, gloves, and skin
equipment as required by the pesticide use instructions. protections.
When re-entering the cab, remove protective equipment
- Chemicals labeled 'Caution': Least toxic.
and store either outside the cab in a closed box or some
Generally require use of gloves and skin
other type of sealable container or inside the cab in a
protection.
pesticide resistant container, such as a plastic bag.
● Avoid inhaling vapor, aerosol or dust.
Clean your shoes or boots to remove soil or other
● Always have soap, water, and towel available when
contaminated particles prior to entering the cab.
working with chemicals. If chemical contacts skin,
DX,CABS-19-25MAR09 hands, or face, wash immediately with soap and
water. If chemical gets into eyes, flush immediately
with water.
● Wash hands and face after using chemicals and
before eating, drinking, smoking, or urination.
05-10
Safety
● Do not smoke or eat while applying chemicals.

● After handling chemicals, always bathe or shower
and change clothes. Wash clothing before wearing
again.
● Seek medical attention immediately if illness occurs
during or shortly after use of chemicals.
● Keep chemicals in original containers. Do not
transfer chemicals to unmarked containers or to
containers used for food or drink.
● Store chemicals in a secure, locked area away from
human or livestock food. Keep children away.
● Always dispose of containers properly. Triple rinse
empty containers and puncture or crush containers
and dispose of properly.
DX,WW,CHEM01-19-24AUG10
Handling Batteries Safely
Battery gas can explode. Keep sparks and flames away
from batteries. Use a flashlight to check battery
electrolyte level.
Never check battery charge by placing a metal object
TS204—UN—15APR13 across the posts. Use a voltmeter or hydrometer.
Always remove grounded (-) battery clamp first and
replace grounded clamp last.
Sulfuric acid in battery electrolyte is poisonous and
strong enough to burn skin, eat holes in clothing, and
cause blindness if splashed into eyes.
Avoid hazards by:
● Filling batteries in a well-ventilated area
● Wearing eye protection and rubber gloves
● Avoiding use of air pressure to clean batteries
● Avoiding breathing fumes when electrolyte is added
● Avoiding spilling or dripping electrolyte
● Using correct battery booster or charger procedure.
If acid is spilled on skin or in eyes:

1.Flush skin with water.
2.Apply baking soda or lime to help neutralize the acid.
3.Flush eyes with water for 15—30 minutes. Get
medical attention immediately.
If acid is swallowed:
05-11
Safety
1.Do not induce vomiting. ● Remove paint a minimum of 100 mm (4 in.) from area
2.Drink large amounts of water or milk, but do not to be affected by heating. If paint cannot be removed,
exceed 2 L (2 qt.). wear an approved respirator before heating or
welding.
3.Get medical attention immediately.
● If you sand or grind paint, avoid breathing the dust.
Wear an approved respirator.
WARNING: Battery posts, terminals, and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds, ● If you use solvent or paint stripper, remove stripper
chemicals known to the State of California to cause with soap and water before welding. Remove solvent
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after or paint stripper containers and other flammable
handling. material from area. Allow fumes to disperse at least
15 minutes before welding or heating.
DX,WW,BATTERIES-19-02DEC10
Do not use a chlorinated solvent in areas where welding

will take place.
Avoid Heating Near Pressurized Fluid Lines
Do all work in an area that is well ventilated to carry toxic
fumes and dust away.
Dispose of paint and solvent properly.
DX,PAINT-19-24JUL02
Handle Electronic Components and

Brackets Safely
Flammable spray can be generated by heating near
pressurized fluid lines, resulting in severe burns to
yourself and bystanders. Do not heat by welding,
soldering, or using a torch near pressurized fluid lines or
other flammable materials. Pressurized lines can
accidentally burst when heat goes beyond the
immediate flame area.
DX,TORCH-19-10DEC04
Falling while installing or removing electronic
components mounted on equipment can cause serious
Remove Paint Before Welding or Heating injury. Use a ladder or platform to easily reach each
mounting location. Use sturdy and secure footholds and
handholds. Do not install or remove components in wet
or icy conditions.
If installing or servicing a RTK base station on a tower or
other tall structure, use a certified climber.
If installing or servicing a global positioning receiver
mast used on an implement, use proper lifting
techniques and wear proper protective equipment. The
mast is heavy and can be awkward to handle. Two
people are required when mounting locations are not
accessible from the ground or from a service platform.
TS220—UN—15APR13 DX,WW,RECEIVER-19-24AUG10
Avoid potentially toxic fumes and dust.

Hazardous fumes can be generated when paint is
heated by welding, soldering, or using a torch.
Remove paint before heating:
05-12
Safety
Practice Safe Maintenance Avoid Hot Exhaust
RG17488—UN—21AUG09
Servicing machine or attachments with engine running
can result in serious personal injury. Avoid exposure
and skin contact with hot exhaust gases and
components.
Exhaust parts and streams become very hot during
operation. Exhaust gases and components reach
temperatures hot enough to burn people, ignite, or melt
common materials.
DX,EXHAUST-19-20AUG09
Clean Exhaust Filter Safely

Understand service procedure before doing work. Keep
area clean and dry.
Never lubricate, service, or adjust machine while it is
moving. Keep hands, feet, and clothing away from
power-driven parts. Disengage all power and operate
controls to relieve pressure. Lower equipment to the
ground. Stop the engine. Remove the key. Allow
machine to cool.
Securely support any machine elements that must be
raised for service work.
Keep all parts in good condition and properly installed.
Fix damage immediately. Replace worn or broken parts.
Remove any buildup of grease, oil, or debris.
On self-propelled equipment, disconnect battery ground
cable (-) before making adjustments on electrical
systems or welding on machine.
On towed implements, disconnect wiring harnesses
from tractor before servicing electrical system
components or welding on machine.
Falling while cleaning or working at height can cause
serious injury. Use a ladder or platform to easily reach
each location. Use sturdy and secure footholds and
handholds. TS271—UN—23AUG88
DX,SERV-19-28FEB17
05-13
Safety
Keep hands, feet, and clothing away from power-driven

parts.
Always disable movement (neutral), set the parking
brake or mechanism and disconnect power to
attachments or tools before leaving the operator’s
station.
Shut off engine and remove key (if equipped) before
leaving the machine unattended.
DX,EXHAUST,FILTER-19-12JAN11
TS1693—UN—09DEC09
Work In Ventilated Area
During exhaust filter cleaning operations, the engine TS220—UN—15APR13
may run at elevated idle and hot temperatures for an Engine exhaust fumes can cause sickness or death. If it
extended period of time. Exhaust gases and exhaust is necessary to run an engine in an enclosed area,
filter components reach temperatures hot enough to remove the exhaust fumes from the area with an
burn people, or ignite or melt common materials. exhaust pipe extension.
Keep machine away from people, animals, or structures If you do not have an exhaust pipe extension, open the
which may be susceptible to harm or damage from hot doors and get outside air into the area.
exhaust gases or components. Avoid potential fire or DX,AIR-19-17FEB99
explosion hazards from flammable materials and vapors
near the exhaust. Keep exhaust outlet away from
people and anything that can melt, burn, or explode.
Support Machine Properly
Closely monitor machine and surrounding area for
smoldering debris during and after exhaust filter
cleaning.
Adding fuel while an engine is running can create a fire
or explosion hazard. Always stop engine before
refueling machine and clean up any spilled fuel.
Always make sure that engine is stopped while hauling
machine on a truck or trailer.
Contact with exhaust components while still hot can
result in serious personal injury.
Avoid contact with these components until cooled to
safe temperatures. TS229—UN—23AUG88
If service procedure requires engine to be running: Always lower the attachment or implement to the ground
before you work on the machine. If the work requires
● Only engage power-driven parts required by service that the machine or attachment be lifted, provide secure
procedure support for them. If left in a raised position, hydraulically
● Ensure that other people are clear of operator station supported devices can settle or leak down.
and machine Do not support the machine on cinder blocks, hollow
tiles, or props that may crumble under continuous load.
05-14
Safety
Do not work under a machine that is supported solely by Transport Tractor Safely
a jack. Follow recommended procedures in this manual.
When implements or attachments are used with a
machine, always follow safety precautions listed in the
implement or attachment operator's manual.
DX,LOWER-19-24FEB00
Prevent Machine Runaway
RXA0103709—UN—01JUL09
A disabled tractor is best transported on a flatbed
carrier. Use chains to secure the tractor to the carrier.
The axles and tractor frame are suitable attachment
points.
Before transporting the tractor on a low-loader truck or
flatbed rail wagon, make sure that the hood is secured
over the tractor engine and that doors, roof hatch (if
equipped) and windows are properly closed.
TS177—UN—11JAN89
Avoid possible injury or death from machinery runaway. Never tow a tractor at a speed greater than 10 km/h (6
mph). An operator must steer and brake the tractor
Do not start engine by shorting across starter terminals. under tow.
Machine will start in gear if normal circuitry is bypassed.
DX,WW,TRANSPORT-19-19AUG09
NEVER start engine while standing on ground. Start
engine only from operator’s seat, with transmission in
neutral or park.
Service Cooling System Safely
DX,BYPAS1-19-29SEP98
Park Machine Safely
Explosive release of fluids from pressurized cooling
system can cause serious burns.
Shut off engine. Only remove filler cap when cool
TS230—UN—24MAY89 enough to touch with bare hands. Slowly loosen cap to
Before working on the machine: first stop to relieve pressure before removing
● Lower all equipment to the ground. completely.
● Stop the engine and remove the key. DX,WW,COOLING-19-19AUG09
● Disconnect the battery ground strap.

● Hang a "DO NOT OPERATE" tag in operator station.
DX,PARK-19-04JUN90
05-15
Safety
Service Accumulator Systems Safely When inflating tires, use a clip-on chuck and extension
hose long enough to allow you to stand to one side and
NOT in front of or over the tire assembly. Use a safety
cage if available.
Check wheels for low pressure, cuts, bubbles, damaged
rims, or missing lug bolts and nuts.
Wheels and tires are heavy. When handling wheels and
tires use a safe lifting device or get an assistant to help
lift, install, or remove.
DX,WW,RIMS-19-28FEB17
TS281—UN—15APR13 Service Front-Wheel Drive Tractor Safely

Escaping fluid or gas from systems with pressurized
accumulators that are used in air conditioning,
hydraulic, and air brake systems can cause serious
injury. Extreme heat can cause the accumulator to burst,
and pressurized lines can be accidentally cut. Do not
weld or use a torch near a pressurized accumulator or
pressurized line.
Relieve pressure from the pressurized system before
removing accumulator.
Relieve pressure from the hydraulic system before
removing accumulator. Never attempt to relieve
hydraulic system or accumulator pressure by loosening
a fitting. L124515—UN—06AUG94
When servicing front-wheel drive tractor with the rear
Accumulators cannot be repaired. wheels supported off the ground and rotating wheels by
DX,WW,ACCLA2-19-22AUG03 engine power, always support front wheels in a similar
manner. Loss of electrical power or transmission
hydraulic system pressure will engage the front driving
wheels, pulling the rear wheels off the support if front
Service Tires Safely wheels are not raised. Under these conditions, front
drive wheels can engage even with switch in
disengaged position.
DX,WW,MFWD-19-19AUG09
Tightening Wheel Retaining Bolts/Nuts
RXA0103438—UN—11JUN09
Explosive separation of a tire and rim parts can cause
serious injury or death.
Do not attempt to mount a tire unless you have the
proper equipment and experience to perform the job.
Always maintain the correct tire pressure. Do not inflate
the tires above the recommended pressure. Never weld L124516—UN—03JAN95
or heat a wheel and tire assembly. The heat can cause Torque wheel retaining bolts/nuts at the intervals
an increase in air pressure resulting in a tire explosion. specified in section Break-In Period and Service.
Welding can structurally weaken or deform the wheel.
DX,WW,WHEEL-19-12OCT11
05-16
Safety
Avoid High-Pressure Fluids lines, sensors, or any other components between the
high-pressure fuel pump and nozzles on engines with
High Pressure Common Rail (HPCR) fuel system.
Only technicians familiar with this type of system can
perform repairs. (See your John Deere dealer.)
DX,WW,HPCR1-19-07JAN03
Store Attachments Safely
X9811—UN—23AUG88
Inspect hydraulic hoses periodically – at least once per
year – for leakage, kinking, cuts, cracks, abrasion,
blisters, corrosion, exposed wire braid or any other
signs of wear or damage.
Replace worn or damaged hose assemblies
immediately with John Deere approved replacement
parts.
Escaping fluid under pressure can penetrate the skin
causing serious injury. TS219—UN—23AUG88
Stored attachments such as dual wheels, cage wheels,
Avoid the hazard by relieving pressure before and loaders can fall and cause serious injury or death.
disconnecting hydraulic or other lines. Tighten all
connections before applying pressure. Securely store attachments and implements to prevent
falling. Keep playing children and bystanders away from
Search for leaks with a piece of cardboard. Protect storage area.
hands and body from high-pressure fluids.
DX,STORE-19-03MAR93
If an accident occurs, see a doctor immediately. Any
fluid injected into the skin must be surgically removed
within a few hours or gangrene may result. Doctors
unfamiliar with this type of injury should reference a Decommissioning — Proper Recycling and
knowledgeable medical source. Such information is Disposal of Fluids and Components
available in English from Deere & Company Medical
Department in Moline, Illinois, U.S.A., by calling 1-800-
822-8262 or +1 309-748-5636.
DX,FLUID-19-12OCT11
Do Not Open High-Pressure Fuel System
Safety and environmental stewardship measures must
be taken into account when decommissioning a
machine and/or component. These measures include
the following:
● Use appropriate tools and personal protective
equipment such as clothing, gloves, face shields or
glasses, during the removal or handling of objects
TS1343—UN—18MAR92
and materials.
High-pressure fluid remaining in fuel lines can cause
serious injury. Do not disconnect or attempt repair of fuel ● Follow instructions for specialized components.
05-17
Safety
● Release stored energy by lowering suspended

machine elements, relaxing springs, disconnecting
the battery or other electrical power, and releasing
pressure in hydraulic components, accumulators,
and other similar systems.
● Minimize exposure to components which may have
residue from agricultural chemicals, such as
fertilizers and pesticides. Handle and dispose of
these components appropriately.
● Carefully drain engines, fuel tanks, radiators,
hydraulic cylinders, reservoirs, and lines before
recycling components. Use leak-proof containers
when draining fluids. Do not use food or beverage
containers.
● Do not pour waste fluids onto the ground, down a
drain, or into any water source.
● Observe all national, state, and local laws,
regulations, or ordinances governing the handling or
disposal of waste fluids (example: oil, fuel, coolant,
brake fluid); filters; batteries; and, other substances
or parts. Burning of flammable fluids or components
in other than specially designed incinerators may be
prohibited by law and could result in exposure to
harmful fumes or ashes.
● Service and dispose of air conditioning systems
appropriately. Government regulations may require a
certified service center to recover and recycle air
conditioning refrigerants which could damage the
atmosphere if allowed to escape.
● Evaluate recycling options for tires, metal, plastic,
glass, rubber, and electronic components which may
be recyclable, in part or completely.
● Contact your local environmental or recycling center,
or your John Deere dealer for information on the
proper way to recycle or dispose of waste.
DX,DRAIN-19-01JUN15
05-18
Safety Signs
Operator's Manual Seat Belt
RXA0186042—UN—18NOV21 RXA0186043—UN—18NOV21
(A) (A)
RXA0167890—UN—13MAY19 RXA0169970—UN—12AUG19
A—Operator’s Manual Label (left-hand front cab post) A—Seat Belt Label (left-hand front cab post)
CAUTION: Avoid the risk of injury. Use seat belt properly.
CAUTION: Avoid crushing injury or death

This Operator’s Manual contains important information
during rollover.
necessary for safe machine operation and an
explanation of safety signs. Carefully observe all safety This machine is equipped with a roll-over
rules to avoid accidents. protective structure (ROPS).
KT81203,0000494-19-05JAN22 USE a seat belt when operating with a ROPS.
• Hold the latch and pull the seat belt across the
body.
• Insert the latch into the buckle. Listen for a
click.
• Tug on the seat belt latch to make sure that the
belt is securely fastened.
• Snug the seat belt across the hips.
KT81203,0000495-19-20JAN22
05A-1
Safety Signs
Passenger Seat Rear Hitch Remote Switch (If Equipped)

[Ag]
RXA0186044—UN—18NOV21
(A)
RXA0186045—UN—18NOV21
(A)
RXA0168813—UN—10JUN19
A—Passenger Seat Label (left-hand front cab post)
RXA0180289—UN—26OCT20
A—Left-Hand Label (rear left-hand side of fuel tank)
CAUTION: Avoid crushing during rollover.
CAUTION: Avoid crushing.
The passenger seat must NOT be used while in field
operation. Riders are permitted only on a properly When attaching or detaching an implement, there is a
installed passenger seat approved by John Deere. risk of crushing in the area between the tractor and
When using the passenger seat, always use the seat implement. When attaching to the hitch, stay clear of the
belt. area where the three-point hitch rises and do not permit
KT81203,0000496-19-05JAN22
anyone to be in the area.
RD47322,000067F-19-11JAN22
05A-2
Safety Signs
Park Brake (Stored Energy) Track Accumulators
RXA0186047—UN—18NOV21
(A)
RXA0186059—UN—18NOV21
(A)
RXA0186183—UN—30NOV21
A—Park Brake Label (housing near park lock)
CAUTION: Avoid injury from sudden release of

stored energy.
Park brake contains spring under load. Remove park

brake cover cap screws evenly.
KT81203,0000950-19-11JAN22 RXA0186184—UN—30NOV21
A—Accumulator Label (left-hand and right-hand tracks)
CAUTION: Avoid crushing and fluid injection.
Releasing pressure may cause machine movement and

exposure to fluid under pressure. See your dealer for
instruction on relieving pressure before servicing the
system.
RD47322,00004DF-19-11JAN22
05A-3
Safety Signs
Rear SCVs—With Hitch [Ag] Rear SCVs—Without Hitch and with

Standard Drawbar [Ag]
RXA0186053—UN—18NOV21
(A)
RXA0186053—UN—18NOV21
(A)
RXA0186196—UN—30NOV21
A—Hot Surface Label (let-hand hitch cylinder)
RXA0186197—UN—30NOV21
A—Hot Surface Label (rear drawbar support)
CAUTION: Avoid contact with hot surfaces.
Components of the hydraulic system may become hot.
Touching hot surfaces of the hydraulic system, Components of the hydraulic system may become hot.
accessories, or hoses and lines can cause injury. Touching hot surfaces of the hydraulic system,
Wear work gloves or let the hydraulic components cool accessories, or hoses and lines can cause injury.
down before servicing hydraulic system. Wear work gloves or let the hydraulic components cool
EC82310,000055D-19-20JAN22
down before servicing hydraulic system.
EC82310,000055E-19-20JAN22
05A-4
Safety Signs
Rear SCVs—Without Hitch and with Wide-

Swing Drawbar [Ag]
RXA0186053—UN—18NOV21
(A)
RXA0186198—UN—30NOV21
A—Hot Surface Label (rear drawbar support)
Components of the hydraulic system may become hot.

Touching hot surfaces of the hydraulic system,
accessories, or hoses and lines can cause injury.
Wear work gloves or let the hydraulic components cool
down before servicing hydraulic system.
EC82310,000055F-19-20JAN22
05A-5
Vehicle Overview
9RT Series Tractor
RXA0180312—UN—27OCT20
9RT Series Tractor (Typical)
KD34109,00001D4-19-27OCT20
10-1
Engine Operation
Engine Settings—Access
Access Application through Display:
1.
RXA0167075—UN—20MAR19
Menu
Menu
RXA0175172—UN—13FEB20
2. Engine Example
Items Accessible on the Engine Main Page:
RXA0167076—UN—20MAR19
Machine Settings
Machine Settings tab

RXA0175187—UN—13FEB20
3. Engine Power
Engine Power — select to display the current engine

power level. See Engine Settings—Engine Power in this
Operator’s Manual section.
RXA0175176—UN—17FEB20
Engine
Engine
RXA0175162—UN—17FEB20
Access Application through Navigation Bar: Engine Hours
Engine Hours — displays the accumulated engine

hours.
RXA0168449—UN—30MAY19
Max Engine Speed Items:
Engine
Press engine button on navigation bar below display.

KD34109,00005AC-19-30JUN22
RXA0175183—UN—17FEB20
Max Engine Speed 1
Engine Settings Enable Max Engine Speed 1 — select to enable the

The Engine application is used to access and adjust saved maximum speed.
engine settings.
NOTE: Some items only display if machine is equipped

RXA0175194—UN—18FEB20
with the associated option. Max Engine Speed 1 Value
Max Engine Speed 1 — select to adjust the maximum

speed setting. See Engine Settings—Max Engine
Speed in this Operator’s Manual section.
20-1
Engine Operation
parked. See Engine Settings—Exhaust Filter System

Overview in this Operator’s Manual section.
RXA0175184—UN—17FEB20
Max Engine Speed 2
Enable Max Engine Speed 2 — select to enable the RXA0175191—UN—18FEB20

saved maximum speed. Request Exhaust Filter Cleaning
Request Exhaust Filter Cleaning — select to start a

more intense cleaning procedure than Parked Filter
RXA0175195—UN—18FEB20 Cleaning. See Engine Settings—Exhaust Filter System
Max Engine Speed 2 Value Overview in this Operator’s Manual section.
Max Engine Speed 2 — select to adjust the maximum Decelerator Items:
speed setting. See Engine Settings—Max Engine
Speed in this Operator’s Manual section.
RXA0175181—UN—13FEB20
Indicator
Active Indicator — illuminates orange when a Max

Engine Speed is enabled. RXA0175169—UN—13FEB20
Decelerator
Standby Indicator — appears gray when a Max Engine
Speed is disabled.
Decelerator — select to adjust how much the engine
Rear PTO Items: rpm decreases when the foot decelerator is used.
Engine Braking Items:
RXA0175189—UN—02APR20
RXA0167071—UN—21MAR19
Rear PTO Speed Advanced Settings
Rear PTO — displays the current PTO speed. Advanced Settings — access further adjustments and
less common settings.
Exhaust Filter Cleaning Items:
Run Page Modules
NOTE: Final Tier 4/Stage V engines only.
Add modules for this application to run pages using
Layout Manager. See the Generation 4 Display
Operator’s Manual.
RXA0175166—UN—17FEB20
AUTO Exhaust Filter Cleaning Example:
AUTO Exhaust Filter Cleaning — select to enable/

disable an automated process to perform Exhaust Filter
Cleaning during normal operation. See Engine Settings
—Exhaust Filter System Overview in this Operator’s
Manual section. RXA0175178—UN—17FEB20
Engine Power
NOTE: Different modules may be available for your

RXA0175186—UN—18FEB20 application.
Parked Filter Cleaning
Engine Power — quick access to the Engine Power
Parked Filter Cleaning — select to start a process to module.
perform Exhaust Filter Cleaning while the machine is
20-2
Engine Operation
Shortcut Keys enabling the operator to toggle quickly from one to the
Add shortcut keys for this application to the shortcut bar other.
using Layout Manager. See the Generation 4 Display Procedure to Modify:
Example: NOTE: The engine must be running to adjust the Max
Engine Speed.
RXA0175194—UN—18FEB20
RXA0175174—UN—17FEB20
ON Max Engine Speed Value
1. Select Max Engine Speed value.

NOTE: Different shortcut keys may be available for your
application.
Engine Brake — quick access to turn the Engine Brake

ON and OFF.
KD34109,00005AD-19-08JUN22
Engine Settings—Engine Power

The Engine Power page displays a graph of the current
Engine Power level and the number of accumulated
engine hours.
Items Accessible on Engine Power Page: RXA0175163—UN—17FEB20
Adjust Speed
2. Select (+/++) to increase or (-/- -) to decrease the

setting. Use (++) and (- -) to increase or decrease the
value at a higher rate than (+) and (-). The value is
shown in the display box.
RXA0175180—UN—17FEB20
Power Level
The green fill indicates the amount of Engine Power RXA0167129—UN—25MAR19

being used. A reading does not display until 40% of the Close
available Engine Power is being used.
3. Select to close.
PTO Items:
RXA0175162—UN—17FEB20
Engine Hours
Accumulated engine operating hours for the machine

are displayed. RXA0175189—UN—02APR20
Rear PTO Speed
KD34109,00005AE-19-03SEP21
Rear PTO — displays the current PTO speed.

Engine Settings—Max Engine Speed External Sources:
Limiting engine speed in light load situations can Max Engine Speed Button — enable/disable Max
improve fuel economy. Max Engine Speed utilizes a Engine Speeds using the button on the CommandARM.
constant speed governor curve, providing an instant See CommandARM Controls—Left Side in
response to varying loads. The setting can be adjusted CommandARM Controls section of this Operator’s
1100—2150 rpm. Two different speeds can be set, Manual. The last Max Engine Speed selected in the
20-3
Engine Operation
CommandCenter is used. A box displays on the page Never perform exhaust cleaning procedures in
around the Max Engine Speed that was enabled last. a closed building unless suitable exhaust is
Interaction with Transmission Modes: provided.
NOTE: The transmission mode is changed on the Corner post display indicators and CommandCenter
Transmission page. For more information, see prompts provide information related to the exhaust filter
Transmission section. system activity.
● Full AUTO — at full throttle, the minimum engine

speed is 1500 rpm with the PTO off. The RXA0175166—UN—17FEB20
transmission downshifts and the engine speeds up to AUTO Exhaust Filter Cleaning
the Max Engine Speed to compensate for increasing
workloads. The available engine speed range is
1500 rpm to Max Engine Speed. NOTE: Exhaust Filter Cleaning automatically resets
back to AUTO mode after every key cycle.
● Custom — two minimum engine speed settings are
also available, ECO ON and ECO OFF. ECO ON AUTO Exhaust Filter Cleaning — an automated
runs the engine as low as possible for light loads that process to perform Exhaust Filter Cleaning during
do not change quickly. ECO OFF can handle quick normal operation. See Engine Settings—AUTO Exhaust
load changes. Filter Cleaning in this Operator’s Manual section.
● Manual — the operator sets the engine speed using
the hand throttle. The engine speed stays constant
and is limited by the Max Engine Speed.
RXA0175164—UN—17FEB20
AUTO Exhaust Filter Cleaning Disabled
KD34109,00005B0-19-23JUN22
Disable AUTO Exhaust Filter Cleaning — use in

conditions where it can be unsafe for elevated exhaust
Engine Settings—Exhaust Filter System temperatures. See Engine Settings—Disable AUTO
Overview Exhaust Filter Cleaning in this Operator’s Manual
Final Tier 4/Stage V engines clean and filter the section.
exhaust. Under normal machine operation and with filter
cleaning in AUTO mode, minimal interaction is required.
To avoid unnecessary buildup of diesel particulates or
soot in the exhaust filter system: RXA0175186—UN—18FEB20
● Utilize the AUTO Exhaust Filter Cleaning mode.
● Avoid unnecessary idling. NOTE: The process requires about 1 hour to complete.
● Use proper engine oil.
● Use only ultra-low sulfur fuel. Parked Filter Cleaning — a process to perform
Exhaust Filter Cleaning while machine is parked. See
CAUTION: When AUTO, Parked, or Requested Engine Settings—Parked Filter Cleaning in this
Filter Cleaning is in progress, the exhaust Operator’s Manual section.
temperature can be high under no load or light
load conditions at certain times during the
Exhaust Filter Cleaning cycle.
Servicing the machine or attachments during RXA0175191—UN—18FEB20
the Exhaust Filter Cleaning can result in serious Request Exhaust Filter Cleaning
personal injury. Avoid exposure and skin
contact with hot exhaust gases and NOTE: The process requires about 2—3 hours to
components. complete.
During the AUTO and manual/stationary
Exhaust Filter Cleaning operations, the engine Request Exhaust Filter Cleaning — a more intense
runs at elevated idle and hot temperatures for cleaning procedure than Parked Filter Cleaning. See
an extended period. Exhaust gases and exhaust Engine Settings—Parked Filter Cleaning in this
filter components reach temperatures hot Operator’s Manual section.
enough to cause burns to people, or to ignite or
melt common materials. Exhaust Filter Cleaning Indicator — illuminates on
the corner post display when the exhaust filter system is
20-4
Engine Operation
actively performing an Exhaust Filter Cleaning. See

Corner Post Display in Corner Post Display section of
RXA0175164—UN—17FEB20
this Operator’s Manual. AUTO Exhaust Filter Cleaning Disabled
KD34109,00005B1-19-20JUN22
1. Select to open the AUTO Exhaust Filter Cleaning
page.
Engine Settings—AUTO Exhaust Filter NOTE: Exhaust Filter Cleaning automatically resets
Cleaning back to AUTO mode after every key cycle.
NOTE: Final Tier 4/Stage V engines only.
The Exhaust Filter Cleaning page allows you to enable/

disable AUTO mode. AUTO mode automatically RXA0167628—UN—26APR19
performs Exhaust Filter Cleaning as required. ON/OFF
CAUTION: When AUTO, Parked, or Requested 2. Select ON to enable AUTO Exhaust Filter Cleaning.
Filter Cleaning is in progress, the exhaust
temperature can be high under no load or light
load conditions at certain times during the
Exhaust Filter Cleaning cycle.
RXA0167129—UN—25MAR19
Servicing the machine or attachments during Close
the Exhaust Filter Cleaning can result in serious
personal injury. Avoid exposure and skin 3. Select to close.
contact with hot exhaust gases and
KD34109,00005B2-19-09FEB22
components.
During the AUTO and manual/stationary
Exhaust Filter Cleaning operations, the engine
runs at elevated idle and hot temperatures for Engine Settings—Disable AUTO Exhaust
an extended period. Exhaust gases and exhaust Filter Cleaning
filter components reach temperatures hot
enough to cause burns to people, or to ignite or NOTE: Final Tier 4/Stage V engines only.
melt common materials.
AUTO Exhaust Filter Cleaning can be disabled in
Never perform exhaust cleaning procedures in certain conditions.
a closed building unless suitable exhaust is
provided. IMPORTANT: Disable the AUTO Exhaust Filter
Cleaning system only when necessary.
IMPORTANT: Disable AUTO Exhaust Filter Cleaning
when temporarily connected to an indoor Modify When:
ducted exhaust system for diagnostic and
repair activities, or in any elevated exhaust ● Indoors or under a roof, unless a high temperature
temperature conditions that are unsafe. See externally vented exhaust system is connected.
Engine Settings—Disable AUTO Exhaust Filter ● There is not enough time available for the machine to
Cleaning in this Operator’s Manual section. complete a cleaning cycle before it is shut down.
Do not disable AUTO Exhaust Filter Cleaning ● Operating in high crop dust or chaff conditions.
unless absolutely necessary. Repeated ● Next to a fueling area.
disabling or ignoring prompts to perform
manual or Parked Filter Cleaning procedure will
cause additional engine power limitation and Procedure to Modify:
can eventually lead to required dealer service.
Damage to exhaust cleaning components can
RXA0175166—UN—17FEB20
occur if the engine is turned off while AUTO Exhaust Filter Cleaning
performing Exhaust Filter Cleaning or shortly
after the cleaning is complete.
1. Select to open the AUTO Exhaust Filter Cleaning
page.
Procedure to Modify When Disabled:
NOTE: Exhaust Filter Cleaning automatically resets
back to AUTO mode after every key cycle.
20-5
Engine Operation
Servicing the machine or attachments during

the Exhaust Filter Cleaning can result in serious
RXA0167628—UN—26APR19 personal injury. Avoid exposure and skin
ON/OFF contact with hot exhaust gases and
components.
2. Select OFF to disable AUTO Exhaust Filter Cleaning. During the AUTO and manual/stationary
Exhaust Filter Cleaning operations, the engine
runs at elevated idle and hot temperatures for
an extended period. Exhaust gases and exhaust
RXA0167129—UN—25MAR19 filter components reach temperatures hot
Close enough to cause burns to people, or to ignite or
melt common materials.
3. Select to close.
Never perform exhaust cleaning procedures in
a closed building unless suitable exhaust is
provided.
RXA0175164—UN—17FEB20
AUTO Exhaust Filter Cleaning Disabled
Procedure to Modify:
The DISABLED icon and text will display on the main 1. Select appropriate procedure:
page.
KD34109,00005B3-19-18FEB20
RXA0175186—UN—18FEB20
Engine Settings—Parked Filter Cleaning
NOTE: Final Tier 4/Stage V engines only. a. Parked Filter Cleaning
Parked Filter Cleaning is an operator-initiated process

to clean the exhaust filter.
During the process, the system controls engine speed RXA0175191—UN—18FEB20
and the machine must remain parked to complete the Request Exhaust Filter Cleaning
procedure. The time required for the Parked Filter
Cleaning process is dependent upon the level of b. Request Exhaust Filter Cleaning
exhaust filter restriction, ambient temperatures, and the
current exhaust gas temperature. 2. Verify that the machine is configured for Parked Filter
Cleaning.
Modify When:
● Stop machine motion.
● The Exhaust Filter Cleaning indicator is flashing on ● Set the engine speed to low idle.
the corner post display.
● Engage the park brake.
● Constantly disabling AUTO Exhaust Filter Cleaning
mode. ● Disengage the PTO (front and rear).
● Idling excessively.
● Incorrect fuel quality is used.
RXA0175167—UN—19FEB20
NOTE: If Parked Filter Cleaning is ignored and the soot Check Mark
level gets too high, Request Filter Cleaning, a more
intense cleaning procedure, will be forced. Once a condition has been met, a green check mark
displays next to the condition.
CAUTION: When AUTO, Parked, or Requested
Exhaust Filter Cleaning is in progress, the
exhaust temperature can be high under no load RXA0175185—UN—19FEB20
or light load conditions at certain times during Next
the Exhaust Filter Cleaning cycle.
3. Once all conditions have been met, select Next.
NOTE: The exhaust filter system controls the engine

speed to increase the exhaust temperature.
20-6
Engine Operation
Engine Settings—Decelerator
The Decelerator page allows a percentage adjustment
of the maximum engine rpm for the foot decelerator.
RXA0175188—UN—19FEB20
Progress Indicator
When the decelerator is active, the full range of the
throttle is affected.
A progress indicator displays while Exhaust Filter When using Efficiency Manager and depressing the foot
Cleaning is running. decelerator, transmission downshifts to the startup gear
may occur in order to reduce wheel speed. To reduce
the number of shifts, adjust the start gear.
RXA0175168—UN—19FEB20
Complete
The system informs you when each of the two stages is

complete:
● Preparation — the exhaust filter system controls
engine speed to increase the exhaust
temperature.
● Cleaning — diesel particulates (soot) are cleaned
from the exhaust filter system. The process may
exceed 40 minutes.
RXA0175170—UN—17FEB20
Increase/Decrease Value
RXA0167129—UN—25MAR19
Close 1. Select (+) to increase or (-) to decrease the
percentage. The default setting is 65% and can be
4. Select to close. adjusted 50—95%. The value is shown in the display
box.
NOTE: The system defaults to AUTO mode when
cleaning is complete.
If you are not returning the machine to service RXA0167129—UN—25MAR19

immediately after the procedure, allow the engine Close
enough time to return to normal operating temperature
before turning off the engine. 2. Select to close.
Cancel Procedure: KD34109,00005B5-19-23JUN22
RXA0175161—UN—19FEB20 Engine Settings—Advanced

Abort
Advanced settings allow you to access further
adjustments and less common settings.
To cancel the process, select Abort at any time during
the cleaning procedure. Items Accessible on Advanced Settings Page:
The process is also canceled by:
● Advancing the throttle.
RXA0175165—UN—17FEB20
● Engaging the transmission. AUTO ON/OFF
● Stopping the engine.
● Engaging the PTO (front or rear). IMPORTANT: Avoid injury and/or engine damage:
KD34109,00005B4-19-23NOV20 ● The Engine Braking system assists the
service brakes in slowing the vehicle down.
Never use only the engine brakes to stop the
vehicle.
20-7
Engine Operation
● Do not exceed the governed engine speed Emission System Fault Has Occurred
when operating the engine brakes.
Automatic Engine Braking — reduces the tractor

speed using engine compression, allowing less wear on
the service brakes. Use when traveling under load on
level surfaces. Select ON to enable or OFF to disable.
KD34109,0000617-19-08SEP20
RG26361—UN—04SEP14
30 minutes remaining, Engine Emissions System
Malfunction and Warning Indicators are illuminated and
Required Machine Stop Warning alarm sounds to warn operator of emissions-related
fault. “Less than 30 minutes to Power Restriction”
Machine Stop Mandate Occurs
displayed on machines with display.
● Engine power is normal.
● Machine operation is normal.
● Place machine in a safe state.
● Contact service provider.
RG22491—UN—21AUG13
IMPORTANT: In some situations, machine engine

power may be reduced as described. On
notification, immediately place the machine in a
safe state and or move it to a safe location. A
mandated machine stop can only be removed
by a service technician. RG26972—UN—26MAR15
20 minutes remaining, Engine Emissions System
Engine Emissions System Malfunction Indicator Malfunction and Engine Stop Indicators are illuminated
illuminates when an emission-related fault occurs. and alarm sounds to warn operator of emissions-related
fault. “Less than 20 minutes to Power Restriction”
displayed on machines with displays.
● Engine power and torque are reduced.
● Key Off - Key On will temporarily provide full power.
RG22492—UN—21AUG13
Warning Indicator illuminates when a condition exists
which requires operator action.
RG26972—UN—26MAR15
2 minutes or less remaining, Engine Emissions System
RG22493—UN—21AUG13
Malfunction and Engine Stop Indicators are illuminated
Engine Stop Indicator illuminates when a condition and alarm sounds to warn operator of emissions-related
exists which requires immediate operator action and fault which has not been corrected. “Power Restriction”
service. displayed on machines with displays.
● Engine power is idle only.
DX,MACHSTOPWARN,AG-19-02OCT15
20-8
Engine Operation
Engine Fuel System and Power Rating c. Key is switched to OFF.

Fuel System 2. When the battery disconnect switch indicator light
has gone out, turn the battery disconnect switch off
IMPORTANT: Modification or alteration of injection (C).
system or emission control devices will
terminate warranty to purchaser. 3. If desired, secure the battery disconnect switch in the
off position using holes (D) provided.
Do not attempt to service injection system.
Special training and special tools are required. 4. Turn the battery disconnect switch on (E) before
See your John Deere dealer. operating tractor.
EC82310,0000F58-19-09NOV20
Engine Certification/Power Rating

kW (hp) rating on engine emissions certification label
specifies gross engine kW (hp), which is flywheel power Start the Engine
without fan.
Before Starting the Engine
TS36762,0000174-19-18NOV16
1. Move the SCV levers to the NEUTRAL position.
2. Disengage the PTO (if equipped).
Battery Disconnect Switch 3. Move the hand throttle to the low idle position.
CAUTION: Avoid injury or damage to the tractor 4. Move the transmission shift lever to the PARK
systems from inadvertent contact with position.
electrical power. Disconnect the battery when
directed. CAUTION: Avoid possibility of serious injury or
death. Be sure that the tractor and attached
equipment are clear of people and other
objects.
5. Depress clutch and brake pedals.

6. Sound horn.
Start the Engine
RXA0180392—UN—06NOV20
The battery disconnect switch is located near the tractor
stairs.
IMPORTANT: Prevent damage to the tractor

electrical system and emissions system. Never
turn off the power using the battery disconnect
switch (A) when the:
● Engine is running.
● Battery disconnect light (B) is illuminated.
During a long storage period, always turn the

battery disconnect switch to the off position. If
the battery disconnect switch is left on, the
battery could lose charge.
1. Before using the battery disconnect switch, ensure RXA0167042—UN—20MAR19

that the: 1. Turn the key switch (A) fully clockwise to the start
position. The Engine Control Unit (ECU) senses the
a. Tractor is stopped. key position and sends a signal to the starter to start
b. Transmission is placed into PARK. the engine. The key can be released.
20-9
Engine Operation
2. If the engine fails to start after a time period

determined by the ECU, based on ambient
conditions, the ECU will terminate the start attempt
until the cranking motor has had time to cool.
Depending on conditions, the ECU can:
● Attempt to start the engine for up to 2 minutes.
● Prevent a second start attempt for up to 2
minutes.
3. The engine start attempt continues until any of the

following conditions occur:
● The engine starts. RXA0108294—UN—24JUN10
Immobilizer Key Compared To Standard John Deere Key
● The starting process is canceled by turning the
key switch to OFF.
● Or an engine problem is detected by the ECU. NOTE: Immobilizer keys (A) can be identified because
● The engine was unable to start after attempting for they are slightly thicker than a normal ignition key
up to 2 minutes. (B). Immobilizer keys are programmed for a specific
tractor. There is only a limited number of keys
4. If the engine: available for any given tractor.
● Starts—begin desired operations. Immobilizer equipped tractors are delivered with two
● Does not start—attempt a second start. If the keys to the dealer. Up to three additional keys can be
engine still does not start, go to step 5. ordered through your John Deere dealer.
CESAR Datatag
NOTE: If the engine fails to start, the ECU can prevent
additional cranking attempts for up to 2 minutes,
allowing the cranking motor sufficient time to cool.
5. Check the:
● Quantity and quality of the fuel.
● Electrical system.
● Ambient temperature. In cold weather (at or below
-6°C [21°F]), follow the steps listed in the
appropriate Cold Weather Starting topic in Cold
Weather Operation section of this Operator’s
Manual.
RXA0117725—UN—09JUN11
6. If all factors in step 5 are acceptable, attempt to start CESAR Datatag
the engine again. If the engine fails to start after three
attempts, see your John Deere dealer. This theft deterrent system helps reduce tractor theft
KT81203,0000136-19-03NOV20
and also helps with recovery of stolen tractors.
Tractors equipped with the CESAR Datatag will have 2
large and 2 small waterproof, triangle shaped,
Theft Deterrent Systems identification plates located around the machine. These
tags contain small Radio Frequency Identification
Immobilizer Keys (RFID) chips that can be read by a Datatag scanner to
Immobilizer is a system that must have a programmed identify a machine if the serial numbers have been
key for that tractor. If the key does not have the specific removed. Other secure items are used to identify
electronic device, the engine starts, but only runs briefly tractors and/or tractor components if the machine is
before shutting off. Continued attempts with key not stolen.
programmed for tractor will result in tractor engine TS36762,00002A7-19-14MAY19
turning over, but will not start.
20-10
Engine Operation
Run the Engine IMPORTANT: Prevent damage to tractor emissions

system. Battery disconnect switch with
IMPORTANT: Do not start engine with throttle indicator light: Tractor is equipped with an
pushed completely forward. engine which uses a Selective Catalytic
Reduction (SCR) system. Light is illuminated
Avoid excessive engine idling (more than 5 minutes). during Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) purge from
Prolonged idling may cause engine coolant temperature system. Do not turn disconnect switch off until
to fall below normal range. Prolonged idling causes light goes out.
crankcase oil dilution, due to incomplete fuel
combustion, and permits formation of gummy deposits Battery disconnect switch without indicator
on valves, pistons, and piston rings. It promotes rapid light: Engine not equipped with SCR system. No
accumulation of engine sludge and unburned fuel in waiting period is required before turning off
exhaust system. switch.
See Battery Disconnect Switch in Engine
Operate engine between 1500—2100 rpm. Do not
Operation section of this Operator’s Manual.
operate engine constantly below 1500 rpm during heavy
draft usage or when tractor is under full PTO [Ag] load.
1. Stop tractor and pull throttle back to slow idle
For maximum tractor performance: position.
● Ensure that tractor is correctly ballasted, see 2. Depress clutch and brake pedals.
Performance Ballasting section of this Operator’s
Manual. 3. Put transmission in PARK position.
● For transmission information, see e18 PowerShift 4. Lower all equipment to the ground.
Transmission section of this Operator’s Manual. 5. Make sure SCV levers are in NEUTRAL position.
6. [Ag] Pull rear PTO (if equipped) switch rearward to
If engine stalls, start immediately to provide lubrication
disengage PTO.
to critical engine parts.
Allow engine to idle for 20 seconds before turning key CAUTION: Remove key to prevent accidents.
switch to OFF position.
7. Turn key switch to OFF position and remove key.
IMPORTANT: Contact your John Deere dealer if any KT81203,00000D1-19-21AUG18
symptoms that may be early signs of engine
problems are detected:
● Sudden drop in oil pressure Restart Engine That Has Run Out of Fuel
● Abnormal coolant temperatures 1.Fill fuel tank.
● Unusual noise or vibration 2.Turn key switch to RUN position to start electric fuel
● Sudden loss of power pump and bleed air from fuel system.
● Excessive fuel consumption NOTE: Steps two and three may need to be repeated as
● Excessive oil consumption necessary if fuel tanks have been removed or
drained.
● Fluid leaks
KT81203,00000C9-19-23JUN22 3.Allow pump to run for 30 seconds to 1 minute before
attempting to restart engine.
Fuel pump will turn off after 1 minute. Key switch

Stop the Engine must be turned to OFF and back to RUN to turn pump
back on.
IMPORTANT: Before stopping an engine that has
been operating at working load, idle engine at TS36762,0000179-19-18NOV16
least 2 minutes at 1000—1200 rpm to cool hot

engine parts. If an exhaust filter cleaning has
just been performed, increase engine idle time Reduce Fuel Consumption
to 4 minutes. If service work is going to be
performed on exhaust filter, increase engine Following are guidelines to reduce fuel consumption:
idle time to 10 minutes. ● Replace air cleaner elements and fuel, engine oil,
and transmission/hydraulic filter elements at
specified service intervals, see Service—Record
20-11
Engine Operation
Charts section of this Operator’s Manual or when Booster Battery

indicated by CommandCenter display messages.
● Use recommended oils and lubricants only, see Fuel,
Lubricants, and Coolant sections of this Operator’s
Manual.
● Adjust hitch function for most efficient operation, see
TouchSet Depth Control Section of this Operator’s
Manual.
● Ballast tractor for conditions, see Performance
Ballasting Section of this Operator’s Manual.
● Always drive in highest possible gear with reduced
engine speed. Choose a gear so engine speed drops
150-250 rpm when tractor is operating and engine is
under load. See e18 PowerShift Transmission RXA0185275—UN—01SEP21
section of this Operator’s Manual. The battery jumper terminal posts are located near the
tractor steps.
NOTE: For light work, reduce engine speed below 2000 1. Remove the tractor battery terminal post caps.
rpm. Select a gear so that engine speed drops 200
—300 rpm when operating. 2. Attach the red (positive) batter cable to the:
Using Max Engine Speed may improve fuel a. Remote positive starter terminal (A).
economy. For more information on Max Engine b. Positive terminal of the booster battery.
Speed settings, see Engine Settings in this
Operator's Manual section. 3. Attach the black (ground) battery cable to the:
a. Negative terminal of the booster battery.
KT81203,00000D2-19-29JUN22
b. Remote negative starter terminal (B).
4. When the tractor has started, remove the:
Battery Booster or Charger
a. Negative cable from the tractor.
CAUTION: Gas given off by batteries is b. Negative cable from the booster battery.
explosive. Keep sparks and flames away from
batteries. Make the last connection and first c. Positive cable from the battery.
disconnection at a point away from booster d. Positive cable from the tractor.
batteries.
Battery Charger
IMPORTANT: Be sure that polarity is correct before
making the connections. Reversed polarity IMPORTANT: Set battery charger at nominal 12 volt
damages the electrical system or possibly and no more than 16 volt maximum. Consult the
cause the battery to explode. battery charger manufacturers Operator’s
If two or more booster batteries are used, they Manual.
must be connected in parallel ensuring booster
batteries are producing 12 volt charge. 1. Assure the battery charger is turned off.
Prevent damage to the tractor emissions 2. Remove the tractor terminal post caps and attach
system. Never disconnect the battery the:
disconnect switch while the battery disconnect a. Positive (red) charger lead to the remote
light is illuminated. See Battery Disconnect positive starter terminal.
Switch in this Operator’s Manual section.
b. Black (ground) negative charger lead to remote
ground post.
3. Switch on the charger and charge battery according
to charger manufacturers Operator’s Manual.
4. Switch off the charger.
5. When the tractor has started, remove from the tractor
the:
a. Negative charger lead.
20-12
Engine Operation
b. Positive charger lead.

EC82310,0000F59-19-08JUN22
20-13
Cold Weather Operation
Cold Weather Starting—With Starting Aid IMPORTANT: To avoid drawing dust into engine,
always keep starting fluid can in position or
CAUTION: Starting fluid is extremely clean bottom of canister and install bottom side
flammable. While using this product, do not up.
smoke and make sure to extinguish all flames.
Turn off all pilot lights, stoves, heaters, 4. Install new can and tighten canister.
electrical motors, and other sources of ignition
TO84419,000039B-19-25JUL17
while using this product and/or if vapors are
still present.
Tractors equipped with cold weather starting aid from Engine Coolant Heater Use
the factory utilize an automatic starting aid injection
system. System will automatically inject starting aid as CAUTION: To avoid electrical shock or fire, use
needed based on fuel and engine coolant temperatures. 3-wire, 14 AWG (14 gauge), heavy-duty
Manually spraying starting fluid into air intake screens is electrical cord with 15 amp rating, suitable for
not recommended or required. outdoor use. Always plug electrical cord into
220 volt outlet protected by GFI (Ground Fault
If the engine fails to start: Interrupter).
● Check quantity and quality of fuel. Before connecting heater to power source, be
● Verify that starter fluid canister has fluid. sure that element is immersed in coolant.
● Check FE14 fuse and KE14 relay. NEVER energize heater in air. Doing so can
cause element sheath to burst causing
● If engine fails to start after three attempts, consult personal injury.
your John Deere dealer.
IMPORTANT: Ground fault interrupter on tractor
To replace starting aid canister, see Change Starting protects tractor only, not electrical wiring
Fluid Canister in this section of the Operator’s Manual. supplying power to tractor. Test ground fault
interrupter before each use.
GH15097,00003E1-19-09MAR20
NOTE: Extremely cold weather may require 1—2 hours

to heat engine.
Change Starting Fluid Canister
CAUTION: Do not use starting fluid near fire,
sparks or flames. Read caution information on
container. Protect container against damage.
Do not carry starting fluid cans inside cab.
RXA0164451—UN—05SEP18
Right-Hand Side of Engine
1. Remove engine access panel, see Remove Engine

Access Panel in Service—General Information
RXA0141914—UN—05JUN14
section of this Operator’s Manual.
1. Raise hood to access canister (A). 2. Connect engine coolant heater plug (A), on right-
2. Remove safety cap and plastic spray nozzle from hand side of engine, to a ground fault protected 220
new can. volt electrical outlet.
BH38674,0000D8E-19-25AUG21
3. Loosen canister and remove old can.
20A-1
Emissions Equipment
Aftertreatment Indicators Overview
RG22493—UN—21AUG13
Engine Stop Indicator
RG22487—UN—21AUG13
Diesel Exhaust Fluid Indicator
IMPORTANT: The operator will be informed by the
operator warning system when the emission
control system does not function correctly and/
or an engine malfunction is detected by the
engine control unit. Ignoring the operator
warning signals will lead to an emission related
derate, resulting in an effective disablement of
RG22488—UN—21AUG13 non-road mobile machinery operation.
Engine Emissions Temperature Indicator
It is essential to take prompt action to rectify any
incorrect operation, use or maintenance of the
emissions control system in accordance with the
rectification measures indicated by the warnings
referenced below.
The Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) indicator illuminates
RG22489—UN—21AUG13 when the DEF is low. Fill DEF tank.
Exhaust Filter Indicator
When the DEF indicator is combined with the warning
indicator or engine stop indicator engine performance is
reduced by the Engine Control Unit (ECU) because the
DEF is below a measurable level. Fill DEF tank.
When engine emissions temperature indicator
illuminates exhaust gas temperature is high, elevated
idle is active, or exhaust filter cleaning is in process. The
RG22490—UN—21AUG13
machine can be operated as normal unless the operator
Auto Cleaning Disabled Indicator
determines the machine is not in a safe location for high
exhaust temperatures and disables auto cleaning.
When engine emissions temperature indicator is
combined with the warning indicator or engine stop
indicator engine performance is reduced by the ECU
because the exhaust gas temperature is higher than
expected. Follow Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
RG22491—UN—21AUG13 procedure or see your authorized servicing dealer.
Engine Emissions System Malfunction Indicator
When the exhaust filter indicator illuminates the exhaust
filter cleaning is in process, aftertreatment system has a
fault, or the exhaust filter is in need of cleaning and the
operator has disabled auto exhaust filter cleaning. If
conditions are safe, the operator should enable the auto
exhaust filter clean setting or perform manual service
regeneration or follow DTC procedure.
RG22492—UN—21AUG13
Warning Indicator When the exhaust filter indicator is combined with the
warning indicator engine performance is reduced by the
ECU because there is an aftertreatment system fault or
the soot level of the exhaust filter is moderately high. If
conditions are safe, the operator should enable the auto
exhaust filter clean function. If conditions are not safe,
the operator should move the machine to a safe location
and engage the auto exhaust filter cleaning mode.
20B-1
Emissions Equipment
Perform manual service regeneration or follow DTC lacks the required fuel to complete the cleaning
procedure. process.
When the exhaust filter indicator is combined with the The engine emissions system malfunction indicator
engine stop indicator engine performance is further illuminates when engine emissions are outside of
reduced by the ECU because there is an aftertreatment normal operating range or engine emissions system
system fault or the soot level of the exhaust filter is fault. Follow DTC procedure or see your authorized
extremely high. If this combination is present, see your servicing dealer.
authorized servicing dealer.
When the engine emissions system malfunction
The auto cleaning disabled indicator illuminates when indicator is combined with the warning indicator engine
the operator has engaged the request to disable the performance is reduced by the ECU because the engine
auto exhaust filter cleaning function. This icon remains emissions are outside of normal operating range or
illuminated until the operator re-engages automatic engine emissions system fault. Follow DTC procedure
exhaust filter cleaning from the diagnostic gauge. or see your authorized servicing dealer.
Disabling auto mode is not recommended for any DX,AFTRTREAT,INDCATRS-19-12FEB18
situation unless it is safety-related or if the fuel tank
20B-2
Emissions Equipment
Selective Catalytic Reduction (SCR) System Overview
RG22427A—UN—07JAN20
SCR System
A—SCR Catalyst E—DEF Tank Header Assembly

B—DEF Dosing Injector F—Inline DEF Filter (If Equipped)
C—DEF Dosing Unit G—Modular Canning Configuration
D—DEF Tank H—Inline Canning Configuration
20B-3
Emissions Equipment
Used exhaust filters, including the DPF, can be

IMPORTANT: Do not remove battery leads for at exchanged at any John Deere dealer or
least 4 minutes after engine stops. The SCR qualified service provider.
system automatically purges itself of Diesel
Exhaust Fluid (DEF) immediately after the ● Always allow a qualified service provider to
engine is stopped. If adequate time is not remove ash from the DPF.
allowed for lines to be purged, residual DEF can ● See your John Deere dealer or other
freeze and possibly damage components of the qualified service provider for assistance.
SCR system during cold-weather exposure.
Failure to follow approved DPF ash removal
In order to comply with national and local emission methods can:
requirements, this engine series contains a Selective ● Violate U.S. federal, state, and local
Catalytic Reduction (SCR) system. The main hazardous waste law.
components of the SCR system include the SCR
catalyst (A), DEF dosing injector (B), DEF dosing unit ● Damage the DPF, resulting in potential denial
(C), DEF tank (D), and DEF tank header assembly (E). of the emissions warranty.
The SCR system is effective at reducing the nitrogen
oxides (NOx) emissions. NOx is a major component of IMPORTANT: Avoid damage to the aftertreatment
smog and acid rain. system. Never:
During combustion, NOx molecules are formed in the ● Use incorrect or unapproved aftertreatment
exhaust. DEF is injected into the exhaust stream before components.
the SCR catalyst. Through a chemical reaction in the ● Interchange aftertreatment components
SCR, NOx is converted into nitrogen and water. between Interim Tier 4/Stage III B and other
Water vapor is a normal by-product of combustion. vehicles equipped with other aftertreatment
During cold-weather operation at low exhaust systems.
temperatures, this water vapor can condense and
resemble white smoke from the exhaust. This will The exhaust filter includes a DPF. The DPF is designed
dissipate as operating temperature increases and the to:
water is further vaporized. This situation is considered
● Retain residual ash, which is a noncombustible result
normal.
of additives used in crankcase lubrication oils and the
A DEF solution begins to crystallize and freeze at -11 °C fuel.
(12 °F). With climate temperatures that can range much ● Provide many hours of maintenance-free operation.
colder than this, DEF is expected to freeze in the DEF However, the DPF requires professional service to
tank. For this reason, the DEF tank contains a heating remove the accumulated ash at some point. The
element that provides rapid thawing of DEF upon start- exact number of hours of operation before
up. The heating element cycles to maintain fluidity professional service is required depends on:
during operation as needed. DEF is not dosed upon
initial start-up, therefore it is not necessary to have liquid - The engine power category, duty cycle, operating
DEF at cold start-up. conditions, fuel quality, and ash content of the
If DEF quality deteriorates and it is no longer within engine oil.
specifications, the engine can derate. DEF should be - Adhering to the recommended oil and fuel
crystal clear with a light ammonia smell. If DEF appears specifications to maximize the hours of operation.
cloudy, has a colored tint, or has a profound ammonia
smell, it is likely not within specification. The engine owner is responsible for performing the
required maintenance described in this Operator’s
DX,SCR,OVERVIEW-19-30MAR20 Manual. During normal equipment operation:
● DPF maintenance requirements depend on the rate
at which ash accumulates in the DPF.
Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) Service ● As ash levels rise in the DPF, the capacity for soot
CAUTION: Correctly dispose of an exhaust filter storage is reduced and the backpressure of the
that has reached the end of its useful life. The exhaust system rises more frequently.
exhaust filter contains DPF ash that: ● The dash lamp indicator or diagnostic gauge
● Can be classified as a hazardous waste. indicates when the DPF needs servicing.
● Requires disposal in accordance with all EC82310,0000F0A-19-17JUN20
applicable federal, state, and local laws or
regulations governing hazardous waste
disposal.
20B-4
Emissions Equipment
Restored Operation Option

NOTE: This is a European Union (EU) only option.
Engine must have an EU only emission label.
Option is not available for engine with EPA and EU
emission label.
IMPORTANT: Operating the engine without

emissions related derates could damage the
aftertreatment system.
The Restored Operation Option enables a SCR

equipped application to operate without emissions
related derates for a specified time. After a final
emission-related derate, the operator can activate the
Restored Operation Option through the operator
interface. Once activated, the engine can operate free
of emissions-related derates for 30 minutes. The option
can be activated three times, for a total of 90 minutes.
To reset the Restored Operation Option for future use,
the derate condition must be corrected.
DX,SCR,RESTORE,EU-19-07OCT14
20B-5
Front Console
Front Console Operate Horn
NOTE: See transmission section for left-hand reverser.
RXA0167455—UN—12APR19
Horn Button
Horn — push button at end of left-hand lever on

steering column to sound horn.
RXA0177210—UN—14APR20
KD34109,00004CC-19-29MAY19
Front Console Example
KD34109,00005E2-19-13APR20
Operate Wipers and Washers

Wiper and washer controls are on right-hand lever on
Adjust Steering Wheel and Column steering column.
NOTE: Some items are only available if machine is

equipped with the associated option.
RXA0167453—UN—12APR19
Tilt/Telescope Stop Lever
Tilt/Telescope Stop Lever — pull lever away from RXA0167456—UN—12APR19

steering column to unlock adjustments. While unlocked, Front Wiper Speed
extend/retract and tilt of steering wheel can be adjusted.
Push lever back toward steering column to lock into Front Wiper Speed — turn knob at the end of wiper/
desired position. washer lever. The higher the setting, the faster the wiper
operates. Bottom setting is off (circle shown). Arrow
indicates current setting.
RXA0167457—UN—12APR19
RXA0167454—UN—12APR19
Front Washer Button
Memory Tilt Pedal
Memory Tilt Pedal — push pedal to tilt steering column Front Wiper Washer — push and hold button at end of
up away from operator or down closer to operator. wiper/washer lever. Let go of button to stop washer.
Release pedal to lock into position.
KD34109,00004CB-19-29MAY19
RXA0167458—UN—12APR19
Select Right-Hand/Rear Wiper Lever
30-1
Front Console
Select Right-Hand/Rear Wiper — to select active

wiper/wipers, move lever to one of the following
positions:
● Left for right-hand wiper RXA0168014—UN—17MAY19
● Center for right-hand and rear wipers Start
● Right for rear wiper
Start — starts engine and returns to run position.
KD34109,00004CE-19-30MAY19
Operate Turn Signals
RXA0167459—UN—12APR19
Right-Hand/Rear Wiper Speed/Washer Lever
Right-Hand/Rear Wiper Speed/Washer — move lever

up from off position (circle shown) to operate active RXA0168015—UN—17MAY19
wiper/wipers. The higher the setting, the faster the wiper Turn Signal Lever
operates. Push and hold lever down to operate washer.
Release lever to stop washer. The turn signal control is the left-hand lever on the
KD34109,00004CD-19-26AUG19 steering column.
Lane Change Turn Signal — move the lever one
position (up for right-hand signal, down for left-hand
Key Switch signal) to activate. The signal automatically turns off
after three flashes.
Self-Canceling Turn Signal — move the lever two
positions (up for right-hand signal, down for left-hand
signal) to activate. The signal turns off when the front
wheels return to the neutral position or by moving the
lever one position in the same direction. If an implement
is connected, there is a delay in the signal turning off
RXA0168011—UN—17MAY19 after a turn.
Key Switch
KD34109,00004CF-19-08JUN22
Key switch is on right-hand side of steering column and

has three positions:
Pedals
RXA0168012—UN—17MAY19
STOP
STOP — turns off all engine and accessory functions.
RXA0168013—UN—17MAY19 RXA0177205—UN—14APR20
Run Brake Pedal
Run — allows all accessories functions and engine to Brake Pedal — use to slow and stop machine. For
run once it has been started. more information on brakes, see Brakes section of this
Operator's Manual.
30-2
Front Console
toggle between low and high beam modes. Indicator

on corner post display lights when in high beam
mode.
● Momentary High Beam (Flash-to-Pass) — with
road lights enabled, pull lever away from window and
hold to momentarily activate high beam mode.
Release to return to low beam mode. Setting also
momentarily activates high beam lights in park or off
RXA0177207—UN—14APR20
modes.
Clutch Pedal
● Field Lights Presets — with field lights enabled, pull
Clutch Pedal — use to disengage clutch. lever away from window or push lever toward window
to change active preset.
RXA0168021—UN—17MAY19
Convenience Lights Button
Convenience Lights (If Equipped) — press

RXA0177203—UN—13APR20 convenience lights button to turn on, press again to turn
Speed Control Pedal off. For convenience light locations, see Light
Identification in Lights section of this Operator's Manual.
Speed Control Pedal:
Button location:
NOTE: The tractor can be equipped with one of the ● 7R, 8RW, and 8RX: Left-hand side of machine,
speed control pedals or no pedal. between steps.
● 8RT and 9RT: Left-hand side of machine, next to
● Accelerator Function (Orange) — use to control battery disconnect.
engine or ground speed depending on transmission
● 9RW and 9RX: Left-hand side of machine, next to
mode.
steps.
● Decelerator Function (Gray) — use to lower the
engine rpm based on the decelerator setting. For
setting adjustments, see Engine settings in Engine
KD34109,00005E0-19-11AUG21
RXA0173051—UN—09DEC19
Operate Lights Trailering Lights Switch
Trailering Lights (If Equipped) — press top of switch

to turn on or bottom of switch to turn off trailering lights.
Switch is located near the radio. For trailering lights
location, see Trailering Lights in Lights section of this
RXA0168015—UN—17MAY19
KD34109,00004D1-19-20JUN22
Lights Lever
High beams and lighting presets are controlled using

left-hand lever on steering column. For additional
lighting controls, including field and road lights buttons,
see CommandARM Climate, Radio, and Lighting
Controls in CommandARM section of this Operator’s
Manual.
● Low/High Beam Position — with road lights
enabled, push lever toward window and release to
30-3
Front Console
Differential Lock Switch
RXA0177202—UN—13APR20
Differential Lock Floor Switch
Differential Lock Floor Switch — to enable manual

differential lock mode:
● 9RW Tractors: Press and release the floor switch. To
disable, press the brake or the differential lock button
on the CommandARM. For button location, see
CommandARM Controls—Left Side in
CommandARM Controls section of this Operator’s
Manual.
● 9RX Tractors: Press and hold the floor switch. To
disable, release the floor switch.
For more information on differential lock, see Differential

Lock in Drivetrain section of this Operator’s Manual.
KD34109,00005E1-19-23JUN22
30-4
Corner Post Display
Corner Post Display
RXA0167741—UN—06MAY19
Engine Preheat Indicator
NOTE: 6.8L engines only.
Engine Preheat Indicator — illuminates when key is in

run position. Indicator turns off when engine can be
started.
RXA0168459—UN—29MAY19
Corner Post Display RXA0167742—UN—06MAY19
Tachometer

with the associated option. Tachometer — displays engine speed in revolutions
per minute (rpm). If (- - - -) is displayed, no speed signal
is being received.
RXA0167737—UN—06MAY19
Left-Hand Turn Indicator RXA0167743—UN—06MAY19
IPM Indicator
Left-Hand Turn Indicator — flashes when left turn
signal or hazard lights are on. Intelligent Power Management (IPM) Indicator —
illuminates when IPM is active.
RXA0167744—UN—06MAY19
RXA0167738—UN—06MAY19 Max Engine Speed Indicator
Right-Hand Turn Indicator
Maximum Engine Speed Indicator — illuminates
Right-Hand Turn Indicator — flashes when right turn when max engine speed one or two is active.
signal or hazard lights are on.
RXA0167745—UN—06MAY19
RXA0167739—UN—06MAY19 Manual Engine Speed Indicator
High Beam Indicator
Manual Engine Speed Indicator — illuminates when
High Beam Indicator — illuminates when high beam engine speed is in manual mode on machines equipped
lights are on. with CommandPRO joystick.
RXA0167746—UN—06MAY19
Max Engine Speed/Engine Set Speed Number
RXA0167740—UN—06MAY19
Trailer Turn Indicator
Engine Set Speed Number — illuminates 1 when
Trailer Turn Indicator — trailer symbol and 1 flash engine set speed one is active. Illuminates 2 when
when turn signal or hazard lights are on and one trailer engine set speed two is active.
is attached. Symbol, 1, and 2 flash when turn signal or
hazard lights are on and two trailers are attached.
30A-1
Corner Post Display
RXA0167753—UN—06MAY19
RXA0167747—UN—06MAY19 CommandPRO Max Set Speed Indicator
Exhaust Filter Cleaning Indicator
CommandPRO Maximum Set Speed Indicator —
Exhaust Filter Cleaning Indicator — illuminates when illuminates when CommandPRO max set speed is
exhaust filter cleaning is active. active.
RXA0167748—UN—06MAY19
Ground Speed
Ground Speed — displays travel speed in either miles

per hour (mph) or kilometers per hour (km/h), depending
on operator-selected units (U.S. or metric). If (- - -) is
displayed, no speed signal is being received. When
RXA0167754—UN—06MAY19
engine preheat indicator (6.8L engines) is activated,
Direction of Travel Indicator
engine start time is displayed.
Direction of Travel Indicator — tractor symbol and top
arrow illuminate when machine is in forward. Symbol
and bottom arrow illuminate when in reverse.
RXA0167749—UN—06MAY19
Ground Set Speed Direction and Number
Ground Set Speed Direction and Number — displays

active set speed direction (forward—F or reverse—R) RXA0167755—UN—06MAY19
and number (1 or 2). Current Gear
Current Gear — displays gear machine is in.
RXA0167750—UN—06MAY19
Ground Set Speed Indicator
Ground Set Speed Indicator — illuminates when RXA0167756—UN—06MAY19

ground set speed one or two is active. Park/Neutral
Park/Neutral — displays P if machine is in park or N if

machine is in neutral.
RXA0167751—UN—06MAY19
Ground Set Speed Value
Ground Set Speed Value — displays speed value (in

RXA0167757—UN—06MAY19
orange) for active set speed. Displays max set speed if AutoTrac Indicator
CommandPRO joystick is equipped and set speed is not
active. Displays (- - -) if no max set speed or set speed
AutoTrac Indicator — illuminates when AutoTrac is
signal is being received.
active.
RXA0167752—UN—06MAY19
RXA0167758—UN—06MAY19
CommandPRO Set Speed Indicator Automatic Shifting Indicator
CommandPRO Set Speed Indicator — illuminates Automatic Shifting Indicator — illuminates when auto
when CommandPRO set speed one or two is active. shift is on.
30A-2
Corner Post Display
RXA0167759—UN—06MAY19
Inching Mode Indicator RXA0167766—UN—06MAY19
Front PTO Indicator
Inching Mode Indicator — illuminates when set speed
is reduced below 2 km/h (1 mph) or higher set speed is Front PTO Indicator — tractor and front PTO symbols
limited to a factor of 2.5 to avoid big speed increases. illuminate when front PTO is active. 1000 illuminates
when 1000 mode is active.
RXA0167760—UN—06MAY19
Speed Control Pedal Mode Indicator
RXA0167767—UN—06MAY19
Speed Control Pedal Mode Indicator — illuminates Rear PTO Indicator
when Pedal mode is active.
Rear PTO Indicator — tractor and rear PTO symbols
illuminate when rear PTO is active. PTO gear
information illuminates for corresponding active PTO
RXA0167761—UN—30MAY19
gear.
iTEC Indicator
iTEC Indicator — illuminates when iTEC is enabled.
RXA0167762—UN—06MAY19
Tractor Automation Indicator
Tractor Automation Indicator — illuminates when

some tractor automation is active. RXA0167768—UN—06MAY19
Trailer Air Brake Pressure Gauge
Trailer Air Brake Pressure Gauge — displays percent

of air pressure for trailer air brake. Segments in red
RXA0167763—UN—06MAY19
zone indicate brake pressures from no pressure (0%) to
Joystick Indicator low pressure (66%). Segments in green zone indicate
brake pressures from just above low pressure (66.4%)
Joystick Indicator — illuminates when joystick is to full pressure (100%). When air pressure is low,
active. segments in red zone flash.
RXA0167764—UN—06MAY19
Differential Lock Indicator
Differential Lock Indicator — illuminates when

differential lock is active.
RXA0167769—UN—06MAY19
Coolant Temperature Gauge
RXA0167765—UN—06MAY19
MFWD Indicator Coolant Temperature Gauge — displays engine
coolant temperature between 40—120°C (104—248°F).
Mechanical Front-Wheel Drive (MFWD) Indicator — All segments are off when coolant temperature is below
illuminates when MFWD is active. 40°C (104°F). All segments are lit when temperature is
120°C (248°F) and above. When temperature reaches
red zone, segments in red zone and icon flash.
30A-3
Corner Post Display
STOP Alert Indicator — flashes and an alarm pattern

sounds continuously, indicating a serious malfunction
requiring immediate attention.
RXA0167773—UN—06MAY19
Service Alert Indicator
RXA0167770—UN—06MAY19
Fuel Level Gauge Service Alert Indicator — flashes and an alarm pattern
sounds five times, indicating a performance or
Fuel Level Gauge — displays fuel level in tank. Each operational problem has been detected and must be
lighted segment represents 5% of fuel tank total resolved as soon as possible.
capacity. When fuel tank is full, all segments are lit.
When fuel level is low, segments in red zone flash.
When fuel level reaches red zone, an alarm signal
sounds once.
RXA0167774—UN—06MAY19
Information Alert Indicator
Information Alert Indicator — illuminates

continuously, and when GSix is on the bus, an alarm
pattern sounds for 2 seconds, indicating a possible fault
condition.
Warning Indicators:
RXA0167771—UN—06MAY19
When a warning occurs:
DEF Level Gauge
● Park tractor on level ground and prevent tractor from
rolling away.
NOTE: Diesel exhaust fluid is only used on Final Tier 4/ ● Diagnostic trouble code (DTC) will display on
Stage V engine equipped tractors. DEF gauge will CommandCenter. Follow instructions to fix the fault.
not display on machines equipped with other ● If fault cannot be fixed, see your John Deere dealer.
engines.
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Level Gauge — displays

diesel exhaust fluid level. Each lighted segment
represents 5% of DEF tank total capacity. When DEF
tank is full, all segments are lit. When DEF level is low, RXA0167775—UN—06MAY19
Steering Warning Indicator
segments in red zone flash. When DEF level reaches
red zone, an alarm signal sounds once. DEF tank
should be filled whenever fuel tank is filled. Steering Warning Indicator — illuminates when a
serious fault has been detected in the steering system.
Alert Indicators:
Alert indicators are accompanied by an informative
message, diagnostic trouble code, and/or fault
description shown on CommandCenter. For more RXA0167776—UN—06MAY19
information on CommandCenter alerts, see STOP, Yellow Brake Warning Indicator
Service, and Information Alerts in Troubleshooting—
Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC) section of this Yellow Brake Warning Indicator — illuminates when
Operator’s Manual. an electrical fault has been detected that affects the
ability to detect additional faults.
RXA0167772—UN—06MAY19 RXA0167777—UN—06MAY19
STOP Alert Indicator Red Brake Warning Indicator
30A-4
Corner Post Display
Red Brake Warning Indicator — indicates the

following:
NOTE: Brake warning indicator (red) illuminates while

trailer air brakes reach operating pressure.
Indicator turns off once operating pressure is
reached.
● Illuminates when a serious fault has been detected

that affects brake system performance. Stop tractor
immediately.
● Flashes when park lock cannot engage.
TS36762,0000189-19-20JUN22
30A-5
CommandARM Controls
CommandARM
RXA0168025—UN—17MAY19
Hitch Depth Adjust Dial
NOTE: Dial will not raise hitch above upper limit.

RXA0168022—UN—17MAY19
CommandARM Example Hitch Depth Adjust Dial — use to raise or lower hitch.
KD34109,00004E7-19-15JUN22
RXA0168026—UN—17MAY19
CommandARM Hitch Controls [Ag] Set Button
equipped with the associated option. Set Button — press to store a set point.
Front Hitch Items:
RXA0168027—UN—17MAY19
Lock Button
RXA0168023—UN—17MAY19
Front Hitch Lever Lock Button — press to lock hitch. Press again to
unlock.
NOTE: Lever will not raise hitch above upper limit.
Front Hitch Lever — allows adjustment of front hitch

position. See Hitch Control Lever in Rear Hitch section RXA0168028—UN—17MAY19
of this Operator’s Manual. Resume Button
Rear Hitch Items: Resume Button — press to move hitch to set point
position.
RXA0168024—UN—17MAY19
Rear Hitch Lever
NOTE: Lever will not raise hitch above upper limit. RXA0168029—UN—17MAY19
Upper Limit Hitch Dial
Rear Hitch Lever — allows adjustment of rear hitch
position. See Hitch Control Lever in Rear Hitch section Upper Limit Hitch Dial — use to adjust Upper Limit
of this Operator’s Manual. setting. A drop-down will display on CommandCenter to
view adjustment.
30B-1
CommandARM Controls
Front PTO Lever — engage/disengage front PTO. See

Operate PTOs in PTO—General Information section of
this Operator’s Manual.
RXA0168030—UN—17MAY19
Drop Rate Hitch Dial
Drop Rate Hitch Dial — use to adjust Drop Rate RXA0168034—UN—17MAY19

setting. A drop-down will display on CommandCenter to Rear PTO Lever
view adjustment.
Rear PTO Lever — engage/disengage rear PTO. See
Operate PTOs in PTO—General Information section of
KD34109,00005E5-19-15JUN22
RXA0168031—UN—17MAY19
Load Depth Hitch Dial CommandARM Climate, Radio, and
Lighting Controls
Load Depth Hitch Dial — use to adjust Load Depth
setting. A drop-down will display on CommandCenter to
view adjustment.
KD34109,00005E4-19-20JUN22
CommandARM SCV Control Levers RXA0168035—UN—17MAY19

Volume
NOTE: SCV control levers can be reconfigured to
control tractor functions and implements. See
Volume — press (+) to increase or (-) to decrease
Controls Setup in CommandCenter section of this
volume.
RXA0168032—UN—17MAY19
RXA0168036—UN—17MAY19
SCV I Lever
Previous/Next
SCV Control Levers allow you to adjust SCV flow.

Previous/Next — press top arrow for next track/station
Number of levers varies by machine. See SCV Control
or bottom arrow for previous track/station.
Lever Adjustments in Selective Control Valves section
of this Operator’s Manual.
KD34109,00004E1-19-15JUN22
RXA0168037—UN—28JUN19
Mute
CommandARM PTO Control Levers [Ag]
Mute — press to silence speaker volume, press again
NOTE: Some items are only available if machine is to unmute. Does not mute microphone during an active
equipped with the associated option. call. Microphone can only be muted from phone or radio
faceplate.
RXA0168033—UN—17MAY19
Front PTO Lever
30B-2
CommandARM Controls
RXA0168040—UN—17MAY19
RXA0178830—UN—22JUL20 Hazard Lights
PTT/Accept Call
Hazard Lights — press to turn on hazard lights, press

NOTE: If equipped with non-touch screen radio, button again to turn off. Indicator light is on when active.
only accepts incoming calls.
Push-To-Talk (PTT)/Accept Call — allows operator to

perform various functions depending on radio state and
length of button press. If equipped with the touch screen RXA0168041—UN—17MAY19
radio, see the global radio Operator’s Manual for more Parking Lights
information on PTT.
Parking Lights — press to turn on parking lights, press
again to turn off. Indicator light is on when active.
RXA0178829—UN—22JUL20
End Call
RXA0168042—UN—17MAY19
End Call — press to end call in progress or active voice Road Lights
recognition (VR) session.
Road Lights — press to turn road lights on. Press again
to turn off. Indicator light is on when active. If equipped,
hood/belt line lights page automatically displays when
selected. Page disappears after 10 seconds of inaction.
RXA0167638—UN—26APR19
Air Flow Mode
See Lights Settings in Lights section of this Operator’s
Manual.
Air Flow Mode — press to select mode of air flow. Each
press moves to next mode.
RXA0168043—UN—17MAY19
Field Lights
Field Lights — press to turn on field lights, press again

to turn off. Indicator light is on when active. Active preset
page will automatically display. Page disappears after
RXA0167640—UN—26APR19
Temperature 10 seconds of inaction. See Lights Settings in Lights
Temperature — press (+) to increase or (-) to decrease
temperature.
RXA0168044—UN—17MAY19
Beacon Lights
Beacon Lights — press to turn on beacon lights (if

equipped). Press again to turn off. Indicator light is on
RXA0167644—UN—26APR19
when active.
Fan Speed KD34109,00004E3-19-20APR22
Fan Speed — press (+) to increase or (-) to decrease

fan speed.
30B-3
CommandARM Controls
CommandARM Controls—Left Side front-wheel drive (MFWD) mode. See Mechanical Front-
Wheel Drive (MFWD) in Drivetrain section of this
NOTE: Some items are only available if machine is Operator’s Manual.
RXA0168426—UN—30MAY19
AUTO MFWD Button
AUTO MFWD Button — press to enable AUTO

mechanical front-wheel drive (MFWD) mode. See
Mechanical Front-Wheel Drive (MFWD) in Drivetrain
RXA0171324—UN—10OCT19
Speed/Shift Control Example
Speed/Shift Control — use to operate transmission.

For more information on the control equipped on your RXA0168427—UN—30MAY19
machine, see your Transmission section of this Differential Lock Button
Differential Lock Button — to enable manual
differential lock mode:
● 7R, 8RW, 8RX, and 9RW Tractors: Press and
release the button. To disable, press the button again
RXA0168423—UN—30MAY19 or press the brake pedal/pedals.
AutoTrac Resume Button (AUTO)
● 9RX Tractors: Press and hold the button. To disable,
release the button.
AutoTrac Resume Button (AUTO) — press to enable
Tractor-Implement Automation (TIA) after preparing
implement as indicated in implement Operator's For more information on differential lock, see Differential
Manual. Lock in Drivetrain section of this Operator’s Manual.
RXA0168428—UN—30MAY19
AUTO Differential Lock Button
AUTO Differential Lock Button — press to enable

AUTO differential lock mode. See Differential Lock in
Drivetrain section of this Operator’s Manual.
RXA0168424—UN—30MAY19
iTEC Buttons
1—4 Buttons — press to enable assigned function. For

assignment information, see Controls Setup in RXA0168429—UN—30MAY19
CommandCenter section of this Operator’s Manual. SCV Lock Button
SCV Lock Button — press to lock out SCV levers.

Indicator on button illuminates when levers are locked.
Press again to unlock.
RXA0168425—UN—30MAY19
MFWD Button
MFWD Button — press to enable manual mechanical
30B-4
CommandARM Controls
information, see your Transmission section of this

RXA0168430—UN—30MAY19
ISB Button
CAUTION: Avoid injury. Verify button function RXA0168434—UN—30MAY19

in a safe and open area that is clear of Speed Control Pedal Lock Button
bystanders.
NOTE: The speed control pedal will not lock if the button
ISOBUS (ISB) Button — press to signal ISOBUS to
is held for more than 1 second. If the speed control
stop operations started at implement. Verify that
pedal decelerator function is equipped, the pedal
implement is compatible with ISB button in implement
lock/unlock button does not function.
Operator's Manual.
Speed Control Pedal Lock/Unlock Button — press to
lock speed control pedal to maintain commanded
speed. Indicator on button illuminates when locked.
Commanded speed will discontinue if button is pressed
again, pedal is depressed after locking, brake is
depressed, or machine is placed in PARK.
RXA0168435—UN—30MAY19
Engine Set Speed 1 Button
RXA0168431—UN—30MAY19
Hand Throttle NOTE: Machines equipped with CommandPRO joystick
only.
NOTE: Hand throttle commands engine speed only, not
Engine Set Speed 1 Button — press to enable engine
wheel speed.
set speed 1 setting. Press again to disable. Indicator on
button illuminates when enabled. See Engine Settings
Hand Throttle — use to increase or decrease engine —Engine Set Speed in Engine Operation section of this
speed. Operator’s Manual.
RXA0168432—UN—30MAY19
Maximum Engine Speed Button
RXA0168436—UN—30MAY19
Maximum Engine Speed Button — press to enable Engine Set Speed 2 Button
maximum engine speed setting. Press again to disable.
Indicator on button illuminates when enabled. See NOTE: Machines equipped with CommandPRO joystick
Engine Settings—Max Engine Speed in Engine only.
Engine Set Speed 2 Button — press to enable engine
set speed 2 setting. Press again to disable. Indicator on
button illuminates when enabled. See Engine Settings
—Engine Set Speed in Engine Operation section of this
RXA0168433—UN—30MAY19
ECO Button
ECO Button — press to enable ECO Performance.

ECO is only available in Custom Transmission mode.
Press again to disable. Indicator on button illuminates RXA0168437—UN—30MAY19
when enabled. For ECO setting (if equipped) Engine Manual Mode Button
30B-5
CommandARM Controls
NOTE: Machines equipped with CommandPRO joystick

only.
RXA0168446—UN—30MAY19
Run Page Scroll
Engine Manual Mode Button — press to enable
manual engine mode. Engine speed is determined by Run Page Scroll — press to scroll through custom run
hand throttle. Press again to disable. Indicator on button pages.
illuminates when enabled.
KD34109,00004E4-19-14JUL22
RXA0168447—UN—30MAY19
CommandARM Secondary Brake Lever SCV
SCV — press to open SCV application.
RXA0168448—UN—30MAY19
Rear Hitch
NOTE: Ag machines only.

RXA0169485—UN—02JUL19
Secondary Brake Lever Rear Hitch — press to open Rear Hitch application.
NOTE: Only applies brakes to rear axle.
Pull lever (if equipped) back and hold to engage

RXA0168449—UN—30MAY19
secondary brake. To release secondary brake, release Engine
lever.
KD34109,00004FE-19-17JUN22 Engine — press to open Engine application.
CommandARM Navigation Bar

RXA0168450—UN—30MAY19
Transmission
Transmission — press to open Transmission

application.
RXA0171956—UN—12NOV19
Navigation Bar Example
RXA0168451—UN—30MAY19
PTO
NOTE: Ag machines only.
RXA0168445—UN—30MAY19
PTO — press to open PTO application.
Adjustment Dial
Adjustment Dial — turn clockwise to increase or

counterclockwise to decrease selected input field.
RXA0168452—UN—30MAY19
Button in center of adjustment wheel is used to close iTEC
CommandCenter pages.
iTEC — press to open iTEC application.
30B-6
CommandARM Controls
RXA0168455—UN—05JUN19
Lights
Lights — press to open Lights application.

RXA0167305—UN—02APR19
Height Only Adjustment
Adjustment Knob (Height Only) — turn adjustment

RXA0168456—UN—30MAY19
HVAC
knob counterclockwise to loosen. Move CommandARM
to desired position and tighten by turning knob
clockwise.
HVAC — press to open HVAC application.
RXA0168457—UN—30MAY19
Controls Setup
Controls Setup — press to open Controls Setup

RXA0167306—UN—02APR19
application.
Height and Tilt Adjustment
Adjustment Knob (Height and Tilt) — turn adjustment

knob counterclockwise to loosen. Move CommandARM
RXA0168458—UN—30MAY19 to desired position and tighten by turning knob
AutoLoad clockwise. If adjusting tilt but not height, only this knob is
needed.
NOTE: Scraper machines only. TS36762,000023C-19-17JUN22
AutoLoad — press to open AutoLoad application.

KD34109,00004E6-19-20JUN22
Adjust CommandARM Position
RXA0167304—UN—02APR19
CommandARM Adjustment
NOTE: Both adjustment knobs must be loosened to

adjust height.
30B-7
CommandCenter
Generation 4 Display ● For more information, see Engine Settings in Engine
For additional information on Display hardware and Operation section of this Operator’s Manual.
software functionality, reference the Display Operator’s
Manual and the Help Center application on the display.
To obtain a copy of the Operator’s Manual, contact your
dealer, use the Help Center application on the display,
or visit techpubs.deere.com.
RXA0178628—UN—08JUL20
DX,PC,DISPLAY,REFERENCE-19-15JUN22 ExactRate Tractor Tank
ExactRate Tractor Tank

Rear Hitch or PTO Availability ● Use ExactRate Tractor Tank application to view
[Ag] PTO or rear hitch options are available only on an ExactRate fill information.
agricultural tractor. ● For more information, see ExactRate Tractor Tank
[Scraper] For scraper tractor, ignore CommandCenter Settings in ExactRate Tractor Tanks section of this
content that pertains to these options. Operator’s Manual.
RX32825,0000004-19-20JUN22
Machine Settings Overview

RXA0169132—UN—25JUN19
NOTE: Some items only display if machine is equipped Front Hitch
with the associated option.
Front Hitch
● Use Front Hitch application to adjust front hitch
settings.
● For more information, see Front Hitch Settings in
Front Hitch section of this Operator’s Manual.
RXA0167076—UN—20MAR19
Access machine-specific applications from the Machine
Settings tab. Available applications vary depending on
tractor configuration.
RXA0167626—UN—26APR19
HVAC
HVAC
RXA0180073—UN—09OCT20
● Use HVAC application to adjust heating, ventilation,
AutoLoad and air conditioning settings.
● For more information, see HVAC Settings in HVAC
AutoLoad section of this Operator’s Manual.
● Use AutoLoad application to adjust AutoLoad
settings.
● For more information, see Scraper Information
RXA0177902—UN—14MAY20
John Deere CTIS
John Deere CTIS

RXA0175176—UN—17FEB20 ● Use John Deere CTIS application to adjust John
Engine Deere CTIS settings.
● For more information, see John Deere CTIS Settings
Engine in John Deere CTIS section of this Operator’s
● Use Engine application to adjust engine and exhaust Manual.
filter system settings.
30C-1
CommandCenter
RXA0168488—UN—05JUN19 RXA0173516—UN—03JAN20
Lights SCV
Lights SCV
● Use Lights application to adjust lights settings. ● Use SCV application to adjust SCV settings.
● For more information, see Lights settings in Lights ● For more information, see SCV Settings in Selective
section of this Operator’s Manual. Control Valves section of this Operator’s Manual.
RXA0171926—UN—06NOV19
RXA0134981—UN—07AUG13 Steering
Maintenance and Calibrations
Steering
Maintenance and Calibrations
● Use Steering application to adjust steering settings.
● Use Maintenance and Calibrations application to
add/edit service intervals and perform ground radar ● For more information, see Steering Settings in this
and slip calibrations. Operator’s Manual section.
● For more information, reference the Generation 4
Display Operator’s Manual and the Help Center
application on the display.
RXA0174230—UN—28JAN20
Suspension
Suspension
RXA0167685—UN—30APR19
PTO ● Use Suspension application to adjust suspension
settings.
PTO ● For more information, see Suspension Settings in
● Use PTO application to adjust PTO settings. Drive Train section of this Operator’s Manual.
● For more information, see PTO Settings in PTO—
General Information section of this Operator’s
Manual.
RXA0177626—UN—28APR20
Trailer Brake
Trailer Brake
RXA0169204—UN—26JUN19
Rear Hitch ● Use Trailer Brake application to adjust brake and pre-
brake settings and/or to test trailer brakes.
Rear Hitch ● For more information, see Trailer Brake System
● Use Rear Hitch application to adjust rear hitch Settings in Brakes section of this Operator’s Manual.
settings.
● For more information, see Rear Hitch Settings in
Rear Hitch section of this Operator’s Manual.
RXA0167077—UN—20MAR19
Transmission
30C-2
CommandCenter
Transmission
● Use Transmission application to adjust transmission
settings.
● For more information, see appropriate transmission
KD34109,00005E3-19-15JUN22
Navigate Generation 4 CommandCenter

NOTE: Images are for reference and may differ by
tractor configuration or operator settings. As the
operator pages through the CommandCenter, more
in-depth information is presented, allowing the
operator to fine-tune tractor functions. RXA0137128—UN—19NOV13
Run Page
Navigating CommandCenter Pages:

D—Shortcut Keys: Allow quick access to application
functions from the shortcut bar.
E––Run Page Modules: Allow quick access to
application functions from the run pages.
F––Title Bar: Select to access available run pages or
add a new run page.
G—Menu: Select to access all applications installed on
the display and machine. Select left-hand tabs to view
different groups of applications.
RXA0130496—UN—09APR13
CommandCenter and CommandARM
Use touchscreen CommandCenter buttons or icons to

make selections. To adjust input box values, enter the
value on the keypad or select the input box and scroll
the adjustment dial (C) to the desired value. A yellow
highlight box appears around the selected input box and
indicates that the adjustment dial is active.
A—CommandCenter: A touchscreen display attached
to the CommandARM (B) that allows the operator to RXA0137084—UN—13DEC13
Module Functions
access pages required to operate the tractor. The
operator can select (touch) options on the screen to
move through pages and access tractor functions. H—Help/Advanced Settings Buttons: While in an
application, select the title bar to view the help pages or
B—CommandARM: Made up of buttons, switches, and change additional settings for that application.
a joystick (if equipped) that allow the operator to
manage tractor or implement functions. I––Close Button: Select to close the current page.
C—Adjustment Dial/Close Window Button: Rotate J—Increase/Decrease Value Buttons: Select to

the adjustment dial clockwise to raise or change a value within input boxes. Use (++) and (- -)
counterclockwise to lower input box values. Press the buttons to make larger incremental changes when
button one time to close a window. Press and hold the adjusting the value, rather than touching (+) or (-)
button to close all open windows. buttons. For areas that require tighter adjustments, only
(+) and (-) buttons are available.
K—Tabs: Select to change to different section topics.
KT81203,00004A1-19-17JUN22
30C-3
CommandCenter
Compatible Universal Displays section of this Operator’s Manual. If the problem

Generation 4 CommandCenter may be configured to persists, see your John Deere dealer.
run with the following John Deere universal displays KT81203,00004A2-19-20JUN22
connected at the corner post.
● GreenStar 3 2630 Display
● 4640 Universal Display Change Pages and Values
● 4240 Universal Display (7R and 8R Series Tractors Various methods are provided to allow selection and
only) modification of CommandCenter pages and values.
KD34109,000058C-19-20JUN22
Power Display On and Off

The Generation 4 CommandCenter display turns on and
off with the tractor key switch.
● Warm boot occurs when the CommandCenter
display has been on within the last 24 hours. The
display rests in hibernation state during the 24-hour
or less time period that it has been off. When turned
back on, the display powers up quickly
(approximately 10 seconds). RXA0181011—UN—22JAN21
● A—Section Tab: Select to change to a different
● Cold boot occurs if the display has not been
section topic.
operated for 24 hours or more, or if the unswitched
power has been disconnected. During this period, ● B—Icons: Select to open an application.
the display shuts down completely to conserve
battery power. The next power-up takes
approximately 60 seconds.
NOTE: After turning off the engine, avoid turning the key
switch back on until the display screen has gone
black.
● Hard reset is required when the display is

unresponsive for more than a few minutes under
normal operating conditions.
RXA0130123—UN—23APR13
● C—Bar Graph: Shows setting information using the
filled portion of the bar.
● D—Slider Bar: Shows the setting within the
minimum and maximum value range.
● E—Input Box: Shows the set value. Select (+) to
increase or (-) to decrease the value.
NOTE: When changing values using the adjustment

RXA0148512—UN—25JUN15 dial, rotating the dial faster increases or decreases
Navigation Bar the value faster.
Perform a hard reset by simultaneously pressing the If a large range of values is available, a numeric keypad
left-most upper and lower buttons (A and B) on the appears, allowing direct input of the desired value.
navigation bar for 5 seconds. If the display does not
KT81203,00004A7-19-20JUN22
reset, pull fuse nine from the load center and replace it
after 5 seconds. For more information on load center
fuses, see Load Center—Cab in Service—Electrical
30C-4
CommandCenter
Factory and Service ADVISOR Installed

Onscreen Help
Tractor Application Help Package with Service
ADVISOR or Service ADVISOR Remote is installed at
the factory for the following eight languages:
• Chinese • Italian
• English • Portuguese
• French • Russian
• German • Spanish
Generation 4 Operating System Help Package is RXA0147580—UN—10MAR15

installed for all languages at factory.
NOTE: Radar calibration can be canceled by selecting
For instructions on how to install and update Onscreen Cancel (B).
Help packages, see the Generation 4 Display
Operator’s Manual. 7. Select Start (A) to begin radar calibration process.
KT81203,00004A9-19-21APR22
Radar Calibration
CAUTION: Avoid injury. Perform calibration in
safe and open area that is clear of objects and
bystanders.
Perform radar calibration if:

● Radar speed and wheel/track speed are not equal
when slip is not present.
RXA0147581—UN—10MAR15
● Radar device was installed/replaced.
8. Select OK (C) to complete radar calibration.
● Tire size was changed.
● Ballast of tractor was changed. If radar calibration is unsuccessful after three attempts,
see your John Deere dealer.
● Speed source was changed.
KD34109,00004DE-19-22JUN22
Slip Calibration
CAUTION: Avoid injury. Perform calibration in
safe and open area that is clear of objects and
RXA0147926—UN—13APR15 bystanders.
1. Select Menu.
Perform slip calibration if:
2. Select Machine Settings tab.
● Radar calibration has been performed.
3. Select Maintenance & Calibrations icon.
● Slip is displayed when slip should not be present.
4. Select Calibrations tab. ● Ballast of tractor was changed.
5. Select Radar Calibration icon. ● Speed source was changed.
6. Drive unloaded tractor on hard, dry, and level surface
at approximately 3.2 km/h (2.0 mph).
RXA0147928—UN—13APR15
1. Select Menu.
30C-5
CommandCenter
2. Select Machine Settings tab. If slip calibration is unsuccessful after three attempts,
3. Select Maintenance & Calibrations icon.
KT81203,000020F-19-22JUN22
4. Select Calibrations tab.
NOTE: Tractor must be in motion for slip calibration icon

to appear. Steering Settings—Access
5. Select Slip Calibration icon.
RXA0167075—UN—20MAR19
Menu
1. Menu
RXA0147582—UN—10MAR15
NOTE: Slip calibration can be canceled by selecting RXA0167076—UN—20MAR19

Cancel (B). Machine Settings
6. Select Start (A) to begin slip calibration process. 2. Machine Settings tab
7. Drive unloaded tractor on hard, dry, and level surface
at least 8 km/h (5 mph).
RXA0171926—UN—06NOV19
Steering
3. Steering
KD34109,0000571-19-08DEC21
Steering Settings
Steering application is used to access and adjust
steering settings.
RXA0147583—UN—10MAR15
Items Accessible on Steering Main Page:
8. Select Calibrate (C).
RXA0171924—UN—07NOV19
Sensitivity Status
RXA0147584—UN—10MAR15
Manual Steering Sensitivity — adjust sensitivity of
9. Select OK (D) to complete slip calibration. turning the steering wheel for varying vehicle loads. See
30C-6
CommandCenter
Steering Settings—Manual Steering Sensitivity in this 2.Select Applications tab.

Operator’s Manual section. 3.Select Controls Setup application.
KD34109,0000577-19-06NOV19 4.Select from the following tabs on the left-hand side of
the page:
NOTE: Unlock the tractor joystick (if equipped) to
Steering Settings—Manual Steering activate default and custom (manually set)
Sensitivity assignments. See CommandARM Joystick in
Manual Steering Sensitivity setting allows operator to CommandARM Controls section of this Operator’s
adjust sensitivity of turning the steering wheel for Manual.
varying vehicle loads. Higher values focus more on turn
radius, lower values focus more on control. - CommandPRO Joystick: Assign to control
tractor and implement functions (example: rear
Procedure to Modify: hitch).
- Integrated Tractor Joystick: Assign to control
tractor and implement functions (example: front
hitch).
- CommandARM Levers and 1—4 Buttons:
Assign to control tractor and implement functions
(example: rear hitch).
- Third-Party Devices: Any mechanism, John
Deere, or non-John Deere, attached to ISOBUS.
Once attached, assign control to tractor and
RXA0171927—UN—06NOV19
implement functions (example: trailer).
Increase/Decrease Value - ISO Aux implements: Assign implement
(example: trailer) function to a specific button on
Select (+) to increase or (-) to decrease value. the tractor joystick.
● Maximum: 175 5.Select reconfigurable assignment module.
● Minimum: 75 Depending on the selected source, the following
● Increment: 1 combinations (assignments) are possible:
● Default: 100 - Integrated Tractor Joystick, CommandARM
Levers, 1—4 buttons, and Third-Party Devices:
Input + Source + Function
- ISO Aux Implements: Function + Device + Input
RXA0167129—UN—25MAR19
Close Manage Assignments:
Select to close.
KD34109,0000578-19-06NOV19
Controls Setup RXA0156706—UN—11JAN17

To edit assignments for the tractor joystick,
CommandARM levers, or 1—4 buttons, select the
desired reconfigurable assignment module. To remove
an assignment, select the desired assigned module and
then select Remove Assignment (A).
PC15326—UN—08JUL13 To edit assignments for third-party devices or ISO Aux
Controls Setup configures the integrated tractor joystick, implements, select edit (B) in the desired reconfigurable
CommandARM levers, 1—4 buttons, and third-party assignment module. To remove an assignment, select
devices to control tractor or implement functions. ISO trash (C).
Aux implements configure to the tractor joystick or a
third-party device. Activate Custom, ISO Aux, and Defaults:
Set up assignments:
1.Select Menu.
30C-7
CommandCenter
1. Locate 4-pin video connectors (A) at bottom opening

of rear cab panel.
RXA0166821—UN—05MAR19
Select Activate Custom and ISO Aux buttons to enable
custom assignments for ISO Aux implements
4 1
Activate Custom (D): Enables all customized
assignments across all groups. 2 3
ISO Aux (E): Determines if messages from the tractor
joystick are sent to the ISO Aux implement. Select to
enable implement functions, select again to disable.
Functions are stored until the operator edits a RXA0107925—UN—28MAY10
corresponding assignment. Video Connector Pin Identification
Defaults (F): Clears and restores any custom control
assignments to factory default settings.
Pin
Function
KT81203,00005B2-19-20JUN22 Number
1 Power
2 Ground
Install Video Display Camera 3 Signal
4 Signal—Ground
IMPORTANT: Avoid damaging camera by mounting
camera securely to equipment and in location NOTE: After connecting camera to port, may need to
where camera will not be pinched, crushed, cycle key switch for camera to function.
kicked, or knocked off.
2. Connect camera cable into 4-pin connector.
NOTE: Camera placement is limited to video camera 3. Route camera cable.
cable length. Consider camera field of view when
selecting location. 4. Mount camera at desired location.
Tractors equipped with 4200 processor will have For information on how to adjust Video settings, see the
one camera input connector and 4600 processor Generation 4 Display Operator’s Manual.
will have four camera input connectors.
KD34109,00004B4-19-21APR22
If camera/cameras factory equipped:
● 4600 processor: Up to two of four video inputs
will be occupied.
● 4200 processor: Video input will be occupied.
RXA0169767—UN—31JUL19
Machine Equipped with 4600 Processor
30C-8
Intelligent Total Equipment Control (iTEC)
CommandARM Control Functions iTEC Station Description (EU 1322/2014)
Intelligent Total Equipment Control, iTEC, allows CAUTION: Do not operate front loaders in
multiple reoccurring tasks to be performed with touch of conjunction with Intelligent Total Equipment
one button, up to four sequences. Sequences remain in Control (iTEC) to avoid sudden movements and
memory until deleted or overwritten, even if electrical possible accidents.
current is switched off. Each sequence can include up to
20 functions.
A sequence is defined as the start of the first recorded
A sequence is a course of events from start of first function to completion of last recorded function.
function to completion of last function. Sequence can be Example of two sequences would be, one sequence
started by pressing one of the sequence (1—4) buttons. made up of a series of functions, operations and
distances used at start of field and a second sequence
iTEC pages are accessed through Generation 4 used at a water way in the center of the field. Each
CommandCenter. See additional information in this program can include up to 20 functions. The programs
Operator’s Manual section on how to set up and edit a remain in the memory until they are deleted or
sequence. overwritten, even if the electrical current is switched off.
KT81203,00004FB-19-15JUN22
CommandCenter Pages Descriptions and

Functions
CAUTION: Avoid unwanted movement and
possible accidents. Do not operate front
loaders in conjunction with Intelligent Total
Equipment Control (iTEC).
iTEC Main Page

RXA0156096—UN—09DEC16
The following iTEC functionality chart describes item
and function from CommandARM image.
NOTE: Some items are only available if machine is RXA0168452—UN—30MAY19

equipped with the associated option. Use shortcut button or follow alternative path:
1.
iTEC Functionality
Component Functions
IVT -AutoPowr, EVT-
eAutoPowr, and 16-Speed Change Set Speed Forward
RXA0145566—UN—01OCT14
A PowerShift
Select Menu.
Upshift or Downshift in
e18 and e23 Transmission
forward gear 2.Select Machine Settings tab.
B Raise Detent, Lower Detent, 3.Select iTEC Icon.
Rear Hitch
and Fast Lower Detent
C Raise, Lower, Float, and ●
Front Hitch
Cancel
D Extend, Retract, Float, and
SCVs
Cancel
E 1—4 Buttonsa Sequence Set 1, 2, 3, or 4
F Front PTO On/Off
G Rear PTO On/Off
H MFWD On/Off/Auto
Differential Lock (7R, 8RW,
On/Off/Auto
I 8RX, and 9RW)
Differential Lock (9RX) Auto
a
Buttons are reconfigurable and must be assigned to iTEC to run
sequence sets.
KT81203,000093C-19-17JUN22 RXA0158043—UN—02MAR17
40-1
A — iTEC Master Toggle: Toggle iTEC ON/OFF. - Error - One or more sequence steps did not
execute.
● B — Active Assignment Set Button: Select or
KT81203,00004D8-19-20JUN22
create an assignment set.
● C — Assignments List: List of sequences that can
be assigned to 1—4 buttons.
● D — Manage Sequences Button: Edit sequence All Sequence Page
and assign buttons.
● E — Scroll Bar: Scroll up or down.
● F — Status List: Shows status of each iTEC
sequence step as sequence progresses. RXA0129723—UN—06MAR13
Select Manage Sequences button on iTEC main page.
KT81203,00004D7-19-17JUN22
Status Area
●
RXA0158044—UN—02MAR17
● A—All Sequences Tab: View available, delete
saved, edit saved, or add new sequences.
● B—Sequence Sets Tab: View assigned sequences
or give sequence assignment.
RXA0131243—UN—08MAR13 ● C—Recommendations (AutoLearn): View and edit
A—Name: Name of sequence that is currently running. learned sequences.
● B—Distance: Displays accumulated distance while ● D—New Sequence Button: Manually program new
iTEC sequence is running. sequence.
● C—Status: Indicator of current iTEC status. ● E—Edit Button: Edit saved sequence.
● F—Trash Button: Deleted saved sequence.
- Off - No sequence execution possible.
● G—Sequence List: List of saved sequences.
- Ready - Waiting for iTEC button to which a DB71512,000013B-19-22JUN22
sequence is assigned to be pressed.
- Active - iTEC sequence execution active.
- RPM Limit - Engine speed is out of range. 1 Add New Sequence
- Park - Transmission indicates that park lock is
engaged.2 NOTE: For complete list of functions available, see
- Operator Presence - No operator presence, no CommandCenter Pages Descriptions and
iTEC execution allowed. Operator returns to seat. Functions in this Operators Manual section.
1
From iTEC main page, follow steps listed below:
- Wheel Speed Low - Wheel speed < 0.5 km/h
(0.3 MPH), execution is paused. 1.
- Complete - Sequence successfully completed.
- Aborted - Sequence execution aborted by
operator or active abort condition.
RXA0158059—UN—02MAR17
Select Manage Sequences button.
1
Sequences pauses or cannot start if this condition exists. Correct 2. Select All Sequences tab.
condition to resume sequence.
2
Sequence pauses or cannot start if this condition exists. Correct 3. Select New Sequence button.
condition to resume sequence.
40-2
4. Select Add Step button.

NOTE: Select Cancel button (F) to exit editing process
without saving changes.
5.
RXA0158048—UN—02MAR17
Select Sequence Name box (G). Type name of
sequence. Select Save/OK button when complete.
RXA0158057—UN—02MAR17
Select from list of functions (A). NOTE: A sequence must be assigned in order to be
6. Select from list of actions (B). used.
7. 12. Select Sequence Assignment box (H). Select
assignment, if desired, and select Save/OK button
when complete.
13. Select Save button (I) to save sequence.
KT81203,00004D9-19-20JUN22
Sequence Step Status
RXA0158047—UN—02MAR17
On Step Distance page, use keypad (D) to enter RXA0131170—UN—05MAR13
distance into step distance box (C).
8. Select OK Button (E).
9. Repeat steps 4-8 to add steps to sequence.
10. Press Next button to continue.
11.
RXA0131609—UN—25JUL13
NOTE: Press Information Button (B) on any iTEC page

to access a general status page. General status
page will list all functions that are part of the
sequences of current selected implement.
Whenever execution of a sequence step is not possible
40-3
or is interrupted, iTEC system informs operator about

new issue by displaying Information Alert (A) or Fault
Alert (F) next to the sequence or sequence step. Press
Alert Symbol next to the sequence (in assignment area
or sequence assignment tab) to access the sequence
status page to read steps with errors. Use scroll bars (D)
to scroll up and down list. Select edit sequence button
(G) if you want to edit a sequence. Press Alert Symbol
next to a sequence step (while in EDIT) for information
about the issue just for that step. Both views will show a
short reason (C) for issue. Press OK button (E) to exit.
KT81203,00004DA-19-20JUN22
Edit or Remove Sequence

RXA0158051—UN—02MAR17
From iTEC main page:
NOTE: To exit editing process without saving changes,
select Cancel button (I).
6.To edit step, select add new step (E), function (F), or
RXA0129723—UN—06MAR13 action (G) buttons or use distance input box (H).
1.Select Manage Sequences button. 7.Select Next button (J).
8.If needed, edit sequence name (L) or sequence
assignment (M).
9.Select Save button (N).
KT81203,00004DB-19-20JUN22
Sequence Sets Page

From iTEC main page, use following steps:
RXA0158049—UN—02MAR17
2.Select All Sequences tab (A).
RXA0129723—UN—06MAR13
3.Select desired sequence. 1.Select Manage Sequences button.
NOTE: Trash button (C) removes sequence or step
within sequence.
4.To update sequence steps, select Edit button (B).
RXA0158311—UN—15MAR17
2.Select Sequence Sets tab (A).
3.If needed, select Active Sequence Set (B) and follow
steps 4-6. If not, skip to step 7.
RXA0158050—UN—02MAR17
5.Select desired step to edit from sequence step list
(D). If needed, use scroll bar (K) to locate step.
40-4
set speeds, gears, or automatic gear shift. Tractor

ground speed must be at least 0.5 km/h (0.31 mph).
Before performing sequence using SCV functions,
relevant SCV levers must be in neutral position.
Abort current sequence at any time by pressing same
assigned iTEC sequence button used for starting
sequence. Currently active commanded functions will
be canceled (example: hitch (if equipped) motion or
SCV flow will stop if previously initiated as part of
sequence).
iTEC Indicator is illuminated when active. For indicator
location, see Corner Post Display in Corner Post
Display section of this Operator’s Manual.
RXA0158312—UN—15MAR17
RXA0173766—UN—13JAN20
During sequence execution, a function can be actuated
manually at any time without execution of sequence
being interrupted. Functions that are actuated manually
are ignored by iTEC for the rest of sequence. Relevant
alert icon for this function appears in Status area (C).
1.Turn iTEC Master toggle (A) to ON position.
2.Select iTEC sequence button assigned to desired
sequence (B).
RXA0158313—UN—15MAR17 3.Sequence steps appear in Status area (C) and show
NOTE: To exit page without saving changes, select progression of steps.
Cancel (F) or Close (I) button. KT81203,00004DF-19-20JUN22
4.Select sequence set from Sequence Set list (D).

5.If needed, select Edit (C) or New Set (E) button.
Recommendations (AutoLearn)
6.Select OK button (G).
When AutoLearn is ON, the system learns every action
7.Select desired iTEC button to assign. the machine completes in the background. When the
8.Select Edit button (C). same patterns, actions, or steps are recognized,
9.Select sequence from Sequence list (H). AutoLearn creates a sequence. AutoLearn then
recommends assignment to an iTEC button.
KT81203,00004DD-19-20JUN22
Sequences can be deleted when no longer needed.
When a sequence is deleted, all button assignments
clear and sequence is no longer available for use.
Perform Sequence From iTEC main page, use following steps:
iTEC sequence execution requires that certain tractor
controls are operated in a particular way. Sequence will
not execute with tractor in PARK position. Transmission
shift lever must be in forward position when executing
RXA0129723—UN—06MAR13
40-5
1.Select Manage Sequences. but set speed changes will not be executed for the
remainder of the sequence.
When a set speed is changed by an iTEC sequence,
transmission will react as if the operator changed set
speed, shifting up or down as a result.
KT81203,00004E2-19-17JUN22
RXA0158056—UN—02MAR17
NOTE: AutoLearn is ON by default. To turn AutoLearn

OFF, use AutoLearn ON/OFF toggle (B).
2.Select Recommendations (AutoLearn) tab (A).

3.Review Recommendation History (C).
4.To edit or assign recommended sequence, select edit
(D). To remove sequence from list, select trash (E).
KT81203,00004E0-19-20JUN22
iTEC Functions—Efficiency Manager
RXA0139446—UN—17MAR14
Efficiency Manager Set Speed Buttons (C): The current
forward set speed can be changed up or down with the
set speed adjusting wheel (B) on shift knob (A).
Transmission changes will be executed at the normal
rate once the set speed has been changed.
The minimum set speed that can be saved is 0.8 km/h
(0.5 mph). Changing the set speed or shifting during
execution of a sequence will not cause iTEC to abort,
40-6
Tractor-Implement Automation (TIA)
TIA—General Information
CAUTION: Although phrases ”transfer control”
and ”disengage control” are terms commonly
used with TIA equipment, at NO time is
implement in total control of an operation.
Operator ALWAYS has the ability to override
TIA implement. It is operator's responsibility to
make sure that implement operation does not
damage equipment, or pose danger of injury or
death to operator or others close by.
Do not operate TIA when driving on public
roads or when other persons are close by. RXA0166931—UN—08MAR19
4. Select Activations tab (A).
For ISO-compliant tractors, TIA-compatible implements
5. When Activations page displays, press Enter Code
have the ability to control certain individual tractor
(B). Keyboard appears.
functions. See your implement Operator’s Manual or
contact your John Deere dealer with any questions
NOTE: Some tractor automation activation page
regarding TIA-compatible implements.
keyboard characters are grayed out and are not
KD34109,0000901-19-06MAY22 used in activation codes. If provided activation code
includes any characters that are grayed out on
tractor automation activation page keyboard,
Activate TIA Equipment request dealers reconfirm activation code.
6. Using keyboard, enter activation code, then select

Response Codes, Text Descriptions, and Corrective Actions OK.
Common
Response Text Displayed Corrective Action 7. If activation code is entered correctly, confirmation
Codes code appears in the enter activation overlay and
0 Code Accepted None Required message is displayed. Code Accepted indicates that
Implement Not Available to Implement already activation is complete.
4
Deactivate deactivated
8. If message other than Code Accepted appears, see
None Required, Response Codes, Text Descriptions, and Corrective
Implement Already
5 implement should work as
Activated
expected Actions table. If message not listed appears, check
and reenter code. If problem persists, contact your
Space Unavailable for Contact your dealer for
6 and 11
Activation assistance John Deere dealer.
Demonstration Activation Up to 20 implement names can be viewed on
17 Replaced With Permanent None Required Activations page at any given time. When a new entry
Activation
shows up in Features list (C), that entry is labeled
Unknown Implement.
NOTE: To obtain tractor serial number, see Product
Identification Number in Identification Numbers KD34109,0000902-19-23JUN22
An activation code is required to allow TIA to function. Operate TIA

Contact your John Deere dealer with tractor serial
number and implement make, model, and serial IMPORTANT: For TIA to function correctly, the
number. Dealer obtains activation code through John tractor and implements must meet various
Deere StellarSupport. requirements. See requirements information in
this Operator’s Manual section and the
implement Operator’s Manual sections.
1. Connect TIA equipment to tractor using ISO

RXA0166970—UN—08MAR19 connection. See Right-Hand Front Corner Post in
1. Select Menu. Accessories section of this Operator’s Manual.
2. Select System tab. 2. Select AutoTrac Resume (AUTO) button on
CommandARM. For button location, see
3. Select Software Manager icon. CommandARM Controls—Left Side in
40A-1
CommandARM Controls section of this Operator’s ● Change SCV flow rate up to set limit.
Manual.
3. Follow implement Operator's Manual instructions to To disengage control, perform any of the following:
operate implement. ● Actuate specific SCV lever.
KD34109,0000903-19-23JUN22
● Lock all assigned SCV controls.
● Actuate remote control switch on fender.
● Remove inputs assigned to SCVs.
PTO Requirements [Ag]
Before transferring control to implement, prepare KD34109,0000905-19-23JUN22
implement as indicated in implement Operator's

Manual. Transfer control using AutoTrac resume button
as described in implement Operator's Manual. PowerShift Transmission Requirements
Following conditions must be met before transferring
control to implement: NOTE: These requirements also apply to the e23
transmission.
● Operator in seat.
● No PTO faults present. Before transferring control to implement, prepare
implement as indicated in implement Operator’s
● PTO remote control off.
as presented in the implement Operator’s Manual.
NOTE: Implement cannot engage PTO when tractor is
stopped unless it is authorized to do so. However, NOTE: The implement cannot exceed ground speed set
implement can disengage PTO at any time by the operator.
including when tractor is stopped.
Following conditions must be met before transferring
While operating and depending on PTO system control to implement:
capabilities, implement has the ability to engage/
disengage PTO or adjust PTO speed. ● Operator in seat.
● No PowerShift transmission faults present.
To disengage control, turn PTO switch off.
● Shift lever in forward.
KD34109,000090F-19-08JUN22
NOTE: When transferring control to the implement,

Efficiency Manager mode will engage.
SCV Requirements
Speed may always be reduced.
Before transferring control to implement, prepare
implement as indicated in implement Operator's Set speed limit may be increased within 2 seconds
Manual. Transfer control using AutoTrac resume button after engaging travel speed auto mode. Current
as described in implement Operator's Manual. travel speed can be limited by other processes (e.g.
iTEC). This limit might be observed; however, the
Following conditions must be met before transferring limit will not be considered as an intervention by
control to implement: operator.
To disengage control using the shift lever:
● No SCV faults present.
● SCV control levers (if assigned) in neutral position. ● During driving: Shift up or down manually.
● Unlock all assigned SCV controls. ● Increasing the speed will end the auto mode. The
implement has all information to inform the operator
that this intervention will end the travel speed auto
NOTE: Set maximum SCV flow limit which cannot be mode. See implement Operator's Manual.
exceeded by implement.
KD34109,0000908-19-23JUN22
NOTE: Implement cannot adjust SCV flow when tractor

is stopped unless it is authorized to do
so. However, implement can stop SCV flow at any AutoTrac Guidance Requirements
time including when tractor is stopped. Before transferring control to implement, prepare
While operating, implement has ability to: Manual. Transfer control using AutoTrac resume button
● Control SCVs during operations. as presented in implement Operator's Manual.
40A-2
Following guidelines must be met before transferring

control to implement.
● Steering system functional.
● AutoTrac is off.
● Steering wheel stationary.
● Vehicle speed below maximum automated speed.
● Transmission not in PARK.
While operating, implement has ability to automatically

steer tractor.
To disengage control:
● Turn steering wheel.
● Place tractor in PARK.
KD34109,0000909-19-23JUN22
Rear Hitch Requirements [Ag]

Before transferring control to implement, prepare
as presented in implement Operator's Manual.
Implement can automatically control hitch depth.
Set raise limit using CommandCenter.
IMPORTANT: Implement cannot exceed limit.
Following guidelines must be met before transferring

control to implement:
● No hitch faults present.
● Hitch control lever in neutral position.
● Hitch unlocked.
NOTE: On a tractor that is standing still, only the

implements authorized by John Deere can control
the hitch depth.
To disengage control, perform any of the following:

● Move hitch control lever.
● Lock hitch.
● Activate fender-mounted hitch switch (if equipped).
KD34109,000090E-19-08JUN22
40A-3
Drivetrain
Drivetrain Overview Adjust the transmission settings for IPM maximum
Tractor drivetrain consists of: efficiency. Suggested settings may increase shift
occurrences, but allows the engine to stay in the desired
● Transmission: e18 PowerShift boosted power range.
● Brakes: Rear 1.Select the transmission custom mode page. See e18
● Mechanical, electronic, and hydraulic control Transmission Settings—Custom in e18 PowerShift
systems Transmission section of this Operator’s Manual.
TS36762,00002C1-19-29JUN22
2.Select the Engine Speed Droop PTO ON module.
3.Adjust the droop percentage to 15%.
4.Select the Engine Speed Droop PTO OFF module.
Drivetrain Protection 5.Adjust the droop percentage to 15%.
NOTE: Drivetrain protection system only affects

operations in gears with maximum operating IPM is available as a factory- or dealer-installed option.
speeds below 7 km/h (4.4 mph). See your John Deere dealer.
When the tractor is operated under a heavy load

Maximum Engine Power Available
and low engine rpm, the PowerShift transmission hp (kW)
may default to NEUTRAL. PARK will engage once
Ge- 9RT 570
track speed drops below 1.75 km/h (1.0 mph) for ar
vehicle protection. 9RT 470 9RT 520 With
Without IPM Hydraulic
To engage the transmission, move the PowerShift IPM
transmission lever to PARK, reduce the load, and 1 470 (346) 470 (346) 468 (349) 544 (406)
then shift back into desired operating gear. 2 470 (346) 470 (346) 468 (349) 544 (406)
A TIP Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will be stored 3 470 (346) 494 (363) 494 (368) 557 (415)
and displayed when default to PARK condition 4 470 (346) 520 (382) 520 (388) 570 (425)
occurs. 5 470 (346) 520 (382) 544 (406) 582 (434)
6 470 (346) 520 (382) 570 (425) 595 (444)
Drivetrain protection system is gear-sensitive and is not 7 470 (346) 520 (382) 590 (434) -
apparent in most situations. It does not affect load
starting and only affects operations in gears with GH15097,00005FE-19-13JUL22
maximum operating speeds below 7.1 km/h (4.4 mph).
Full engine horsepower, plus 10 percent power bulge is
available in all other gears.
Electronic engine controls provide protection from
drivetrain overloading. Engine horsepower is
automatically reduced to protect drivetrain components
when:
● Air Filter Restriction Warning is activated (CCU
000107.00) Engine performance is reduced. Service
engine air filter immediately. See Engine Primary and
Secondary Air Filters in Service—Change section of
● Fuel filters become plugged resulting in a loss of
power due to a reduction in delivered fuel. Service
engine fuel filter immediately. See Fuel Filters in
Service—Change section of this Operator’s Manual.
● See your John Deere Dealer.
Seeding Hydraulic Intelligent Power Management

(IPM)
The swashplate angle sensor determines the hydraulic
power being consumed by the implement to enable
IPM.
Power increase is only provided when required by the
system.
50-1
Brakes
Trailer Brake System Settings—Access NOTE: Some items only display if machine is equipped
with the associated option. If the trailer brake
Access Application through Display: adjustability settings do not display and assistance
is needed to improve tractor-trailer compatibility,
Trailer Brake Gain Items:

RXA0167075—UN—20MAR19
Menu
1. Menu
RXA0167076—UN—20MAR19
RXA0177620—UN—28APR20
Machine Settings
Gain Value and Status
2. Machine Settings tab

Gain — select to adjust the aggressiveness of the trailer
brakes. See Trailer Brake System Settings—Brake Gain
in this Operator’s Manual section.
Trailer Pre-Brake Items:
RXA0177626—UN—28APR20
Trailer Brake System
3. Trailer Brake System

KD34109,00005EF-19-08DEC21
Trailer Brake System Settings

The Trailer Brake System application is used to access
and adjust trailer brake settings. RXA0177621—UN—28APR20
Pre-Brake Value and Status
Pre-Brake — select to adjust the trailer brake initiation

timing. See Trailer Brake System Settings—Pre-Brake
Offset in this Operator’s Manual section.
Trailer Brake Test Controls and Settings Items:
RXA0177627—UN—28APR20
Trailer Brake Test Controls
Trailer Brake Test Controls — select to access the test

RXA0177625—UN—28APR20 to confirm that the park brake will hold both the tractor
Trailer Brake System Example and the trailer. See Trailer Brake System Settings—
Trailer Brake Test in this Operator’s Manual section.
Items Accessible on the Trailer Brake System Main
Page:
RXA0167071—UN—21MAR19
Advanced Settings
50A-1
Brakes
Advanced Settings — access further adjustments and

less common settings. See Trailer Brake System
RXA0167129—UN—25MAR19
Settings—Advanced in this Operator’s Manual section. Close
KD34109,00005F0-19-13MAY20
3. Select to close.
KD34109,00005F1-19-13MAY20
Trailer Brake System Settings—Brake Gain
The Brake Gain adjustment allows the operator to adjust
the braking aggressiveness to match the trailer Trailer Brake System Settings—Pre-Brake
requirements. Offset
Modify When: Pre-Brake Offset allows the operator to change the
timing of the trailer brake initiation. The trailer brake
● The trailer is slow to stop.
initiation may need to be adjusted to prevent the trailer
● The trailer wheels lock up when the brakes are from pushing the tractor forward (example: when
applied. connecting the trailer to the tractor).
RXA0177621—UN—28APR20
RXA0177620—UN—28APR20 Pre-Brake Value and Status
Gain Value and Status
1. Select the Pre-Brake value.
1. Select the Gain value.
RXA0177622—UN—28APR20
RXA0177616—UN—28APR20 Increase/Decrease Value
2. Select (+) to increase or (-) to decrease the value.
2. Select (+) to increase or (-) to decrease the value. The value is shown in the display box.
The value is shown in the display box.
● Maximum: 10
● Maximum: 10
● Minimum: -10
● Minimum: 0
● Increment: 1
● Increment: 1
50A-2
Brakes
● Brakes Released is displayed when the Release

Trailer Brakes key is held.
RXA0167129—UN—25MAR19
● Fault Present and the fault icon are displayed when a
Close fault is present in the brake control.
3. Select to close. Procedure to Modify:

KD34109,00005F2-19-12APR22
1. Place the tractor in PARK.
Trailer Brake System Settings—Trailer

RXA0177627—UN—28APR20
Brake Test Trailer Brake Test Controls
Use the Trailer Brake Test to confirm that the tractor
park brake will hold both the tractor and the trailer. This 2. Select Trailer Brake Test Controls.
condition is necessary when the tractor is parked and
the trailer brakes are released. The test overrides the
default park state and forces the trailer brakes to
release. RXA0177623—UN—28APR20
Release Trailer Brakes
NOTE: Available on tractors equipped with dual-line
hydraulic trailer brakes. 3. Select and hold Release Trailer Brakes long enough
to ensure that the tractor and trailer do not move.
Test When:
● Verifying park brake performance.
● Attaching a different trailer. RXA0177618—UN—28APR20
Done
The tractor must be in PARK and the trailer brakes must

be engaged to perform the trailer brake test. If these 4. Press Done to close.
conditions are not met, the Release Trailer Brakes key KD34109,00005F3-19-12MAY20
is grayed out. The statuses of these conditions are
displayed on the page.
Prerequisite — one of the following statuses is Trailer Brake System Settings—Advanced
displayed next to Machine must be in park: Advanced settings allow you to access further
Items Accessible on Advanced Settings Page:
RXA0177617—UN—28APR20
Check Mark
RXA0177624—UN—28APR20
● The check mark indicates that the machine is in
Reset
PARK.
Reset to Default — select Reset to return the trailer
brake settings to factory default values. When selected,
a page displays to verify the selection. Select OK to
RXA0177619—UN—28APR20
Fault
continue or Cancel to return to the previous page
without resetting the values.
● The fault icon indicates that the machine is not in KD34109,00005F4-19-28APR20
PARK.
Brake Control — one of the following statuses is Brake Use

displayed regarding the trailer brake:
CAUTION: Avoid possible personal injury.
● (---) is displayed when the trailer brake is not Reduce speed if towed load weighs more than
engaged. tractor or transporting loads under adverse
● Brakes Engaged is displayed when the trailer brake conditions. Avoid hard braking applications,
is engaged. see implement manual and Transport Section.
50A-3
Brakes
IMPORTANT: Avoid unnecessary wear on brakes. ● Check hydraulic trailer brake regularly for
DO NOT rest foot on brake pedal during tractor proper operation.
operation.
NOTE: Brake life can be extended when stopping large

loads by using a combination of engine motoring
and service brake torque to slow the vehicle. This
can be achieved by downshifting and then using
service brakes to further slow vehicle and bring
engine speed to idle.
Test brakes with engine stopped to be sure manual

brake system is functioning, see Service—Check
RXA0185310—UN—02SEP21
Dual-line (if equipped) hydraulic trailer brake system
employs yellow control (A) and red supply (B) (if
equipped) couplers.
Clean connections before attaching hydraulic hoses.
Connect trailer line that goes to yellow hydraulic brake
coupler (control) first. Lift dust cover from trailer
hydraulic brake coupler and connect trailer hose
coupling. Seal connections with dust covers whenever
hoses are disconnected.
Depress brake pedal to operate hydraulic trailer brake.
RXA0180381—UN—05NOV20
Press brake pedal (A) to stop tractor while disengaging Braking effect depends on pressure applied to brake
clutch. pedal.
GH15097,0000605-19-02SEP21
Maintain at least 1800 engine rpm during aggressive
braking events to ensure adequate cooling oil flow is
directed to vehicle brakes. Do not over speed engine as
it may cause damage to engine or transmission
components.
TO84419,00000C9-19-21APR21
Hydraulic Trailer Brakes (If Equipped)

CAUTION: Avoid possible injury from losing
control of tractor when operating on downhill
slopes. Tractor tracks may lock and skid on
steep or slippery downhill slopes.
IMPORTANT: Operating tractor with three scrapers

requires tractor and all scraper pans to be
equipped with hydraulic trailer brakes.
Reference Towing Loads and Transporting with
Ballast in Transport Section of this Operator's
Manual.
IMPORTANT: Recommendations to reduce brake

wear:
● Make sure pressure hose is connected.
● Select same gear for both downhill and uphill
driving.
50A-4
Transmission—General Information
Transmission Settings—Access Advanced Transmission Settings—Advanced
Access Through Display: Advanced Settings allows you to access further

RXA0167075—UN—20MAR19 Items Accessible on Advanced Settings Page:

Menu
1. Menu
RXA0167133—UN—21MAR19
Selection Box
True Ground Speed Input — allows the choice of

Radar or GPS as the ground speed source. Touch the
selection box to display the selection list. If the speed
RXA0167076—UN—20MAR19 source is changed, perform radar calibration, then slip
Machine Settings calibration. For information on calibrations, see Radar
Calibrations and Slip Calibrations in CommandCenter
2. Machine Settings tab section of this Operator's Manual.
RXA0167134—UN—22MAR19
OFF/LOW/MED/HIGH
RXA0167077—UN—20MAR19 NOTE: IVT and EVT without CommandPRO joystick and

Transmission e23 only.
3. Transmission AutoClutch Sensitivity — select OFF to disable or

select the level of sensitivity for AutoClutch. If set to
OFF and the key is cycled, the setting reverts to the last
LOW, MED, or HIGH setting.
NOTE: The OFF selection is only available when the

RXA0167071—UN—21MAR19 brake pedals are not applied.
Advanced Settings
Sensitivity levels:
4. Advanced Settings
● LOW - recommended for driving in extremely hilly
Access Through Navigation Bar: terrain with implements (drawn or attached),
particularly if driving conditions are slippery.
● MED - recommended for driving in moderately hilly
terrain with implements (drawn or attached).
RXA0167078—UN—20MAR19 ● HIGH - recommended for driving without an
Transmission implement or with an implement in flat terrain.
1. Press transmission button on navigation bar below

display.
RXA0167133—UN—21MAR19
Selection Box
Start Gears — choose which gear the Transmission

RXA0167071—UN—21MAR19
starts in. Touch the selection box next to the desired
Advanced Settings setting to be adjusted. A gear list displays. Select the
desired gear from the list.
2. Select advanced settings. Options displayed depend on the Transmission:
KD34109,00004B5-19-19MAY20
50B-1
RXA0167137—UN—22MAR19
AUTO MFWD Toggle
RXA0172259—UN—18NOV19 NOTE: Machines configured with mechanical front-

Forward Start Gear
wheel drive only.
● Some transmissions have a setting for a forward start AUTO MFWD — MFWD disengages to enable a tighter
gear. turning radius or to reduce ground disturbance in the
area of the turn. Select the desired steering angle to
disengage MFWD or disable by selecting OFF.
Disabling the steering angle leaves Auto MFWD with the
speed dependency only. See Mechanical Front-Wheel
RXA0172260—UN—18NOV19 Drive (MFWD) in Drivetrain section of this Operator’s
Reverse Start Gear Manual.
● Some transmissions have a setting for a reverse start

RXA0167138—UN—22MAR19
gear. AUTO Diff Lock Example
NOTE: Machines configured with differential lock only.

Options displayed depend on the machine.
AUTO Diff Lock — higher disengage steering angles

require the operator to turn the steering wheel further
before differential lock disengages. Use in high slip field
conditions that require large steering corrections to
maintain the desired path. Differential lock remains
RXA0172261—UN—18NOV19
Multiple Start Gears engaged while making steering corrections across the
field but automatically disengages on headland turns.
● Some transmissions have settings for multiple Select the desired steering angle to disengage
forward start gears. differential lock.
● Moderate disengage steering angles are useful in
loader situations. Differential lock remains engaged
when entering a pile, but quickly disengages while
turning.
RXA0167136—UN—22MAR19
Selection Box ● Lower disengage steering angles allow differential
lock to disengage sooner (less movement of the
Reverse/Forward Ratio — select the ratio for reverse steering wheel), which is useful in high-traction
and forward Set Speeds. Reverse Set Speed will conditions (example: paved surface). Differential lock
automatically set to the forward Set Speed times the remains engaged during straight-line work, while
selected setting. For example, if Fx0.3 is selected, minimizing tractor jerk when disengaged or re-
reverse Set Speed will be 30% of what forward Set engaged during turns.
Speed is set to. If set to Independent, reverse and
forward Set Speeds function independent of each other See Differential Lock in Drivetrain section of this
and are set separately. Regardless of the ratio, Operator’s Manual.
maximum reverse speed is 20 km/h (12 mph) for IVT for
7 and 8 Series Tractors.
RXA0167139—UN—21MAR19 RXA0167140—UN—21MAR19
Forward Speed Limit Reverse Speed Limit
RXA0167187—UN—22MAR19
ON/OFF
NOTE: Machines equipped with CommandPRO joystick
Backup Alarm (If Equipped) — select ON to enable or only.
OFF to disable the alarm that sounds when the tractor is
in reverse. See Backup Alarm in this Operator’s Manual Speed Limits — adjust the maximum allowed speed in
section. both forward and reverse directions. See
CommandPRO Transmission Settings—Speed Limits in
50B-2
IVT-AutoPowr Transmission with CommandPRO

Joystick section of this Operator’s Manual.
RXA0176726—UN—07APR20
Ride Control
Ride Control — displays to indicate that the machine is

equipped with Large Square Baler (LSB) Ride Control.
For more information on LSB Ride Control, see Large
Square Baler (LSB) Ride Control in Drivetrain section of
RXA0180450—UN—17NOV20
Jumper Hose Install to SCV Coupler [Scraper]
1. Install jumper hose (A) into SCV I couplers.

2. Place transmission lever in PARK position.
3. Turn key switch to start position.
RXA0178631—UN—10JUL20 4. Press SCV shortcut button on navigation bar.
Implement Traction Assist Aggressiveness
5. Select SCV I module.
Implement Traction Assist Aggressiveness — select 6. Set detent Time to C (continuous). See SCV
(+) to increase or (-) to decrease the aggressiveness. Settings—Time in Selective Control Valves section
Higher aggressiveness targets less wheel slip. of this Operator’s Manual.
NOTE: EVT only. 7. Set detent Flow to 8.00 or above. See SCV Settings
—Flow in Selective Control Valves section of this
KD34109,00004AB-19-20JUN22
8. Select SCV II module and repeat steps 6 and 7.
Warm-Up Transmission-Hydraulic System

IMPORTANT: Avoid machine damage. Do not
operate tractor under load until transmission-
hydraulic system has warmed up. Tractor-
hydraulic warm-up procedure is recommended
when temperature is at or below -5°C (23°F).
RXA0166860—UN—06MAR19
9. Pull SCV I (B) and SCV II (C) levers to extend
detent. See SCV Control Lever Adjustments in
Selective Control Valves section of this Operator’s
Manual.
10. Operate engine at 1400 rpm.
11. Monitor Hydraulic Oil Temperature until it reaches
38°C (100°F).
RXA0180455—UN—17NOV20
Jumper Hose Install to SCV Coupler [Ag]
RXA0126813—UN—12JUN12
a. Select Menu.
50B-3
b. Select Applications tab. ● High (left-hand position)

c. Select Machine Monitor icon. ● Low (middle position)
● Medium (right-hand position)
KD34109,000056F-19-25MAR20
RXA0181012—UN—22JAN21
d. Select Temperature tab (D).
e. Select Hydraulic Oil Temperature reading (E).
12. Return SCV levers I and II to neutral position.
13. Disconnect jumper hose and return to normal
operation.
KT81203,0000252-19-22JAN21
Backup Alarm
The backup alarm is located on rear of machine. It is
standard on scraper machines and is available as a
factory or field installed option on agricultural machines.
Backup alarm emits an audible sound to alert anyone
nearby when key switch is on and machine is in reverse
gear. For information on how to enable/disable alarm,
see Transmission Advanced Settings in this Operator’s
Manual section.
Adjust Volume
RXA0171844—UN—31OCT19
Volume can be adjusted using switch (A) on back of
alarm.
Volume settings:
50B-4
e18 PowerShift Transmission
Operate Transmission—e18
CAUTION: Avoid possible injury from losing
control of tractor while operating on a downhill
slope. Observe following precautions:
● Avoid depressing the clutch pedal or shifting RXA0171366—UN—10OCT19
to NEUTRAL at high speeds while the tractor Speed Adjustment Wheel
is rolling downhill.
● In overspeed condition, the clutch may not Speed Adjustment Wheel — turn wheel clockwise to
re-engage when the pedal is released; use increase or counterclockwise to decrease speed.
the brakes to slow down the tractor.
● Adjust Set Speed to a safe downhill
operating speed.
● Do not make major speed reductions with
right-hand reverser.
IMPORTANT: Prevent transmission or clutch

damage:
● Avoid depressing the clutch pedal or shifting
to NEUTRAL at high speeds while the tractor
is rolling downhill. RXA0171324—UN—10OCT19
Right-Hand Reverser
● In overspeed condition, a diagnostic trouble
code (DTC) appears and the clutch may not
re-engage when the pedal is released; use NOTE: The engine will start with the shift lever in any
the brakes to slow down the tractor. For position. However, the tractor will not move until the
more information on DTCs, see lever is moved into and out of NEUTRAL or PARK.
Troubleshooting—Diagnostic Trouble Codes
(DTC) section of this Operator's Manual. Right-Hand Reverser — lever on CommandARM used
● Never attempt to start tractor by towing or to shift transmission. For information on shifting, see
pushing. Shift Transmission—e18 in this Operator’s Manual
section.
● Shift lever can be moved to PARK position at
any time. However, the park brake will not With right-hand reverser:
engage until the ground speed is below 1.75
● Transmission can be shifted into forward or reverse
km/h (1.0 mph).
without use of the clutch pedal.
● Avoid excessive ballast.
● Clutch pedal is used when selecting forward or
● Avoid continuous operation under full reverse for more precise movement (such as
throttle and full load conditions below 1800 connecting implements).
rpm.
● Gear information displays on the corner post display.
● Fully depress the clutch pedal to completely See Corner Post Display in Corner Post Display
disengage the clutch. section of this Operator’s Manual.
● Bump lever (move and release) to increase (+) or
NOTE: When machine load is causing below idle speed: decrease (-) forward and reverse gears.
● Transmission can default to NEUTRAL to protect KD34109,000055F-19-15JUL22
the power train.
● Park brake engages when the wheel speed
drops below 1.75 km/h (1.0 mph).
Shift Transmission—e18
● Diagnostic trouble code displays.
IMPORTANT: Avoid damage to park brake. Repeated
To re-engage transmission, move lever to PARK, engagement of park brake while machine is
reduce load, and shift into desired operating gear. moving may damage the park brake. Shift lever
can be moved to PARK position at any time.
NOTE: Operator presence sensor prevents initiation of However, park brake will not engage until
movement with operator out of seat. See Operator ground speed is below 1.75 km/h (1.0 mph).
Presence Sensor in Seats section of this
50G-1
Command Gears: Shuttle Shift (Direction Change):
NOTE: Optimum engine speed is 1800—2200 rpm in Move reverser lever between forward and reverse
full load conditions. Using higher gear and lower positions to modulate directly to opposite direction of
engine speed for light load operation saves fuel and travel without clutching or braking. Shuttle shift occurs
reduces wear. between last commanded forward and reverse gears.
Ground Speed Matching:
Each time transmission is placed in forward or reverse,
transmission starts in commanded gear when clutch CAUTION: Avoid possible accident and injury
pedal is released. Commanded gear displays on corner from loss of vehicle control. Never allow
post display. Commanded gear temporarily changes to machine to coast downhill.
the last gear used when shuttling between forward and
reverse or shifting from gear to NEUTRAL. NOTE: Custom and Full AUTO modes only.
Startup commanded gear defaults are 7F and 2R. To
If clutch pedal is released while machine is traveling
change startup gears, see Transmission Advanced
above default startup gear speed, transmission
Settings in Transmission—General Information section
automatically shifts gears to match speed. However, if
clutch pedal is released while machine is traveling
Manually Preselect Gears: below default startup gear speed, transmission will stay
at startup gear, even if machine stops.
● Forward — depress clutch pedal, put reverser lever
in forward position, and bump gear up or down until Right-Hand Reverser Positions:
desired command gear (between F1 and F13)
displays.
● Reverse — depress clutch pedal, put reverser lever
in reverse position, and bump gear up or down until
desired command gear (between R1 and R5)
displays.
Cold Weather Starting:

When temperature is -10°C (14°F) or lower, it can take
up to 1 minute to release the park brake and shift
transmission lever in gear (with operator in the seat). RXA0171316—UN—10OCT19
Several shifts between PARK and NEUTRAL can be PARK Position
required to release park brake in extremely cold
conditions. PARK — park brake is applied when lever is placed in
When temperature is above -10°C (14°F), it can take up position next to P.
to 3 seconds to release park brake with operator in seat.
When reverser lever is moved to NEUTRAL, corner post
display shows N for 3 seconds. If park brake does not
release, N changes back to P. Move reverser lever back
to PARK, then back to NEUTRAL until N displays for
more than 3 seconds.
Transmission will not shift above F13 until normal
operating temperature has been reached. Delayed shift,
slow hydraulic operation, hard steering, and limited
engine rpm can also be noticeable until operating
temperature is obtained. RXA0171315—UN—10OCT19
NEUTRAL Position
Transport Shift:
When tractor is in light load condition, transmission can NEUTRAL — park brake releases when lever is placed
shift faster by rapidly bumping lever until desired anywhere in right-hand gate.
transport speed is reached. To reach transport speed
quickly from a stop, depress clutch and bump lever to
desired gear. When clutch pedal is released,
transmission shifts directly to selected gear.
50G-2
Engine throttle should be fully forward for maximum

rpm:
● To reach Set Speeds.
● In high load applications.
Shift decisions are based on load conditions, throttle

command, and operator settings. However,
transmission may shift gears if hand throttle or speed
control pedal are adjusted.
RXA0171317—UN—10OCT19
Reverse Position NOTE: Efficiency Manager Set Speeds can be
programmed in iTEC application. See Intelligent
Reverse — machine moves in reverse when placed in Total Equipment Control (iTEC) section of this
gate labeled with an R. Operator’s Manual.
RXA0171325—UN—10OCT19
Set Speed 1 Button
Set Speed 1 Button — select to activate Set Speed

one. Select again to disengage.
RXA0171314—UN—10OCT19
Forward Position
Forward — machine moves forward when placed in

gate labeled with an F. RXA0171326—UN—10OCT19
Set Speed 2 Button
KD34109,0000560-19-20JUN22
Set Speed 2 Button — select to activate Set Speed

two. Select again to disengage.
e18 Set Speeds and Efficiency Manager
Efficiency Manager:
● Controls transmission gearshift and engine speed to
maintain desired ground speed (Set Speed).
● Will not shift gears if clutch pedal is partially
depressed. RXA0171366—UN—10OCT19
Speed Adjustment Wheel
● Selects startup gear and may reduce engine speed if
clutch pedal is fully depressed and machine is
stationary. Speed Adjustment Wheel — while Set Speed is active,
turn wheel clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to
● Selects startup gear speed if clutch pedal is fully decrease setting.
depressed and machine is moving below startup
gear speed. In Full AUTO and Custom Modes:
● Selects a gear and engine speed to match ground ● It is recommended that the hand throttle is placed in
speed if clutch pedal is fully depressed and machine full forward position at all times.
is moving above startup gear speed. ● On corner post display, Set Speed value and
● Selects startup gear when shifting from NEUTRAL or automatic shifting indicator always display. However,
PARK to gear. Set Speed number displays only when Set Speed is
● Is always running when in Full AUTO and Custom active. See Corner Post Display in Corner Post
modes. Display section of this Operator’s Manual.
● Runs in Manual mode when Set Speed buttons are ● Bumping right-hand reverser increases Set Speed
active. value. However, Set Speed disengages, and
adjusted speed is not stored.
50G-3
In Manual Mode: e18 Transmission Settings

● On corner post display, automatic shifting indicator Transmission application is used to display transmission
and Set Speed information display only when Set information and adjust settings.
Speeds are active. See Corner Post Display in
Corner Post Display section of this Operator’s NOTE: Some items only display if machine is equipped
Manual. with the associated option.
● Bumping right-hand reverser or drive lever
disengages Set Speed.
KD34109,0000615-19-23JUN22
e18 Transmission Settings—Access

1.
RXA0171369—UN—17OCT19
Transmission
RXA0167075—UN—20MAR19
Menu
Items Accessible on e18 Transmission Main Page:
Menu
2.
RXA0171377—UN—14OCT19
Transmission Mode
Mode — select desired transmission mode. See e18

Transmission Settings—Mode in this Operator’s Manual
section.
RXA0167076—UN—20MAR19
Machine Settings
Machine Settings tab RXA0171389—UN—11OCT19

Custom Settings
3.
Custom Settings — adjust engine settings for PTO,
hitch, and SCV. See e18 Transmission Settings—
Custom in this Operator’s Manual section.
RXA0167077—UN—20MAR19
Transmission
RXA0171378—UN—10OCT19
ECO
Transmission
Access Application through Navigation Bar: NOTE: Only available in Custom mode.
Performance — select ECO to enable/disable reduced

fuel consumption for light loads. Indicator is illuminated
orange when enabled. For ECO button information, see
RXA0167078—UN—20MAR19
Transmission CommandARM Controls—Left Side in CommandARM
Controls section of this Operator’s Manual.
Press transmission button on navigation bar below
display.
KD34109,0000562-19-29JUN22
50G-4
RXA0171381—UN—10OCT19
Forward Start Gear
RXA0171380—UN—10OCT19
ECO ON
Forward Start Gear — toggle between selected
ECO ON — adjust Minimum Engine Speed setting when forward start gears 1 or 2. Gears are selected in
ECO is enabled. See e18 Transmission Settings—ECO Advanced Settings.
RXA0167071—UN—21MAR19
Advanced Settings
RXA0171379—UN—10OCT19
ECO OFF
less common settings. See Transmission Advanced
ECO OFF — adjust Minimum Engine Speed setting Settings in Transmission—General Information section
when ECO is disabled. See e18 Transmission Settings of this Operator’s Manual.
—ECO in this Operator’s Manual section.
Run Page Modules
Example:
RXA0171376—UN—10OCT19
Set Speeds
Set Speeds — displays current forward and reverse Set

Speeds. A box displays around active Set Speed. See RXA0178591—UN—29JUN20
e18 Set Speeds and Efficiency Manager in this Mode
application.
RXA0171384—UN—10OCT19
Forward Max Speed Mode — quick access to adjust the Transmission Mode.
Forward Max Speed — adjust setting for maximum Shortcut Keys

speed in forward gear. See e18 Transmission Settings Add shortcut keys for this application to the shortcut bar
—Max Speeds in this Operator’s Manual section. using Layout Manager. See the Generation 4 Display
Example:
RXA0171385—UN—10OCT19
Reverse Max Speed
Reverse Max Speed — adjust setting for maximum

speed in reverse gear. See e18 Transmission Settings RXA0178590—UN—29JUN20
—Max Speeds in this Operator’s Manual section. ON

application.
50G-5
Backup Alarm — quick access to enable/disable the before transmission shifts down. See e18 Transmission
Backup Alarm. Settings—Droop in this Operator’s Manual section.
KD34109,0000616-19-08JUN22
RXA0167125—UN—21MAR19
e18 Transmission Settings—Mode PTO ON/OFF
Load Anticipation (PTO) — when enabled and PTO is

in use, engine speed increases to obtain the desired
RXA0171357—UN—10OCT19 PTO speed. Select ON to enable or OFF to disable.
Full AUTO Mode
Full AUTO — adjusts Minimum Engine Speed

automatically to maximize fuel economy under light
RXA0167126—UN—21MAR19
loads. Load Anticipation responds to operation of rear Hitch ON/OFF
hitch, SCVs, and PTOs. Engine speed Droop is
maintained at maximum tractor power.
Load Anticipation (Hitch) — when enabled and hitch
is lowered, engine speed increases as needed to
reduce ground speed fluctuations. Select ON to enable
or OFF to disable.
RXA0171356—UN—10OCT19
Custom Mode
Custom — customize settings for engine speed Droop, RXA0167127—UN—21MAR19

Minimum Engine Speed, and Load Anticipation SCV ON/OFF
reaction. See e18 Transmission Settings—Custom in
this Operator’s Manual section. Load Anticipation (SCV) — when enabled, engages if
flow rate is 25% or greater and/or SCV is set to
continuous time detent. Engine speed increases as
needed to reduce ground speed fluctuations or to
provide desired hydraulic flow. Select ON to enable or
RXA0171358—UN—10OCT19
Manual Mode
OFF to disable.
Manual — all fuel economy and load control functions

are manual.
RXA0167129—UN—25MAR19
KD34109,0000564-19-20JUN22 Close
Select to close.
e18 Transmission Settings—Custom KD34109,0000565-19-23JUN22
Custom Settings are only available when transmission
mode is set to Custom. See e18 Transmission Settings
—Mode in this Operator's Manual section. Settings
allow for increased efficiency depending on current
e18 Transmission Settings—Droop
operation. Adjust percentage of engine rpm drop before
transmission downshifts. Lower percentage causes
NOTE: Some items only display if machine is equipped transmission downshifts earlier and to shift more. Higher
with the associated option. percentage causes transmission downshifts later and to
shift less.
Procedure to modify:
NOTE: PTO On adjustments do not affect transmission
operation for machines without PTO.
RXA0167122—UN—25MAR19 RXA0167123—UN—25MAR19 PTO On — use when operating PTO driven equipment

PTO On PTO Off
to maintain a consistent rpm. Selection results in
reduced rpm change before a transmission downshift.
Droop — percentage of maximum engine rpm change
PTO Off — use for implements that do not require a
50G-6
consistent rpm range, such as pulling ground engaging

equipment. a. ECO ON
1. Select desired setting icon:
RXA0171379—UN—10OCT19
RXA0167122—UN—25MAR19 ECO OFF
PTO On
b. ECO OFF
a. PTO On
RXA0167123—UN—25MAR19
PTO Off
b. PTO Off
RXA0171328—UN—10OCT19
2. Select (+) to increase or (-) to decrease value.
RXA0167129—UN—25MAR19
RXA0167165—UN—21MAR19 Close
3. Select to close.
KD34109,0000567-19-20JUN22
RXA0167129—UN—25MAR19 e18 Transmission Settings—Max Speeds

Close Adjust settings for maximum speed in forward and
reverse gears. Set Speed setting cannot exceed this
3. Select to close. setting and will automatically adjust accordingly.
KD34109,0000566-19-20JUN22
1. Select desired setting icon:
e18 Transmission Settings—ECO
ECO ON — adjust Minimum Engine Speed setting when
ECO is enabled. RXA0171384—UN—10OCT19
Forward Max Speed
ECO OFF — adjust Minimum Engine Speed setting
when ECO is disabled.
a. Forward Max Speed
1. Select desired setting:
RXA0171385—UN—10OCT19
Reverse Max Speed
b. Reverse Max Speed
RXA0171380—UN—10OCT19
ECO ON
50G-7
RXA0171354—UN—10OCT19
RXA0167129—UN—25MAR19
Close
3. Select to close.
KD34109,0000568-19-20JUN22
50G-8
PTO—General Information [Ag]
PTO Settings—Access
RXA0167075—UN—20MAR19
Menu
1. Menu
RXA0187232—UN—27JUN22
PTO Example
Items Accessible on PTO Main Page:
RXA0167076—UN—20MAR19
Machine Settings
2. Machine Settings
RXA0167687—UN—30APR19
Front PTO
Front PTO (If Equipped) — view current speed of front

RXA0167685—UN—30APR19 PTO. Operate PTO using front PTO lever and correct
PTO engine speed. See Operate PTOs in this Operator’s
Manual section.
3. PTO
Access Application through Navigation Bar:
RXA0167686—UN—30APR19 RXA0167688—UN—30APR19
PTO Rear PTO
Press PTO button on navigation bar below display. Rear PTO — view current speed of rear PTO. Operate
PTO using rear PTO lever and correct engine speed.
KD34109,00004BE-19-08DEC21
See Operate PTOs in this Operator’s Manual section.
PTO Settings
The PTO application is used to access and adjust PTO
settings.

RXA0187302—UN—28JUN22
with the associated option. PTO Out-of-Seat - Enabled
PTO Out-of-Seat — indicates when operator can be out

of seat and maintain PTO engagement. See PTO
Settings—PTO Out-of-Seat in this Operator's Manual
section.
60A-1
less common settings. See PTO Settings—Advanced in

this Operator’s Manual section.
Run Page Modules
RXA0187405—UN—27JUN22
ON/OFF Operator’s Manual.
Example:
PTO Remote — select ON to enable or OFF to disable
external PTO switches (if equipped). See External PTO
Switches (If Equipped) in this Operator’s Manual
section.
RXA0167691—UN—30APR19
ON/OFF
RXA0167689—UN—30APR19
Rear PTO Speed Limit NOTE: Different modules may be available for your
application.
Rear PTO Speed Limit — adjust speed of rear PTO at
maximum throttle. See PTO Settings—Rear PTO PTO Remote — quick access to enable/disable
Speed Limit in this Operator’s Manual section. external PTO switches.
NOTE: 7R Tractors with IVT: If the PTO is in use and Shortcut Keys
PTO Cruise is ON, the tractor decelerates slower Add shortcut keys for this application to the shortcut bar
during shuttle shift to maintain the PTO speed. To using Layout Manager. See the Generation 4 Display
avoid slower deceleration, set PTO Cruise to OFF. Operator’s Manual.
Example:
RXA0167628—UN—26APR19
ON/OFF
RXA0167692—UN—30APR19
Rear PTO Speed Limit Toggle — select ON to enable ON
or OFF to disable Rear PTO Speed Limit setting.
application.
RXA0167690—UN—30APR19
Rear PTO Gear Example PTO Gear — quick access to enable/disable PTO gear.
KD34109,00004BF-19-28JUN22
IMPORTANT: Incorrect PTO speed could result in

severe damage to implement. Before engaging
PTO, make sure that selected PTO gear is PTO Settings—Advanced
correct for attached implement.
Advanced settings allows you to access further
NOTE: Gears displayed vary by machine. adjustments and less common settings.
Rear PTO Gear — select rear PTO gear for current
operation.
RXA0167700—UN—30APR19
Engagement Rate Selection Box
PTO Engagement Rate — select Rear or Front (if

RXA0167071—UN—21MAR19 equipped) PTO Engagement Rate selection box to
Advanced Settings adjust rate at which PTO engages. See PTO Settings—
Engagement Rate in this Operator’s Manual section.
KD34109,00004C1-19-27AUG19
60A-2
PTO Settings—Engagement Rate Procedure to Modify:

PTO Engagement Rate page allows you to adjust the
rate at which the PTO engages.
RXA0167693—UN—30APR19
Engagement Rate List
Select best rate for current operation. RXA0167699—UN—30APR19

Adjust Rear PTO Speed Limit
● Low Rate is used when gradual PTO start-up is
required or if AUTO engagement is too aggressive or Select (+) to increase or (-) to decrease setting. Value is
inconsistent. shown in display box.
● High Rate is used for applications where PTO clutch
engagement must be aggressive.
IMPORTANT: Avoid power train damage. If operator
is experiencing problems with PTO clutch
engagement in AUTO setting, change setting to
High Rate. RXA0167687—UN—30APR19
Front PTO Speed
● AUTO is used for most implements and is factory
setting in CommandCenter. This setting provides View current front PTO speed (if equipped).
software logic to determine engagement rate for PTO
clutch, based on PTO speed sensor feedback. If PTO
does not turn fast enough during initial PTO clutch
engagement, engagement rate is automatically
increased to avoid clutch slip and PTO shutdown.
RXA0167688—UN—30APR19
Rear PTO Speed
RXA0167694—UN—30APR19
OK View current rear PTO speed.
Select OK to exit and save changes.
RXA0167129—UN—25MAR19
Close
RXA0167695—UN—30APR19
Cancel
Select to close.
Select Cancel to exit without saving changes. KD34109,00004C2-19-10JUN22
KD34109,00004C0-19-20JUN22
PTO Settings—PTO Out-of-Seat

PTO Settings—Rear PTO Speed Limit PTO Out-of-Seat allows you to maintain PTO
Rear PTO Speed Limit allows you to adjust speed of engagement while out of the seat. When the operator
rear PTO at maximum throttle. When enabled, engine leaves the seat, a page displays to enable (an audible
speed is also limited in relation to PTO speed. If max warning sounds and a service alert indicator, on the
engine speed is also enabled, lower limit applies. corner post display, flashes). The page also displays
before leaving the seat, when the PTO is engaged for
NOTE: Only available on machines equipped with an the first time after starting the engine.
electronic shift PTO. If the page is ignored, the PTO will automatically
60A-3
disengage after 7 seconds. A page does not display if Operating Instructions (EU 1322-2014)
PTO Out-of-Seat is already enabled. The operator can
also select PTO Remote ON/OFF to enable PTO Out- CAUTION: Avoid personal injury. Diagrams do
of-Seat on the PTO main page. not show protective shields on drive shaft.
Protective shield use is mandatory when using
Status information is displayed to indicate the current drive shafts.
state of PTO Out-of-Seat.
Status Indicators: IMPORTANT: Avoid equipment damage. Only
operating conditions described in implement
Operator's Manuals are permitted. This applies
particularly to maximum permissible angle of
articulation, to the use of freewheel clutches
RXA0177921—UN—14MAY20 and overload clutches, and to the prescribed
Status Indicator amount of overlap when shaped pipes are
pushed together.
● Green Indicator — the indicator is illuminated green
when PTO Out-of-Seat is enabled. Before using a PTO-driven implement, take
action to ensure that the drive shaft is
● Gray Indicator — the indicator is not illuminated lubricated regularly. Comply with instructions
and appears gray when PTO Out-of-Seat is OFF. in the Operator's Manual provided by the
manufacturer.
On multi-component, telescopic drive shafts,
the yokes at each end must be aligned as
RXA0187303—UN—27JUN22 shown. The yokes at each end must NOT be at
Enabled Indicator 90° to one another (see arrows in illustration on
the right).
● Enabled Indicator — the indicator displays when
PTO Out-of-Seat is enabled.
RXA0187301—UN—27JUN22
OFF Indicator
● OFF Indicator — the indicator displays when PTO

Out-of-Seat is OFF.
LX1049749—UN—21MAY10
Articulation on drive shaft
1—Z-Shaped Layout
RXA0187235—UN—15JUN22
2—W-Shaped Layout
Enable PTO Out-of-Seat
Select Enable PTO Out-of-Seat to maintain PTO

engagement while out of seat.
RXA0167129—UN—25MAR19
Close
Select close to allow PTO to disengage when the

operator is out of seat.
KD34109,00004C3-19-28JUN22
LX1049900—UN—22FEB11
Align Forks Correctly
As far as possible, angles (a) and (b) at universal joints
60A-4
should be same at both ends of drive shaft. In Lever Adjustments:

applications where this is not the case (e.g. sharp turns
with PTO engaged), it is recommended to use a
continuous-velocity drive shaft.
KT81203,0000504-19-22APR22
Operate PTOs
PTOs are engaged using CommandARM PTO control
levers. See CommandARM PTO Control Lever in
CommandARM Controls section of this Operator’s RXA0167697—UN—30APR19
Manual. Once engaged for use with the machine in Engage PTO
motion, use the correct engine speed listed in Select
Correct Engine Speed in this Operator's Manual Push lever down and forward to engage PTO. Lever will
section. return to center.
CAUTION: Avoid personal injury. Stop engine
and PTO driveline before adjustment or
connections are made, or before cleaning PTO-
driven equipment. Always disengage PTO when
not in use.
IMPORTANT: Avoid PTO clutch damage. If operating

RXA0167696—UN—30APR19
PTO with excessive load, PTO automatically
Disengage PTO
disengages. Wait 15 seconds before attempting
to re-engage. If a problem occurs during re-
engagement, try decreasing PTO speed. Pull lever back to disengage PTO. Lever will return to
center.
If PTO disengages during start-up in cold-
weather operation, wait 5 minutes before re- Outside of Cab Operation :
engaging. To operate the PTO outside of the cab using external
PTO switches (if equipped), wheel/track speed must be
NOTE: Rear PTO automatically disengages if: less than 0.5 km/h (0.3 mph). See External PTO
Switches in this Operator’s Manual section.
● PTO speed is less than 100 rpm for more than 1
second. KD34109,00004C4-19-20JUN22
● Engine speed drops below 500 rpm to prevent

engine from stalling.
External PTO Switches
Front PTO (if equipped) automatically disengages External PTO switches (if equipped) allow you to
if: operate PTOs from outside the cab. Front PTO external
● 7R and 8R Tractors: Clutch slip is greater than switches are on the front of the machine. Rear PTO
40% for more than 1 second. external switches are on the rear of the machine.
● 8R Tractors: Clutch slip is greater than 10% for Procedure to Modify:
more than 45 seconds.
● 7R and 8R Tractors: Engine speed drops below
500 rpm to prevent engine from stalling.
For information on corner post display indicators, see

Corner Post Display in Corner Post Display section of
this Operator’s Manual. RXA0187405—UN—27JUN22
ON/OFF
NOTE: If the engine is stopped while the PTO is
running, the PTO will not operate when the engine 1. Select ON to enable remote PTO switches on PTO
is restarted. The lever must be re-engaged to main page (an audible warning sounds and hazard
operate the PTO. warning lights flash).
60A-5
NOTE: PTO Remote will also turn ON automatically,

when pressing and releasing any external PTO
remote switch.
2.
RXA0167698—UN—30APR19
Remote PTO Switch
Press and hold remote PTO switch. PTO starts slowly.
NOTE: If equipped with front and rear PTO and only one
PTO is started with the remote PTO switch, hazard
warning sound/lights continue. Enabling external
PTO switches enables both front and rear PTO and
the system recognizes that one of the PTOs has not
started.
● If held for at least 4 seconds, hazard warning

sound/lights turn off and PTO continues to
operate.
● If released within 4 seconds, PTO slowly stops
and hazard warning sound/lights continue.
To turn off PTO, press remote PTO switch (an audible

warning sounds and hazard warning lights flash) or pull
back PTO control lever inside cab.
To return PTO control lever back to normal function,
disable remote PTO.
KD34109,00004C5-19-28JUN22
Select Correct Engine Speed
PTO
Engine
Shaft Speeda
Speed
Diameter Spline rpm
rpm
mm (in)
1000 45 (1-3/4) 20 1895
a
Tachometer displays current engine speed. See Corner Post Display
in Corner Post Display section of this Operator’s Manual.
KD34109,00005EA-19-20APR20
60A-6
Rear PTO [Ag]
Use PTO Shield (If Equipped) Attach PTO-Driven Implement [Ag]
RXA0142441—UN—11JUN14 TS1644—UN—22AUG95
PTO Shield (Standard Position)
CAUTION: Entanglement in rotating driveline
can cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION: Avoid possible injury. Tractor PTO
shield should be in place at all times except for Keep PTO shield and driveline shields in place
special applications as directed in the at all times. Make sure rotating shields turn
implement Operator's Manual. Do not use the freely.
shield as a step. Wear close fitting clothing. STOP ENGINE and
be sure that PTO driveline is stopped before
making adjustments, connections, or cleaning
PTO-driven equipment.
RXA0142439—UN—11JUN14
PTO shield can be tipped up in the raised position (A) to
provide clearance while connecting the PTO shaft.
CAUTION: Avoid possible injury. Do not operate

PTO with the shield in the raised position.
RXA0142225—UN—09JUN14
PTO Shaft End to

PTO Shaft Hitch Pin Hole Center (A)
mm (in)
1000 rpm - 20 Splinesa 508 (20)
a
45 mm (1-3/4 in) Shaft Diameter.
1. Lock the drawbar in the center position.

2. Remove the clevis assembly.
3. Attach the implement to the drawbar before
connecting the PTO driveline. If the implement will be
RXA0142440—UN—11JUN14 connected to the quick-hitch, be sure that the
PTO shield can be lowered (B) to improve the drawbar drawbar will not interfere.
visibility when the drawbar is being used without the 4. Connect the drive line to the PTO shaft. Turn the
PTO. shaft slightly by hand to line up splines. Be sure the
GH15097,0000648-19-20JAN22 yoke is in the correct position and firmly locked.
60C-1
Rear PTO [Ag]
5. Move the PTO shield into position for the PTO shaft
size being used.
WTEFIAT,000001F-19-26JAN22
60C-2
Rear Hitch [Ag]
Hitch Lift Capacities
IMPORTANT: Avoid equipment damage. Never
exceed axle load capacities.
Rear Hitch Sustained Lift Capacitya

kg (lb)
9RT
Model
470 520 570
4N/3 Optional —
Hitch Category
4N/4 Optional
Lift Cylinder 100 6804 (15000)
Diameter
mm 110 9072 (20000)
a
610 mm (24 in) behind the coupling points.
KT81203,0000920-19-04OCT21
Rear Hitch Settings—Access Rear Hitch Settings

Access Application through Display: Rear Hitch application is used to access and adjust rear
hitch settings.

RXA0167075—UN—20MAR19
Menu
1. Menu
RXA0167076—UN—20MAR19
Machine Settings
RXA0169346—UN—27JUN19
Rear Hitch Example
Items Accessible on Rear Hitch Main Page:
RXA0169204—UN—26JUN19
Rear Hitch
3. Rear Hitch
RXA0169206—UN—25JUN19
Upper Limit
RXA0169205—UN—26JUN19
Rear Hitch
Upper Limit — upper set point that cannot be exceeded
unless using external switches. See Rear Hitch Settings
Press rear hitch button on navigation bar below display. —Upper Limit in this Operator’s Manual section.
KD34109,00004EE-19-08DEC21
60E-1
Rear Hitch [Ag]
RXA0169207—UN—25JUN19
Drop Rate
Drop Rate — speed at which the rear hitch is lowered.

See Rear Hitch Settings—Drop Rate in this Operator’s
Manual section. RXA0169211—UN—25JUN19
Position
Position — displays information for current rear hitch

settings. See Rear Hitch Settings—Position in this
Operator’s Manual section. For hitch position
adjustments, see Hitch Control Lever Adjustments in
RXA0169208—UN—25JUN19
Raise Rate
RXA0167071—UN—21MAR19
Advanced Settings
Raise Rate — speed at which the rear hitch is raised.
See Rear Hitch Settings—Raise Rate in this Operator’s
Manual section. Advanced Settings — access further adjustments and
less common settings. See Rear Hitch Settings—
Advanced in this Operator’s Manual section.
Run Page Modules
RXA0169209—UN—26JUN19 Layout Manager. See the Generation 4 Display
Load Depth
Load Depth — sensitivity to changing terrain or soil Example:
conditions. See Rear Hitch Settings—Load Depth in this
RXA0169210—UN—26JUN19
Slip Sensitivity
NOTE: Only available if equipped with radar and Load

RXA0169212—UN—25JUN19
Depth is set to draft control mode. Position
Slip Sensitivity — how much the hitch reacts to wheel

slip. See Rear Hitch Settings—Slip Sensitivity in this NOTE: Different modules may be available for your
Operator’s Manual section. application.
Position — quick access to position module.

KD34109,00004EF-19-22APR22
60E-2
Rear Hitch [Ag]
Rear Hitch Settings—Upper Limit Rear Hitch Settings—Drop Rate

Upper Limit page allows you to adjust Upper Limit Drop Rate page allows you to adjust the speed at which
setting and view current hitch settings. Rear hitch will the rear hitch is dropped and view current hitch settings.
only move above Upper Limit setting using external
switches. CAUTION: Avoid injury or machine damage. Do
not lower implement too quickly. Fully lowering
NOTE: Fully down position is 0% and fully raised implement should take at least 2 seconds.
position is 100%.
RXA0169142—UN—25JUN19
RXA0169139—UN—25JUN19 Adjust Drop Rate
Adjust Upper Limit
Select (+) to increase or (-) to decrease Drop Rate.
Select (+) to increase or (-) to decrease Upper Limit set Value is shown in display box.
point. Value is shown in display box.
RXA0169143—UN—25JUN19
Drop Rate Indicator
RXA0169140—UN—25JUN19
Position Indicator
Indicates setting on slider.
Indicates current position of rear hitch on slider.
RXA0169141—UN—25JUN19 RXA0167129—UN—25MAR19
Upper Limit Indicator Close
Indicates position of Upper Limit on slider. Select to close.

Alternative Method to Modify:
Drop Rate Hitch Dial (If Equipped) — dial on
CommandARM to adjust Drop Rate setting. A drop-
RXA0167129—UN—25MAR19
Close down will display on CommandCenter to view
adjustment. See CommandARM Hitch Controls in
Select to close. CommandARM Controls section of this Operator’s
Manual.
KD34109,00004F1-19-20JUN22
Upper Limit Hitch Dial (If Equipped) — dial on
CommandARM to adjust Upper Limit setting. A drop-
down will display on CommandCenter to view
Rear Hitch Settings—Raise Rate
CommandARM Controls section of this Operator’s Raise Rate page allows you to adjust the speed at
Manual. which the rear hitch is raised and view current hitch
settings.
KD34109,00004F0-19-20JUN22
60E-3
Rear Hitch [Ag]
RXA0169214—UN—26JUN19
Load Depth Indicator
RXA0169142—UN—25JUN19 RXA0167129—UN—25MAR19
Adjust Raise Rate Close
Select (+) to increase or (-) to decrease Raise Rate. Select to close.

Value is shown in display box.
Load Depth Hitch Dial (If Equipped) — dial on
RXA0169143—UN—25JUN19 CommandARM to adjust Load Depth setting. A drop-
Raise Rate Indicator
down will display on CommandCenter to view
Indicates setting on slider. CommandARM Controls section of this Operator’s
Manual.
KD34109,00004F3-19-20JUN22
RXA0167129—UN—25MAR19
Close
Rear Hitch Settings—Slip Sensitivity
Select to close. Slip Sensitivity page allows you to adjust how much the
KD34109,00004F2-19-29OCT19 hitch reacts to wheel slip. The higher the setting, the
more the hitch reacts. Slip Sensitivity setting only
adjusts hitch up and takes priority over draft control
setting, which adjusts hitch down. See Rear Hitch
Rear Hitch Settings—Load Depth Settings—Draft Control in this Operator’s Manual
Load Depth control (draft response) allows control of section. After wheel slip goes below slip setting, hitch
movement of hitch while working. The higher the value, will resume normal draft control. Appropriate setting
the larger the range of movement (more draft response). depends on implement type, soil conditions, and tractor
The lower the value, the smaller the range of movement setup.
(less draft response). Correct adjustment provides
better control of implement depth and operating NOTE: Only available if equipped with radar and Load
efficiency. Depth is set to draft control mode.
RXA0169213—UN—26JUN19
Adjust Load Depth RXA0169215—UN—26JUN19
Adjust Slip Sensitivity
Select (+) to increase or (-) to decrease Load Depth

setting. Value is shown in display box. Select (+) to increase or (-) to decrease setting. Value is
shown in display box.
● For position control only, set Load Depth to 0.0. See
Rear Hitch Settings—Position Control in this
● Higher settings are used for draft control. See Rear
Hitch Settings—Draft Control in this Operator’s RXA0169214—UN—26JUN19
Manual section. Slip Sensitivity Indicator
60E-4
Rear Hitch [Ag]
Position Indicator — indicates current position of rear

hitch on slider. Use hitch control lever or adjustment dial
to adjust hitch position. See Hitch Control Lever
RXA0167129—UN—25MAR19
Close
Adjustments in this Operator’s Manual section.
Rear Hitch Position Statuses:
Select to close.
KD34109,00004F4-19-29OCT19
Rear Hitch Settings—Position

Position allows you to view current rear hitch
information.
Items Accessible on Position Module:
RXA0169224—UN—25JUN19
At Rest
Hitch at rest.
RXA0169211—UN—25JUN19
Position
Position Example — items may change based on

status.
RXA0169225—UN—25JUN19
Commanded to Position
RXA0169222—UN—25JUN19
Upper Limit Setting Hitch commanded to 25% position. Green value is
commanded position and green line indicates distance
Upper Limit Setting — line indicates position of upper between current hitch position and commanded
limit. Shaded area at the top indicates amount out of position.
range (above upper limit).
RXA0169223—UN—26JUN19
Hitch Depth Indicator
RXA0169226—UN—25JUN19
Float
Hitch Depth Indicator — indicates stored operating
depth. See Hitch Depth Set Point in this Operator’s Hitch set to float position. Icon displays above current
Manual section. hitch position value.
RXA0169140—UN—25JUN19
Position Indicator
60E-5
Rear Hitch [Ag]
Rear Hitch Settings—Position Control
RXA0169227—UN—25JUN19
Float Unavailable
Float unavailable. Icon displays above current hitch

position value.
RXA0169149—UN—25JUN19
Locked
RXA0163992—UN—18JUL18
Hitch locked. Icon displays below current hitch position Use position control to operate non-ground engaging
value. See CommandARM Hitch Controls in implements and implements that fully rest on gauge
CommandARM Controls section of this Operator’s wheels to control depth. Set Load Depth to 0 for position
Manual. control.
KD34109,00004F7-19-29OCT19
RXA0169228—UN—25JUN19
Lock Damping Rear Hitch Settings—Draft Control
Draft control helps to maintain operating depth of non-
Lock damping enabled. Icon displays below current floating tillage equipment in rolling terrain. Draft control
hitch position value. also helps if tractor altitude/pitch and rear wheel sinkage
force implement deeper than desired. Higher Load
Depth values respond better to rolling terrain but are
more sensitive to soil density variation. Lower values
stay more consistent with field soil changes but are less
RXA0169229—UN—25JUN19 responsive to hills. Ideal setting depends on implement
Return to Lower Set Point Unavailable type and field conditions.
While in draft control mode, hitch can move above and
Return to lower set point unavailable. Icon displays
below setting based on soil type and/or terrain. If setting
below current hitch position value.
is causing implement to go lower than desired, set to 1
and increase Slip Sensitivity.
Control or change operating depth by pressing resume
button or performing lower detent with control lever. See
RXA0169230—UN—25JUN19 CommandARM Hitch Controls in CommandARM
Fast Lower Controls section of this Operator’s Manual.
Hitch set to fast lower. Icon displays below current hitch Examples of Load Depth Settings:
position value.
KD34109,00004F6-19-20JUN22
RXA0163993—UN—18JUL18
If soil varies, high value causes more depth variation.
60E-6
Rear Hitch [Ag]
RXA0169216—UN—26JUN19
Raise Proportionally
Raise Proportionally — moving lever within this range

RXA0163994—UN—18JUL18 will raise hitch. Rate of movement depends on how far
If soil varies, middle value causes less depth variation. lever is from center position.
RXA0169217—UN—26JUN19
Lower Proportionally
Lower Proportionally — moving lever within this range

will lower hitch. Rate of movement depends on how far
RXA0163995—UN—18JUL18 lever is from center position.
In rolling terrain, low value causes more depth variation.
RXA0169218—UN—26JUN19
Raise Detent
Raise Detent — moving lever to this position and

releasing will raise hitch to Upper Limit set point.
RXA0163996—UN—18JUL18
In rolling terrain, high value causes less depth variation.
KD34109,00004F8-19-20JUN22
Hitch Control Lever Adjustments

Hitch control levers on the CommandARM allow you to
adjust the hitch position. Levers will not raise hitch RXA0169219—UN—26JUN19
above upper limit. Lower Detent
Hitch Control Lever Adjustments:

NOTE: If machine is moving during this operation, hitch
will also raise to lower set point.
Lower Detent — moving lever to this position and

releasing will lower hitch to hitch depth set point. See
Hitch Depth Set Point in this Operator’s Manual section.
60E-7
Rear Hitch [Ag]
Float Operation
Implements that fully rest on the depth gauge wheels for
depth control require the hitch to float and fallow the
ground contour.
Put the hitch control lever in the float position. For more
information on the hitch control lever, see
CommandARM Hitch Controls in the CommandARM
RXA0169220—UN—26JUN19 Controls section of this Operator's Manual. Lift links can
Float be adjusted for the lateral float. See Adjust Lateral Float
Float — moving lever to this position allows hitch to
move freely and is useful when detaching implement. Forced Float
See Float Operation in this Operator’s Manual section. When the hitch is commanded to the lower set point but
Alternative Method to Modify: is unable to reach it, the hitch enters forced float mode.
While in this mode, the hitch acts as though the control
Hitch Depth Adjust Dial — dial on CommandARM to lever is in the float position. If the hitch reaches the
raise and lower hitch. Dial will not raise hitch above lower set point while in forced float mode, the hitch
Upper Limit. See CommandARM Hitch Controls in returns to the mode that the lever is set to.
CommandARM Controls section of this Operator’s
TS36762,00001DB-19-20JUN22
Manual.
KD34109,00004F9-19-20JUN22
Rear Hitch Components

Hitch Depth Set Point
Hitch depth set point (lower set point) is a frequently
used operating depth that can be set and recalled.
Controls used to adjust setting are found on
CommandARM.
1. Move hitch to desired position using hitch control
lever or adjustment dial. See Hitch Control Lever
Adjustments in this Operator’s Manual section.
RXA0168026—UN—17MAY19
SET
RXA0184122—UN—16JUN21
A—Lift Arm
2. Select SET button to store set point. B—Lift Link
C—External Hitch Switch (if equipped) (2 used))
D—Quick-Hitch
E—Draft Link
F—Center Link
G—Lift Cylinder
RXA0168028—UN—17MAY19 H—Quick-Hitch Handle
Resume I—Sway Block (if equipped)
All the components except the center link and quick-

NOTE: If hitch is below set point, resume will only hitch are on the left-hand and the right-hand sides.
engage if the tractor is moving. RW29387,0000616-19-11MAY22
3. Select resume button when wanting to return to set

point position. Lower detent on control lever can also
be used to recall set point.
KD34109,00004FA-19-20JUN22
60E-8
Rear Hitch [Ag]
External Hitch Switches

CAUTION: Prevent injury or tractor damage. Be
sure that the transmission is in the PARK
position before using the remote raise and
lower switches. Stay clear of interference
points when using the remote raise and lower
switches.
RXA0184070—UN—14JUN21
1. Remove the plug to access the manual lowering
valve (A).
2. Turn the valve counterclockwise slowly to lower the
hitch until the desired rate of drop is achieved.
3. Turn the valve clockwise and install the plug after the
hitch has been lowered.
RXA0183164—UN—12MAY21
BH38674,0000BE4-19-28JUN21
NOTE: The hitch control lever cannot be used
simultaneously with the remote raise and lower
switches.
Adjust Sway Blocks
External hitch switches (if equipped) allow hitch
operation from outside the cab. Front external hitch
switches are on the front of the machine. Rear external
hitch switches are on the rear of the machine. Press and
hold the remote switches to raise (A) or lower (B) the
hitch. The hitch initially moves at slow speed when
using the remote switches. However, the longer the
switch is pressed the faster the hitch moves.
GH15097,00007EA-19-25JUN21
Hitch Manual Lowering

RXA0140952—UN—01MAY14
CAUTION: Avoid injury or death. Do not 1. Install the sway blocks (A) with the thick end toward
disconnect any hitch sensors, solenoids, or the frame to minimize the side sway of the hitch.
connectors from the hitch control valve while
the engine is operating or the key switch is ON.
Unexpected hitch movement may occur. Stay
clear of the hitch area when starting the engine
or manually lowering the hitch.
NOTE: The hitch cannot be raised manually. Both

hydraulic and electrical power are required to raise
the hitch. F
C
Hitch manual lowering is possible when hydraulic
pressure and/or electrical power is not available.
B
RXA0090041—UN—04AUG06
2. Adjust the bumper block (B) by loosening the lock nut
and sliding forward or rearward to limit the amount of
sway.
3. Tighten the attaching bolts to 230 N·m (170 lb·ft).
60E-9
Rear Hitch [Ag]
4. Remove sway blocks from both sides of the tractor to 7. Slowly retract the hitch control lever to raise the
allow side sway when the hitch is lowered. Side sway implement. Lower the implement to ground and
is prevented when hitch is raised. adjust the upper height limit control if necessary.
5. Install the sway blocks with the tapered sides TO84419,000011A-19-23JUN22
outward from the frame.

6. If the hitch sway cannot be removed by adjusting the
bumper block, install shims (C) as necessary Adjust Implement Level
between the bumper block and the spacer (F). Shims 1. Adjust the center link to level the implement front-to-
can be purchased from your John Deere dealer. rear:
RW29387,000061B-19-11OCT21
Attach Implement to Quick-Hitch

CAUTION: Avoid injury or machine damage:
● Put the transmission in the PARK position
and check the full range of the hitch motion
for interference, binding, and PTO separation
whenever an implement is attached.
● Make sure that the implement is correctly
attached. Incorrect attachment can allow the
implement to be pulled over the tractor wheel RXA0180511—UN—24NOV20
and onto the operator’s station. a. Remove the lock ring (A).
● Do not stand between the tractor and b. Disengage the adjustment handle (B).
implement.
c. Slide the adjustment sleeve over the adjustment
lock and use the handle to rotate the body of the
center link (C) to adjust the length of the center
link.
d. Measure between the centers of attaching pins.
The adjustment range is 726.0—881.0 mm
(28.6—34.7 in).
e. Engage the adjustment handle to lock it down.
f. Install the lock ring to hold the center link in
position.
2. Adjust the left-hand and right-hand lift links to level
the implement side-to-side:
RXA0184116—UN—14JUN21
1. Pull up on the coupler latch handles (A). a. Remove the lock ring (D).
2. Extend the hitch control lever until the quick-hitch b. Disengage the adjustment handle (E).
hooks are lower than the implement hitch pins. For c. Slide the adjustment sleeve over the adjustment
more information on the hitch control lever, see lock and use the handle to rotate the body of the
CommandARM Hitch Controls in the CommandARM lift link (F) to adjust the length of the lift link.
Controls section of this Operator's Manual.
d. Measure between the centers of the attaching
3. Back up the tractor to the implement. pins. The adjustment range is 1110.0—1270.0
4. Raise the hitch enough to engage the implement pins mm (43.7—50.0 in).
into the hooks. e. Engage the adjustment handle to lock it down.
5. Push the coupler latch handles down to lock the f. Install the lock ring to hold the center link in
implement to the quick-hitch. position.
6. Connect the hydraulic hoses and the electrical RW29387,000061E-19-17JUN21
connections.
IMPORTANT: Check for implement interference.

Drawbar removal may be necessary.
60E-10
Rear Hitch [Ag]
Adjust Lateral Float NOTE: See your John Deere dealer for the Category 3
hook required for the Category 3 configuration.
RXA0141373—UN—16JUN14
Place the lateral float pins in the upper holes (A) to hold RXA0164019—UN—20JUL18
the implement rigid. 1. Adjust the bumper (A) and spacer (B) placement for
Put the lateral float pins in the lower holes (B) of the the desired configuration:
draft arms for the float position. The draft links raise ● Category 4: bumper and spacer on the inside of
slightly as the implement follows the ground surface. the hitch arm
RW29387,000061F-19-08OCT21
● Category 3/4N: bumper on the inside of the hitch
arm and the spacer on the outside of the hitch arm
Detach Implement from Quick-Hitch To adjust the bumper and the spacer:
a. Remove the cap screw and nut (C).
b. Position the spacer on the inside or the outside
of the hitch arm to achieve the desired
configuration.
c. Position the bumper on the inside of the hitch
arm.
d. Install the cap screw and nut. Tighten to 230
N·m (170 lb·ft).
e. Repeat the procedure on the opposite side.
f. Cycle the hitch switch to ensure that there is no
RXA0184116—UN—14JUN21 interference between the hitch and the sway
1. Raise both latch handles (A) with the implement blocks.
raised.
CAUTION: Avoid injury. Use proper lifting
2. Disconnect the hydraulic hoses and the electrical
device when converting the coupler.
connections.
3. Lower the implement to the ground. Continue 2. Support the center of the quick-hitch.
lowering the quick-hitch until the hook clears the
implement hitch pins.
4. Carefully drive the tractor away from the implement.
TO84419,000011B-19-09SEP21
Hitch Conversion—Category 4/4N/3

Convertible Quick-Hitch
Quick-hitch is convertible to Category 4, 4N, or 3. Use
Category 4 whenever possible, especially for heavy
loads. Greater width gives more strength.
60E-11
Rear Hitch [Ag]
7. Turn the coupler latch handle inward (H) and reinstall

the roll pin.
8. Flip handle down in the lock position.
NOTE: See your John Deere dealer for Category 3 hook

required for the Category 3 configuration.
RXA0184146—UN—21JUN21
3. Remove the pin retaining bolts (D) and the pins from
the draft link.
4. Remove the side member cap screws (E).
RXA0184178—UN—22JUN21
Quick-Hitch with Category 3 Hook Shown
9. Category 3 conversion only: remove the shims (I).

Replace the shims when converting from Category 3
to Category 4/4N.
RW29387,0000620-19-21SEP21
Convert Category 4N/3 Convertible Quick-

Hitch Lower Hooks
RXA0184147—UN—22JUN21
Quick-Hitch Shown in Category 4N Configuration device when converting the coupler. A second
person is recommended to align the
5. Swap the quick-hitch side members (F) to configure components during the conversion.
as wide (Category 4) or narrow (Category 4N).
Tighten the cap screws to 490 N·m (360 lb·ft). IMPORTANT: If the Category 4N lower hooks are to
be used on Category 3 implements, bushings
IMPORTANT: Before removing the roll pin, keep are needed over the Category 3 pins. Bushings
pressure under the lower coupler hook to hold can be purchased through your John Deere
the lock rod in place. dealer.
Lower hooks are not marked for left-hand or
right-hand side. Do not move the lower hooks
from one side to the other.
RXA0184177—UN—22JUN21
6. Flip the latch handle around by removing the roll pin
(G).
60E-12
Rear Hitch [Ag]
E
G
D F
B
RXA0091394—UN—07NOV06 RXA0142708—UN—17JUN14
1. Support the quick-hitch frame (A). 1. Support the quick-hitch frame (A).
2. Remove the cap screw (B).
3. Remove the retainer (C), then the pin (D).
NOTE: Because the lower hook (E) has a Category 3

hook (F) on one end and a Category 4N hook (G)
on the opposite end, it is used for both Category 3
and 4N simply by turning it end for end.
4. Remove the lower hook by rotating it down and to the

rear of the coupler, then sliding it out at the front of
the coupler.
5. Install the lower hook with the desired end facing RXA0142706—UN—17JUN14
rearward. Using a reverse motion of removal, rotate it 2. Remove the quick-lock pin (D) and pin (C) to release
up and in. the center link (B).
6. Install the pin, retainer, and cap screw. Tighten to 100 3. Remove the pin (E) and the upper hook (F).
N·m (74 lb·ft).
BH38674,0000BEC-19-14SEP21
Convert Category 4N/3 Convertible Quick-

Hitch Upper Hook
device when converting the coupler. A second
person is recommended to align the
components during the conversion.
IMPORTANT: It is recommended to use Category 4 RXA0147950—UN—29APR15

upper hook if the implement setup allows. The 4. Remove pin (H) to remove the stored upper hook
Category 3 upper hook may be overloaded with (G).
very high draft loads.
NOTE: Pin (C) must be installed left to right. Shoulder
(I) will keep retaining the pin (B) from being
installed if the pin (C) is installed incorrectly.
5. Place the upper hook (F) in the storage location.

6. Install the upper hook (G) on the quick-hitch.
GH15097,000092F-19-21SEP21
60E-13
Rear Hitch [Ag]
60F-1
Drawbar
Drawbar Load Limitations [Ag]

IMPORTANT: Avoid tractor and attachments
damage. Heavy implements, rough terrain, and
speed can place excessive strain on the
drawbar.
Never exceed the maximum static vertical load
limit or the drawbar and PTO position
limitations.
RXA0179941—UN—24SEP20
Drawbar Load Limits Based on Drawbar Position and Length

Drawbar End of PTO Shaft to Static Test ≤ 40 km/h (≤ 25 mph)a
Drawbar Pin Hole
Distance (A) Vertical Load Towed Mass
Category Support Position
mm (in) kg (lb) kg (lb)
Short 394 (15.5)
Standard
Regular (PTO) 507 (20)
bc
Short 394 (15.5)
5 Wide Swing 3000 (6613) 26000 (57320)
Regular (PTO) 507 (20)
Wide Swing and Short 394 (15.5)
Reinforcement Kit Regular (PTO) 507 (20)
a
Mechanical Towing Couplings certified per 2015/208 - Annex XXXIV
b
70 mm (2.75 in) diameter pin.
c
If equipped with Category 4 conversion pin, pin diameter is 51 mm (2 in).
EC82310,0000A22-19-17FEB22
60F-2
Drawbar
Using Correct Drawbar Pin—Category 5 to when attaching to implements equipped with a Category
4 [Ag] 4 hitch link, if approved by implement manufacturer.
Use Category 5 drawbar pin furnished with the tractor to
attach implements that have a Category 5 hitch link.
See the table for dimensions. Consult the implement
Operator's Manual or manufacturer to determine the
proper size of drawbar pin for implement attaching
system. Operating the tractor and implements with
drawbar category combinations, which are not properly
sized for implement power requirements, can result in
premature wear or failure of hitch components.
IMPORTANT: Use Category 5 drawbar pin for

implements that produce the drawbar loads
requiring more than 348 kW (467 hp) the engine
power level rating or 300 kW (400 hp) PTO
power level rating for the proper operation.
Contact the implement manufacturer for
RXA0141903—UN—05JUN14 information on how to convert the implement to
See your John Deere dealer to purchase an Adapter Kit accept Category 5 drawbar pin.
(F) for tractors equipped with a Category 5 drawbar
RXA0160175—UN—10JUL17
Hitch Link Dimensions
Tractor Drawbar Implement Hitch Link

Category Drawbar Opening Hitch Pin Diameter (B) Link Thickness (C) Slot Width (minimum) Slot Length (E)
Height (A) (D)
5 100 mm (3.94 in) 70 mm (2.76 in) 60 mm (2.36 in) 73 mm (2.87 in) 73—85 mm (2.87—
3.35 in)
GH15097,000063F-19-16JUN22
Scraper Applications [Scraper]

IMPORTANT: Avoid tractor damage. Never exceed
the maximum drawbar vertical load.
See your John Deere dealer if the:
● Drawbar is not John Deere approved.
● Drawbar vertical load or distance behind the
rear axle exceeds the following table values.
60F-3
Drawbar
Calculate Vertical Drawbar Load Distance

Behind Rear Axle [Scraper]
RXA0179306—UN—21AUG20
A—Rear Axle Center Line
B—Front Drawbar Pin Center Line
C—Rear Drawbar Pin Center Line
RXA0179306—UN—21AUG20
D—Front Drawbar Pin Distance in Front of Rear Axle
E—Vertical Load Distance Behind Rear Axle
F—Drawbar Length
Maximum Vertical
Front Drawbar Pin
Maximum Vertical Load Distance
Distance in Front of
Load Behind Rear Axle
Rear Axle (D)
kg (lb) (E)
mm (in)
mm (in)
10194 (22500) 486 (19.1) 1374 (54.1)
For load and distance measurement procedures, see

Calculate Static Vertical Drawbar Load [Scraper] and
Calculate Vertical Drawbar Load Distance Behind Rear RXA0179874—UN—23SEP20
Axle [Scraper] in this Operator’s Manual section. For vertical drawbar load distance behind the rear axle
KD34109,0000613-19-23FEB22 (E):
1. Measure the length of the drawbar (F) from the front
drawbar pin center line (B) to the rear drawbar pin
Calculate Static Vertical Drawbar Load center line (C).
[Scraper] 2. Determine the rear axle center line (A). Subtract the
For static vertical drawbar load: front drawbar pin distance in front of the rear axle (D)
1. Measure and record total tractor weight without from the drawbar length (F). For the front drawbar pin
implement connected for total bare tractor weight. distance in front of the rear axle (D), see the table in
Scraper Applications [Scraper] in this Operator’s
2. Measure and record total tractor weight with loaded Manual section.
implement connected for total loaded tractor weight.
NOTE: If the front drawbar pin distance in front of the
3. Subtract total bare tractor weight (step 1) from total
rear axle value provided is negative, subtracting a
loaded tractor weight (step 2).
negative will provide a distance longer than the
WTEFIAT,0000069-19-18FEB22 measured drawbar length.
WTEFIAT,0000063-19-28FEB22
Adjust Drawbar [Ag]

IMPORTANT: Drawbar must be positioned, as
instructed in Attach PTO-Driven Implement in
PTO, Hitch, and Drawbar section of this
Operator’s Manual, for PTO-driven implement.
60F-4
Drawbar
Adjust Wide Swing Drawbar [Ag] (If

Equipped)
RXA0186159—UN—29NOV21
Adjust Drawbar Length:
1. Loosen the drawbar locking bolts (B).
RXA0142221—UN—10JUN14
IMPORTANT: When installing the stop blocks (B),

the closed portion of the block should be on top
of the drawbar.
CAUTION: Avoid personal injury. Lock the wide

swing drawbar in the center position for
transport and PTO operation using stop blocks.
NOTE: See the implement manual for drawbar

positioning.
RXA0186160—UN—29NOV21
2. Remove the front pivot pin retainer cap screws,
Move the drawbar to the desired position.
washers, and spacers (D). Remove the pivot pin
retainer (C). Install the stop blocks with the locking pins (D) in the
drawbar retaining stops.
3. Slide the drawbar (A) to the desired position.
Secure the locking pins in place with the spring retaining
4. Install the pivot pin retainer, spacers, washers, and
pins (C).
cap screws. Tighten the cap screws to 435 N·m (322
lb·ft). Stop blocks can be stored on the storage brackets (A)
when the drawbar is used in a full-swing position.
5. Install and tighten the drawbar locking bolts to 435
N·m (322 lb·ft). GH15097,0000642-19-28FEB22
Adjust Drabar Side-to-Side:

1. Remove the drawbar locking bolts. Install Drawbar or Quick-Attach in Short
2. Slide the drawbar to the desired position. Drawbar Support [Scraper]
3. Install a locking bolt against each side of the drawbar. Use the scraper drawbar when the scraper tongue
Tighten to 435 N·m (322 lb·ft). weight exceeds the design specifications of agricultural
tractor drawbar. The scraper drawbar is shorter, which
GH15097,0000640-19-16FEB22
minimizes the weight transfer to the rear axle. Follow
scraper recommendations for the drawbar installation.
60F-5
Drawbar
5. Install the front drawbar pin.

C
6. Tighten the drawbar locking bolts to 430 N·m (320
lb·ft).
B 7. Remove the locking pin (E) and lift the handle (F) to
operate the quick-attach drawbar.
A
IMPORTANT: Recheck locking bolt torque
specification.
8. Check and retighten the drawbar support bolts after

the first 10, 50, and 100 hours of scraper operation.
RXA0064878—UN—23JAN03 WTEFIAT,0000040-19-16FEB22
IMPORTANT: Adjust the hex bushings (C) when

installing the scraper drawbar.
Short Scraper Drawbar Conversion
NOTE: All four (4) locking bolts should be kept clean to
maintain maximum torque.
[Scraper]
Scraper drawbar support is designed to accept a larger
1. Loosen the drawbar locking bolts and bushings, drawbar and can be converted for use with a smaller
underside of support. scraper drawbar. Follow the scraper recommendations
for the drawbar installation.
2. Measure the width of the drawbar area (A) resting on
the drawbar support.
3. Rotate the bushings so that the distance (B) between
bushings is as close to the drawbar width as
possible.
RXA0082032—UN—05JUL05
RXA0142716—UN—21JUL14
Scraper Drawbar Support
RXA0082012—UN—05JUL05
Smaller Scraper Drawbar Support Setup
IMPORTANT: Adjust the hex bushings (C) when

installing the scraper drawbar.
NOTE: All four locking bolts must be kept clean to

RXA0148253—UN—29MAY15
Quick-Attach Drawbar
maintain maximum torque.
4. Slide the short drawbar or the quick-attach drawbar

(D) into support.
60F-6
Drawbar
● Inspect the tow cable and/or drawbar pin for

wear and replace when necessary.
● Attach the tow cable to the storage bracket
and keep tight, when not in use.
RXA0082010—UN—05JUL05
Larger Scraper Drawbar Support Setup
1. Loosen and remove the drawbar support cap screws

(A) and bushings (B).
2. Place the lower bushings on the cap screws with lock RXA0142715—UN—24JUN14
washers. Use the tow cable (A) to pull the tractor or tractor with
3. Reinstall the cap screws with lower bushings and scraper from soft or wet soil conditions.
upper bushings (D) to the drawbar support.
4. Measure the width of the drawbar area with the
drawbar resting on the drawbar support.
5. Rotate the bushings so the distance between
bushings is as close to the drawbar width as
possible.
6. Slide the drawbar into support.
7. Install the front drawbar pin.
8. Tighten the drawbar locking bolts to 430 N·m (320
lb·ft).
RXA0185286—UN—31AUG21
IMPORTANT: Recheck locking bolt torque Attach the tow cable to the drawbar support (B).
specification.
WTEFIAT,0000059-19-17FEB22
9. Check and retighten the drawbar support bolts after

the first 10, 50, and 100 hours of scraper operation.
WTEFIAT,000004A-19-16FEB22
Install and Use Clevis Assembly [Ag]
Tow Cable [Scraper]

IMPORTANT: Avoid possible tractor damage:
● Correctly use the tow cable by pulling from
the front of the tractor in a straight forward
direction.
● Keep the cable tight to limit cable side
movement and interference with the right
front wheel/track.
● Do not use the tow cable to hook the tractors RXA0141899—UN—05JUN14
in tandem to pull the draft load. Heavy-Duty Drawbar
● Pulling the tractor with the loaded equipment
can cause excessive strain on the drawbar Clevis assembly (C) must be attached ONLY to the top
support and is greatly increased by the of drawbar.
speed and rough ground conditions.
60F-7
Drawbar
Tighten the cap screws (A) to 750 N·m (553 lb·ft) and
(B) to 610 N·m (455 lb·ft). Keep the drawbar support, brace, hammer strap, and
the spacer block cap screws tight. Tighten to 610 N·m
Insert the pin only through the tractor drawbar if towed (450 lb·ft) if needed.
implement also has the clevis assembly.
GH15097,0000643-19-25FEB22
For maximum vertical static drawbar loads, see
Drawbar Load Limitations [Ag] in this Operator’s Manual
section.
GH15097,0000646-19-02MAR22
Category 5 Heavy-Duty Drawbar Load
Limitations [Ag] (If Equipped)
IMPORTANT: Heavy-duty drawbar support must be
used when the maximum static vertical load
exceeds 3400 kg (7500 lb).
RXA0074740—UN—03MAY04
Heavy-Duty Drawbar Support, 4990 kg (11000 lb) Capacity
RXA0098006—UN—06MAY08
Wide-Swing Drawbar Support, 4580 kg (10100 lb) Capacity
RXA0098007—UN—06MAY08
Wide-Swing Drawbar Support with High Capacity Support
Kit, 5440 kg (12000 lb) Capacity
60F-8
Hydraulics—General Information
Hydraulic System Overview 3.Start the tractor and allow the CommandCenter to
Hydraulics system provides lubrication, power and start completely.
control to many tractor subsystems. Transmission, 4.Shut off the engine and allow the CommandCenter to
steering, brakes, and hitch [Ag] are covered in other shut down completely.
sections of this Operator’s Manual. The next several 5.Reconnect the implement harness to the implement
sections deal with selective control valves, including connector.
adjustment, function, and connections as well as special
6.Start the engine and allow the CommandCenter to
control systems.
start completely.
TS36762,00002C7-19-23APR18
7.Operate the implement. If a DTC continues to
appears or the implement fails to respond to
commands, see your John Deere dealer.
Hydraulic Option Connector
WTEFIAT,0000076-19-12JUL22
RXA0187221—UN—08JUN22
Hydraulic option connector is located in the cab rear
panel of the tractor and is required when using the SCV
automation and feature mode functions. To access the
hydraulic option connector, see Remove Cab Rear
Panel in Service—General Information section of this
Operator's Manual.
When making the initial connection to this connector or
to the implement harness connection interface, the key
must be in the OFF position.
Use the hydraulic option connector with John Deere
applications such as:
● TouchSet Depth Control, see TouchSet Depth
Control Settings and Adjustments in TouchSet Depth
Control section of this Operator’s Manual.
● Laser Scraper Control, see Laser Scraper—Scrapers
Equipped with Scraper Control Unit in Laser Scraper
● AutoLoad, see Machine Settings Overview in
CommandCenter section of this Operator’s Manual.
Hydraulic Option Connector Reset Procedure:

If a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) occurs or the
automation feature does not function, perform the
hydraulic option connector reset procedure:
1.Shut off the engine and allow the CommandCenter to
shut down completely.
2.Disconnect the implement harness from the
implement connector, or disconnect the hydraulic
option connector.
70-1
Selective Control Valves
SCV Settings—Access
RXA0167075—UN—20MAR19
Menu
1. Menu
RXA0178901—UN—23JUL20
SCV Example
Items Accessible on SCV Main Page:
RXA0167076—UN—20MAR19
Machine Settings
2. Machine Settings tab RXA0173519—UN—06JAN20

SCV Tab Example
SCV Tabs — tabs display when there are more than

four SCVs. Only available SCVs display.
RXA0173516—UN—03JAN20
SCV
3. SCV
RXA0173515—UN—03JAN20
SCV
RXA0173523—UN—02JAN20
Standard Mode Example
Press SCV button on navigation bar below display.
KD34109,000057C-19-08DEC21 Standard Mode — set one detent time value and one
detent flow value for both extend and retract. See SCV
Settings—Standard Mode in this Operator’s Manual
SCV Settings section.
SCV application is used to access and adjust SCV
modes and settings for equipped SCVs.
NOTE: Display will depend on current mode of SCV and

number of SCVs available.
RXA0173504—UN—03JAN20
Independent Mode Example
Independent Mode — set different detent time and flow
70A-1
values for extend and retract. See SCV Settings— Other SCV Statuses:
Independent Mode in this Operator’s Manual section.
RXA0173494—UN—02JAN20
Flow Active Example
Flow Active — indicator will move with flow level. Fill

area between 0 point and indicator displays green.
RXA0173490—UN—02JAN20
Feature Mode Example
Feature Mode — detent time is controlled by RXA0173525—UN—02JAN20

implement. To enable, connect implement using Time Active Example
optional connector before turning on vehicle. See SCV
Settings—Feature Mode in this Operator’s Manual Time Active — yellow box displays during time
section. adjustment and when it is active.
RXA0173768—UN—13JAN20
RXA0173500—UN—03JAN20 Float
Hydraulic Flow Indicator
Float — cylinder is free to extend or retract, letting
Hydraulic Flow Indicator — indicates current flow and implement follow ground contour.
displays when SCV is selected, active, and oil is flowing.
RXA0173492—UN—02JAN20
Float Disabled
RXA0167071—UN—21MAR19 Float Disabled — if lever is in float position at engine

Advanced Settings start-up, float function will be disabled until lever is
cycled to neutral.
less common settings. See SCV Settings—Advanced in
Operate SCVs: RXA0173506—UN—03JAN20
Locked
Locked — SCV is locked.
RXA0173518—UN—06JAN20 RXA0173483—UN—02JAN20
SCV I Lever AUTO
SCV Control Lever Adjustments — SCV levers on the AUTO — AUTO mode is enabled and active.
CommandARM are used to adjust SCV flow. See SCV
Control Lever Adjustments in this Operator’s Manual
section. RXA0173484—UN—02JAN20
AUTO Disabled
AUTO Disabled — AUTO mode is ON but not active.

Run Page Modules
70A-2

NOTE: SCV assignment for module can be changed if RXA0173503—UN—03JAN20

accessing settings this way. See SCV Settings— Flow Tab
Assignment in this Operator’s Manual section.
Flow — select to adjust detent flow value for extend and
Example: retract. See SCV Settings—Flow Adjustment in this
KD34109,000057E-19-09JAN20
SCV Settings—Independent Mode

Set different detent time and flow values for extend and
retract. Enable independent mode in advanced settings.
RXA0173524—UN—02JAN20 See SCV Settings—Advanced in this Operator’s Manual
Standard Mode section.
Items Accessible in Independent Mode:
application.
Standard Mode — quick access to standard mode

module.
KD34109,0000618-19-08JUN22
SCV Settings—Standard Mode

Set one detent time value and one detent flow value for
both extend and retract.
Items Accessible in Standard Mode: RXA0173504—UN—03JAN20
Independent Mode Example
Independent Mode Example — items may change

based on status.
RXA0173529—UN—02JAN20
Time Retract Tab
Time Retract — select to adjust detent time retract

RXA0173523—UN—02JAN20 value. See SCV Settings—Time Adjustment in this
Standard Mode Example Operator’s Manual section.
Standard Mode Example — items may change based

on status.
RXA0173502—UN—03JAN20
Flow Retract Tab
RXA0173530—UN—02JAN20 Flow Retract — select to adjust detent flow retract

Time Tab value. See SCV Settings—Flow Adjustment in this
Time — select to adjust detent time value for extend
and retract. See SCV Settings—Time Adjustment in this
70A-3
RXA0173501—UN—03JAN20 RXA0173527—UN—02JAN20
Flow Extend Tab Time Tab Example
Flow Extend — select to adjust detent flow extend Time — controlled by implement and will be grayed out
value. See SCV Settings—Flow Adjustment in this since no adjustments can me made.
RXA0173503—UN—03JAN20
RXA0173528—UN—02JAN20
Flow Tab Example
Time Extend Tab
Flow — select to adjust detent flow value for extend and
Time Extend — select to adjust detent time extend retract. See SCV Settings—Flow Adjustment in this
value. See SCV Settings—Time Adjustment in this Operator’s Manual section.
KD34109,000057F-19-10JAN20
RXA0173485—UN—02JAN20
SCV Settings—Feature Mode Automation Tab
NOTE: See Hydraulic Option Connector in Hydraulics—

General Information section of this Operator’s NOTE: Not available for AutoLoad.
Manual.
Automation — enable/disable feature mode. See SCV
Feature mode allows the implement to control the Settings—Automation in this Operator’s Manual section.
application. To enable, connect a feature mode KD34109,0000580-19-12JUL22
compatible implement using the hydraulic option
connector before turning on the vehicle. When
connected through ISOBUS or an implement connector,
SCVs automatically enter feature mode and a page SCV Settings—Flow Adjustment
displays with the feature options. Adjust amount of SCV flow based on demand. For
information on approximate SCV flow output settings
Items Accessible in Feature Mode: and available pump flow, see Total SCV Flow in this
RXA0173490—UN—02JAN20
Feature Mode Example
Feature Mode Example — items may change based on

status.
RXA0173495—UN—02JAN20
Adjust Flow
NOTE: Tab appearance and quantity will vary since
feature mode is used in combination with standard
and independent modes. NOTE: Flow adjustment is from 0.04 to10. Selecting (+)
increases flow in increments of 0.04 and (++)
increases flow in increments of 1.00. Selecting (-)
or (--) decreases flow by the same increments.
70A-4
Select (+/++) to increase or (-/--) to decrease flow. Value Procedure to Modify:

is shown in display box.
RXA0173499—UN—03JAN20
Flow Gauge
RXA0173526—UN—02JAN20
Flow setting also displays on flow gauge. Adjust Time
NOTE: Time adjustment is from 0 seconds to C for

continuous flow. Time increases by 1 second
RXA0167129—UN—25MAR19 increments up to 10 seconds, then in 2 second
Close increments up to 20, then 5 second increments up
to 30, then 10 second increments up to 60, then 30
Select to close. second increments up to 120, then by 60 second
increments up to C.
Items Accessible for TouchSet Depth Control:
Select (+) to increase or (-) to decrease time. Value is
RXA0173521—UN—06JAN20 shown in display box.
Set Point Indicator
RXA0173522—UN—06JAN20
Set Upper Point
RXA0173525—UN—02JAN20
Upper Set Point — select upper SET key to set a Time Setting
frequently used height that can be recalled. Set point is
displayed by upper yellow indicator. Time setting also displays under flow gauge. A yellow
box displays around the time while adjustment is taking
place.
RXA0173521—UN—06JAN20
Set Point Indicator
RXA0173520—UN—06JAN20
Set Lower Point
RXA0167129—UN—25MAR19
Close
Lower Set Point — select lower SET key to set a
frequently used depth that can be recalled. Set point is Select to close.
displayed by lower yellow indicator.
KD34109,0000583-19-06FEB20
RXA0173500—UN—03JAN20
Position Indicator SCV Settings—Advanced
Advanced settings allow you to access further
Position Indicator — displays current implement adjustments and less common settings.
position.
KD34109,0000582-19-20JUN22 NOTE: Some items only display if machine is equipped
with the associated options.

SCV Settings—Time Adjustment
Adjust amount of time operation of attached implement
will run.
70A-5
SCV Settings—Activating Independent

Mode
Allows you to set different detent time and flow values
for extend and retract. Independent mode is enabled/
disabled for each SCV separately.
NOTE: Only available SCVs display.
RXA0167187—UN—22MAR19
RXA0173517—UN—03JAN20 ON/OFF
SCV Independent Mode Example
Independent Mode — select ON to enable or OFF to

SCV Independent Mode — turn independent mode ON disable.
or OFF for each SCV. See SCV Settings—Activating
Independent Mode in this Operator’s Manual section. KD34109,0000581-19-11FEB20
SCV Settings—Automation
NOTE: See Hydraulic Option Connector in Hydraulics—
Manual.
Automation allows you to enable/disable the SCV

RXA0173496—UN—02JAN20
adjustments in feature mode. When disabled, SCV
Flow Adjustment Sensitivity
displays adjustments for either standard mode or
independent mode, whichever the SCV is set to.
Flow Adjustment Sensitivity — select the desired flow
response curve for the SCV control lever and joystick. Procedure to Modify:
See SCV Settings—Flow Adjustment Sensitivity in this
RXA0167187—UN—22MAR19
ON/OFF
RXA0167187—UN—22MAR19
ON/OFF Auto Mode — select ON to enable or OFF to disable.
KD34109,0000584-19-10JUN22
Loader Mode — prevents unwanted loader movement
by ignoring the SCV flow and time settings. Select ON to
enable or OFF to disable.
SCV Settings—Assignment
Reassign an SCV run page module to a different SCV.
NOTE: Only accessible from run page module.

RXA0167187—UN—22MAR19
ON/OFF
Flow Sharing — reduces flow to non-critical functions,
ensuring priority flow to critical functions. Select ON to
enable or OFF to disable. See Flow Sharing in this
RXA0173514—UN—03JAN20
KD34109,0000587-19-03FEB20 SCV Assignment Tab
1. Select SCV Assignment tab.
70A-6
less than that traveled by the SCV control lever/

joystick lever (giving a more sensitive start to the
RXA0173512—UN—03JAN20 movement).
Assigned SCV Box
2. Select Assigned SCV box.

RXA0173487—UN—02JAN20
Combination
● Combination — an intermediate stage between

linear and progressive.
RXA0173508—UN—03JAN20
OK
Select OK to exit and save changes.
RXA0173513—UN—03JAN20
SCV List RXA0173486—UN—02JAN20
Cancel
3. Select desired SCV from list.
Select Cancel to exit without saving changes.
KD34109,0000588-19-03FEB20
RXA0167129—UN—25MAR19
Close
SCV Settings—Flow Assist
4. Select to close. Flow Assist automatically adjusts engine speed, while
maintaining constant wheel speed in order to meet
KD34109,0000585-19-14JAN20
pump flow demand for all hydraulic functions. Engine
speed operator limits are followed (including the throttle
position as the upper limit).
SCV Settings—Flow Adjustment Sensitivity Hydraulic flow demand includes (but is not limited to):
● SCV
● Hitch
RXA0173498—UN—02JAN20 RXA0173497—UN—02JAN20 ● Steering
SCV Control Lever Joystick Adjustment
Adjustment ● Power Beyond
1. Select the box to set the desired response curve for Flow Assist can be enabled/disabled in Full AUTO and
the SCV control lever or the joystick. Custom transmission modes.
2. Select one of the following response curves: In these modes, engine speed and transmission gear
are also automatically adjusted based on:
● Load
RXA0173505—UN—03JAN20 ● Commanded wheel speed
Linear
KD34109,00005DF-19-19APR21
● Linear — the flow rate of the SCV corresponds to
the distance traveled by the SCV control lever/
joystick lever.
SCV Control Lever Adjustments
CAUTION: Avoid personal injury or machine
RXA0173509—UN—03JAN20 damage:
Progressive
● Ensure that hoses are not reversed. If hoses
● Progressive — initially, the flow rate of the SCV is
70A-7
are reversed, cylinder extends when it

should retract.
● To prevent unintentional implement
movement, shut off engine, move SCV
control levers to neutral position, and press
SCV lock button before attaching implement.
For lock button identification, see
CommandARM Controls—Left Side in RXA0173510—UN—03JAN20
CommandARM Controls section of this Retract
Operator's Manual.
● SCV does not disengage when operator Retract — operator-controlled variable flow to retract
leaves seat. For more information, see cylinder. Oil flows at a rate that varies depending on how
Operator Presence Sensor in Seats section far lever is moved. Slowest oil flow is when lever is
of this Operator’s Manual. closest to neutral position. Lever is returned to neutral
position when released.
SCV control levers on the CommandARM allow you to
make adjustments to the SCV flow. For more
information on SCV levers, see CommandARM SCV
Control Levers in CommandARM Controls section of
NOTE: SCV control levers can be reconfigured to

control tractor functions and implements. See
Controls Setup in CommandCenter section of this RXA0173489—UN—02JAN20
Operator’s Manual. Extend Detent
SCV Control Lever Adjustments: Extend Detent — timed flow to extend cylinder based
on time and flow detent settings. Lever returns to neutral
position, but flow continues at flow detent setting rate
until detent time setting has elapsed.
RXA0173507—UN—03JAN20
Neutral
NOTE: SCV control lever should be in neutral position at RXA0173511—UN—03JAN20

tractor start-up. Retract Detent
Neutral — flow continues until timed detent expires. If Retract Detent — timed flow to retract cylinder based
no timed detent is commanded, flow is turned off. on time and flow detent settings. Lever returns to neutral
position, but flow continues at flow detent setting rate
until detent time setting has elapsed.
RXA0173488—UN—02JAN20
Extend RXA0173491—UN—02JAN20
Float
Extend — operator controlled variable flow to extend
cylinder. Oil flows at a rate that varies depending on how NOTE: If lever is in float position at engine start-up, float
far lever is moved. Slowest oil flow is when lever is function will be disabled until lever is cycled to
closest to neutral position. Lever is returned to neutral neutral.
position when released.
70A-8
To relieve hydraulic pressure in implement, move - Decrease flow setting on noncritical functions.
lever to float position while engine is running. - Convert implement open center valves to
closed center operation, if equipped.
Float — SCV opens to allow free flow of oil from head-
NOTE: Flow measurements made without steering or
to-rod end of implement hydraulic cylinder, allowing
hitch being used.
implement to follow ground contour. Lever and SCV
remain in float position until lever is manually returned to
neutral. Cycle cylinder fully in both directions after being
Pump Flow (Approximate)a
used in float position to ensure that cylinder is filled with L/min (gal/min)
oil. Float can be used to allow hydraulic cylinders to Pump
coast when shutting down implement. Engine rpm
85 cc 85 cc + 85 cc
KD34109,0000589-19-20JUN22 1000 100.9 (27) 201.8 (53)
1500 151.4 (40) 302.8 (80)
2000 201.8 (53) 403.7 (106)
Total SCV Flow 2100 211.9 (56) 423.9 (112)
a
1. Check flow setting for each function independently. Typical flows were taken from new tractors. Component wear may
For correct motor flow settings, refer to the cause slightly lower values. More than one SCV is needed to achieve
full flow at each rpm listed.
implement Operator's Manual.
The following may cause pump to operate at high
pressure: Power Beyond Maximum Flow
● Down-pressure systems (drills, air seeders, disks) Coupler L/min (gal/min)
— can be considered to be zero flow demand after 1/2-Inch 132 (35)
completion of raise or lower cycle. For more 3/4-Inch 211.9 (56)
information, see implement connection examples
in Hydraulic Connections section of this
● Auxiliary flow control valves (vacuum flow control) SCV Flow (Approximate)a
L/min (gal/min)
— open the implement flow control valve and
adjust tractor flow rate to desired setting. For more Standard-Flow SCV High-Flow SCV
SCV Flow Settings
1/2-Inch Couplerb 3/4-Inch Couplerc
information, see implement connection examples
in Hydraulic Connections section of this 0.04d — —
Operator’s Manual. 1.0 1.9 (0.5)e 4.3 (1.1)
● Cylinder functions where line or orifice restrictions 2.0 6.1 (1.6) 11.3 (3.0)
control flow — adjust the tractor flow control to 3.0 13.6 (3.6) 19.4 (5.1)
point where function speed begins to decrease. 4.0 20.4 (5.4) 27.6 (7.3)
● Auxiliary control valves (implement stack valves, 5.0 28.0 (7.4) 35.2 (9.3)
row guidance) — adjust the tractor flow control to 6.0 40.9 (10.8) 49.9 (12.4)
lowest setting that results in correct operation. 7.0 62.1 (16.4) 72.0 (19.0)
8.0 81.4 (21.5) 95.3 (25.2)
2. Determine total flow demand by adding flow 9.0 107.1 (28.3) 118.6 (31.4)
requirements for each SCV using settings
10.0 132.0 (35.0) 159.0 (42.0)
determined in Step 1. Include hitch and power a
beyond flow requirements if applicable (refer to SCV At 2000 rpm and 454 kg (1000 lb) of load at point-of-use.
b
85 cc pump.
flow chart for settings based on approximate flow c
85 cc and 85 cc pumps.
output). d
Minimum flow setting.
e
Observed under no load.
3. Determine if flow demand exceeds available pump
flow (refer to SCV pump flow chart for approximate
available pump flow). Hitch Cylinder Diameter Hitch Flow [Ag]
If flow demand: mm L/min (gal/min)
90/100 71 (18.7)
● Is less than available pump flow but has 120/120 88 (23.2)
performance concern, see your John Deere
dealer.
KD34109,0000586-19-06MAY21
● Exceeds pump flow:
- Increase engine rpm if possible.
70A-9
Flow Sharing 6. If implement functions remain slow, see your John

To maintain productivity, hydraulic flow sharing reduces Deere dealer.
flow to non-critical SCV functions, ensuring priority flow KD34109,000057B-19-08JUN22
to critical SCV functions. To enable or disable flow
sharing, see SCV Settings—Advanced in this
NOTE: Continuous setting receives priority over timed

detent. If all SCVs are set to C (continuous) and
requested flow is exceeded, flow is equally reduced
to all SCVs to ensure that all functions are still
active.
For Maximum Performance:

● Properly connect SCVs and implement according to
● If implement Operator's Manual is unavailable, refer
to appropriate hydraulic connection example in
Hydraulic Connections section of this Operator’s
Manual. On agricultural tractors equipped with high-
flow hydraulics, SCVs can be supplied by different
pumps. For more information, see Connecting
Implements to High-Flow Hydraulic SCVs [AG] in
Hydraulic Connections section of this Operator’s
Manual.
● Make sure SCV flow settings match flow
requirements for function. For more information, see
Total SCV Flow in this Operator’s Manual section.
● Setting detent time (recommendation in implement
Operator's Manual) slightly longer than needed is
preferred. However, setting time much longer than
necessary or to C (continuous) could result in
activation of flow sharing and excess fuel burn.
If implement functions operate slower than expected,

perform flow sharing diagnostic procedure.
Flow Sharing Diagnostic Procedure:
1. Check all connections for proper hookup. Whenever
possible, connect return connections to SCV return
ports or power beyond return port.
2. For every SCV set to C (continuous) flow, adjust the
flow rate to be the lowest rate possible for optimal
implement operation. Not all functions require
continuous flow, and timed SCVs set too long can
lead to flow sharing if they overlap with continuous
flow SCVs.
3. Hydraulic flow is engine speed dependent. If a
function is slow, increase engine rpm to increase
flow.
4. Adjust flow first and then timed detent SCVs (as
necessary from observation) to provide proper
implement function.
5. On high-flow hydraulic system equipped tractors, try
to balance hydraulic loading between the two
circuits.
70A-10
Hydraulic Connections
Connect/Disconnect Hydraulic Hoses Steam cleaning or using a high pressure
CAUTION: Escaping fluid under pressure can washer in the area around the SCV connections
penetrate the skin causing serious injury. and electronics can damage equipment. Keep a
minimum distance of 200 mm (8 in) between the
● Avoid injury, always: pressure washer nozzle and hydraulic
- Protect the hands and body from high- connections for any pressure washer
pressure fluids. exceeding 6895 kPa (69 bar) (1000 psi).
- Inspect hydraulic hoses periodically – at
least once per year – for damage. SCV Coupler Component Identification and
Signs of wear or damage include, but are not Location
limited to, leakage, kinking, cuts, cracks,
abrasion, blisters, corrosion, and exposed
wire braid.
Replace worn or damaged hose assemblies
immediately with John Deere approved
replacement parts.
- Tighten all connections before applying
pressure.
- Ensure that all connected lines are as
straight as possible.
- Search for leaks with a piece of cardboard.
- Relieve pressure from the hydraulic system RXA0177992—UN—22JUN20
before disconnecting a hydraulic line or A—Extend Port

B—Retract Port
other lines. C—Coupler Identification Plate—Extend Port
● If an accident occurs, see a doctor D—Coupler Identification Plate—Retract Port
E—Remote Cylinder Coupler Identification
immediately. Any fluid injected into the skin F—SCV Hydraulic Hose Release Lever
must be surgically removed within a few
hours or gangrene can result. Doctors
unfamiliar with this type of injury should NOTE: Remote cylinder couplers are designated I
reference a knowledgeable medical source. through VIII (E) with I being the bottom coupler.
Such information is available in English from Verify that the remote hydraulic hoses are
Deere & Company Medical Department in connected to the correct SCV couplers to ensure
Moline, Illinois, U.S.A., by calling 1-800-822- desired system control operation.
8262 or +1 309-748-5636.
Connect Hydraulic Hoses
Unintentional implement movement can cause
injury. To avoid injury, before attaching or 1. From within the cab, lock out the SCV controls.
detaching hydraulic hoses, always engage the: 2. From outside the cab:
● SCV control lever lock. See CommandARM
a. Before connecting the hydraulic hoses,
SCV Control Levers in the CommandARM
determine:
Controls section of this Operator’s Manual.
● Joystick lock (If Equipped). See Operate 1. If the symbols on the coupler identification
SCVs with CommandARM Joystick in the plate (C) or (D) indicating cylinder movement,
Selective Control Valves section of this match the desired cylinder travel direction.
Operator’s Manual. 2. The desired SCV connection based on
whether the implement uses single-acting or
IMPORTANT: Dirt, dust, or other foreign material can double-acting cylinders. For:
damage the hydraulic system. Avoid damage to
the hydraulic system and thoroughly clean - Single-acting cylinders, use the extend (A)
hydraulic hoses and hose ends, and SCVs port.
before connecting an implement. - Double-acting cylinders, use the extend
(A) and retract (B) ports.
b. To connect the hydraulic hose to the SCV:
1. Clean the dust covers/caps.
2. Rotate up or remove the dust covers to
expose the SCV couplers.
70B-1
3. Push the hydraulic coupler sleeve forward. (If 4. Recheck the oil level when the implement is
Equipped) removed.
4. Push the hydraulic hose firmly into the SCV 5. Add or remove hydraulic oil as necessary. If the oil
coupler. must be drained, see Hydraulic System Oil and
5. Pull the hydraulic coupler sleeve backward to Filters in the Service—Change section of this
lock the house coupler into the receptacle. (If Operator’s Manual.
Equipped) EC82310,0000EF4-19-02SEP21
Disconnect Hydraulic Hoses

1. From within the cab: Using Load-Sensing Hydraulic System—
a. Start the tractor. Power-Beyond
b. Use the appropriate SCV lever to lower the Power-beyond is used as a pressure/flow source for
implement to the ground. auxiliary functions equipped with independent flow
control valves. Use power-beyond when:
c. Relieve the hydraulic pressure in hoses by
moving the SCV control lever or joystick (If ● Tractor SCV control is not needed.
Equipped) to the float position for a few ● No other SCV outlet is available.
seconds.
d. Lock out the SCV controls. Power-beyond functions require a "load-sense" signal to
regulate pump pressure, therefore, a "load-sense"
e. Shut off the tractor. hydraulic line is used. Certain equipment can require
2. From outside the cab: modification. See your John Deere dealer.
a. Push the SCV hose release lever (F) down Component Identification
slightly to relieve any pressure buildup of
trapped oil.
b. Remove the hoses from the SCV couplers.
c. Clean the SCV coupler area.
d. Rotate down or replace the dust covers to
protect the SCV couplers.
EC82310,0000EF3-19-20JUN22
RXA0177993—UN—20MAY20
Implements Requiring Large Volumes of Power-Beyond Coupler—Mid/Upper
Hydraulic Oil
A— Pressure Coupler
IMPORTANT: Avoid damage to the hydraulic B— Load Sense Coupler
C— Return Coupler (Motor Return)
system:
● Lower the implement to the ground to return
most of the oil to the reservoir during the
checking procedure.
● Never add hydraulic oil to reservoir with
engine running as doing so can cause the
hydraulic reservoir to overflow.
● Do not overfill the hydraulic reservoir.
1. Cycle all the implement cylinders after starting the

tractor.
2. Lower the implement to the ground to return the most
oil to the reservoir.
3. Check the hydraulic oil level at the transmission-
hydraulic oil sight gauge. See Hydraulic System Oil
Level in the Service—Check section of this RXA0179032—UN—06AUG20
Operator’s Manual. Power-Beyond Coupler—Hitch Casting
70B-2
Example 3
B— Load Sense Coupler
D
Example 1
A
NOTE: Example 1 is the preferred practice. E
B
C
D
A RXA0177996—UN—20MAY20
E B— Load Sense Coupler
B C— Return Coupler (Motor Return)
D— Control Valve
C E— Cylinder
IMPORTANT: System will maintain a maximum

RXA0177994—UN—20MAY20 pressure of 20000 kPa (200 bar) (2900 psi) as
B— Load Sense Coupler long as power-beyond hoses are connected.
D— Control Valve Control valve directs oil into extend or retract circuits,
E— Cylinder either requiring high pressure. Connect load-sense line
Control valves with a load-sense provide a load-sense to pressure line before control valve. An example is a
signal to hydraulic system and can be operated folding implement, where pressure is needed to extend
manually or by solenoids. or retract cylinders.
Example 2 Example 4
F G
D
A
A
E
B
H
C B
RXA0177995—UN—20MAY20
A— Pressure Coupler C
B— Load Sense Coupler
RXA0138270—UN—17JAN14
A— Pressure Line
D— Control Valve
B— Return Line
E— Cylinder
C— Load-Sense Line
F— Pressure-Compensated Flow Valve
IMPORTANT: Circuit allows cylinder "leak-down" G— Hydraulic Motor
H— Motor Case Drain (Sump Line)
through load-sense line (C). If leakage is not
acceptable for operation, use Example 3.
NOTE: Motor speed can fluctuate when other functions
Control valve directs oil into extend or retract circuits. cause system pressure change. Minimize
Connect load-sense line to circuit requiring pressure. An fluctuations by installing a pressure-compensated
example is a trailer lift cylinder with load supported by flow control valve.
mechanical stops in full down position. Load-sense For Ag high flow, it is recommended that the
signals pump when increased pressure is needed. hydraulic motor be connected to the top SCVs (85
Pressure remains low when load is supported by cc high flow pump).
mechanical stops.
High-flow scraper hydraulics is not recommended
for motor application.
Pressure-compensated flow control valve is used to
70B-3
regulate hydraulic motor speed. Connect load-sense

line to pressure line after control valve.
EC82310,0000EF5-19-28APR22
Component Identification and Location

[Ag]
SCVs are color coded for easier identification. Hose
identification kits are available from your John Deere
dealer.
SCV Numbers and Corresponding Colors

SCV RXA0178744—UN—16JUL20
Component Identification and Location [Ag]—Standard Flow
Number Color with Power-Beyond in Hitch Casting
I Green
II Blue A—Extend Coupler (3 used)
B—Retract Coupler (3 used)
III Brown
C—Power-Beyond: Pressure Coupler
IV Black D—Power-Beyond: Load Sense Coupler
V Violet E—Power-Beyond: Return Coupler (Motor Return)
VI Gray
VII White
VIII Light Green
Standard Flow Hydraulics
RXA0187065—UN—13APR22
Component Identification and Location [Ag]—Standard
Flow: (F) Sump Coupler—Motor Case Drain
F—Sump Coupler (Motor Case Drain)
RXA0177997—UN—20MAY20
1/2 inch SCVs VII and VIII are only available as field
Component Identification and Location [Ag]—Standard Flow installation kits.
with Power-Beyond in Upper Location
High-Flow Hydraulics
A—Extend Coupler (5 used)
B—Retract Coupler (5 used)
D—Power-Beyond: Load Sense Coupler
E—Power-Beyond: Return Coupler (Motor Return)
RXA0178141—UN—10JUN20
High-Flow SCV with Couplers I—VI
A1—Extend Coupler (Primary Hydraulic Pump) (3 used)
70B-4
A2—Extend Coupler (Secondary Hydraulic Pump) (3 used) - IV—VI (A2, B2) (If Equipped) are supplied by the
B1—Retract Coupler (Primary Hydraulic Pump) (3 used) secondary pump. These SCVs are recommended
B2—Retract Coupler (Secondary Hydraulic Pump) (3 used)
for orbital motor use.
D—Power-Beyond: Load Sense Coupler ● Eight SCVs:
E—Power-Beyond: Return Coupler (Motor Return)
- I-IV (A1, B1) are supplied by the primary pump.
- V-VIII (A2, B2) are supplied by the secondary
pump. These SCVs are recommended for an
orbital motor or air seeder use.
- VII—VIII. A tractor equipped with SCVs VII and
VIII is also equipped with Intelligent Power
Management (IPM). If an air seeder is connected
to SCV VI—VIII, follow the guidelines found in the
air seeder operators manual (example: John
Deere 1870 or 1895 Air Seeder). See Drivetrain
Protection in the Drivetrain section of this
Connecting Implements to High-Flow Hydraulics
SCVs
RXA0178746—UN—17NOV20
High-Flow SCV with Couplers I-VIII

A2—Extend Coupler (Secondary Hydraulic Pump) (4 used)
B1—Retract Coupler (Primary Hydraulic Pump) (4 used)
C1—Power-Beyond: Pressure Coupler (Primary Hydraulic Pump)
D1—Power-Beyond: Load Sense Coupler (Primary Hydraulic
Pump)
E1—Power-Beyond: Return Coupler (Motor Return) (Primary
Hydraulic Pump)
E2—Power-Beyond: Return Coupler (Motor Return) (Secondary
Hydraulic Pump) (2 used)
RXA0178144—UN—17JUN20
High Flow Hydraulic SCV Stack—Five SCVs with Power-
Beyond in Upper Location

A2—Extend Coupler (Secondary Hydraulic Pump) (2 used)
C2—Power-Beyond: Pressure Coupler (Secondary Hydraulic
Pump)
Pump)
RXA0187065—UN—13APR22 D2—Power-Beyond: Load Sense Coupler (Secondary Hydraulic
Component Identification and Location [Ag]—High-Flow Pump)
Hydraulics: (F) Sump Coupler—Motor Case Drain E1—Power-Beyond: Return Coupler (Motor Return) (Primary
Hydraulic Pump)
F—Sump Coupler (Motor Case Drain) E2—Power-Beyond: Return Coupler (Motor Return) (Secondary
Hydraulic Pump)
For high-flow hydraulic systems with:
● Six SCVs:
- I—III (A1, B1) are supplied by the primary pump.
70B-5
The high-flow hydraulic system utilizes two pumps. The

pumps consist of a:
1. Primary hydraulic pump supplying SCVs (A1) and
(B1). The primary pump is recommended for high
pressure and low flow functions, such as air seeders,
large cylinders, and active down force systems.
2. Secondary hydraulic pump supplying SCVs (A2) and
(B2). Secondary hydraulic pump is recommended for
low pressure and high flow functions. Most hydraulic
motors use 19—26.5 L/min (5—7 gal/min) per motor
and a pressure of around 1450 psi (100 bar) to
operate. The secondary hydraulic pump can:
a. Operate hydraulic motors such as air seeders,
sprayers, and vacuum planters. Using the
secondary hydraulic pump when operating
hydraulic motors:
● Can improve fuel economy, reduce power
loss, and reduce heating of hydraulic oil.
● Reduces hydraulic system interactions with
RXA0178746—UN—17NOV20 steering, brakes, raise, lower, active down
High Flow Hydraulic SCV Stack—Eight SCVs with Power-
Beyond in Hitch Casting force, and so forth.
A1—Extend Coupler (Primary Hydraulic Pump) (4 used) b. Provide high pressure to the same functions as
A2—Extend Coupler (Secondary Hydraulic Pump) (4 used) the primary hydraulic pump, however:
B2—Retract Coupler (Secondary Hydraulic Pump) (4 used) ● The benefits of the improved fuel economy
C1—Power-Beyond: Pressure Coupler (Primary Hydraulic Pump) and reduced power loss disappear.
Pump) ● There is an increased chance of system
E1—Power-Beyond: Return Coupler (Motor Return) (Primary interactions with hydraulic motors being on
Hydraulic Pump) the same pump as other hydraulic functions
E2—Power-Beyond: Return Coupler (Motor Return) (Secondary which typically means increased vacuum
level or blower motor speed fluctuations.
● Under some conditions, more heat can be
generated which places increased load on
the cooling system.
RXA0187065—UN—13APR22
Component Identification and Location [Ag]—High-Flow
Hydraulics: (F) Sump Coupler—Motor Case Drain
IMPORTANT: Avoid damage to the hydraulic and

cooling systems due to overheating. Ensure
that the implement is properly connected to the
hydraulic system.
This system is not recommended for high-flow
scraper hydraulics.
70B-6
Connecting Implements to Air Seeder Special High- - Hydraulic motor supply to the secondary
Flow Hydraulics SCVs hydraulic pump SCVs (A2) and (B2).
- Hydraulic motor return coupler to a Power-
Beyond return coupler connection (E2).
● It is not recommended to connect scraper
hydraulic systems to the high-flow SCVs.
The high-flow hydraulic system utilizes two pumps:

● Primary hydraulic pump supplying SCVs (A1) and
(B1).
● Secondary hydraulic pump supplying SCVs (A2) and
(B2).
Primary Hydraulic Pumps SCVs

Use these SCVs for high pressure and low flow
functions, such as large cylinders and active down force
systems.
Secondary Hydraulic Pump SCVs
Use these SCVs for low pressure and high flow
functions, such as hydraulic motor operation associated
with air seeders, sprayers, and vacuum planters.
RXA0178746—UN—17NOV20
High-Flow Hydraulic SCV Stack Operating hydraulic motors through the secondary
hydraulic pump:
A2—Extend Coupler (Secondary Hydraulic Pump) (4 used) ● Reduces hydraulic system interactions with steering
B1—Retract Coupler (Primary Hydraulic Pump) (4 used) and brakes, raise and lower functions, and active
down force.
D1—Power-Beyond: Load Sense Coupler (Primary Hydraulic ● Improves fuel economy, decreases power loss, and
Pump) reduces heating of hydraulic oil.
E1—Power-Beyond: Return Coupler (Motor Return) (Primary
Hydraulic Pump)
EC82310,0000EF7-19-01JUN22
E2—Power-Beyond: Return Coupler (Motor Return) (Secondary
Using Hydraulic Spray Pumps [Ag]

IMPORTANT: For motors using the SCV pressure
and return couplers, avoid damage to the
hydraulic system pump seals due to high-
pressure oil trapped between the SCV and the
pump. To stop the pump:
● Always move the SCV lever to the float
position, which allows the motor to coast to
a stop.
● Never move the SCV lever to the neutral
position as this action can cause the motor
RXA0187065—UN—13APR22
Component Identification and Location [Ag]—High-Flow to stop abruptly.
Hydraulics: (F) Sump Coupler—Motor Case Drain
NOTE: Connecting the hydraulic motor to the 85 cc
high-flow pump is the preferred method of
connection.
IMPORTANT: Avoid hydraulic and cooling system
overheating. Ensure that the implement is 1. Follow the recommendations provided by the spray
correctly connected to the hydraulic system. pump manufacturer for pump model selection, setup,
● Recommended setup for high-flow and operation.
agriculture applications, connect the:
70B-7
● Use SCV:
E
C - III, IV, or V for a standard hydraulic system.
- III or IV for a high-flow hydraulic system with a
hitch.
A - IV or V for a high-flow hydraulic system without
a hitch.
3. Connect the return line to the Power-Beyond return
coupler.
B IMPORTANT: Some motors are not equipped with

D
over-speed protection. Extended operation
RXA0178001—UN—20MAY20
above the recommended speed can cause
Spray Pump (Without Hitch)
failure.
A—Pressure Line
B—Return Line 4. Activate the SCV by:
C—Inlet Line Orifice (Remove)
D—Power-Beyond Return Coupler—Motor Return a. Moving the SCV lever forward to the retract
E—Needle Valve (Closed) detent position.
2. Connect the motor pressure line to the retract port of b. Adjusting the hydraulic flow rate to the pump
the SCV (right-hand side). manufacturers guidelines.
In general: 5. Shut off the spray pump by moving the SCV control
lever to the float position (full forward and down).
● Select the smallest displacement motor
recommended for multiple hydraulic function EC82310,0000EF6-19-04AUG20
operation. The smaller displacement lowers total

hydraulic flow demand and improve overall
system performance.
Implement Connection Example [Ag]: Closed Center Valve and Pump at High Pressure—
Less Hitch
RXA0185747—UN—02NOV21
70B-8
1—Standard-Flow E—Power-Beyond Return Coupler—Motor Return

2—High-Flow F—Raise/Lower Cylinder
A—Extend Coupler Line G—Marker Cylinder (2 used)
B—Retract Coupler Line H—Folding Cylinder (2 used)
C—Pressure Line I—Hydraulic Motor
D—Return Line
In this application:
IMPORTANT: To avoid damage to the hydraulic
● The hydraulic return coupler is routed to the Power-
system seals due to the incorrect positioning of
Beyond return port.
the SCV levers after the hydraulic motor is
shutoff: ● The hydraulic motor receives pressure oil from the
SCV retract port.
position, which allows the motor to coast to ● If the hydraulic oil return hose is:
a stop.
- Connected to the Power-Beyond port, a special
● Never move the SCV lever to the neutral return hose tip is not required.
- Not connected to the Power-Beyond port, use a
to stop abruptly.
special return hose tip to connect the hydraulic oil
return to any of the left-hand side SCV couplers.
NOTE: Connecting the hydraulic motor to the secondary EC82310,0000EF8-19-10MAY22
connection.
Implement Connection Example [Ag]: Planter with Vacuum Motor and Return Line to SCV
Using Motor Return Tip
RXA0185748—UN—10NOV21
1—Standard-Flow D—Return Line

2—High-Flow E—Flow Control Valve
A—Extend Coupler Line F—Vacuum Motor
B—Retract Coupler Line G—Marker Cylinder (2 used)
C—Pressure Line H—Folding Cylinder (2 used)
70B-9
Avoid damage to the hydraulic system seals

IMPORTANT: Avoid damage to the hydraulic oil. If due to high-pressure hydraulic return oil
the ambient air temperature is high, hydraulic moving back toward the motor through the SCV
oil can overheat when the hydraulic pump connection. The installation of a special return
operates at the maximum pressure. hose tip with a check valve is required.
● Flow control valve controls the flow with
standard-flow hydraulics. NOTE: Connecting the hydraulic motor to the secondary
● Valve is used to control the oil flow with high- high-flow pump is the preferred method of
flow hydraulics. connection.
Avoid damage to the hydraulic system seals In this application:

due to the incorrect positioning of the SCV ● A vacuum motor, similar to a planter blower, receives
levers after the hydraulic motor is shutoff: the pressure oil from the SCV retract coupler.
● Always move the SCV lever to the float ● If using an SCV to control the flow to the vacuum
position, which allows the motor to coast to motor, use the SCV panel for standard-flow or high-
a stop. flow hydraulics. If the planter is equipped with a flow
● Never move the SCV lever to the neutral control valve on the vacuum motor, it needs to be in
position as this action can cause the motor the wide-open position.
to stop abruptly.
EC82310,0000EFB-19-10MAY22
Implement Connection Example [Ag]: Planter with Vacuum Motor and Return Line to Motor
Return—With Hitch and Implement Lift Assist
RXA0185977—UN—10NOV21
1—Standard-Flow E—Flow Control Valve

2—High-Flow F—Vacuum Motor
A—Extend Coupler Line G—Marker Cylinder (2 used)
B—Retract Coupler Line H—Folding Cylinder (2 used)
C—Pressure Line I—Implement Lift Assist
D—Return Line (Power-Beyond Return Coupler—Motor Return) J—T-Fitting and Hydraulic Hose
70B-10
NOTE: Connecting the hydraulic motor to the secondary

L connection.
In this application, the:

● Vacuum motor receives pressure oil from the SCV
retract coupler.
● Flow control valve is:
K - Set in a wide-open position.
- Controlled by the tractor panel.
● Return oil is routed to the Power-Beyond return port.
RXA0178005—UN—20MAY20
K—9-Pin Implement Connector ● Return hose can be connected directly to the left-
L—9-Pin Connector for TouchSet Depth Control hand side of coupler three. For:
- Standard-flow hydraulics equipped with a special
IMPORTANT: Avoid damage to the hydraulic oil. If return hose tip.
the ambient air temperature is high, hydraulic - High-flow hydraulics equipped with a special
oil can overheat when the hydraulic pump planter return hose tip.
operates at the maximum pressure.
● Implement lift assist cylinders are connected to the
● Flow control valve controls the flow with hitch-lowering valve using a T-fitting and a hydraulic
standard-flow hydraulics. hose.
● Valve is used to control the oil flow with high-
flow hydraulics. - The hitch lever controls the implement lift assist
cylinders when activating the hitch valve.
Avoid damage to the hydraulic system seals - SCV I is used to control both the hitch valve and
due to the incorrect positioning of the SCV the implement lift assist.
levers after the hydraulic motor is shutoff: - The 9-pin implement connector harness contains
● Always move the SCV lever to the float a loop circuit that disables the tractor hitch control
position, which allows the motor to coast to unit when it is connected to the 9-pin connector
a stop. for TouchSet depth control that is wired into the
● Never move the SCV lever to the neutral tractor main electrical harness.
position as this action can cause the motor EC82310,0000EFE-19-23JUN22
to stop abruptly.

due to high-pressure hydraulic return oil
moving back toward the motor through the SCV
connection. The installation of a special return
hose tip with a check valve is required.
70B-11
Implement Connection Example [Ag]: Pressure Control Valve Applications—Less Hitch

(Grain Drills or Air Seeders with Constant Down-Pressure System)
F
H
C G
A B
C
D B
A
D
A
B A
E
B
E
1 2
RXA0178006—UN—20MAY20
1—Standard-Flow D—Pressure Control Valve

2—High-Flow E—Transport Lock Valve
A—Extend Coupler Line F—Pressure Line
B—Retract Coupler Line G—Return Line (Power-Beyond Return Coupler—Motor Return)
C—Selector Valve H—Special Hose Tip

IMPORTANT: Avoid damage to the hydraulic oil. due to high-pressure hydraulic return oil
Using more than one implement requiring the moving back toward the motor through the SCV
use of active downforce can damage the connection: Route the return oil to the:
hydraulic system due to overheated hydraulic
oil when: ● Extend port of the SCV. This option requires
the installation of a special return hose tip.
● The ambient air temperature is high.
● Power-Beyond return port. This option does
● The hydraulic pump is set to operate at not require the installation of a special return
maximum pressure. hose tip.
If the ambient air temperature is high do not
use more than one implement at any given NOTE: Connecting the hydraulic motor to the secondary
time. high-flow pump is the preferred method of
connection.
due to the incorrect positioning of the SCV In this application:
levers after the hydraulic motor is shutoff. After
the hydraulic motor is shutoff: ● The vacuum motor receives pressure oil from the
retract port of SCV.
position, which allows the motor to coast to ● When using implements requiring active down force,
a stop. set the hydraulic pump to operate at maximum
pressure by:
position as this action can cause the motor - Setting the flow control to continuous.
to stop abruptly.
- Move the SCV lever to the detent position.
EC82310,0000F01-19-10MAY22
70B-12
Implement Connection Example—High- NOTE: Connecting the hydraulic motor to the secondary
Flow Hydraulics [Ag]: Implement Control high-flow pump is the preferred method of
Valves—Less Hitch connection.
In this application, the:

E
● Secondary hydraulic pump operates the:
H A D - Hydraulic motors.
- Vacuum motor.
J ● Return oil is routed to the high-flow Power-Beyond
return port. If the return hose is equipped with a
special return hose tip, it can be connected directly to
G left-hand side of coupler.
I ● Hydraulic motor (G) receives pressure oil from the
K retract port of SCV. Since the return oil is routed to
B the extend port of an SCV, a special return hose tip is
F required.
● Hydraulic motor (H):
B - Receives pressure oil from the Power-Beyond

port.
C - Return oil is routed to the Power-Beyond return
port.
EC82310,0000F06-19-02NOV21
Component Identification and Location

[Scraper]
RXA0185749—UN—08MAR22 SCV covers are color coded for easy identification.
A—Variable Rate Drive (Power-Beyond Pressure Coupler)
B—Pressure Line
C—Return Line (Power-Beyond Return Coupler—Motor Return) SCV Numbers and Corresponding Colors
D—Power-Beyond Load Sense Line SCV
E—Return Hose Tip
F—Vacuum Motor Number Color
G—Hydraulic Motor I Green
H—Hydraulic Motor
II Blue
I—Return Line
J—Power-Beyond Pressure Line III Brown
K—Power-Beyond Return Line IV Black
V Violet
IMPORTANT: Avoid damage to the hydraulic system VI Gray
seals due to the incorrect positioning of the
SCV levers after the hydraulic motor is shutoff:
Standard-Flow Hydraulics
position, which allows the motor to coast to
a stop.
to stop abruptly.
A B
due to the high-pressure hydraulic return oil
moving back toward the motor through the SCV
connection. Routing the return oil to the:
● Extend port of the SCV requires the
installation of a special return hose tip.
RXA0179031—UN—11AUG20
● Power-Beyond return port does not require A—Extend Port (4 used)
the installation of a special return hose tip. B—Retract Port (4 used)
70B-13
High-Flow Hydraulics (Premium) Select SCV Coupler
A—Extend Port (6 used) A—Extend Port (6 used)
B—Retract Port (6 used) B—Retract Port (6 used)
Both the primary hydraulic pump and the secondary

hydraulic pump supply hydraulic oil to all six SCVs. SCV Coupler Option
Features
Select
SCV Coupler Option 3/4” Connection Yes
Features Float Yes
Premium
3/4” Connection Yes Couple/Decouple Under
No
Pressure
Float Yes
Breakaway Capability No
Couple/Decouple Under
Yes
Pressure
EC82310,0000F07-19-10MAY22
Breakaway Capability Yes
Scraper Hydraulic Hose Tips [Scraper]

Recommended John Deere scraper hydraulic hose tips
for hoses with flat face O-ring seal connectors and
couplers with O-ring boss ports.
Size Part Number

Hydraulic Hose
SCV Hose-to-
Inner Coupler Hose Tip Coupler
Dash
Diameter mm (in) Adapter
Number
mm (in)
-8 12.5 (0.50) AR94522a 38H1161
12 (0.5)
AN233013
-12 19 (0.75) 38H1163
19 (0.75) AT117365b
a
Standard Ag Coupler
b
High Flow Coupler
EC82310,0000F08-19-12MAY20
70B-14
Implement Connection Example [Scraper]:

Pulling 1, 2, and 3 Scrapers
RXA0178010—UN—20MAY20
Pull Scraper Connection Examples
A—Scraper 1
B—SCV 1 (Lift Cylinder) (2 used)
C—SCV 2 (Gate/Dump Cylinder) (2 used)
D—Scraper 2
E—SCV 3 (Lift Cylinder) (2 used)
F—SCV 4 (Gate/Dump Cylinder) (2 used)
G—Scraper 3
H—SCV 5 (Lift Cylinder) (2 used)
I—SCV 6 (Gate/Dump Cylinder) (2 used)
EC82310,0000F09-19-10MAY22
70B-15
TouchSet Depth Control
TouchSet Depth Control Settings and ● Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC) to appear.
Adjustments
If a DTC appears or the implement fails to
CAUTION: Avoid personal injury or death. Do respond to commands, reset the implement
not attempt to install depth control sensors on position connector. See Reset the Implement
implements not intended for this system. See Position Connector.
While engine is running, moving the implement Connect the Implement Position Connector
control unit, sensor, connectors, or linkages 1. Position the rear of the tractor at the front of the
can result in unexpected movement. Stay clear implement.
of implement when starting engine.
2. Shut off the engine.
TouchSet depth control allows a frequently used height
and depth to be set and easily recalled. To use CAUTION: Prevent personal injury and
TouchSet depth control, SCV I must be properly equipment damage. Always set the hitch pin
connected and set to feature mode. into the locked position.
For more information on: 3. Attach the implement to the drawbar.

● Proper connection, see Attach Implement and 4. Connect the implement hydraulic hoses. See
Control System in this 's Manual section. Connect/Disconnect Hydraulic Hoses in the
● Feature mode, see SCV Settings—Feature Mode in Hydraulic Connections section of this Operator’s
Selective Control Valves section of this 's Manual. Manual.
● Height and depth settings, see SCV Settings—Flow
Adjustment in Selective Control Valves section of this
Operator's Manual.
SCV lever adjustments:

● To move implement to upper or lower set point,
briefly hold SCV lever in extend detent or retract
detent position.
● To adjust implement position up or down by a fixed
amount, tap SCV lever into extend or retract position.
For more information on SCV lever positions, see SCV RXA0179273—UN—20AUG20

Control Lever Adjustments in Selective Control Valves Tractor Wiring Harness Connector (D) is on a Bracket to the
Right of the SCV Stack
KD34109,000058D-19-20JUN22 5. Install the implement position connector to the tractor
wiring harness connector (D).
Disconnect the Implement Position Connector
Connect/Disconnect the Implement
Position Connector 1. Shut off the engine.
2. Uninstall the implement position connector from the
CAUTION: Prevent possible personal injury. To
tractor wiring harness connector.
prevent implement movement, before
connecting/disconnecting implements, always: 3. Disconnect the implement hydraulic hoses.
1.Shut off the engine. 4. Detach the implement from the drawbar.
2.Move the SCV lever to the neutral position.
Reset the Implement Position Connector
3.Lock out the SCV controls.
To reset the implement connection:
IMPORTANT: Always shut off the engine before 1. Shut off the engine and allow the CommandCenter to
connecting or disconnecting the implement shut down completely.
position connector. Connecting or
2. Disconnect the implement harness from the
disconnecting the implement position
implement connector.
connector with the engine running can cause:
● The implement not to respond to commands. 3. Start the tractor and allow the CommandCenter to
start completely.
70C-1
TouchSet Depth Control
4. Shut off the engine and allow the CommandCenter to

5. Connect the implement harness to the implement
connector.
6. Start the engine and allow the CommandCenter to
start completely.
7. Operate the implement. If a DTC appears or the
implement fails to respond to commands, see your
John Deere dealer.
TS36762,0000202-19-17JUN22
70C-2
Laser Scraper Control [Ag]
Laser Scraper—Scrapers Equipped with
Scraper Control Unit
CAUTION: Avoid personal injury or death. While
engine is running, moving the scraper control
unit, connectors, or linkages can result in
unexpected movement. Stay clear of implement
when starting engine.
NOTE: The system is used primarily in areas requiring

an automated laser guidance system for scraper
applications.
Automatic scraper control system allows raising,

lowering, and setting the depth for the implement
electronically without leaving the cab.
Setup
1. Connect implement to tractor using SCV I, III, or V.
2. Set connected SCV to AUTO. See SCV Settings—
Feature Mode in Selective Control Valves section of
this Operator's Manual.
3. Set flow for connected SCV. See SCV Settings—
Flow Adjustment in Selective Control Valves section
of this Operator's Manual.
Activation
To activate automatic scraper control system, briefly
move corresponding SCV lever to extend detent or
retract detent position. For more information on SCV
lever positions, see SCV Control Lever Adjustments in
Selective Control Valves section of this Operator’s
Manual.
KD34109,000058E-19-10NOV20
70D-1
Scraper Information [Scraper]
Scraper Operation Cycle NOTE: Following these operating guidelines could
result in extended tractor and scraper life as well as
B increased production.
● Limit depth of cut to maintain a loading speed no

greater than 6.2 km/h (3.8 mph).1 For maximum
power performance operate in 5th forward gear.
iTEC iTEC ● Maintain minimum engine rpm of 1900-2150 or
higher in the cut.
● Ballast tractor correctly to maintain optimum slip of 8-
12%.
A C ● Shallow cuts at higher speeds will extend drivetrain
life and increase overall productivity.
● Use iTEC (Intelligent Total Equipment Control) to
combine downshifts/upshifts, raise/lower scrapers or
other functions when returning to dig area or to/from
transport part of cycle. (See Intelligent Total
iTEC Equipment Control (iTEC) Section.)
● Drawbar height should be set so scraper cutting
edge hits the ground before the scraper bottom. See
D Scraper Operator's Manual.
RXA0187404—UN—24JUN22 ● Load downhill and/or towards the fill area when
Scraper Cycle Diagram conditions allow.
A—Dig Area ● Set scraper(s) on ground before top loading.
B—Transport—Loaded ● Activate differential lock before loading, disengage
C—Dump Area before turning.
D—Transport—Unloaded
● Use of differential lock should be limited to tough and
IMPORTANT: Operating the tractor with three wet areas or during the cut.
scrapers requires the tractor and all scraper ● Do not downshift below grounds speeds of 6.2 km/h
pans be equipped with hydraulic trailer brakes. (3.8 mph) when under load.1
See Towed Loads and Transport with Ballast in ● Reduce speed, and shift down before descending a
the Transport Section of this Operator's Manual. hill.
Never exceed: ● When possible load in 6th gear or above and target
● Maximum tractor ballast of 24500 kg (54000 1900-2150 rpm.
lb) with 65% on the front axle. ● Minimize all steering input during scraper loading.
● 10206 kg (22500 lb) maximum scraper tongue ● Avoid high speed dynamic maneuvers especially
load with short scraper drawbar. when loaded. (Sudden turns, transitions from slopes
● 8391 kg (18500 lb) maximum for scraper to flat surfaces, or heavy or sudden braking
tractors with regular long scraper (Ag) maneuvers.)
drawbar support. ● Do not load in a turn.
● Do not turn tires or tracks into the tongue of the
Towed Scrapers scraper.
● Maintain a smooth haul road and fill area.
Scraper Tractor Application Guidelines ● See Operator's Manual for operating/service
Trailer Brakes Maximum Towed Load instructions and AutoLoad setup if equipped.
Without 1.5 times the tractor weighta Efficiency Manager Recommendations
With 4.5 times the tractor weight
a
Limited to 32 kph (20 mph) without trailer brakes NOTE: Using AutoLoad will exit Efficiency Manager.
Follow manufacturer's Scraper Operation ● Use Transmission Efficiency Manager for transport.
Recommendations and instruction in attaching and ● Use both Efficiency Manager speed settings for
using scraper: transport. One speed setting at transport speed and
the other at digging speed. Use the second Efficiency
Manager speed setting to downshift tractor and bring
1
These values vary depending upon the tractor configuration.
70E-1
ground speed closer to dig speed before switching to hits the ground before scraper bottom. See scraper
manual mode. Operator’s Manual.
RD47322,00000ED-19-08JUN22
Example:
- Use set speed 2 for transport, set speed 1 for
approaching loading and unloading area.
Loading Techniques
- Disengage efficiency manager before entering
the cut. Loading Methods
RD47322,0000584-19-28JUN22 There are three common loading techniques.
● Pull Loading - tractor pulling scraper(s) is preferred
loading method. Generally the most economical
Weight Transfer Limits method for loading scrapers.
● Push Loading - uses separate vehicle to push
IMPORTANT: Do not exceed 10206 kg (22500 lb)
scraper. Only push load a scraper which is designed
maximum scraper tongue load transfer to short
to be push loaded (i.e. ejector models). It is critical
scraper drawbar and 8391 kg (18500 lb)
that push vehicle speed not exceed pull tractor speed
maximum scraper tongue load transfer to long
or track overrun and slippage on drive wheels can
scraper drawbar. Excess weight transferred to
result.
tractor may cause structural or drivetrain
damage.
IMPORTANT: To prevent excessive shock loading
When pulling a direct mounted scraper a portion of into tractor through drawbar and hydraulic
scraper and payload weight will be transferred to tractor. system during loading sequence when top
This additional weight on tractor can significantly loading, always lower scraper to ground before
improve productivity during the load cycle, especially beginning loading cycle.
when pulling two scrapers in tandem. After first scraper
is loaded, tractor will have more pulling capability and ● Top Loading (i.e. excavator) - uses scraper as a haul
will be able to load second bowl much faster, resulting in unit loaded by an excavator.
significantly reduced cycle times.
RD47322,00000EC-19-07JAN19
Working Cycle Automation
Scraper/Tractor Attachment
IMPORTANT: Failure to observe operating limits and
follow proper operating procedures may reduce
life of tractor and cause premature chassis,
drivetrain and track system failures.
Proper machine operation is important to extend life of

tracks, drivetrain and undercarriage, avoid downtime,
and maximize operating efficiency.
RXA0119628—UN—09AUG11
Tongue Height Working Cycle Automation
Height of scraper tongue determines angle of cutting
edge relative to ground. If tongue is too low, bottom of A— Dig Area
B— Loaded Transport
scraper bowl will drag in cut. If tongue is too high, C— Dump Area
scraper will be difficult to control in cut. Optimum height D— Unloaded Transport
for tongue is 46 to 53 cm (18 to 21 in) from ground.
Adjust tongue up or down through assemblies of hitch Use iTEC (Intelligent Total Equipment Control) to
and yoke. When operating in soft conditions raising combine downshifts and upshifts, raise or lower
tongue height may improve ground clearance during scrapers or automate other functions when returning to
transport. Tongue of rear scraper should be set at same dig area (A) or entering loaded (B) or unloaded transport
height as front. See scraper Operator’s Manual. (D) parts of cycle. See Intelligent Total Equipment
Control (iTEC) section of this Operator’s Manual.
Drawbar Height
Use Efficiency Manager for transport portions of cycle,
Drawbar height should be set so scraper cutting edge not during loading operations. See e18 Set Speeds and
70E-2
Efficiency Manager in e18 PowerShift Transmission 1. Shut off the engine.

Limit depth of cut to maintain a loading speed higher
than 6.4 km/h (4 mph)
Loading Sequence
RXA0179346—UN—24AUG20
AutoLoad Harness Connector Outlet is Above the SCV
Stack
2. Connect the AutoLoad harness from the scraper to

the tractor AutoLoad harness connector outlet (A).
RXA0119629—UN—09AUG11
A— Scraper Width 3. Refer to the Scraper Operation label for proper
B— Less Than Scraper Width
C— First Cut scraper operation or Scraper Operation Cycle in this
D— Second Cut Operator’s Manual section.
E— Third Cut
Reset the AutoLoad Harness
After making first cut (C), make second cut (D) parallel
To reset the harness connection:
to first at a distance from first cut that is less than
scraper width (B). On third pass (E) pick up material 1. Shut off the engine and allow the CommandCenter to
between first two cuts. shut down completely.
When loading a direct mounted scraper in tandem with 2. Disconnect the AutoLoad harness from the
another scraper it is most efficient to load front scraper connector outlet.
bowl first.
3. Start the tractor and allow the CommandCenter to
RD47322,00000EE-19-23JUN22 start completely.
4. Shut off the engine and allow the CommandCenter to
Connect AutoLoad Harness
5. Connect the AutoLoad to the connector outlet.
IMPORTANT: Always shut off the engine before
connecting or disconnecting the AutoLoad 6. Start the engine and allow the CommandCenter to
harness. Connecting or disconnecting the start completely.
AutoLoad harness with the engine running can 7. Operate the scraper pan. If a DTC appears or the
cause: AutoLoad fails to respond to commands, see your
● The scraper pan to not respond to Autoload John Deere dealer.
commands. AK08008,0000B3C-19-23JUN22
● Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC) to appear.
If a DTC appears or the AutoLoad harness fails AutoLoad Settings—Access

to respond to commands, reset the harness.
See Reset the AutoLoad Harness. Access Application through Display:
70E-3
NOTE: Some items only display if the machine is

RXA0167075—UN—20MAR19
Menu
1. Menu
RXA0167076—UN—20MAR19
Machine Settings
RXA0180074—UN—09OCT20
AutoLoad Example
Items Accessible on AutoLoad Main Page:
RXA0180073—UN—09OCT20 RXA0177921—UN—14MAY20
AutoLoad Status Indicator
3. AutoLoad
NOTE: A module is displayed for each attached
Access Application through Navigation Bar: AutoLoad compatible scraper.
Scraper Position Status Indicator — view the status

of the scraper position relative to the set points. See
AutoLoad Settings—Scraper Status in this Operator’s
RXA0168458—UN—30MAY19 Manual section.
AutoLoad
Press AutoLoad button on navigation bar below display.

KD34109,000063A-19-23JUN22
AutoLoad Settings
The AutoLoad application is used to access and adjust
AutoLoad settings. AutoLoad only functions in tractor RXA0180085—UN—09OCT20
gears 5—13. Initial Draft
NOTE: If a window shade appears saying that the SCV NOTE: A module is displayed for each attached
function stalled and to increase the flow rate, verify AutoLoad compatible scraper.
that the tractor is in one of the required gears (5—
13). Initial Draft — view and adjust the current initial draft
setting. See AutoLoad Settings—Initial Draft in this
When an AutoLoad scraper is connected to the tractor, Operator’s Manual section.
the SCV page displays with the connected SCV (I, III,
and/or V) in feature mode. For more information, see
SCV Settings in Selective Control Valves section of this
Operator’s Manual. For the best reading accuracy,
perform the drawbar sensor calibration annually. For the
calibration procedure, see Drawbar Sensor Calibration
in Service—Check section of this Operator’s Manual.
70E-4
RXA0180094—UN—09OCT20 RXA0180093—UN—09OCT20
SCVs Unlocked SCVs Locked
Status — view the SCVs locked or unlocked status.
RXA0180092—UN—09OCT20 RXA0167071—UN—21MAR19
Scraper Position Advanced Settings
NOTE: A module is displayed for each attached Advanced Settings — access further adjustments and
AutoLoad compatible scraper. less common settings. See AutoLoad Settings—
Advanced in this Operator’s Manual section.
Scraper Position — view and adjust the current
Run Page Modules
scraper position and set points. See AutoLoad Settings
—Scraper Position in this Operator’s Manual section. Add modules for this application to run pages using
Example:
RXA0180075—UN—09OCT20
Average Draft
Average Draft — view and adjust the current average

draft setting. See AutoLoad Settings—Average Draft in
RXA0180089—UN—09OCT20
Position
RXA0180071—UN—09OCT20
Load Count NOTE: Different modules may be available for your
application.
NOTE: After the counter reaches the maximum value
Position — quick access to position module.
(9999 loads), the count resets to zero.
KD34109,000063B-19-08JUN22
Load Count — view and manually adjust the number of

scraper loads hauled. To enable/disable automatic load
counting, see AutoLoad Settings—Advanced in this AutoLoad Settings—Scraper Status
The status indicator shows the current position of the
scraper relative to the set points. The color of the
indicator will change depending on the current status
(phase of the digging process) of the AutoLoad system.
RXA0180090—UN—09OCT20 Status Indicators:
Reset Load Count
Reset Load Count — reset the load count to zero. A

page will display to verify the selection.
RXA0177921—UN—14MAY20
Status Indicator
70E-5
● Black Indicator — the indicator is illuminated black the scraper and allows adjustments to the scraper set
when the scraper is in the Transport position. points.
● Gray Indicator — the indicator is not illuminated and
appears gray when a Fault is detected. NOTE: A module is displayed for each attached
AutoLoad compatible scraper.
● Green Indicator — the indicator is illuminated green
when the scraper is in the Entering the cut position.
● Blue Indicator — the indicator is illuminated blue
when the scraper is in the Loading position.
● Orange Indicator — the indicator is illuminated
orange when the scraper is in the Ready position.
KD34109,000063C-19-23JUN22
AutoLoad Settings—Initial Draft

The Initial Draft setting is means by which the operator
can tune the work load of the system when entering the
cut. The setting affects roughly the first half of the cut. RXA0180095—UN—09OCT20
Set Point Indicators
NOTE: A module is displayed for each attached
AutoLoad compatible scraper. Set Point Indicators — small yellow indicators that
represent the three scraper position set points. All three
Procedure to Modify: positions must be set for AutoLoad to operate.
● Transport (upper)
● Ready (lower)
● Loading (ground level)
Increase Decrease
Select (+/++) to increase or (-/- -) to decrease the RXA0180097—UN—09OCT20

setting. Use (++) and (- -) to increase or decrease the Set Upper Limit
value at a higher rate than (+) and (-).
Transport — the desired position for scraper transport.
After the scraper is moved to the desired position, select
the set upper limit key. The corresponding SCV lever
can be moved to extend detent to move the scraper to
RXA0180098—UN—09OCT20 the transport position. If the scraper is above the set
Value
position when the lever is moved, the scraper will not
move. For more information on SCV control lever
The value is shown in the display box which is adjustments, see SCV Control Lever Adjustments in
highlighted while being adjusted. Selective Control Valves section of this Operator’s
Manual section.
RXA0169143—UN—25JUN19
Indicator
The indicator shows the current setting. The closer to

the maximum setting (250), the more aggressive RXA0180086—UN—09OCT20
(heavier) the cut will be. The closer to the minimum Set Lower Limit
setting (0), the less aggressive (lighter) the cut will be.
Ready — the desired dumping position for the scraper.
KD34109,000063D-19-23JUN22
After the scraper is moved to the desired position, select
the set lower limit key. The corresponding SCV lever
can be moved to retract detent to move the scraper to
AutoLoad Settings—Scraper Position the ready position. If the scraper is below the set
The Scraper Position page shows the current position of position when the lever is moved, the scraper will not
move. For more information on SCV control lever
70E-6
adjustments, see SCV Control Lever Adjustments in

Selective Control Valves section of this Operator’s The indicator shows the current setting. The closer to
Manual section. the maximum setting (250), the more aggressive
(heavier) the cut will be. The closer to the minimum
setting (0), the less aggressive (lighter) the cut will be.
KD34109,000063F-19-23JUN22
RXA0180082—UN—09OCT20
Set Ground Level
AutoLoad Settings—Advanced
NOTE: John Deere recommends that the drop center Advanced Settings allows you to access further
blades are lowered to penetrate the ground. adjustments and less common settings.
Lowering drop center blades allows the outer Items Accessible on Advanced Settings Page:
blades to touch the ground when setting ground
level loading (entering the cut) position.
Loading — the desired position for the scraper to enter

the cut. After the scraper is moved to the desired RXA0180096—UN—09OCT20
position, select the set ground level key. Setup Wizard
AutoLoad Setup — the Setup Wizard takes you

RXA0169140—UN—25JUN19 through the steps to set up the AutoLoad scraper
Scraper Position Indicator positions.
Position Indicator — indicates the current position of
the scraper.
KD34109,000063E-19-23JUN22
RXA0180091—UN—09OCT20
Auto/Manual Dimensions
AutoLoad Settings—Average Draft
The Average Draft setting is means by which the Scraper Dimensions — set dimensions using the
operator can tune the work load of the system after fully scraper model or by entering them manually. See
entering the cut. The setting affects roughly the last half AutoLoad Settings—Scraper Dimensions in this
of the cut. The setting is the same for all scrapers and Operator’s Manual section.
only set in one location.
RXA0167187—UN—22MAR19
ON/OFF
Decrease Increase NOTE: AutoLoad will increment the load count each
time the automated cut is deactivated, either by
manually taking over scraper control or by
Select (+/++) to increase or (-/- -) to decrease the detenting to the upper set position. If the automated
setting. Use (++) and (- -) to increase or decrease the cut is stopped and restarted, the load count
value at a higher rate than (+) and (-). increments twice. The load count needs to be
manually corrected, if desired. AutoLoad counts
each individual scraper load, not the number of
cycles.
RXA0180098—UN—09OCT20
Input Box Load Count — select ON to enable or OFF to disable
automatic load counting.
The value is shown in the display box which is KD34109,0000640-19-23JUN22
highlighted while being adjusted.
RXA0169143—UN—25JUN19 AutoLoad Settings—Scraper Dimensions

Indicator
Set up scraper dimensions manually or by model.
70E-7
To set up by selecting model:
RXA0180079—UN—09OCT20
Dimension A
RXA0180072—UN—09OCT20 2. Select input box A to enter the scraper length

Auto Dimensions dimension. A number pad will display to enter the
dimension.
1. Select Auto Dimensions.
RXA0180080—UN—09OCT20
RXA0180076—UN—09OCT20
Dimension B
Model Selection Box
3. Select input box B to enter the blade-to-axle

2. Select the model selection box.
dimension. A number pad will display to enter the
dimension.
John Deere Scraper Dimension Chart

Scraper Tongue Pin Scraper Blade to
to Rear Pin Length Rear Axle Length
Scraper Model (A) (B)
ft
1510C 24.3 8.3
1510DC 24.3 8.3
1512C 23.3 7.6
RXA0180088—UN—09OCT20 1810C 27.0 9.3
Model List
1810DC 27.0 9.3
1812C 24.3 8.3
3. Select the model from the list.
1812DC 24.3 8.3
To set up by entering dimensions: 1814C 24.6 7.6
1814DC 24.6 7.6
NOTE: Scraper dimensions can only be entered if the 2112C 29.2 9.6
tractor, drawbar, and scraper are equipped with
2112DC 29.2 9.6
AutoLoad components.
1512E 27.7 7.8
1612DE 27.7 7.8
1810E 29.2 9.3
RXA0180087—UN—09OCT20 2010DE 29.2 9.3
Manual Dimensions 2010DE Two Tire 31.2 10.5
1814E 26.3 7.8
1. Select Manual Dimensions. 2014DE 26.3 7.8
2112E 31.6 9.8
2412DE 32.8 9.8
2412DE Two Tire 33.9 10.5
KD34109,0000641-19-23JUN22
RXA0180081—UN—09OCT20
Dimension Reference
● Dimension A (scraper length) is the distance

between the scraper front tongue pin and the rear
pin connecting a tandem scraper.
● Dimension B (blade-to-axle) is the distance from
the shallowest cutting blade tip to the rear axle.
70E-8
Tracks—General Information
General Track Use Guidelines turn more efficiently and with less ground
disturbance than by attempting to power and spin
IMPORTANT: Avoid track and track system through turn.
component damage, pre-condition tracks.
● Maintain correct track tension
● Before driving tractor on road for first time, - Under-tension causes rapid wear on tracks and
pre-condition tracks. See Perform Track inside surface of belt due to slippage and
Systems Break-In in Service—Break-In (100 potentially cause material buildup.
Hours or Less) section in this Operator’s
Manual. - Over-tension adds extra load and stress to
undercarriage bearings, internal track cables, and
● Avoid traveling at high speeds with new set track frame.
of tracks and wheels, especially during the
first 50-100 hours. ● Keep irregular material out of tracks
To extend drivetrain and track life, avoid Sharp hard material inside the track is primary
excessive soil compaction, and reduce rolling reason for localized track tears and subsequent entry
resistance: avoid adding excessive ballast. points for moisture into track carcass.
Never add ballast that results in operating with EC82310,0000550-19-05JUL22
heavy loads and with continuous full-power
below 7.1 km/h (4.4 mph).
Trash build-up can cause fire from increased Tracks Service
friction. Remove trash from trash build-up Service information for the track system is located in
points between track and tractor frame. Service sections of this OM.
Avoid operating track in grease, oil, or other
petroleum chemicals. Avoid spilling these Service Task See
materials on track and wheels during service.
Track Wear
Track Alignment
Maximizing Track Life Track Tension
Track carcasses are designed to exceed tread wear out, Drive and Idler Wheels and Mid-
Service—Check
so long as integrity of carcass is maintained. It is critical Rollers
to keep moisture out of the steel carcass and to avoid Track Trash Buildup
situations where localized cable overloading could Mid-Rollers Oil Level
occur. Track machine owners are advised to follow Idler Wheel Hub Oil Level
these guidelines to achieve maximum track life and
Drive Wheel Nuts, Idler Wheel,
avoid operational problems, all of which results in lower and Mid-Roller Cap Screws
Service—Tighten
cost per operating hour:
Walking Beam Bumper Stops Service—Change
● Minimize roading. Excessive roading can Track Tension Cylinder Service—Lubricate
increase track wear up to 15 times field wear
rates EC82310,0000526-19-21SEP21
- Minimize transport weight during road transport.
- Reduce maximum travel speed especially during
high ambient conditions.
● Use correct operational techniques
- Avoid skidding and tread bar scrubbing on hard
surfaces to reduce track wear.
- Use care when crossing ditches or transitions
while making turns. Diagonal crossing of ditches
causes track to become unsupported in the center
and with idler hitting opposite embankment, can
cause momentary loss of tension that can drop
center section down and outside drive or idler
wheels, making derailing a much higher risk if in a
turn.
- Use ratchet-turn or bump steer technique. When
turning at end of field, steering performance can
be gained by turning in several small turns,
returning to neutral position between each ratchet
steer. This helps gain more traction and complete
80-1
Seats
Adjust Air Seat from swiveling. Seat can be locked out in several
positions.
RXA0167344—UN—03APR19
Fore/Aft Attenuation Lockout Control
Fore/Aft Attenuation — place lever in forward position

(shown) to allow movement. Place lever in rear position
to lock out movement. Seat must be in center position to
lock.
RXA0167353—UN—03APR19
Air Seat
NOTE: Select, premium, or ultimate indicates the

comfort and convenience package the feature is
included with if not included with all.
RXA0167345—UN—03APR19
Left/Right Attenuation Lockout Control
Left/Right Attenuation — place lever in forward

position (shown) to allow movement. Place lever in rear
position to lock out movement. Seat must be in center
position to lock.
RXA0167320—UN—03APR19
Armrest Height Control
Left-Hand Armrest Height — turn adjustment knob

counterclockwise to loosen. Move armrest up or down to
RXA0167343—UN—03APR19
desired position and tighten by turning knob clockwise. Ride Firmness Control
Ride Firmness — move lever to one of three levels of

ride firmness:
● Most firm (forward position)
● Medium firmness (center position)
● Least firm (rear position)
RXA0167321—UN—03APR19
Armrest Inclination Control
Left-Hand Armrest Inclination — turn adjustment

knob to adjust incline angle of armrest.
RXA0167326—UN—03APR19
Seat Height Control
Seat Height — push up (up arrow shown) to raise seat

or down (down arrow shown) to lower seat.
RXA0167322—UN—03APR19
Swivel Lockout Control
Seat Swivel — place lever in up position to allow seat to

swivel. Place in down position (shown) to lock out seat
90-1
Seats
RXA0167340—UN—03APR19
Backrest Angle Control - Select RXA0167329—UN—03APR19
Cushion Tilt Control - Premium and Ultimate
Backrest Angle (Select) — pull lever up and adjust
angle. Release lever when desired angle is reached. Cushion Tilt (Premium and Ultimate) — push front of
Backrest locks into nearest detent. control in the same direction as desired for front of
cushion to move.
RXA0167342—UN—03APR19
Lumbar Adjustment Control - Select
RXA0167327—UN—03APR19
Backrest Angle Control - Premium and Ultimate Lumbar Adjustment (Select) — move lever to adjust
amount of lumbar support. Continue to move lever until
Backrest Angle (Premium and Ultimate) — push desired amount of support is reached.
control in the same direction as desired for backrest to
move.
RXA0167330—UN—03APR19
Lumbar Height Control - Premium
RXA0167341—UN—03APR19 Lumbar Height (Premium) — push up (up arrow) to

Fore/Aft Position Control - Select
raise lumbar support or down (down arrow) to lower
lumbar support.
Fore/Aft Seat Position (Select) — pull up on bar and
adjust position. Release bar when desired position is
reached. Seat locks into nearest detent.
RXA0167331—UN—03APR19
RXA0167328—UN—03APR19
Fore/Aft Position Control - Premium and Ultimate Lumbar Height Control - Ultimate
Fore/Aft Seat Position (Premium and Ultimate) — Lumbar Height (Ultimate) — push up (top control) to
push control in the same direction as desired for seat to raise lumbar support or down (bottom control) to lower
move. lumbar support.
RXA0167332—UN—03APR19
Lumbar Extension Control - Premium
90-2
Seats
Vent/Heat (Ultimate) — push left (blue icon) to select

Lumbar Extension (Premium) — push add (+) or vent or right (red icon) to select heat.
remove (-) to adjust amount of air in lumbar support.
RXA0173801—UN—14JAN20
Vent/Heat Intensity Control - Ultimate
Vent/Heat Intensity (Ultimate) — select one of three

RXA0167333—UN—03APR19 settings:
Lumbar Extension Control - Ultimate
● High (top)
Lumbar Extension (Ultimate) — push add (right-hand ● Off (center)
control) or remove (left-hand control) to adjust amount ● Low (bottom)
of air in lumbar support.
KD34109,00004B0-19-09DEC20
Adjust ActiveSeat II
RXA0167334—UN—03APR19
Cushion Length Control - Premium and Ultimate
Cushion Length (Premium and Ultimate) — push

increase (top) or decrease (bottom) to adjust cushion
length.
RXA0167335—UN—03APR19
Back Bolsters Control - Ultimate RXA0167319—UN—04APR19
ActiveSeat II
Back Bolsters (Ultimate) — push add (+) or remove (-)
to adjust amount of air in backrest bolsters. NOTE: Premium or ultimate indicates the comfort and
convenience package the feature is included with if
not included with both.
RXA0167337—UN—03APR19
Massage Control - Ultimate
Massage (Ultimate) — push down (1) to select

massage pattern one or up (2) to select massage
pattern two. Press the selected pattern again to turn off RXA0167320—UN—03APR19
massaging. Massage feature times out after 10 minutes. Armrest Height Control
Left-Hand Armrest Height — turn adjustment knob

counterclockwise to loosen. Move armrest up or down to
desired position and tighten by turning knob clockwise.
RXA0173802—UN—14JAN20
Vent/Heat Control - Ultimate
90-3
Seats
Seat Height — push up (up arrow shown) to raise seat

or down (down arrow shown) to lower seat.
RXA0167321—UN—03APR19
Armrest Inclination Control
Left-Hand Armrest Inclination — turn adjustment

knob to adjust incline angle of armrest.
RXA0167327—UN—03APR19
Backrest Angle Control
Backrest Angle — push control in the same direction

as desired for backrest to move.
RXA0167322—UN—03APR19
Swivel Lockout Control
Seat Swivel — place lever in up position to allow seat to

swivel. Place in down position (shown) to lock out seat
from swiveling. Seat can be locked out in several
positions. RXA0167328—UN—03APR19
Fore/Aft Position Control
Fore/Aft Seat Position — push control in the same

direction as desired for seat to move.
RXA0169491—UN—02JUL19
Lateral Attenuation Lockout Control
Lateral Attenuation — rotate lever forward until parallel

with the floor (lever will tighten) to lockout lateral
movement. Rotate lever rearward until parallel with the
floor (lever will tighten) to unlock and allow lateral
movement. RXA0167329—UN—03APR19
Cushion Tilt Control
Cushion Tilt — push front of control in the same

RXA0167325—UN—03APR19
direction as desired for front of cushion to move.
Ride Firmness Control
Ride Firmness — select one of three levels of ride

firmness:
● Most firm (+)
● Medium firmness (center position) RXA0167330—UN—03APR19
Lumbar Height Control - Premium
● Least firm (-)
Lumbar Height (Premium) — push up (up arrow) to
raise lumbar support or down (down arrow) to lower
lumbar support.
RXA0167326—UN—03APR19
Seat Height Control
90-4
Seats
Back Bolsters (Ultimate) — push add (+) or remove (-)

to adjust amount of air in backrest bolsters.
RXA0167337—UN—03APR19
Massage Control - Ultimate
RXA0167331—UN—03APR19
Lumbar Height Control - Ultimate
Massage (Ultimate) — push down (1) to select
Lumbar Height (Ultimate) — push up (top control) to massage pattern one or up (2) to select massage
raise lumbar support or down (bottom control) to lower pattern two. Press the selected pattern again to turn off
lumbar support. massaging. Massage feature times out after 10 minutes.
RXA0173802—UN—14JAN20
Vent/Heat Control - Ultimate
RXA0167332—UN—03APR19
Lumbar Extension Control - Premium
Vent/Heat (Ultimate) — push left (blue icon) to select
vent or right (red icon) to select heat.
Lumbar Extension (Premium) — push add (+) or
remove (-) to adjust amount of air in lumbar support.
RXA0173801—UN—14JAN20
Vent/Heat Intensity Control - Ultimate
Vent/Heat Intensity (Ultimate) — select one of three

settings:
RXA0167333—UN—03APR19
Lumbar Extension Control - Ultimate ● High (top)
● Off (center)
Lumbar Extension (Ultimate) — push add (right-hand
control) or remove (left-hand control) to adjust amount ● Low (bottom)
of air in lumbar support.
KD34109,00004B1-19-21JUN22
Operator Presence Sensor

CAUTION: Avoid injury. SCV does not
RXA0167334—UN—03APR19 automatically disengage when system senses
Cushion Length Control that operator is out of seat.
Cushion Length — push increase (top) or decrease If operator leaves seat, an audible warning sounds for 5
(bottom) to adjust cushion length. seconds when:
● Brake and clutch pedals are not depressed, and
machine is stopped in NEUTRAL or speed is zero.
Machine goes into PARK after 7 seconds.
● PTO is engaged. If Auto Disengage is ignored, PTO
automatically disengages after 7 seconds. For more
RXA0167335—UN—03APR19 information on Auto Disengage, see PTO Settings—
Back Bolsters Control - Ultimate Auto Disengage in PTO—General Information
90-5
Seats
● SCV lever is in detent flow position.

TS36762,000023D-19-19APR21
Adjust Passenger Seat

CAUTION: Keep all other riders off tractor and
equipment to avoid injury. Passenger seat is
provided only for training operators or
diagnosing machine problems. Always wear
seat belt.
RXA0167301—UN—02APR19
Passenger Seat
RXA0167302—UN—02APR19
Backrest Down
Seat Backrest — push backrest forward to use as a

writing surface.
RXA0167303—UN—02APR19
Cushion Up
Seat Cushion — push seat cushion up to allow more

room for entering and exiting cab.
KT81203,00004F8-19-17APR20
90-6
Mirrors
Adjust Mirrors hand arrow to allow adjustments to right-hand electric
mirror.
RXA0167463—UN—12APR19
Electric Mirror Adjustment
NOTE: Mirror angle controls are on right-hand side.
Electric Mirror — after selecting mirror to be adjusted,

select arrows to adjust mirror angle in corresponding
direction. The top mirror on a dual mirror is an electric
adjustment.
RXA0173907—UN—15JAN20
Mirror Example — Dual Mirror
Manual Mirror — push mirror edges to adjust angle.

RXA0167463—UN—12APR19
Mirrors with one mirror and the bottom mirror on dual Electric Telescoping Adjustment
mirrors are adjusted manually.
NOTE: Telescoping controls are on left-hand side.
Electric Telescoping — after selecting mirror to be

adjusted, select left-hand arrow to extend or right-hand
arrow to retract mirror arm.
RXA0167461—UN—12APR19
Manual Telescoping Lock Lever
Manual Telescoping — pull lock lever down to allow

adjustment. Slide mirror arm to desired position. Push
lock lever back up to lock into desired position.
RXA0167464—UN—12APR19
Heat Adjustment
Heated Mirror — push up to turn on or down to turn off

mirror heat. Icon is illuminated when heat is on.
KD34109,00004B2-19-16JAN20
RXA0168462—UN—31MAY19
Electric Mirror Controls Example
Electric mirror controls are next to radio.
RXA0167462—UN—12APR19
Select Left/Right Mirror
Select Mirror — select left-hand arrow to allow

adjustments to left-hand electric mirror. Select right-
90A-1
Lights
Light Identification
RXA0185283—UN—07SEP21
A—Roof Work Light (8 used) H—Headlight Corner Work Light (2 used)

B—Beacon Light (3 used) I—Extremity Warning Light (4 used)
C—Side Marker Light (2 used) J—Auxiliary Drive Light (2 used)
D—Front Mid-Body Work Light (if equipped) (4 used) K—Rear Fender Work Light (4 used)
E—Headlight Front Work Light (2 used) L—Fender Tail Light (2 used)
F—Headlight Front Work Light (2 used) M—Registration Plate Light (2 used)
G—Headlight High Beam—Road (2 used) N—Rear Auxiliary Work Light (if equipped)
SV81855,00000D0-19-11MAY22
Lights Settings—Access 2. Machine Settings tab

RXA0168488—UN—05JUN19
Lights
RXA0167075—UN—20MAR19
Menu
3. Lights
1. Menu Access Application through Navigation Bar:
RXA0168455—UN—05JUN19
Lights
RXA0167076—UN—20MAR19 Press lights button on navigation bar below display.

Machine Settings
KD34109,00004D2-19-22JUN22
90C-1
Lights
Lights Settings
Lights application allows you to access light preset
configurations. To adjust settings for presets, select
RXA0168493—UN—31MAY19
corresponding tab. For lights specific to your machine,
Light with Fault
see Light Identification in this Operator’s Manual
section. For lighting controls, see Operate Lights in
Front Console section of this Operator’s Manual. Light with Fault — exclamation point indicates that
light is in error. Example: light bulb is burnt out.
NOTE: Field lights are configurable. Road lights are not
configurable.
Items Accessible on Lights Main Page:

RXA0167071—UN—21MAR19
NOTE: Some items only display if machine is equipped Advanced Settings
less common settings. See Lights Settings—Advanced
Implement Light Connection:
RXA0168489—UN—31MAY19 7-Pin Outlet — connect implement lights to tractor. See
Field Lights Preset 1 7-Pin Outlet in this Operator’s Manual section.
Field Lights Preset 1 — easily turn on a group of Run Page Modules
frequently used lights. See Lights Settings—Field Lights Add modules for this application to run pages using
Presets in this Operator’s Manual section. Layout Manager. See the Generation 4 Display
Example:
RXA0168490—UN—31MAY19
Field Lights Preset 2
RXA0168494—UN—31MAY19
Field Lights Preset 2 — easily turn on a group of
Road Lights
frequently used lights. See Lights Settings—Field Lights
Presets in this Operator’s Manual section.
application.
Road Lights — quickly toggle between hood and belt

line light groups.
RXA0168491—UN—31MAY19
Hood/Belt Line Lights Shortcut Keys
Hood/Belt Line Lights — toggle between hood and Add shortcut keys for this application to the shortcut bar
belt line lights when lights are in road mode. See Lights using Layout Manager. See the Generation 4 Display
Settings—Hood/Belt Line Lights in this Operator’s Operator’s Manual.
Manual section. Example:
RXA0168495—UN—31MAY19
RXA0168492—UN—31MAY19
Road Lights
Highlighted Tab
Highlighted Tab — indicates which tab is selected. NOTE: Different shortcut keys may be available for your
application.
90C-2
Lights
Road Lights — quickly toggle between hood and belt

line light groups.
KD34109,00004D3-19-22JUN22
RXA0168550—UN—31MAY19
Trailer Light
Lights Settings—Field Lights Presets
Customize light presets for specific customer needs. 2. Select desired light, light pair, and/or trailer light keys
for lights you want illuminated.
1. Select desired tab:
RXA0168551—UN—31MAY19
Highlighted Key
RXA0168489—UN—31MAY19 NOTE: Key is highlighted when selected.

KD34109,00004D4-19-22JUN22
a. Field lights preset 1.
Lights Settings—Hood/Belt Line Lights

Hood/belt line lights tab allows you to toggle between
hood and belt line lights when lights are in road mode.
RXA0168490—UN—31MAY19
b. Field lights preset 2.
RXA0168552—UN—31MAY19
Hood Lights Enabled
RXA0168546—UN—31MAY19
Linked
Select to enable hood lights.
● Select Link on toggle to link paired left-hand and

right-hand lights for simultaneous on and off
operation on all tabs. RXA0168553—UN—31MAY19
Belt Line Lights Enabled
Select to enable belt line lights.

RXA0168547—UN—31MAY19 KD34109,00004D5-19-22JUN22
Unlinked
● Select Unlink on toggle to allow paired left-hand

and right-hand lights individual on and off Lights Settings—Advanced
operation on all tabs. Advanced settings allows you to access further
RXA0168548—UN—31MAY19
Light RXA0168549—UN—31MAY19
Light Pair RXA0168554—UN—31MAY19
Check Box - Enabled
Machine Entrance/Exit Lighting — select to illuminate

convenience lights upon entrance and exit of machine.
Box will display with a check mark when enabled. For
90C-3
Lights
convenience light locations, see Light Identification in - Belt line lights.

this Operator's Manual section.
IMPORTANT: To avoid damage, extremity lights
can be retracted when parking tractor in a
storage building.
RXA0168555—UN—31MAY19
Selection Box
Extremity lights. Extremity lights are lit when these functions are
active:
Engine Off Delayed Lighting — lighting remains on for
a specified duration after engine is turned off. Select box - Hazard flashers.
to display a list of exit lighting durations to choose from.
List also contains OFF to disable exit lighting. - Turn indicators.
- Position lamps.
TS36762,0000250-19-21JUN22
RXA0167628—UN—26APR19
ON/OFF
Beacon Light
Daytime Running Lights — lighting to increase Three beacon lights are on the top of the cab:
visibility during the day while machine is turned on or in ● Two beacon lights at each front corner.
motion. Select ON to enable or OFF to disable. ● One beacon light at the center rear.
TS36762,000024C-19-29JUN22
For exact location, see Light Identification in this section

Hazard and Extremity Lights Push beacon light button to activate rotary beacon light.
CAUTION: Avoid injury or death caused by a For beacon light button location, see CommandARM
collision with another vehicle. Always: Climate, Radio, and Lighting Controls in CommandARM
● Use road lights, extremity lights, and turn
TS36762,0000251-19-21JUN22
signals when operating tractor on a road or
highway at night or during the day.
● Follow local laws and regulations for all
equipment lighting and marking. 7-Pin Outlet
● Comply with all traffic regulations. CAUTION: Avoid accidents. Always use
auxiliary light on towed implement when tractor
Extremity lights alert other vehicles of the
rear signals and other lights are obscured.
tractor’s extended width. If the tractor width
changes, refer to local laws and regulations to
ensure that the tractor remains in compliance. 7-pin outlet allows operator to connect implement lights
to the tractor.
NOTE: Depending on region and installed equipment, Contact your John Deere dealer for:
amber hazard lights can cease to operate as
indicator lights when the Hazard Switch is ● Matching 7-pin plug.
activated. ● Methods to connect tractor light switch with 7-pin
connector accessory wires.
Push hazard lights button to activate flashing hazard
and extremity lights. Outlet Diagram and Terminal Functions Chart
● For the hazard lights button location, see
CommandARM Climate, Radio, and Lighting
Controls in CommandARM section of this Operator’s
Manual.
● For hazard and extremity lights locations, see Light
Identification in this section of this Operator’s
Manual. Hazard and extremity indicator lights
include: RXA0168556—UN—31MAY19
Outlet Diagram
- Front and rear roof lights.
- Rear fender lights (equipped with an amber lens).
90C-4
Lights
NOTE: Accessory fuse F11 is removed. Some trailers

use this connection for fog lights. This can be
enabled by inserting a 30 A fuse into F11.
Terminal Function
Numbers Rear Connection Front Connection
1 Left Turn Signala
2 Accessory
3 Ground
4 Right Turn Signalb
5 Right Tail Lightsc
6 Brake Lightsd Not Used
7 Left Tail Lightse
a
Includes left extremity light.
b
Includes right extremity light.
c
Includes right front clearance and right extremity clearance lights.
d
Includes cab
e
Includes license plate, left front clearance, and left extremity
clearance lights.
KD34109,00004D9-19-27AUG19
90C-5
Accessories
Right-Hand Side Console ● Ground - pictured at top
● Unswitched battery power - pictured bottom left
● Switched power (key) - pictured bottom right
RXA0167972—UN—17MAY19
Right-Hand Side Console Example
RXA0167983—UN—17MAY19
Radio AUX and USB Inputs
equipped with the associated option. NOTE: AUX and USB inputs are only available if a radio
is equipped.
Radio AUX and USB Inputs — use to connect AUX

and USB devices to radio. Provides 500 mA output
current for charging USB devices.
RXA0169821—UN—02AUG19
ISO 11783 Connector
ISO 11783 Connector — use to connect ISO 11783

compliant components.
RXA0167984—UN—17MAY19
Diagnostic Connector (Dealer Use Only) — used for
dealer diagnostics.
KD34109,000052C-19-21JUN22
RXA0167979—UN—17MAY19
CommandCenter USB Input CommandARM Storage
CommandCenter USB Input — use to transfer data

and reprogram CommandCenter. Input does not charge
devices.
RXA0183536—UN—02JUN21
CommandArm Storage Accessories
RXA0169780—UN—30JUL19
12 V Accessory Outlets RXA0167981—UN—17MAY19
12 V Accessory Outlet
12 V Accessory Outlet — use to connect auxiliary
equipment. 12 V Accessory Outlet — use to connect auxiliary
equipment.
KD34109,000052D-19-21JUN22
RXA0167982—UN—17MAY19
Outlet Pins
Outlet pins provide the following:
90D-1
Accessories
Right-Hand Front Corner Post
RXA0167974—UN—17MAY19
Right-Hand Front Corner Post Example

RXA0169832—UN—05AUG19
ISO 11786 Outlet Diagram
Terminal Numbers Function

1 True Ground Speed
RXA0167986—UN—17MAY19
Display Connector 2 Buffered Wheel Speed
3 —
Display Connector — use to connect a universal 4 —
display. 5 —
6 Implement Switch
7 Ground
KD34109,000052E-19-21JUN22
RXA0167987—UN—17MAY19
Ethernet Connector
Ethernet Connector — use to connect an Ethernet Left-Hand Rear Corner Post

cable.
RXA0167988—UN—17MAY19
GreenStar Display Connector RXA0167975—UN—17MAY19
Left-Hand Rear Corner Post Example
GreenStar Display Connector — use to connect
GreenStar Display. NOTE: Some items are only available if machine is
ISO 11786 Connector 12 V Accessory Outlet
ISO 11786 Connector — use to connect implements to 12 V Accessory Outlet — use to connect auxiliary
receive radar or GPS speed signal. equipment.
90D-2
Accessories
RXA0167990—UN—17MAY19
AC Outlets
RXA0167982—UN—17MAY19
AC (Alternating Current) Outlet — use to power Outlet Pins
devices with AC connections. One of two outlet types
displayed will be equipped on machine, 120 V (pictured Outlet pins provide the following:
left) or 230 V (pictured right).
● Ground - pictured at top
KD34109,000052F-19-09AUG19
● Unswitched battery power - pictured bottom left
● Switched power (key) - pictured bottom right
Right-Hand Rear Corner Post KD34109,0000530-19-14AUG19
Refrigerator and Cool/Storage Box
RXA0167976—UN—17MAY19
Right-Hand Rear Corner Post Example
NOTE: Some items are only available if machine is RXA0167977—UN—17MAY19
equipped with the associated option. Refrigerator and Cool/Storage Box Example

Cool/Storage Box Items:
RXA0167985—UN—17MAY19
USB Charging Ports
RXA0167991—UN—17MAY19
USB Charging Ports — use to charge devices with
Vent
USB cable. Provides charging capability of up to 5 A (60
watt) per port.
Vent — open vent to allow storage contents to match
temperature being delivered through HVAC system.
Refrigerator Items:
12 V Accessory Outlets Power
12 V Accessory Outlet — use to connect auxiliary Power — press to turn on cooling. Press again to turn
equipment. off.
RXA0167993—UN—17MAY19
Power/Troubleshooting Indicator
90D-3
Accessories
Power/Troubleshooting Indicator — indicates the

system status. If the indicator shows a:
● Solid green light, the refrigerator is on.
● Flashing or solid red light, the refrigerator is off, and
an operational fault has occurred. See your John
Deere dealer. RXA0167997—UN—17MAY19
Overhead Storage
Overhead Storage — storage compartment on inside

roof of cab.
RXA0167994—UN—17MAY19
Cold Setting
Cold Setting — press button to select cold setting.

Each press moves to next setting. Indicator for selected
setting is illuminated. The larger the indicator, the colder
the setting is.
KD34109,0000531-19-28SEP21
RXA0167998—UN—17MAY19
Operator's Manual Storage
Sunshade Operator's Manual Storage — compartment on right-

hand side of passenger/instructional seat to store
Operator's Manual.
KD34109,00005EB-19-04MAY20
Monitor Bracket Mounts
RXA0169822—UN—02AUG19
Sunshade
Pull-down sunshade reduces glare when operating in

bright sunlight. The pull-down sunshade allows operator RXA0167999—UN—17MAY19
flexibility in amount of window coverage. Monitor Bracket Mount Example
KD34109,0000532-19-02AUG19
Mount implement monitors using brackets and M10 cap
screws. See your John Deere dealer for brackets.
Mounting Locations:
Storage Compartments
● Front right-hand corner post (two mounts)
● Rear right-hand corner post (two mounts)
● Rear left-hand corner post (one mount) if emergency
hammer is not equipped
KD34109,0000534-19-30JUL19
RXA0177578—UN—23APR20
9RW and 9RX Fender
Storage
RXA0167996—UN—17MAY19 Emergency Exit
9RT Fender Storage
If cab door is blocked in an emergency situation,
removable rear cab window provides large exit path.
Fender Storage — storage compartment inside cab
under passenger/instructional seat.
90D-4
Accessories
CAUTION: Avoid injury from broken glass. the US and Canada that operate in the UHF/VHF
Before using hammer, cover eyes, face, and frequency bands.
uncovered skin. Use emergency exit only when
cab door is blocked. Specifications for Factory Installed Radio
Installation Kit:
● Roof Antenna Mount: NMO type.
● Cable Specifications: Cable length is 3.35 m (11 ft)
from antenna mount to PL-259 radio connector. RG-
58/U cable has 50 ohms intrinsic impedance.
● Roof Ground Plane: Grounded large antenna
counterpoise foil under green cab roof allows
RXA0168000—UN—17MAY19
installation of either 1/4 or 1/2 wave antenna.
Rear Window Lever
● CB Antenna: Normal CB antenna can be attached to
Rear Window Lever — lift lever and push out glass to factory installed NMO antenna mount through use of
exit. an appropriate adapter. Special CB antenna already
equipped with NMO base may alternatively be used.
Procedure to Install:
RXA0168001—UN—17MAY19
Emergency Hammer
Emergency Hammer (If Equipped) — use hammer to

break window if exits are blocked.
KD34109,00005EC-19-23JUL20
Install Business Band/Citizens Band (CB) RXA0168002—UN—17MAY19

Antenna and/or Radio Radio Bezel
Custom CB or business band radio installation requires

special tools and skills to tune antenna for lowest 1. Remove radio bezel by pulling.
possible voltage standing wave ratio (VSWR). Qualified
professional should be employed or consulted before
attempting installation. Contact your John Deere dealer
for recommendations. Included specifications are useful
to installer.
CAUTION: Avoid personal injury. Never mount

business band radio antenna to rear of cab.
Never route antenna cable near harness for
electrical system controllers or operator
controls. Failure to follow these precautions
could expose operator to radio frequency
energy levels higher than recommended by
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
and/or could cause undesirable performance of
electronically controlled systems.
RXA0169831—UN—05AUG19
Disconnect battery ground cable before any Antenna and Power Cables
electrical repair.
2. Release antenna and power cables from bracket.
NOTE: Do not mount microphones or accessories to
bottom of radio bezel. Power cable wire identification:
● A - Switched power (key) - red
Business band radios are specially licensed radios in ● B - Ground - black
● C - Unswitched power - red
90D-5
Accessories
5. Remove wiper.
RXA0168004—UN—17MAY19
Hole for Connectors
3. Route cables through hole in back of compartment.

4. Connect cables to radio.
5. Place radio in compartment.
RXA0167898—UN—13MAY19
6. Replace radio bezel. 6. Remove cap screws (H).
KD34109,0000536-19-16DEC19 7. Remove cover (I).
Mount StarFire Receiver

Mount StarFire Receiver to machine using mounting kit
and following procedure. To order kit, see your John
Deere dealer.
RXA0167845—UN—05AUG19
8. Attach StarFire bracket (J) to front wiper support (K)
using cap screws (L).
9. Complete steps 2—7 in reverse to reassemble.
10. Mount receiver to bracket.
RXA0167843—UN—08MAY19
NOTE: If StarFire Integrated Receiver is equipped, it
1. Attach bracket (A) to bracket (B) using cap screws does not function when external StarFire Receiver
(C). is connected.
11. Connect receiver to connector (M).

KD34109,00004C8-19-21JUN22
Mount RTK (Real-Time Kinematic) Radio

NOTE: If machine was ordered with RTK radio,
mounting bracket and radio are installed from
factory. Radio must be removed from bracket to drill
antenna hole. Reinstall radio and install antenna
(located in cab) using information from the following
RXA0167897—UN—10MAY19 procedure.
2. Disconnect front washer fluid hose (D) from fitting
(E). Mount RTK radio to machine using mounting kit and
3. Pull tabs (G) apart to remove cover (F). following procedure. To order kit, see your John Deere
dealer.
4. Remove nut from wiper motor shaft.
90D-6
Accessories
Right-Hand Side Roof 6. Connect radio to connector (H).
1. Remove cap screws (A) and cover (B). 7. Reattach cover.

8. Attach antenna.
KD34109,00004C9-19-29APR21
Implement Connector
RXA0167854—UN—09MAY19
2. Drill a 31.8 mm (1.25 inch) hole at marker (C)
corresponding to antenna location for your radio.
RXA0169781—UN—30JUL19
Implement connector (A) is on the rear of the tractor
above the SCV stack.
KD34109,00005ED-19-29APR20
RXA0167855—UN—09MAY19
3. Attach grommet (D) to drilled hole. RS232 Serial Communication Connection
RXA0167856—UN—09MAY19
4. Attach bracket (E) to cover using cap screws (F).
5. Attach radio to bracket using holes (G).
RXA0169820—UN—02AUG19
RS232 Serial Communication Connection
90D-7
Accessories
Connection provides NMEA0183 GPS data and is

located behind upper right-hand side of radio bezel.
KD34109,0000538-19-02AUG19
AutoLoad Harness Connector [Scraper]
RXA0177580—UN—23APR20
9RW and 9RX Tractors
A chain box is equipped on the left-hand platform of the

RXA0177640—UN—29APR20 tractor.
AutoLoad harness connector (A) is on the rear of the
tractor above the SCV stack.
KD34109,00005F5-19-23JUN22
Chain Box
RXA0177581—UN—23APR20
Rear Chain Box
If the tractor is not equipped with a PTO and is equipped

with a category 5 drawbar, a rear chain box is also
equipped.
KD34109,00005EE-19-23APR20
RXA0177579—UN—23APR20
9RT Tractors
90D-8
HVAC
HVAC Settings—Access
RXA0167075—UN—20MAR19
Menu
1. Menu
RXA0169839—UN—06AUG19
HVAC Example
Items Accessible on HVAC Main Page:
RXA0167076—UN—20MAR19
Machine Settings
RXA0167628—UN—26APR19
2. Machine Settings tab ON/OFF
Climate Control Automation — enable or disable

automatic control of Fan Speed, Air Flow Mode, and A/
C. See HVAC Settings—Climate Control Automation in
RXA0167626—UN—26APR19
HVAC
3. HVAC
RXA0167629—UN—26APR19
Set Temperature
RXA0167627—UN—26APR19
HVAC Set Temperature — set desired temperature inside
cab. See HVAC Settings—Set Temperature in this
Press HVAC button on navigation bar below display. Operator’s Manual section.
KD34109,00004B7-19-08DEC21
RXA0167630—UN—26APR19
HVAC Settings Air Flow Mode
HVAC application is used to adjust the temperature, fan
speed, and air flow mode inside the cab. Air Flow Mode — adjust distribution of air flow inside
cab. See HVAC Settings—Air Flow Mode in this
RXA0167631—UN—26APR19
Fan Speed
Fan Speed — control fan speed inside cab. See HVAC

Settings—Fan Speed in this Operator’s Manual section.
90E-1
HVAC
● Changing Set Temperature does not disable AUTO

mode.
● Selecting Fan Speed, Air Flow Mode, or A/C
RXA0167632—UN—26APR19 overrides and disables AUTO mode.
A/C ● Pressing Fan Speed or Air Flow Mode buttons on
CommandARM overrides and disables AUTO mode.
Air Conditioning (A/C) — enable or disable air
conditioning. See HVAC Settings—Air Conditioning in
Run Page Modules RXA0167628—UN—26APR19
ON/OFF
Operator’s Manual. Select ON to enable or OFF to disable.
KD34109,00004B9-19-21JUN22
Example:
HVAC Settings—Set Temperature

Use Set Temperature to select a desired cab
RXA0167633—UN—26APR19 temperature.
A/C
application.
A/C — toggle gives you direct access to enable/disable

the A/C.
Shortcut Keys RXA0167629—UN—26APR19
Add shortcut keys for this application to the shortcut bar Set Temperature
using Layout Manager. See the Generation 4 Display
Operator’s Manual. 1. Select Set Temperature module to display Set
Temperature page.
Example:
RXA0167634—UN—26APR19
ON

application.
RXA0167639—UN—26APR19
A/C — quick access to turn air conditioning ON and Adjust Set Temperature
OFF.
KD34109,00004B8-19-05MAY22 2. Select (+) to increase or (-) to decrease value.
HVAC Settings—Climate Control

Automation Close
RXA0167129—UN—25MAR19
Climate Control Automation automatically controls Fan

Speed, Air Flow Mode, and A/C based on Set 3. Select to close.
Temperature.
When enabled, the following conditions apply: Alternate Procedure to Modify:
Temperature Button — button on CommandARM to
90E-2
HVAC
adjust temperature. See CommandARM Climate, Procedure to Modify:

Radio, and Lighting Controls in CommandARM Controls
KD34109,00004BA-19-21JUN22
RXA0167641—UN—26APR19
Fan Speed
HVAC Settings—Air Flow Mode 1. Select Fan Speed module to display Fan Speed
Air Flow Mode is used to adjust distribution of air flow page.
inside the cab.
NOTE: Air conditioning automatically turns on when

defrost air flow mode is selected. RXA0167642—UN—26APR19
Adjust Fan Speed
2. Select (-) to decrease or (+) to increase speed
setting.
RXA0167630—UN—26APR19
Air Flow Mode
RXA0167129—UN—25MAR19
Select desired air flow mode on toggle bar. Close
3. Select to close.
RXA0169349—UN—28JUN19
AUTO
RXA0167643—UN—26APR19
If Climate Control Automation is enabled, toggle bar AUTO
changes to AUTO. If selected, Climate Control
Automation is overridden and disabled.
If Climate Control Automation is enabled, setting display
RXA0167636—UN—26APR19
Alternate Procedure to Modify:
Defrost/Operator/Floor
Fan Speed Button — button on CommandARM to
Defrost, Operator, and Floor — directs air flow at adjust fan speed. See CommandARM Climate, Radio,
operator and floor, and defrosts the windshield. and Lighting Controls in CommandARM Controls
KD34109,00004BC-19-21JUN22
RXA0167637—UN—26APR19
Operator/Floor
HVAC Settings—Air Conditioning
Operator and Floor — directs air flow at operator and IMPORTANT: To avoid possible compressor
floor. damage, turn air conditioning OFF if system is
not cooling properly.
Alternate Procedure to Modify:
Air Flow Mode Button — button on CommandARM to
NOTE: Air conditioning turns ON when defrost air flow
select mode of air flow. See CommandARM Climate,
mode is selected.
Radio, and Lighting Controls in CommandARM Controls
KD34109,00004BB-19-21JUN22
HVAC Settings—Fan Speed RXA0167628—UN—26APR19

ON/OFF
Fan Speed page allows control of the fan speed inside
the cab.
90E-3
HVAC
Select ON to enable or OFF to disable air conditioning.
RXA0167645—UN—26APR19
AUTO
If Climate Control Automation is enabled, toggle bar

KD34109,00004BD-19-18OCT19
90E-4
Performance Ballasting
General Ballasting Information Ballast is limited to the lowest capacity of either the tire
This section covers maximum weights, proper setup, or the tractor. Never exceed the carrying capacity of
and ballast limitations. each tire. If more weight is needed, consider installing
larger tires. See Tire Load Index in the Wheels and Tires
Adjust ballast to allow 1—5% slippage when operating. —General Information section of this Operator’s
Field tests show that maximum available horsepower Manual.
occurs in this range.
If the vehicle weight exceeds the MBW due to mounted
Major Considerations commodity tanks or other attachments, draft load shall
be limited to the MBW-equivalent draft to ensure long-
Proper ballast configuration is required to ensure
term damage to the drivetrain of the vehicle does not
proper:
occur. Care shall be taken to not operate the vehicle in
● Weight distribution for braking and steering authority. such a manner that a single tire/track section loses
● Traction to pull a high draft load efficiently. contact with the ground or permanent damage to the
vehicle structure may occur.
● Total weight and static balance for a given implement
type (towed, integral, or semi-integral). Always JL41210,0000AC4-19-05JUL22
reevaluate the ballast configuration when changing

from one implement or attachment to another.
General Guidelines
Effects of an improper ballast configuration:
IMPORTANT: Avoid damage to the tractor. Never
exceed the maximum ballast weight when
Too Little Ballast Too Much Ballast operating with heavy draft loads. The maximum
Excessive slip Soil compaction ballast weight (MBW) is 24500 kg (54000 lb).
Power transfer loss Power loss
Tread wear Increased load Tractor Weight Based on Engine Power
Fuel waste A guide to ballasting tractors is to use engine
Reduced productivity horsepower combined with necessary ballast for a
particular job–light, medium, or heavy. Start the process
Ballast Limitations with the lightest ballast that can handle the job. Then
add ballast as necessary to get the performance
IMPORTANT: Exceeding Maximum Ballast Weight desired.
(MBW) can void the warranty due to “overload”
conditions. The maximum ballast weight (MBW) NOTE: Correct weight split must be maintained when
is 24500 kg (54000 lb). adding or removing ballast. Cast weight is preferred
To extend drive-train life never operate the to obtain the best tractive performance.
tractor with continuous full-power loads below
7.1 km/h (4.4 mph). With any transmission, More or less weight is necessary when different travel
ground speed can slow briefly in hard-pull speeds are used. Higher speeds do not require as much
situations, but recover to faster speeds during weight. Final indication of correct ballast is slip
normal operations. measured in the field.
MBW is the vehicle weight and any added ballast at NOTE: Use radar or GPS to monitor slip. Checking slip
which the tractor power transmission system is qualified is manually possible, but only shows slip in the area
for operation under full draft load for extended periods of of the field where the check is performed. See
time. MBW: Measuring Slip in this Operator’s Manual section.
● Does not include the vertical load induced by hitch or The correct tractor weight to efficiently deliver power to
drawbar-mounted implements. the ground for draft applications depends on travel
● Includes fluids at the maximum level (fuel, DEF, and speed. Consult table for recommended weight based on
hydraulic oil) and operator. expected travel speed and drawbar/hitch load.
Adherence to MBW ensures satisfactory power-train life Recommended Travel Speeds

and minimal ground compaction. Increases in the Ground Speed
Implement Draft
vehicle weight, while decreasing speed results in higher km/h (mph)
torque through the power train components (such as Light 8.7 (5.4) and faster
gears/shafts/bearings/clutches). If ballast limitations are Medium 7.2—8.7 (4.5—5.4)
not followed and the vehicle is operated at slow speeds, Heavy 7.2 (4.5) and slower
premature failure of the power train can occur.
100-1
Light Implement—45 kg/PS (101 lb/hp) Implement Axel Weight Split %

Examples: Drawn planters, air seeders, and PTO- Rear 45
operated equipment that place small vertical loads on Fronta 60
Hitch-Mounted
the drawbar. Rear 40
a
Front weight requirements are determined by the weight of the hitch-
mounted implement; enough front weight needs to be added to
Engine Ballast Weight maintain steering control when transporting and even weight
PS (hp ISO) hp kg (lb) distribution during the field operation.
470 464 21150 (46628)
520 513 23400 (51588)
570 562 24500 (54000)
Medium Implement—47 kg/PS (105 lb/hp)

Examples: Implements that place a larger vertical load
on the drawbar such as disks, chisel plows, and field
cultivators.
Engine Ballast Weight

PS (hp ISO) hp kg (lb)
470 464 22090 (48700)
520 513 24440 (53881) RXA0160305—UN—26JUL17
570 562 24500 (54000)
Heavy Implement—49 kg/PS (110 lb/hp)

Examples: Implements that place large vertical loads on
the hitch or the drawbar such as rippers or hitch-
mounted planters.
Optional front axle reinforcements and frame supports
are recommended for high drawbar vertical loads or
high draft loads.
Engine Ballast Weight

PS (hp ISO) hp kg (lb) RXA0160304—UN—26JUL17
470 464 23030 (50772) Check front-to-rear balance. Correct front-to-rear

520 513 24500 (54000)
balance should be maintained whenever the ballast is
added or removed. When adding weight, install the
570 562 24500 (54000)
approved ballast on the front first, then work towards the
back until a desired weight is reached. A good way to
JL41210,0000AC5-19-15JUL22
check for the correct balance is by driving or walking
along the side of the tractor during operation and
visually checking to ensure the entire contact area of
General Weight Split Guidelines track (B) is in contact with the soil surface at all times
with the implement engaged.
Weigh the tractor for an accurate determination of the
amount and the type of ballast. Weight should be Adjustments may need to be made to the implement
distributed depending on how a tractor is equipped and gauge wheels or more front weight may have to be
the conditions in which it will be operated. added, if daylight can be seen between the front idler
wheel (A) and the soil surface.
Implement Axel Weight Split % WTEFIAT,000000D-19-31AUG21
Towed Fronta 55
Ballast Options
Quik-Tatch Suitcase Weights—Front
Quik-Tatch weights weigh 43 kg (95 lb) each. Up to: ● 26 weights can be installed.
100-2
Quik-Tach Suitcase Weights—Side Idler Wheel Weights—Front

● 12 or 16 weights (depending on the support chosen) Up to 1252 kg can be added to the front idlers. A 36 kg
can be added on each side of the undercarriage for a starter must be used. For more information on the use
total of 24 or 32 weights. Install an equal number of on idler wheel weight, see Idler Wheel Weight Use in
weights on each side of tractor. this Operator’s Manual section.
Weight Adjustment
Ballast Weight Adjustment kg (lb)

Location Type Weight kg (lb) Front Rear
Standard Weight Support 306 (675) +399 (880) -93 (-205)
Quik-Tatch Suitcase
43 (95 +60 (133) -17 (38)
Weights
Front
36 (80) +36 (+80) —
Idler Weights 72 (159) +72 (+159) —
205 (452) +205 (+452) —
Weight Support—12
80 (176) +51 (+112) +29 (+64)
weights
Side
Quik-Tatch Suitcase
43 (95) +27 (+60) +16 (+35)
Weights
KD34109,0001A4A-19-29JUN22
Ballasting Recommendations With Hitch-mounted implements require gauge wheels when

Implements implement is engaged so tractor does not support all of
implement weight.
IMPORTANT: Never operator tractor at weight
exceeding maximum ballasted weight of 24500 IMPORTANT: Avoid possible machine damage by
kg (54000 lb). Warranty may be voided due to checking implement to track clearance before
”overload” conditions. Reduce load if unable to field operation after making any hitch
obtain correct ballast without exceeding adjustments. Check full range of hitch for
maximum ballasted weight. interference, binding, or PTO separation
whenever an implement is attached.
To extend drivetrain and track life, avoid
excessive soil compaction, and reduce rolling
resistance: never operate with heavy loads and Follow suggested guidelines, if 26 front weights are
with continuous full-power below 7.1 km/h (4.4 insufficient to provide an even weight distribution under
mph). tracks when pulling a load:
Adjust implement gauge wheels to support most of its
Towed Implements weight with implement engaged.
Implements providing a light-to-medium draft load can Attach implement to tractor without quick-hitch to allow
require 12-20 front weights. Larger implements require implement to be attached 89 mm (3.5 in) closer to
20-26 front weights. tractor, reducing amount of weight transferred from front
of tractor.
NOTE: Additional front weight is used to counteract
Set sway blocks for partial sway or full sway, depending
weight transfer caused by implement draft.
on accuracy needed for an application. Full sway works
best for heavy draft implements. Normal hitch sway is
Additional side weights can be added to bracket on approximately 38 mm (1.5 in) without adding shims
outboard side of track frame if excessive traction slip between the bumper pads and draft links (desirable for
(greater than 5 percent) is encountered, as long as total most implements).
maximum weight is not exceeded.
Set hitch lateral float pins in upper holes to allow draft
Integral and Semi-Integral Implements links to float independently.
Most hitch-mounted implements require 26 front WTEFIAT,0000010-19-05JUL22
weights. Additional side weights can be added, as long
as total maximum weight is not exceeded.
100-3
Measuring Slip Track Slippage Chart

Track Revolutions
% Slip Result
(Step 5)
9-1/4 7
Add Ballast
9 10
GH15097,0000673-19-24AUG21
Quik-Tatch Weight Use

1
Standard Front Weight Support
3 2 Proper tractor balance under load is crucial for
RXA0117737—UN—13JUN11 maximizing tractor performance and minimizing ground
1. Mark drive wheel. pressure.
2. With the tractor working, mark a starting point on the Up to 26 Quik-Tatch weights can be added to front of
ground. tractor. Front weights are used to maintain total front-to-
rear tract contact depending on application.
CAUTION: Avoid possible personal injury. Stay
Towed implements that produce high draft loads or
clear of moving tractor/implement during this
implements that transfer high amounts of weight to rear
procedure.
axle, will require higher amounts of front weights.
3. Have an assistant follow tractor and mark ground
where drive wheel completes 10 full revolutions.
4 5 RXA0141895—UN—05JUN14
When required, install Quik-Tatch weights, balanced on
each side of center (A). First two weights must be
RXA0117738—UN—13JUN11
installed as a pair.
4. At same working speed go back with implement
raised. Line up the drive wheel mark with ground To hold six weights or fewer in position, insert retaining
mark, or make a new mark on the drive wheel. bolts (B) through holes and secure with a nut. Tighten to
230 N·m (170 lb·ft).
5. With tractor proceeding in a straight line with
implement raised, count the revolutions of the drive When eight or more weights are installed, insert
wheel between the two marks on the ground to the retainers between weights, one with threaded hole
nearest 1/4 track revolution. upward and other with threaded hole downward.
6. Use the second count and the chart to determine IMPORTANT: Do not add additional side or frame
slippage. weights in excess of factory available frame-
7. Adjust ballast to give 2 to 5 percent slippage. weight capacity. Structural damage of tractor
could result and warranty may be voided.
Track Slippage Chart
Track Revolutions
% Slip Result
(Step 5)
10 0
Remove Ballast
9-7/8 1
9-3/4 2
Correct Ballast
9-1/2 5
100-4
Side Weights—12 Weights Side Weight Chart (12 Weights)

Weight
Item
kg (lb)
Maximum ballast (both sides) 1112 (2452)
WTEFIAT,000000F-19-29JUN22
Idler Weight Use
RXA0160121—UN—06JUL17
RXA0142448—UN—12JUN14
IMPORTANT: Each idler wheel (C) requires six M24 x

100 mm cap screws (B) to install weight adapter
RXA0120259—UN—08SEP11 (A) to wheel hub.
NOTE: Up to twelve 43 kg (95 lb) Quik-Tatch weights
can be installed to each side of tractor track frames NOTE: A 36 kg (80 lb) adapter plate must be installed
with side-weight support. on wheel before idler wheel weights can be
installed.
Adding 12 weights (B) requires side-weight support (A)
on each side of tractor. This support uses four shorter Install adapter plate (A) to wheel hub using six M24 x
bolts to attach first six weights and four longer bolts (C) 100 mm cap screws (B). Tighten cap screws to 1050
to attach remaining six weights. Side weight support N·m (774 lb·ft).
holds up to 12 weights. Install weights (C) using M20 cap screws. Tighten
When adding cast ballast, it should always be added to weight mounting bolts to 450 N·m (332 lb·ft).
furthest point front of the center of gravity first. This will A maximum of one 72 kg (159 lb) and one 205 kg (452
help maintain contact throughout the length of the track lb) weight can be installed on inner and outer idler
when high draft loads are encountered. wheel.
Weight Mounting Bolts Torque Specification Idler Wheel Weight Chart

Bolts N·m (lb·ft) Weight
Item
Weight support mounting bolts 610 (450) kg (lb)
Weight mounting bolts 230 (170) Adapter plate 36 (80)
Idler wheel, with 2 weights (inner
626 (1380)
and outer each wheel)
Maximum ballast (both sides) 1252 (2760)
Side Weight Chart (12 Weights)
Weight JL41210,0000AC7-19-24AUG21
Item
kg (lb)
Side weight support (each) 40 (88)
Quik-Tatch weights (each) 43 (95)
Side-weight support with 12
556 (1226)
weights (one side)
100-5
Wheel Weight Holding Wrench (JDG10958) Towed Scrapers

Follow manufacturers instruction in attaching and using
scraper.
Non-Approved Uses
● Spray Tanks - Mounted forward of the grille screen.
● Spray Tanks - Unbalanced.
● Scrapers - Without proper tractor/scraper drawbar
and frame/axle supports (9RT: 470, 520, 570, and
640).
● Front Hitches - Are not approved.
● Tiling Plows - Are not approved.
RXA0100328—UN—03FEB09 ● Fully Mounted Hitch Implements - Center of
JDG10958 Wheel Weight Holding Wrench gravity greater than 609 mm (24 in) beyond hitch
points.
● Fully Mounted Hitch Implements - Total weight
exceeds 6350 kg (14000 lb)—Category 4 (Without
additional implement mounted lift assist).
● Fully Mounted Hitch Implements - Total weight
exceeds 6123 kg (13500 lb)—Category 3 (Without
additional implement mounted lift assist).
● 9RT: 470, 520, and 570 with Category 3 Hitch -
Deep ripping/plowing applications using full
horsepower (Use Category 4 hitch).
● Extreme Draft Loads - Requiring two tractors
hooked in tandem.
RXA0100331—UN—03FEB09
● Tow Hooks - Adding tow hooks is not an option.
The JDG10958 Holding Wrench (A) can be used when
JL41210,0000AD7-19-25AUG21
multiple inner and outer wheel weights are stacked on
the front idler wheel (A).
The Holding Wrench is designed to hold M20 wheel
weight cap screws in limited access areas while
Calculate Tractor Ballast Package
tightening cap screws to 610 N·m (450 lb·ft). CAUTION: Avoid physical injury or equipment
The wrench is available from your John Deere dealer. damage due to improper ballast or tire
pressure. Never:
GH15097,0000672-19-07OCT20
● Operate the tractor if the ballast package
causes instability or unsafe conditions.
● Exceed maximum axle load capacity.
Implement Guidelines
IMPORTANT: Under scraper or severe applications, Tractor efficiency and service life are increased when
tighten wheel bolts every 2 hours until all cap the:
screws remain at 610 N·m (450 lb·ft). ● Tractor is correctly ballasted for the work task.
● Weight is split appropriately between the front and
Front-Mounted Implements rear of the tractor.
Front frame reinforcement is recommended whenever
tractor has front-mounted dozer blades or spray tanks, Examples show correct method of integrating data from
is used in scraper applications, or is equipped with front tables and information from this Operator's Manual
frame ballast. section to determine best possible working ballast for
Reinforcement attaches to the underside of the front individual tractors and operations.
axle and to outside of the front frame behind the front
axle. See your John Deere dealer for parts and Example 1
assistance. Step 1: Tractor Configuration
1A—Show tractor options.
100-6
Model 9RT 570 See General Weight Split Guidelines in this section of
Hitch/PTO No/Yes this Operator’s Manual for ideal weight split.
Fuel Fill Full
Engine Power (PS/hp) 570 (562) Axle Front Rear
Weight Split % 74 26
1B—Show tread option.
3B—Calculate power to weight ratio. Divide the total
Tracks (mm (in)) tractor weight by Engine PS to find the weight to
762 (30) [Ag] 4500 power ratio. See General Guidelines in this section
of this Operator’s Manual for listings of Engine PS
1C—List ballast options. by model.
Axle Ballast Ratio (kg/PS (lb/hp)) 42 (94)

Front Rear
Weight
Yes — 3C—Find recommended implement draft and travel
Support speed with Engine power to weight ratio as
Quik-Tatch — calculated in Step 3B. See General Guidelines for
Ballast Suitcase 26 Tractor Weight Based on Engine Power in this
Weights Weights
36 (80) 1 pair
Idler Weights
72 (159) 1 pair —
kg (lb) Implement Draft Light
205 (452) 1 pair
Recommended Travel Speed
8.7 (5.4) and faster
km/h (mph)
Step 2: Calculate Total Tractor Weight
Find and show: 4—Adjust ballast.
● If the power to weight ratio calculated or weight split
● Unballasted tractor weight. See Unballasted Tractor
is not correct for the application, return to Step 2 and
Weight in this section of this Operator’s manual.
adjust the ballast package. Repeat until results are
● Ballast weights. See Ballast Options in this section of optimized for application.
● In field adjustments may still need be required in
● Add or subtract the front and rear axle weights to find order to achieve desired performance.
the adjusted tractor weight for each axle.
● Add the front and rear adjusted tractor weights to Example 2
calculate the total tractor weight.
Step 1: Tractor Configuration
Front Rear 1A—Show tractor options.

Axle
kg (lb) kg (lb)
Unballasted Tractor Weight 15284 (33701) 6685 (14740) Model 9RT 570
Weight Hitch/PTO No/Yes
399 (553) -93 (-172)
Support Fuel Fill Full
Ballast Quik-Tatch Engine Power (PS/hp) 570 (562)
Weights Suitcase 1560 (3440) -442 (-975)
Weights
Idler Weights 626 (1380) —
1B—Show tread options.
a a
Tractor Adjusted 17869 (39075) 6150 (13594)
Tracks (mm (in))
Weight Total 24019 (52669)
762 (30) [Ag] 4500
a
Weigh axle for actual load.
1C—List ballast options.
Step 3: Results
Axle
Front Rear
3A—Calculate weight split.
● Front axle: Divide the front axle weight by the total Weight
Yes —
tractor weight to find the weight split, then multiply Support
the result by 100. Ballast
Quik-Tatch
Suitcase 26 —
● Rear axle: Subtract the front axle result from 100. Weights
Weights
Idler Weights
— —
kg (lb)
100-7
Step 2: Calculate Total Tractor Weight Axle Front Rear

Find and show: Weight Split % 74 26
● Unballasted tractor weight. See Unballasted Tractor 3B—Calculate power to weight ratio. Divide the total
Weight in this section of this Operator’s manual. tractor weight by Engine PS to find the weight to
● Ballast weights. See Ballast Options in this section of power ratio. See General Guidelines in this section
this Operator’s Manual. of this Operator’s Manual for listings of Engine PS
● Add or subtract the front and rear axle weights to find by model.
the adjusted tractor weight for each axle.
Ballast Ratio (kg/PS (lb/hp)) 41 (94)
● Add the front and rear adjusted tractor weights to
calculate the total tractor weight.
3C—Find recommended implement draft and travel
speed with Engine power to weight ratio as
Front Rear calculated in Step 3B. See General Guidelines for
Axle Tractor Weight Based on Engine Power in this
kg (lb) kg (lb)
Unballasted Tractor Weight 15284 (33701) 6685 (14740) section of this Operator’s Manual.
Weight
399 (553) -93 (-172) Implement Draft Light
Support
Recommended Travel Speed
Ballast Quik-Tatch 8.7 (5.4) and faster
Weights Suitcase 1560 (3440) -442 (-975) km/h (mph)
Weightst
Idler Weights — — 4—Adjust ballast.
Tractor Adjusted 17243 (39075)a 6150 (13594)a ● If the power to weight ratio calculated or weight split
Weight Total 23393 (52669) is not correct for the application, return to Step 2 and
a
Weigh axle for actual load.
adjust the ballast package. Repeat until results are
optimized for application.
Step 3: Results ● In field adjustments may still need be required in
order to achieve desired performance.
3A—Calculate weight split. JL41210,0000AD5-19-01JUL22
● Front axle: Divide the front axle weight by the total
tractor weight to find the weight split, then multiply
the result by 100.
● Rear axle: Subtract the front axle result from 100.
Unballasted Tractor Weight Chart
NOTE: Unballasted weights are calculated by averaging
See General Weight Split Guidelines in this section of and are figured based on tractor with a full tank of
this Operator’s Manual for ideal weight split. fuel. Each tractor will be different. Have your tractor
weighed for exact weight splits.
762 mm (30 in) [Ag] 6500 Tracks

Hitch/PTO Option No/No Yes/No No/Yes Yes/Yes
Front 15470 (34034) 15367 (33807) 15316 (33695) 15367 (33807)
Weight
Rear 6396 (14071) 7157 (15745) 6898 (157176) 7505 (16511)
kg (lb)
Total 21866 (48105) 22524 (49553) 22214 (48871) 22872 (50318)
Weight Split (%) 71 / 29 68 / 32 69 / 31 67 / 33
914 mm (36 in) [Ag] 6500 Tracks

Front 15490 (34078) 15388 (33854) 15336 (33739) 15388 (33854)
Weight
Rear 6674 (14683) 7435 (16357) 7176 (15787) 7783 (17123)
kg (lb)
Total 22164 (48761) 22822 (50208) 22512 (49526) 23170 (50974)
Weight Split (%) 70 / 30 67 / 33 68 / 32 66 / 34
100-8
762 mm (30 in) 4500 Tracks

Front 15438 (33964) 15335 (33737) 15284 (33625) 15335 (33737)
Weight
Rear 6183 (13603) 6944 (15277) 6685 (14707) 7292 (16042)
kg (lb)
Total 21621 (47566) 22279 (49014) 21969 (48332) 22627 (49779)
Weight Split (%) 71 / 29 69 / 31 70 / 30 68 / 32
914 mm (36 in) 4500 Tracks

Front 15452 (33994) 15350 (33770) 15299 (33658) 15350 (33770)
Weight
Rear 6421 (14126) 7181 (15798) 6923 (15231) 7529 (16564)
kg (lb)
Total 21873 (48121) 22531 (49568) 22221 (48886) 22879 (50334)
Weight Split (%) 71 / 29 68 / 32 69 / 31 67 / 33
762 mm (30 in) [Scraper] 6500 Tracks

Front 15574 (34263) — — —
Weight
Rear 6314 (13891) — — —
kg (lb)
Total 21888 (48154) — — —
Weight Split (%) 71 / 29 — — —
JL41210,0000AD4-19-01JUL22
100-9
Worksheet to Calculate Ballast Changes NOTE: Complete this entire worksheet before adding or
changing any ballast.
IMPORTANT: Ballast should not exceed weight
required to result in recommended percent slip
at 7.1 km/h (4.4 mph) MINIMUM.
1. Determine desired weight per Engine HP. ____ % Front
2. Record desired weight per Eng-HP. See Ballasting Guide. _______
Front Rear Total
3. Multiply desired weight from step 2 by 55%. For rear weight, subtract front ________ ________ ________
weight from total weight.
4. Weight of tractor as determined from the Base Weight Options chart or weight ________ ________ ________
from scale.
5. Ballast needed (subtract tractor weight in step no. 4 from desired weight in ________ ________
step no. 3
6. Add ballast. ________ ________
7. Add ballast from step no. 6 to weights from step no. 4. ________ ________
NOTE: You are now ready to test for track slippage. See Measuring Track Slip in this section.
GH15097,000066C-19-05JUL22
100-10
Transport
Driving Tractor on Roads Remote Cylinders—Position control levers
appropriately to eliminate possibility of lowering an
implement during transport by inadvertently bumping
control lever(s). (See procedure in Six-Position SCV
Control Levers in Selective Control Valves section in this
Operator’s Manual.)
[Ag] Rear Hitch—Position or lock hitch in transport
position to eliminate possibility of lowering an implement
during transport by inadvertently bumping control lever.
(See procedure in Hitch section of this Operator’s
Manual.)
GH15097,000068D-19-26APR18
RXA0161723—UN—15JAN18
Towed Mass (EU 1322/2014)

Trailer/implement brake system determine maximum
permissible towable mass and maximum speed. There
may be legal limits in force that restrict maximum towed
mass and/or travel speeds to figures lower than those
quoted here.
Trailer/ Maximum Permissible

Implement Towed Mass Speed
Brake System Model
kg (lb) km/h (mph)
Unbraked 9RT: 470, 3500 (7716)
RXA0161724—UN—15JAN18 Inertia-Braked 520, and 8000 (17635) 25 (16)
Hydraulic 570 18400 (40565)
CAUTION: Avoid personal injury or death from
losing control of tractor. When driving tractor
EC82310,0000541-19-12JUL22
on roads:
● Wear Seat belts.
● Reduce speed when driving on icy, wet, or Towed Loads and Transport with Ballast
graveled surfaces.
● Ballast tractor correctly (See Performance CAUTION: Avoid possible injury from losing
Ballasting section in this Operator’s Manual.) control while towing a load. Stopping distance
increases with speed and weight of towed
● Prevent tracks from locking and skidding on
loads, and on slopes.
tractors transporting heavy loads.
● Avoid holes, ditches, sharp turns, hill sides, Tractor tracksmay lock and skid on slippery
and obstructions which may cause tractor to downhill slopes when tractors are transporting
roll over. heavy loads.
● Frequently check for traffic from the rear, Never transport at speeds exceeding the
especially in turns, and use turn signal implement's maximum transport speed. Before
lights. transporting a towed implement, refer to the
● Always operate flashing lights when implement Operator's Manual and implement
traveling on a highway or public roads, decals to determine the maximum transport
except where prohibited by law. speed. This tractor is capable of operating at
transport speeds exceeding the maximum
allowable transport speed for most towed
Lights—Use headlights and turn signals day and night.
implements. Use implement code in implement
Follow local regulations for equipment lighting and
Operator's Manual to determine the minimum
marking. Keep lighting and marking visible and in good
number of front weights required. Failure to
working order. Replace or repair lighting and marking
adhere to the implement's maximum transport
that has been damaged or lost. An implement safety
speed or to have correct ballast can result in:
lighting kit is available from your John Deere dealer.
● Loss of control of the tractor/implement
Brakes—Tap brake pedal to ensure they engage. Avoid combination.
hard application of brakes.
● Reduced or no ability to stop during braking.
110-1
Transport
● Implement tire failure. Transport Towed Equipment at Safe

● Damage to the implement structure or Speeds
components.
Guidelines for Towing Equipment without

Brakes:
● Do not transport at speeds greater than 32
km/h (20 mph).
● Must weigh less than 1.5 times the ballasted
tractor weight.
Guidelines for Towing Equipment with Brakes:

● If manufacturer does not specify a maximum
transport speed, do not transport at speeds
above 40 km/h (25 mph).
● When transporting at speeds up to 40 km/h
(25 mph) the fully loaded implement must
weigh less than 4.5 times the tractor weight.
● When transporting at speeds between 40 km/
h (25 mph) and 50 km/h (31 mph), the fully
loaded implement must weigh less than 3
times the tractor weight.
The tractor must be heavy and powerful enough

with adequate braking power for towed load. RXA0055336—UN—18FEB05
Add ballast to tractor or lighten implement load. Do not exceed maximum transport speed. This tractor is
capable of operating at transport speeds that exceed
Drive slowly enough to maintain safe control.
maximum allowable transport speed for most towed
Be alert for skids. Shift to a lower gear for
implements.
hillsides, rough ground, and sharp turns,
especially when transporting heavy equipment. Before transporting a towed implement, determine from
Never operate with transmission in neutral signs on implement or information provided in
position or with clutch disengaged. implement's operator manual the maximum transport
speed. Never transport at speeds that exceed
GH15097,000068E-19-16JUN22
implement's maximum transport speed. Exceeding
implement's maximum transport speed can result in:
● Loss of control of tractor/implement combination
Transporting Rear Mounted Implements ● Reduced or no ability to stop during braking
with Ballast ● Implement tire failure
● Damage to implement structure or its components
CAUTION: Avoid possible injury when
transporting heavy rear-mounted implements.
Drive slowly over rough ground, regardless of In the absence of manufacturer's information, observe
how much ballast is used. these transport speed limits:
● For towed equipment without brakes, do not
Add weight to front end if needed for stability. Heavy transport at speeds above 32 km/h (20 mph)
pulling and heavy rear-mounted implements tend to lift
front of tractor. Add proper ballast to maintain steering ● For towed equipment with brakes, do not
control. transport at speeds above 40 km/h (25 mph)
GH15097,000068F-19-10JAN17
Do not attempt transport if:
● The fully loaded implement without brakes weighs
more than 1.5 times weight of tractor
● The fully loaded implement with brakes weighs
more than 4.5 times weight of tractor
GH15097,0000691-19-03APR17
110-2
Transport
Safety Chain Use Tow Points
RXA0142307—UN—09JUN14 RXA0180443—UN—13NOV20
Wide Swing Drawbar
RXA0180444—UN—13NOV20
RXA0058318—UN—06NOV01 CAUTION: Avoid physical injury or equipment

Regular Drawbar damage. Only use tow points shown to
maneuver and tow the tractor on hard-surfaced
Route and attach safety chain (A) around drawbar or roads only.
drawbar support.
Before towing the tractor on hard-surfaced
CAUTION: Avoid possible accident and injury roads with the tow points:
by using a safety chain on drawn equipment. ● Cable needs to be removed from the storage
Use a safety chain with a strength rating equal position before use.
to or greater than the gross weight of ● Remove any trailers or mounted implements.
equipment. Provide enough slack in the chain
to permit turning. ● Never use a tow-rope; always use an
approved towbar.
IMPORTANT: Never use safety chain for towing or To free a mired tractor, see Freeing a Mired Tractor in
possible damage to tractor, implement, and this Owner’s Manual section
drawbar may result. Safety chain is provided
only for transport. Tow points are integrated into the front end of the tractor
to allow the tractor to be maneuvered and towed on
GH15097,0000692-19-13JUN19 hard-surfaced roads.
EC82310,0000F60-19-08JAN21
Tow Mode—Engine Will Start

IMPORTANT: Avoid damage to transmission and
hydraulic systems:
● Operate engine above 1250 rpm (provides
adequate system lubrication).
● Verify all pressure indicator lights are off.
● Never tow machine faster than 8 km/h (5
110-3
Transport
mph) for a maximum distance of 8 km (5 marks. If level is below MIN COLD mark, remove
miles). cap (C) and add hydraulic oil.
2. Attach tow bar to drawbar.
1. Verify hydraulic oil reservoir level is within normal
operation range. See Hydraulic System Oil Level in IMPORTANT: If machine has no electrical power, a
Service—Check section of this Operator’s Manual. 100 Amp electrical source must be connected.
See Battery Booster or Charger in Engine
2. Attach tow bar to drawbar. Operation section of this Operator's Manual.
3. With transmission in PARK, start machine.
3. Open load center next to operator seat. See Access
4. Operate engine above 1250 rpm. Load Center Fuses in Service—Electrical section of
5. Place shift lever in NEUTRAL. this Operator’s Manual.
4. Remove fuse 32 and install in fuse 22 location.
6. Steer and brake machine while being towed.
5. Remove 10 Amp spare fuse and install in fuse 21
7. After towing is complete, place shift lever in PARK. location.
RX32825,000018A-19-02SEP21 6. Install appropriate park brake release hand pump
kit components.
7. Turn key switch to on position.
Tow Mode—Engine Will Not Start 8. Follow kit instructions to manually release spring-
applied park brake.
CAUTION: Avoid injury. If hydraulic oil
temperature is less than -10°C (14°F), backup 9. Enable backup steering in Diagnostic Addresses on
pump will not turn on and brakes or steering Controller Diagnostics tab. See Diagnostic Center
will not function. If machine still must be in CommandCenter section of this Operator’s
moved, contact your John Deere dealer. Manual.
10. Select correct control unit:
IMPORTANT: Avoid machine damage: - TSB – two-track machines
● Never attempt to start machine by towing. - XSB – wheel and four-track machines equipped
● Never tow machine faster than 8 km/h (5 with ACS (ActiveCommand Steering)
mph) for a maximum distance of 8 km (5 - XSC – wheel and four-track machines equipped
miles). with AutoTrac
● Never tow machine without releasing park
brake. NOTE: When Back Up Mode is enabled, turning
steering wheel activates backup pump.
● Never operate or tow machine with a filter
restriction code. If lube or filter STOP or 11. Go to address 025 and select Back Up Mode ON.
Warning code displays, change appropriate
filter. See Service—Change section of this 12. Press Accept.
Operator's Manual. 13. Go to PTP 055 to monitor park brake pressure.
14. Pump power pack to displayed target value of 1800
NOTE: Special tools are required to release park brake. kPa (18 bar) (261 psi).
See your John Deere dealer. 15. Press X to close diagnostic windows.
16. Place shift lever in NEUTRAL and verify on corner
post display.
17. Steer and brake machine while being towed.
18. After towing is complete, place shift lever in PARK.
19. Cycle key switch on and off to return address 025 to
Back Up Mode Off.
20. Return all removed fuses to original locations.
RX32825,0000189-19-08JUN22
Emergency Brake Steering

RXA0169804—UN—01AUG19 This vehicle is equipped with an emergency steering
1. Ensure hydraulic oil reservoir level in sight gauge is system that will use individual control of the service
between FULL COLD (A) and MIN COLD (B) brakes, driven by operator inputs to the steering wheel,
110-4
Transport
to steer the vehicle in the event of a primary steering IMPORTANT: Attach tie downs only to frame “T”
system loss. hook slots and drawbar support when securing
tractor on carrier. Do not use suspended front
NOTE: When emergency brake steering is engaged, axle or track frames for tractor tie-down
vehicle will have restricted function. Stop tractor locations.
and place transmission in PARK as soon as
possible. Transport regulations vary - contact your local
transportation officials for your local transportation
IMPORTANT: Prolonged use of emergency brake requirements.
steering will damage the service brakes. If Load Tractor
brake steering has been used on your vehicle,
see your John Deere dealer. 1. Position ramps to flat bed carrier.
1.In the event of a primary steering system loss, the CAUTION: A second person is required to guide
vehicle will enter emergency brake steering driver onto flat bed carrier, make sure tractor is
automatically. It can also be intentionally activated centered on carrier, and watch for potential
when towing the vehicle. See TOWING TRACTOR- hazards that may cause injury but are not
18 SPEED POWERSHIFT TRANSMISSION in this apparent to driver.
Transport Section 85.
2. Drive tractor onto carrier.
2.The diagnostic trouble code TSB 523329.14 will be
displayed and will persist until the key is cycled when 3. Place transmission in PARK position.
emergency brake steering is active.
3.In emergency brake steering, ground speed will be CAUTION: Avoid accident or injury, stay clear of
limited to 5 km/h (3.1 mph). If you are above this moving suspension components when
speed, the tractor will begin to slow itself by releasing air from vent valve.
downshifting the transmission once emergency brake
steering becomes active.
4.Steering performance with emergency brake steering
will be reduced. The vehicle will not have the ability to
counter rotate. Use small steering commands until
you understand how the tractor and implement will
respond to your commands.
NOTE: This mode of steering is only to be used as

backup steering system. If brake steering becomes
active, see your John Deere dealer.
GH15097,0000695-19-29JUN22
Carrier Transport
RXA0114907—UN—09MAY11
CAUTION: To avoid accident or injury, use tie- 4. Press vent valve (A), located above suspension axle,
down devices to secure tractor to carrier. Drive to lower air suspension system to stops before
carefully. securing with tie-downs.
When transporting 9RT Series tractor on trailer, Tie-Down Locations
AirCushion suspension system must be bled
down to facilitate stability and proper tie down. CAUTION: To avoid accident or injury, use tie-
Avoid accident or injury, stay clear of moving down devices to secure tractor to carrier. Drive
suspension components when releasing air carefully.
from vent valve.
NOTE: When tying tractor to carrier, use protective
material to prevent paint damage.
Secure to flatbed carrier with chain or cable at:
110-5
Transport
RXA0185285—UN—31AUG21
● (D) “T” hook slots (left- and right-hand)
● (E) Frame loop (left- and right-hand)
● (F) Front-end bracket (left- and right-hand)
Reinflating 9RT Series AirCushion Suspension

System
IMPORTANT: Do not drive tractor before first

pumping up air suspension system or a
diagnostic code may set if driven when air
system is bled down.
RXA0160715—UN—28AUG17 NOTE: The 9RT Series AirCushion suspension must be

reinflated after transporting on a trailer.
Use this procedure to remove tractor from a trailer.

1. Remove all attached tractor tie-downs.
NOTE: The tractor can be driven off truck before

reinflating suspension, provided there is adequate
ground and trailer clearance while unloading.
2. Start engine and depress brake pedal to apply

brakes.
3. Shift transmission into Neutral, air compressor will
RXA0160716—UN—28AUG17
begin running to reinflate suspension back to
● (A) Drawbar support (left- and right-hand) calibrated position. Remain in neutral for a
● (B) Drawbar safety loop minimum of 3 minutes.
● (C) Hitch pin
110-6
Transport
IMPORTANT: Remain in operator's seat holding - Use the front suspended axle to tow the
brake pedal depressed with tractor shift lever in tractor.
neutral until suspension is fully inflated. - Attempt to start the tractor by towing.
- Attempt to clear excess soil material by
4. After 3 minutes tractor may be driven normally.
driving the tractor after the mired tractor is
freed.
- Use H-hook attached to the tow cable (If
Equipped)
● Always:
- Have an operator steer and brake the mired

tractor. If possible, maintain a minimum of
1250 engine rpm to provide power for
lubrication, steering, and brakes.
- Tow the tractor in as straight a line as
possible. Pulling at an angle causes heavy
side loads and can damage the suspended
axle or frame.
- Stop immediately if the tracks are spinning
and begin to dig below the surface level of
RXA0114912—UN—09MAY11 soil. Track damage can occur due to material
Air Suspension ingestion between the track and drive
system components.
A—Reference Hole
B—Upper Air Bag Shield - Remove excess material from the
C—Lower Air Bag Shield undercarriage and drive system components
of the freed tractor before driving the tractor
NOTE: Proper suspension calibration position occurs under its own power.
when reference hole (A) is half exposed. Air
compressor will stop. Actual suspension position To Free a Mired Tractor
will be affected by tractor ballast, implement load 1. Unhitch and move any towed implements.
and terrain.
2. Attach a tow chain or tow bar to the mired tractor. If
GH15097,0000696-19-29JUN22 the mired tractor is to be pulled:
● Forward: Use the tow cable (preferred if equipped
with a tow cable) or attach at the tow point.
Freeing a Mired Tractor ● Rearward: Attach at the drawbar (preferred if not
CAUTION: Freeing a mired tractor can involve equipped with a tow cable).
safety hazards. Avoid physical injury, tractor
3. Pull the mired tractor.
damage, or property damage:
EC82310,0000B46-19-26AUG21
● Verify that the tractor surroundings are clear
of people and other hazards before
attempting to free a mired tractor.
● A tow chain or tow bar could fail and recoil
from a stretched condition.
● A mired tractor could tip rearward.
● The towing machine could overturn.
IMPORTANT: H-casting is not to be used for stuck

tractor retrieval.
IMPORTANT: Avoid tractor damage or property

damage:
● Never:
- Use the front weight support as a tow point
or to push other tractors or implements.
110-7
Fuel, Lubricants, and Coolant—General Information
Determine Tractor Engine Type Coolant Heater
IMPORTANT: To determine tractor engine type, see An engine block heater (coolant heater) is an available
Engine Serial Number in Identification Numbers option to aid cold weather starting.
section of this Operator’s Manual. Seasonal Viscosity Oil and Proper Coolant
Concentration
Correct engine oil specification and oil change interval is
Use seasonal grade viscosity engine oil based on the
determined by a number of factors. One important
expected air temperature range between oil changes
consideration is type of engine aftertreatment installed.
To determine engine type, see Engine Serial Number in and a proper concentration of low silicate antifreeze as
Identification Numbers section of this Operator’s recommended. (See DIESEL ENGINE OIL and
Manual. ENGINE COOLANT requirements in this section.)
RX32825,0001798-19-14DEC16 Diesel Fuel Cold Flow Additive

Use John Deere Fuel-Protect Diesel Fuel Conditioner
(winter formula), which contains anti-gel chemistry, or
Minimizing the Effect of Cold Weather on equivalent fuel conditioner to treat non-winter grade fuel
Diesel Engines (No. 2-D in North America) during the cold-weather
season. This generally extends operability to about 10°
John Deere diesel engines are designed to operate C (18°F) below the fuel cloud point. For operability at
effectively in cold weather. even lower temperatures, use winter grade fuel.
However, for effective starting and cold-weather
operation, a little extra care is necessary. The following IMPORTANT: Treat fuel when outside temperature
information outlines steps that can minimize the effect drops below 0°C (32°F). For best results, use
that cold weather may have on starting and operation of with untreated fuel. Follow all recommended
your engine. See your John Deere dealer for additional instructions on label.
information and local availability of cold-weather aids.
Biodiesel
Use Winter Grade Fuel
When operating with biodiesel blends, wax formation
When temperatures fall below 0°C (32°F), winter grade can occur at warmer temperatures. Begin using John
fuel (No. 1-D in North America) is best suited for cold- Deere Fuel-Protect Diesel Fuel Conditioner (winter
weather operation. Winter grade fuel has a lower cloud formula) or equivalent at 5°C (41°F) to treat biodiesel
point and a lower pour point. fuels during the cold-weather season. Use B5 or lower
Cloud point is the temperature at which wax begins to blends at temperatures below 0°C (32°F). Use only
form in the fuel. This wax causes fuel filters to plug. winter grade petroleum diesel fuel at temperatures
Pour point is the lowest temperature at which below -10°C (14°F).
movement of the fuel is observed.
Winterfronts
NOTE: On average, winter grade diesel fuel has a lower Use of fabric, cardboard, or solid winterfronts is not
Btu (heat content) rating. Using winter grade fuel recommended with any John Deere engine. Their use
may reduce power and fuel efficiency, but should can result in excessive engine coolant, oil, and charge
not cause any other engine performance effects. air temperatures. This can lead to reduced engine life,
Check the grade of fuel being used before loss of power and poor fuel economy. Winterfronts may
troubleshooting for low-power complaints in cold- also put abnormal stress on fan and fan drive
weather operation. components potentially causing premature failures.
If winterfronts are used, they should never totally close
Air Intake Heater off the grill frontal area. Approximately 25% area in the
An air intake heater is an available option for some center of the grill should remain open at all times. At no
engines to aid cold weather starting. time should the air blockage device be applied directly
to the radiator core.
Ether
Radiator Shutters
An ether port on the intake is available to aid cold
weather starting. If equipped with a thermostatically controlled radiator
shutter system, this system should be regulated in such
CAUTION: Ether is highly flammable. Do not a way that the shutters are completely open by the time
use ether when starting an engine equipped the coolant reaches 93°C (200°F) to prevent excessive
with glow plugs or an air intake heater. intake manifold temperatures. Manually controlled
systems are not recommended.
If air-to-air aftercooling is used, the shutters must be
200-1
Fuel, Lubricants, and Coolant—General Information
completely open by the time the intake manifold air

temperature reaches the maximum allowable
temperature out of the charge air cooler.
For more information, see your John Deere dealer.
DX,FUEL10-19-13JAN18
Oil Filters
Filtration of oils is critically important for proper
operation and lubrication. John Deere brand oil filters
have been designed and produced specifically for John
Deere applications.
John Deere filters adhere to engineering specifications
for quality of the filter media, filter efficiency rating,
strength of the bond between the filter media and the
element end cap, fatigue life of the canister (if
applicable), and pressure capability of the filter seal.
Non-John Deere branded oil filters might not meet these
key John Deere specifications.
Always change oil filters regularly as specified in this
manual.
DX,FILT1-19-11APR11
200-2
Fuel
Diesel Fuel Sulfur Content for Tier 3 and Stage III A Engines
Consult your local fuel distributor for properties of the ● Use of diesel fuel with sulfur content less than 1000
diesel fuel available in your area. mg/kg (1000 ppm) is RECOMMENDED.
In general, diesel fuels are blended to satisfy the low ● Use of diesel fuel with sulfur content 1000—2000
temperature requirements of the geographical area in mg/kg (1000—2000 ppm) REDUCES the oil and filter
which they are marketed. change interval.
Diesel fuels specified to EN 590 or ASTM D975 are ● BEFORE using diesel fuel with sulfur content greater
recommended. Renewable diesel fuel produced by than 2000 mg/kg (2000 ppm), contact your John
hydrotreating animal fats and vegetable oils is basically Deere dealer.
identical to petroleum diesel fuel. Renewable diesel that
meets EN 590, ASTM D975, or EN 15940 is acceptable Sulfur Content for Tier 2 and Stage II Engines
for use at all percentage mixture levels.
● Use of diesel fuel with sulfur content less than 2000
Required Fuel Properties mg/kg (2000 ppm) is RECOMMENDED.
In all cases, the fuel shall meet the following properties: ● Use of diesel fuel with sulfur content 2000—5000
mg/kg (2000—5000 ppm) REDUCES the oil and filter
Cetane number of 40 minimum. Cetane number change interval.1
greater than 47 is preferred, especially for temperatures
● BEFORE using diesel fuel with sulfur content greater
below –20 °C (–4 °F) or elevations above 1675 m (5500
than 5000 mg/kg (5000 ppm), contact your John
ft.).
Deere dealer.
Cloud Point should be below the expected lowest
ambient temperature or Cold Filter Plugging Point Sulfur Content for Other Engines
(CFPP) should be a maximum 10°C (18°F) below the ● Use of diesel fuel with sulfur content less than 5000
fuel cloud point. mg/kg (5000 ppm) is RECOMMENDED.
Fuel lubricity should pass a maximum scar diameter of ● Use of diesel fuel with sulfur content greater than
0.52 mm as measured by ASTM D6079 or ISO 12156-1. 5000 mg/kg (5000 ppm) REDUCES the oil and filter
A maximum scar diameter of 0.45 mm is preferred. change interval.
Diesel fuel quality and sulfur content must comply
with all existing emissions regulations for the area in IMPORTANT: Do not mix used diesel engine oil or
which the engine operates. DO NOT use diesel fuel with any other type of lubricating oil with diesel fuel.
sulfur content greater than 10 000 mg/kg (10 000 ppm). Improper fuel additive usage may cause
Materials such as copper, lead, zinc, tin, brass and damage on fuel injection equipment of diesel
bronze should be avoided in fuel handling, distribution engines.
and storage equipment as these metals can catalyze
fuel oxidation reactions which can lead to fuel system DX,FUEL1-19-13JUL20
deposits and plugged fuel filters.

E-Diesel fuel
Supplemental Diesel Fuel Additives
DO NOT use E-Diesel (Diesel fuel and ethanol blend).
Diesel fuel can be the source of performance or other
Use of E-Diesel fuel in any John Deere machine may
operational problems for many reasons. Some causes
void the machine warranty.
include poor lubricity, contaminants, low cetane number,
and a variety of properties that cause fuel system
CAUTION: Avoid severe injury or death due to
deposits. These and others are referenced in other
the fire and explosion risk from using E-Diesel
sections of this Operator's Manual.
fuel.
To optimize engine performance and reliability, closely
Sulfur Content for Interim Tier 4, Final Tier 4, Stage follow recommendations on fuel quality, storage, and
III A and B, Stage IV, and Stage V Engines Above 560 handling, which are found elsewhere in this Operator's
kW Manual.
● Use ONLY diesel fuel with a maximum of 500 mg/kg To further aid in maintaining performance and reliability
(500 ppm) sulfur content. of the engine's fuel system, John Deere has developed
a family of fuel additive products for most global
Sulfur Content for Interim Tier 4, Final Tier 4, Stage markets. The primary products include Fuel-Protect
III B, Stage IV Engines, and Stage V Engines Diesel Fuel Conditioner (full feature conditioner in winter
● Use ONLY ultra low sulfur diesel (ULSD) fuel with a
1
maximum of 15 mg/kg (15 ppm) sulfur content. See DX,ENOIL12,OEM, DX,ENOIL12,T2,STD, or DX,ENOIL12,T2,
EXT for more information on Engine Oil and Filter Service Intervals.
200A-1
Fuel
and summer formulas) and Fuel-Protect Keep Clean blends above B20 might not fully comply with or be
(fuel injector deposit removal and prevention). permitted by all applicable emissions regulations.
Availability of these and other products varies by Expect up to a 12% reduction in power and an 18%
market. See your local John Deere dealer for availability reduction in fuel economy when using 100% biodiesel.
and additional information about fuel additives that
might be right for your needs. John Deere fuel conditioners or equivalent, which
contain detergent and dispersant additives, are required
DX,FUEL13-19-07FEB14 when using biodiesel blends from B10 to B100, and are
recommended when using lower biodiesel blends.
Biodiesel Use Requirements and Recommendations
Biodiesel Fuel
The petroleum diesel portion of all biodiesel blends
Biodiesel fuel is comprised of monoalkyl esters of long
must meet the requirements of ASTM D975 (US) or EN
chain fatty acids derived from vegetable oils or animal
590 (EU) commercial standard.
fats. Biodiesel blends are biodiesel mixed with
petroleum diesel fuel on a volume basis. Biodiesel users in the U.S. are strongly encouraged to
purchase biodiesel blends from a BQ-9000 Certified
Before using fuel containing biodiesel, review the
Marketer and sourced from a BQ-9000 Accredited
Biodiesel Use Requirements and Recommendations in
Producer (as certified by the National biodiesel Board).
Certified Marketers and Accredited Producers can be
Environmental laws and regulations can encourage or found at the following website: http://www.bq9000.org.
prohibit the use of biofuels. Operators should consult
with appropriate governmental authorities prior to using Biodiesel contains residual ash. Ash levels exceeding
biofuels. the maximums allowed in either ASTM D6751 or
EN14214 can result in more rapid ash loading and
John Deere Stage V Engines Operating in the require more frequent cleaning of the Exhaust Filter (if
European Union present).
Where the engine is to be operated within the Union on The fuel filter can require more frequent replacement
diesel or non-road gas-oil, a fuel with a FAME content when using biodiesel fuel, particularly if switching from
not greater than 8% volume/volume (B8) shall be used. diesel. Check engine oil level daily prior to starting
engine. A rising oil level can indicate fuel dilution of the
John Deere Engines with Exhaust Filter Except engine oil. Biodiesel blends up to B20 must be used
Stage V Engines Operating in the European Union within 90 days of the date of biodiesel manufacture.
Biodiesel blends up to B20 can be used ONLY if the Biodiesel blends above B20 must be used within 45
biodiesel (100% biodiesel or B100) meets ASTM days from the date of biodiesel manufacture.
D6751, EN 14214, or equivalent specification. Expect a
When using biodiesel blends up to B20, the following
2% reduction in power and a 3% reduction in fuel
must be considered:
economy when using B20.
● Cold-weather flow degradation
Biodiesel concentrations above B20 can harm the
engine’s emission control systems and should not be ● Stability and storage issues (moisture absorption,
used. Risks include, but are not limited to, more microbial growth)
frequent stationary regeneration, soot accumulation, ● Possible filter restriction and plugging (usually a
and increased intervals for ash removal. problem when first switching to biodiesel on used
engines)
John Deere Fuel conditioners or equivalent, which
contain detergent and dispersant additives, are required ● Possible fuel leakage through seals and hoses
when using biodiesel blends from B10 to B20, and are (primarily an issue with older engines)
recommended when using lower biodiesel blends. ● Possible reduction of service life of engine
components
John Deere Engines Without Exhaust Filter
Biodiesel blends up to B20 can be used ONLY if the Request a certificate of analysis from your fuel
biodiesel (100% biodiesel or B100) meets ASTM distributor to ensure that the fuel is compliant with the
D6751, EN 14214, or equivalent specification. Expect a specifications provided in this Operator’s Manual.
2% reduction in power and a 3% reduction in fuel
economy when using B20. Consult your John Deere dealer for John Deere fuel
products to improve storage and performance with
These John Deere engines can operate on biodiesel biodiesel fuels.
blends above B20 (up to 100% biodiesel). Operate at
levels above B20 ONLY if the biodiesel is permitted by The following must also be considered if using biodiesel
law and meets the EN 14214 specification (primarily blends above B20:
available in Europe). Engines operating on biodiesel ● Possible coking or blocked injector nozzles, resulting
200A-2
Fuel
in power loss and engine misfire if John Deere fuel blends up to B20 (20% BioDiesel). Further increase in
additives and conditioners or equivalent containing lubricity is limited for BioDiesel blends greater than B20.
detergent/dispersants are not used DX,FUEL5-19-07FEB14
● Possible crankcase oil dilution (requiring more
frequent oil changes)
● Possible lacquering or seizure of internal Handling and Storing Diesel Fuel
components
● Possible formation of sludge and sediments CAUTION: Reduce the risk of fire. Handle fuel
● Possible thermal oxidation of fuel at elevated carefully. DO NOT fill the fuel tank when engine
temperatures is running. DO NOT smoke while you fill the fuel
tank or service the fuel system.
● Possible compatibility issues with other materials
(including copper, lead, zinc, tin, brass, and bronze) Fill the fuel tank at the end of each day's operation to
used in fuel handling, distribution, and storage prevent water condensation and freezing during cold
equipment weather.
● Possible reduction in water separator efficiency
Keep all storage tanks as full as practical to minimize
● Possible damage to paint if exposed to biodiesel condensation.
● Possible corrosion of fuel injection equipment
Ensure that all fuel tank caps and covers are installed
● Possible elastomeric seal and gasket material properly to prevent moisture from entering. Monitor
degradation (primarily an issue with older engines) water content of the fuel regularly.
● Possible high acid levels within fuel system
When using biodiesel fuel, the fuel filter may require
● Because biodiesel blends above B20 contain more more frequent replacement due to premature plugging.
ash, using blends above B20 can result in more rapid
ash loading and require more frequent cleaning of Check engine oil level daily prior to starting engine. A
the Exhaust Filter (if present) rising oil level may indicate fuel dilution of the engine oil.
IMPORTANT: Raw pressed vegetable oils are NOT
acceptable for use as fuel in any concentration IMPORTANT: The fuel tank is vented through the
in John Deere engines. Their use could cause filler cap. If a new filler cap is required, always
engine failure. replace it with an original vented cap.
DX,FUEL7-19-13JAN18
When fuel is stored for an extended period or if there is
a slow turnover of fuel, add a fuel conditioner to stabilize
the fuel. Keeping the free water drained and treating the
Lubricity of Diesel Fuel bulk fuel storage tank quarterly with a maintenance
dose of a biocide will prevent microbial growth. Contact
Most diesel fuels manufactured in the United States,
your fuel supplier or John Deere dealer for
Canada, and the European Union have adequate
recommendations.
lubricity to ensure proper operation and durability of fuel
injection system components. However, diesel fuels DX,FUEL4-19-13JAN18
manufactured in some areas of the world may lack the
necessary lubricity.
IMPORTANT: Make sure the diesel fuel used in your

Fill Fuel Tank
machine demonstrates good lubricity
characteristics.
Fuel lubricity should pass a maximum scar diameter of

0.52 mm as measured by ASTM D6079 or ISO 12156-1.
A maximum scar diameter of 0.45 mm is preferred.
If fuel of low or unknown lubricity is used, add John
Deere Fuel-Protect Diesel Fuel Conditioner (or
equivalent) at the specified concentration.
Lubricity of BioDiesel Fuel
Fuel lubricity can improve significantly with BioDiesel
200A-3
Fuel
CAUTION: Avoid possible personal injury or

fire:
● Fuel is highly flammable, handle it with care.
● Do not refuel while smoking or when near
open flame or sparks.
● Stop engine when refueling.
● Clean up spilled fuel.
● Fill fuel tank outdoors.
● Keep machine clean of accumulated trash,
grease, and debris.
RXA0185237—UN—27AUG21
IMPORTANT: Prevent damage to tractor fuel Approximately 132 L (35 gal) of fuel remains when fuel
injection system, emissions system, and other level is at bottom of sight tube (A).
components. Never put Diesel Exhaust Fluid
1. Stand on platform.
(DEF) into fuel tank or fuel system. If DEF is
introduced into the fuel tank, see your John 2. Raise fuel cap lever lock (B).
Deere dealer.
3. Rotate cap counterclockwise.
4. Remove cap (C).
GH15097,000069B-19-27AUG21
Testing Diesel Fuel

A fuel analysis program can help to monitor the quality
of diesel fuel. The fuel analysis can provide critical data
such as calculated cetane index, fuel type, sulfur
content, water content, appearance, suitability for cold
weather operations, bacteria, cloud point, acid number,
particulate contamination, and whether the fuel meets
RXA0162573—UN—21MAR18
ASTM D975 or equivalent specification.
IMPORTANT: Prevent damage to engine and Contact your John Deere dealer for more information on
emissions system components. If tractor is diesel fuel analysis.
equipped with Final Tier 4/Stage V engine, use DX,FUEL6-19-13JAN18
only ultra low sulfur fuel as prescribed by decal
(D). Tractors with other emissions
specifications may use other fuels. See Diesel
Fuel in this Operator’s Manual section. Fuel Filters
To determine which engine your tractor is The importance of fuel filtration cannot be
equipped with, see Engine Serial Number in overemphasized with modern fuel systems. The
Identification Numbers section of this combination of increasingly restrictive emission
Operator’s Manual. regulations and more efficient engines requires fuel
system to operate at much higher pressures. Higher
pressures can only be achieved using fuel injection
NOTE: Final Tier 4/Stage V engine equipped tractors components with very close tolerances. These close
require DEF to operate. It is suggested that DEF manufacturing tolerances have significantly reduced
tank is filled each time tractor is refueled. See Fill capacities for debris and water.
DEF Tank - FT4/Stage V Engine in Diesel Exhaust
Fluid (DEF) section of this Operator’s Manual. John Deere brand fuel filters have been designed and
produced specifically for John Deere engines.
IMPORTANT: Each fuel tank is vented through filter To protect the engine from debris and water, always
at top of each tank. See Fuel Tank Vent Filters in change engine fuel filters as specified in this manual.
Service—Change section of this Operator’s DX,FILT2-19-14APR11
Manual.
NOTE: When digital display fuel gauge flashes,

approximately 20 to 25 gallons of fuel remains.
200A-4
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF)
Refilling Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Tank If an unapproved fluid, such as diesel fuel or coolant is
added to the DEF tank, contact your John Deere dealer
immediately to determine how to clean and purge the
system.
If water has been added to the DEF tank, a tank
cleaning is necessary. See Cleaning DEF Tank in this
manual. After refilling the tank, check the DEF
concentration. See Testing Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF).
The operator must maintain appropriate DEF levels at
all times. Check the DEF level daily and refill the tank as
needed. The filling port is identified by a blue colored
cap embossed with the following DEF symbol.
CAUTION: Avoid contact with eyes. In case of DX,DEF,REFILL-19-15JUL20
contact, immediately flush eyes with large
amounts of water for a minimum of 15 minutes.
Reference the Materials Safety Data Sheet
(MSDS) for additional information. Fill DEF Tank—Final Tier 4/Stage V Engine
Do not ingest DEF. In the event DEF is ingested, CAUTION: DEF contains urea. Do not get the
contact a physician immediately. Reference the substance in eyes. In case of contact,
Materials Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for immediately flush eyes with large amounts of
additional information. water for a minimum of 15 minutes. Do not take
internally. In event DEF is ingested, contact a
IMPORTANT: Use only distilled water to rinse physician immediately. Reference Materials
components that are used to deliver DEF. Tap Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for additional
water can contaminate DEF. If distilled water is information.
not available, rinse with clean tap water, then
thoroughly rinse with ample amounts of DEF. IMPORTANT: To determine tractor engine type, see
If DEF is spilled or contacts any surface other Engine Serial Number in Identification Numbers
than the storage tank, immediately clean the section of this Operator’s Manual.
surface with clear water. DEF is corrosive to Never put DEF in diesel fuel tank, or diesel fuel
painted and unpainted metallic surfaces and in DEF tank.
can distort some plastic and rubber
components.
If DEF is filled into engine fuel tank or other
fluid compartment, do not operate engine until
system is properly purged of DEF. Contact your
John Deere dealer immediately to determine
how to clean and purge the system.
Reasonable care should be taken when refilling the

DEF tank. Ensure that the DEF tank cap area is free of
debris before removing the cap. Seal containers of DEF
between use to prevent contamination and evaporation.
Avoid splashing DEF and do not allow DEF to come into
RXA0152790—UN—13JUL16
contact with skin, eyes, or mouth.
To avoid drastic changes in tractor performance, always
DEF is not harmful to handle, but DEF can be corrosive keep DEF level above topmost red mark on corner post
to materials such as steel, iron, zinc, nickel, copper, display (A). Monitor DEF level on cornerpost display and
aluminum, and magnesium. Use suitable containers to refill as necessary. Refill DEF tank every time tractor is
transport and store DEF. Containers made of refueled, see Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) — Use in
polyethylene, polypropylene, or stainless steel are Selective Catalytic Reduction (SCR) Equipped Engines
recommended. in this Operator’s Manual section.
Avoid prolonged contact with skin. In case of accidental
contact, wash skin immediately with soap and water.
Keep anything used to store or dispense DEF clean of
dirt and dust. Wash and rinse containers or funnels
thoroughly with distilled water to remove contaminants.
200B-1
IMPORTANT: If DEF is spilled or contacts any Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Tank in Service—Clean section of
surface other than the storage tank, this Operator’s Manual.
immediately clean the surface with clear water. DB71512,0000071-19-21APR21
DEF is corrosive to painted and unpainted
metallic surfaces and may distort some plastic
and rubber components.
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) — Use in
To fill DEF tank: Selective Catalytic Reduction (SCR)
1.Before using containers, funnels, etc. to dispense Equipped Engines
DEF, wash and rinse items thoroughly with distilled In order to maintain the emissions performance of the
water to remove contaminants. engine, it is essential to use and refill DEF in
accordance with the specification.
Diesel exhaust fluid (DEF) is a high purity liquid that is
injected into the exhaust system of engines equipped
with selective catalytic reduction (SCR) systems.
Maintaining the purity of DEF is important to avoid
malfunctions in the SCR system. Engines requiring DEF
shall use a product that meets the requirements for
aqueous urea solution 32 (AUS 32) according to ISO
22241-1.
The use of John Deere Diesel Exhaust Fluid is
recommended. John Deere Diesel Exhaust Fluid is
available at your John Deere dealer in a variety of
RXA0167615—UN—23APR19 package sizes to suit your operational needs.
2.Wipe DEF tank filler cap (B), area around cap and
filler neck to reduce chance of contaminating DEF. If John Deere Diesel Exhaust Fluid is not available, use
DEF that is certified by the American Petroleum Institute
3.Lift DEF tank cap latch lever and turn cap 90° (API) Diesel Exhaust Fluid Certification Program or by
counterclockwise. the AdBlue Diesel Exhaust Fluid Certification Program.
4.Lift cap from filler neck. Look for the API certification symbol or the AdBlue
name on the container.
IMPORTANT: Avoid overfilling DEF tank.
Completely filling DEF tank at lower
temperatures can cause a blockage in filler
neck. If temperatures are expected to reach
below -11°C (12°F), do not fill DEF tank more
than half way according to DEF level display on
corner post. Observe temperature guidelines to
assure ability to refill tank. RG30211—UN—08MAR18
In some cases, DEF is referred to by one or more of
5.Using funnel, carefully fill DEF tank. DO NOT over fill these names:
DEF tank. Best final fill level is determined by
● Urea
ambient air temperature guide:
● Aqueous Urea Solution 32
- Ambient air temperature at or above -11°C (12°F):
Completely fill tank. ● AUS 32
- Ambient air temperature below -11°C (12°F): ● AdBlue
Keep fill tank level below the filler neck. Although ● NOx Reduction Agent
main portion of DEF tank is heated to keep DEF ● Catalyst Solution
from freezing, filler neck is not heated. Fluid in
DX,DEF(T)-19-08APR22
neck may freeze, preventing refill DEF tank until
fluid melts.
6.Replace and securely latch DEF tank cap. Cap can
be locked with a padlock. Storing Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF)
7.Carefully clean any spills, using clean (preferably CAUTION: Avoid contact with eyes. In case of
distilled) water. contact, immediately flush eyes with large
amounts of water for a minimum of 15 minutes.
If an unapproved fluid, such as diesel fuel, or engine Reference the Materials Safety Data Sheet
coolant is added to vehicle DEF tank, see Diesel (MSDS) for additional information.
200B-2
Do not ingest DEF. In the event DEF is ingested, It is recommended to purchase DEF in quantities that
contact a physician immediately. Reference the will be consumed within 12 months.
Materials Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for DX,DEF,STORE-19-15JUL20
additional information.
IMPORTANT: It is unlawful to tamper with or remove

any component of the aftertreatment system. Testing Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF)
Do not use DEF that does not meet the required IMPORTANT: Using DEF with the correct
specifications or operate the engine with no concentration is critical to engine and
DEF. aftertreatment system performance. Extended
Never attempt to create DEF by mixing storage and other conditions can adversely
agricultural grade urea with water. Agricultural alter the DEF concentration.
grade urea does not meet the necessary
specifications and can damage the If DEF quality is questionable, draw a sample out of the
aftertreatment system. DEF tank or storage tank into a clear container. DEF
must be crystal clear with a light ammonia smell. If DEF
Do not add any chemicals or additives to DEF in
appears cloudy, has a colored tint, or has a profound
an effort to prevent freezing. Any chemicals or
ammonia smell, it is likely not within specification. DEF
additives added to DEF can damage the
in this condition should not be used. Drain tank, flush
with distilled water and refill with new or good DEF. After
Never add water or any other fluid in place of, or refilling the tank, check the DEF concentration.
in addition to DEF. Operating with a modified
DEF or using an unapproved DEF can damage If the DEF passes the visual and smell test, check the
the aftertreatment system. DEF concentration with a handheld refractometer
calibrated to measure DEF.
Storage information provided below is for reference and DEF concentration should be checked when the engine
is to be used as a guideline only. has been stored for extended periods, or if there is
suspicion the engine or packaged DEF fluid has been
It is preferred to store DEF out of extreme ambient
contaminated with water.
temperatures. DEF freezes at –11°C (12°F). Exposure
to temperatures greater than 30°C (86°F) can degrade Two approved tools are available through your John
DEF over time. Do not store DEF in direct sunlight. Deere dealer:
Dedicated DEF storage containers must be sealed ● JDG11594 Digital DEF Refractometer—A digital tool
between uses to prevent evaporation and providing an easy to read concentration
contamination. Containers made of polyethylene, measurement
polypropylene, or stainless steel are recommended to ● JDG11684 DEF Refractometer—Low-cost
transport and store DEF. alternative tool providing an analog reading
Ideal conditions for storage of DEF are:
Follow instructions included with either tool to obtain the
● Store at temperatures between –5°C and 30°C (23°F measurement.
and 86°F)
The correct DEF concentration is 31.8—33.2% urea. If
● Store in dedicated containers sealed to avoid the DEF concentration is not within specification, drain
contamination and evaporation the DEF tank, flush with distilled water and fill with new
or good DEF. If packaged DEF is not within
Under these conditions, DEF is expected to remain
specification, dispose of DEF packages and replace
useable for a minimum of 18 months. Storing DEF at
with new or good DEF.
higher temperatures can reduce its useful life by
approximately 6 months for every 5°C (9°F) DX,DEF,TEST-19-13JUN13
temperature above 30°C (86°F).
If unsure how long or under what conditions DEF has
been stored, test DEF. See Testing Diesel Exhaust Fluid Disposal of Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF)
(DEF). Although there is little issue with minor spillage of DEF
Long-term storage in the DEF tank (over 12 months) is on the ground, large amounts of DEF should be
not recommended. If long-term storage is necessary, contained. If large spills occur, contact local
test DEF prior to operating engine. See Testing Diesel environmental authorities for assistance with clean-up.
Exhaust Fluid (DEF). If a substantial quantity of DEF is not within
specification, contact the DEF supplier for assistance
with disposal. Do not dump substantial quantities of
200B-3
DEF onto the ground or send DEF to wastewater

treatment facilities.
DX,DEF,DISPOSE-19-13JUN13
200B-4
Engine Oil
Diesel Engine Oil Service Interval for between a minimum of 100 hours and a maximum of
Operation at High Altitude 250 hours.
To avoid excessive oil degradation and potential engine
IMPORTANT: Do not use any other engine oils
damage, reduce oil and filter service intervals to 50% of
during the initial break-in of a new or rebuilt
the original recommended values when operating
engine.
engines at altitudes above 1675 m (5500 ft).
Oil analysis may allow longer service intervals. John Deere Break-In Plus Engine Oil can be used for all
John Deere diesel engines at all emission certification
Use only approved oil types.
levels.
After the break-in period, use John Deere Plus-50 II or
Example of Original Hours Corresponding High Altitude
Hours other diesel engine oil as recommended in this manual.
125 60 DX,ENOIL16(T)-19-05APR22
150 75
175 85
200 100 Diesel Engine Oil — Interim Tier 4, Final
250 125 Tier 4, Stage IIIB, Stage IV, and Stage V
275 135
300 150
50oC 122oF
350 175
375 185 40oC 104oF
400 200
SAE 40
500 250 30oC 86oF
SAE 15W-40
SAE 30
SAE 10W-40
DX,ENOIL,SERV,HIALT-19-11NOV14 20oC 68oF

SAE 10W-30
SAE 5W-30
SAE 5W-40
SAE 0W-40
10oC 50oF
John Deere Break-In Plus Engine Oil — 0oC 32oF
SAE 10W
Interim Tier 4, Final Tier 4, Stage IIIB, Stage
IV, and Stage V -10oC 14oF
New engines are filled at the factory with John Deere
Break-In Plus Engine Oil. During the break-in period, -20oC -4oF
add John Deere Break-In Plus Engine Oil, as needed to
maintain the specified oil level. -30oC -22oF
Operate the engine under various conditions, -40oC -40oF

particularly heavy loads with minimal idling, to help seat
engine components properly.
During the initial operation of a new or rebuilt engine, Oil Viscosities for Air Temperature Ranges
change the oil and filter between a minimum of 100
hours and maximum equal to the interval specified for Failure to follow applicable oil standards and drain
John Deere Plus-50 II oil. intervals can result in severe engine damage that might
not be covered under warranty. Warranties, including
After an engine overhaul, fill the engine with John Deere the emissions warranty, are not conditioned on the use
Break-In Plus Engine Oil. of John Deere oils, parts, or service.
If John Deere Break-In Plus Engine Oil is not available, Use an oil viscosity based on the expected air
use an SAE 10W-30 viscosity grade diesel engine oil temperature range during the period between oil
meeting one of the following: changes.
● API Service Category CK-4 John Deere Plus-50 II is the recommended engine
● API Service Category CJ-4 oil.
● ACEA Oil Sequence E9 Extended service intervals may apply when John Deere
● ACEA Oil Sequence E6 Plus-50 II engine oil is used. Refer to the engine oil drain
interval table and consult your John Deere dealer for
If one of these oils is used during the initial operation of more information.
a new or rebuilt engine, change the oil and filter If John Deere Plus-50 II engine oil is not available,
200C-1
Engine Oil
engine oil meeting one or more of the following may be

used: NOTE: The 500-hour extended oil and filter change
interval is only allowed if all of the following
● API Service Category CK-4 conditions are met:
● API Service Category CJ-4 ● Use of diesel fuel with sulfur content less than 15
● ACEA Oil Sequence E9 mg/kg (15 ppm)
● ACEA Oil Sequence E6 ● Use of John Deere Plus-50 II oil
● Use of an approved John Deere oil filter
DO NOT use engine oil containing more than 1.0%
sulfated ash, 0.12% phosphorus, or 0.4% sulfur. Engine operation at high altitude decreases oil
change intervals. See Diesel Engine Oil Service Interval
Multi-viscosity diesel engine oils are preferred. for Operation at High Altitude for additional information.
Diesel fuel quality and fuel sulfur content must comply
with all existing emissions regulations for the area in Engine Oil and Filter Service Intervals
which the engine operates. John Deere Plus-50 II 500 hours
Other Oils 250 hours
IMPORTANT: Use only ultra low sulfur diesel (ULSD)
Oil analysis may extend the service interval of “Other Oils” to a
fuel with a maximum sulfur content of 15 mg/kg maximum not to exceed the interval of Plus-50 II oils. Oil analysis
(15 ppm). means taking a series of oil samples at 50-hour increments beyond
the normal service interval until either the data indicates the end of
DX,ENOIL14(T)-19-05APR22 useful oil life or the maximum service interval of John Deere Plus-50
II oils is reached.
IMPORTANT: To avoid engine damage:

Engine Oil and Filter Service Intervals —
Interim Tier 4, Final Tier 4, Stage IIIB, Stage ● Reduce oil and filter service intervals by 50%
when using biodiesel blends greater than
IV, and Stage V Engines B20
Failure to follow applicable oil standards and drain ● Oil analysis may allow longer service
intervals can result in severe engine damage that might intervals
not be covered under warranty. Warranties, including
the emissions warranty, are not conditioned on the use ● Use only approved oil types
of John Deere oils, parts, or service.
DX,ENOIL15,IT4,120toMAX(T)-19-05APR22
Recommended oil and filter service intervals are based
on a combination of oil pan capacity, type of engine oil
and filter used, and sulfur content of the diesel fuel.
Actual service intervals also depend on operation and
maintenance practices.
Approved Oil Types:
● John Deere Plus-50 II
● “Other Oils” include API CK-4, API CJ-4, ACEA E9,
and ACEA E6
Use oil analysis to evaluate the condition of the oil and

to aid in the selection of the proper oil and filter service
interval. Contact your John Deere dealer or other
qualified service provider for more information on
engine oil analysis.
Change the oil and oil filter at least once every 12
months even if the hours of operation are fewer than the
otherwise recommended service interval.
Diesel fuel sulfur content affects engine oil and filter
service intervals. Higher fuel sulfur levels reduce oil and
filter service intervals.
IMPORTANT: Use of diesel fuel with sulfur content

less than 15 mg/kg (15 ppm) is REQUIRED.
200C-2
Engine Coolant
Diesel Engine Coolant (Engine with Wet unavailable, use coolant concentrate or pre-mix coolant
Sleeve Cylinder Liners) that has a minimum of the following chemical and
physical properties:
Failure to follow applicable coolant standards and drain
intervals can result in severe engine damage that may ● Provides cylinder liner cavitation protection
not be covered under warranty. Warranties, including according to either the John Deere Cavitation Test
the emissions warranty, are not conditioned on the use Method or a fleet study run at or above 60% load
of John Deere coolants, parts, or service. capacity
● Is formulated with a nitrite-free additive package
Preferred Coolants
● Is formulated with a 2-ethylhexanoic acid (2-EHA)
The following pre-mix engine coolants are preferred: free additive package
● John Deere Cool-Gard II ● Protects the cooling system metals (cast iron,
● John Deere Cool-Gard II PG aluminum alloys, and copper alloys such as brass)
from corrosion
Cool-Gard II pre-mix coolant is available in several
concentrations with different freeze protection limits as Water Quality
shown in the following table. Water quality is important to the performance of the
cooling system. Deionized or demineralized water is
recommended for mixing with ethylene glycol and
Cool-Gard II Pre-Mix Freeze Protection Limit
propylene glycol base engine coolant concentrate.
Cool-Gard II 20/80 -9°C (16°F)
Cool-Gard II 30/70 -16°C (3°F) Coolant Drain Intervals
Cool-Gard II 50/50 -37°C (-34°F) Drain and flush the cooling system and refill with fresh
Cool-Gard II 55/45 -45°C (-49°F) coolant at the indicated interval, which varies with the
Cool-Gard II PG 60/40 -49°C (-56°F) coolant used.
Cool-Gard II 60/40 -52°C (-62°F) When Cool-Gard II or Cool-Gard II PG is used, the drain
interval is 6 years or 6000 hours of operation.
Not all Cool-Gard II pre-mix products are available in all
countries. If a coolant other than Cool-Gard II or Cool-Gard II PG is
used, reduce the drain interval to 2 years or 2000 hours
Use Cool-Gard II PG when a non-toxic coolant of operation.1
formulation is required.
IMPORTANT: Do not use cooling system sealing
Additional Recommended Coolants additives or antifreeze that contains sealing
The following engine coolant is also recommended: additives.
● John Deere Cool-Gard II Concentrate in a 40—60% Do not mix ethylene glycol and propylene
mixture of concentrate with quality water glycol base coolants.
Do not use coolants that contain nitrites.
IMPORTANT: When mixing coolant concentrate with
water, do not use less than 40% or greater than DX,COOL3(T)-19-04APR22
60% concentration of coolant. Less than 40%
gives inadequate additives for corrosion
protection. Greater than 60% can result in
coolant gelation and cooling system problems. John Deere Cool-Gard II Coolant Extender
Some coolant additives gradually deplete during engine
operation. For Cool-Gard II pre-mix and Cool-Gard II
Other Coolants
Concentrate, replenish coolant additives between drain
Other ethylene glycol or propylene glycol base coolants intervals by adding Cool-Gard II Coolant Extender.
may be used if they meet the following specification:
Cool-Gard II Coolant Extender should not be added
● Pre-mix coolant meeting ASTM D6210 requirements unless indicated by Cool-Gard II Test Strips. These test
● Is formulated with a 2-ethylhexanoic acid (2-EHA) strips provide a simple, effective method to check the
free additive package freeze point, additive levels, and pH of your engine
● Coolant concentrate meeting ASTM D6210 coolant.
requirements in a 40—60% mixture of concentrate 1
Coolant analysis may extend the service interval of other "Coolants"
with quality water to a maximum not to exceed the interval of Cool-Gard II coolants.
Coolant analysis means taking a series of coolant samples at 1000
hour increments beyond the normal service interval until either the
If coolant meeting one of these specifications is data indicate the end of useful coolant life or the maximum service
interval of Cool-Gard II is reached.
200D-1
Engine Coolant
Test the coolant solution at intervals of 12 months and recommended for mixing with ethylene glycol and
whenever excessive coolant is lost through leaks or propylene glycol base engine coolant concentrate.
overheating.
All water used in the cooling system should meet the
IMPORTANT: Do not use Cool-Gard II Test Strips following minimum specifications for quality:
with Cool-Gard II PG.
Chlorides <40 mg/L
Cool-Gard II Coolant Extender is a chemically matched Sulfates <100 mg/L
additive system for use with all Cool-Gard II coolants. Total solids <340 mg/L
Cool-Gard II Coolant Extender is not intended for use Total dissolved I hardness <170 mg/L
with nitrite-containing coolants.
pH 5.5—9.0
IMPORTANT: Do not add a supplemental coolant

additive when the cooling system is drained IMPORTANT: Do not use bottled drinking water
and refilled with any of the following: because it often contains higher concentrations
of total dissolved solids.
● John Deere Cool-Gard II
● John Deere Cool-Gard II PG Freeze Protection
The relative concentrations of glycol and water in the
The use of non-recommended supplemental coolant
engine coolant determine its freeze protection limit.
additives can result in additive drop-out, gelation of the
coolant, or corrosion of cooling system components.
Ethylene Glycol Freeze Protection Limit
Add the recommended concentration of Cool-Gard II
40% -24°C (-12°F)
Coolant Extender. DO NOT add more than the
recommended amount. 50% -37°C (-34°F)
60% -52°C (-62°F)
DX,COOL16(T)-19-11APR22
Propylene Glycol Freeze Protection Limit
40% -21°C (-6°F)
50% -33°C (-27°F)
Operating in Warm Temperature Climates 60% -49°C (-56°F)
John Deere engines are designed to operate using
recommended engine coolants. DO NOT use a coolant-water mixture greater than 60%
Always use a recommended engine coolant, even when ethylene glycol or 60% propylene glycol.
operating in geographical areas where freeze protection DX,COOL19-19-13JAN18
is not required.
IMPORTANT: Water may be used as coolant in

emergency situations only. Testing Coolant Freeze Point
Foaming, hot surface aluminum and iron
corrosion, scaling, and cavitation occur when
water is used as the coolant, even when coolant
conditioners are added.
Drain cooling system and refill with
recommended engine coolant as soon as
possible.
DX,COOL6-19-17FEB20
Water Quality for Mixing with Coolant TS1732—UN—04SEP13

Concentrate SERVICEGARD Part Number 75240
Engine coolants are a combination of three chemical
components: ethylene glycol (EG) or propylene glycol
(PG) antifreeze, inhibiting coolant additives, and quality
water.
Water quality is important to the performance of the
cooling system. Deionized or demineralized water is
200D-2
Engine Coolant
Disposing of Coolant
Recycle Waste
Improperly disposing of engine coolant can threaten the

environment and ecology.
Use leakproof containers when draining fluids. Do not
TS1733—UN—04SEP13
use food or beverage containers that may mislead
Image with a Drop of 50/50 Coolant Placed on the someone into drinking from them.
Refractometer Window
Do not pour waste onto the ground, down a drain, or into
any water source.
The use of a handheld coolant refractometer is the
quickest, easiest, and most accurate method to Inquire on the proper way to recycle or dispose of waste
determine the coolant freeze point. This method is more from your local environmental or recycling center, or
accurate than a test strip or a float-type hydrometer, from your John Deere engine distributor or servicing
which can produce poor results. dealer.
A coolant refractometer is available through your RG,RG34710,7543-19-26APR18
John Deere dealer under the SERVICEGARD tool
program. Part number 75240 provides an economical
solution for accurate freeze point determination in the
field.
To use this tool:
1. Allow cooling system to cool to ambient
temperatures.
2. Open radiator cap to expose coolant.
3. With the included dropper, collect a small coolant
sample.
4. Open the lid of the refractometer, place one drop of
coolant on the window, and close the lid.
5. Look through the eyepiece and focus as necessary.
6. Record the listed freeze point for the type of coolant
(ethylene glycol coolant or propylene glycol) being
tested.
DX,COOL,TEST(T)-19-04APR22
200D-3
Other Lubricants
Transmission and Hydraulic Oil Tractor transmission/axle and hydraulic reservoir is
factory filled with John Deere Hy-Gard JDM J20C oil.
EC82310,0000F57-19-29JUN22
Multipurpose Extreme Pressure (EP)

Grease
IMPORTANT: For automated lubrication systems,
different ambient air temperatures must be
considered.
RG30204—UN—08MAR18
Oils for Air Temperature Ranges
Use an oil viscosity based on the expected air

temperature range during the period between oil
changes.
The following oils are preferred:
● John Deere Hy-Gard
● John Deere Low Viscosity Hy-Gard
Other oils can be used if they meet one of the following: RG30199—UN—08MAR18
Greases for Air Temperature Ranges
● John Deere Standard JDM J20C
● John Deere Standard JDM J20D Use grease based on NLGI consistency numbers and
the expected air temperature range during the service
interval.
Use John Deere Bio Hy-Gard II oil when a
biodegradable fluid is required.1 John Deere SD Polyurea Grease is preferred.
DX,ANTI(T)-19-04APR22 The following greases are also recommended:
● John Deere HD Lithium Complex Grease
● John Deere Grease-Gard Premium Plus
Transmission and Hydraulic Oil Use
IMPORTANT: To ensure proper shift quality, an oil Other greases may be used if they meet the following:
meeting Hy-Gard or JDM J20C specifications
must be used. ● NLGI Performance Classification GC-LB
● ISO-L-X-BDHB 2 or DIN KP 2 N-10 Lithium Complex,
Shift quality problems and/or drivetrain damage
Non-Synthetic Base Oil (100 to 220 mm2/s @ 40°C)
may occur if the Hy-Gard or JDM J20C
specifications are not followed.
IMPORTANT: Some types of thickeners, base oils,
and additives used in greases are not
compatible with others. Mixing greases should
1
Bio Hy-Gard II meets or exceeds the minimum biodegradability of be avoided. Consult your grease supplier
80% within 21 days according to CEC L-33-T-82 test method. Bio before mixing different types of grease.
Hy-Gard II must not be mixed with mineral oils because doing this
reduces the biodegradability and makes proper oil recycling
DX,GREA1(T)-19-06APR22
impossible.
200E-1
Other Lubricants
Lubricant Storage
Your equipment can operate at top efficiency only when
clean lubricants are used.
Use clean containers to handle all lubricants.
Store lubricants and containers in an area protected
from dust, moisture, and other contamination. Store
containers on their side to avoid water and dirt
accumulation.
Make certain that all containers are properly marked to
identify their contents.
Properly dispose of all old containers and any residual
lubricant they may contain.
DX,LUBST-19-11APR11
Mixing of Lubricants
In general, avoid mixing different brands or types of oil.
Oil manufacturers blend additives in their oils to meet
certain specifications and performance requirements.
Mixing different oils can interfere with the proper
functioning of these additives and degrade lubricant
performance.
Consult your John Deere dealer to obtain specific
information and recommendations.
DX,LUBMIX-19-18MAR96
Alternative and Synthetic Lubricants

Conditions in certain geographical areas may require
lubricant recommendations different from those printed
in this manual.
Some John Deere brand coolants and lubricants may
not be available in your location.
Consult your John Deere dealer to obtain information
and recommendations.
Synthetic lubricants may be used if they meet the
performance requirements as shown in this manual.
The temperature limits and service intervals shown in
this manual apply to John Deere branded fluids or fluids
that have been tested and/or approved for use in John
Deere equipment.
Re-refined base stock products may be used if the
finished lubricant meets the performance requirements.
DX,ALTER-19-13JAN18
200E-2
Service—General Information
Service Sections Overview filters). When such a task is performed, record its
completion in an As Required Service chart.
CAUTION: Avoid personal injury. After
RX32825,00017C6-19-04JAN17
completing any service procedure, reinstall any
shields or covers that have been removed and
close and securely latch hood.
Identify Tractor Engine Emissions Status
IMPORTANT: This publication is not a detailed
service manual. Procedures shown cover IMPORTANT: To determine tractor engine type, see
routine maintenance and service. For more Engine Serial Number in Identification Number
detailed service information, purchase a Section of this Operator’s Manual.
Technical Manual through your John Deere
dealer. Some service procedures differ depending upon
Recommended service intervals are for average emissions equipment with which tractor engine is
conditions. Service more often if tractor is equipped.
operated under adverse conditions. RX32825,0001764-19-14DEC16
Service sections provide information on service

processes and procedures.
Open Hood
Fuel, Lubrication, and Coolants Sections:
Information on approved fluids for operation and CAUTION: Avoid injury. Close and latch hood
service. Also included are guides to selection of correct securely before starting engine.
service intervals for such procedures as engine oil refill.
Break-In Service: Perform listed services during first
100 hours of operation.
Service—Record Charts: Charts are provided to:
● Determine what service tasks must be performed
when.
● Record when services have been performed.
Service Procedure Sections: Various scheduled and

unscheduled service procedures are organized by
procedure type within six sections. Appropriate Service
sections and task names are referenced in Service RXA0180112—UN—12OCT20
Record Charts (example: Change: Engine Oil and If Equipped
Filter). Electrical section includes all service information
for lighting, fuses, and relays.
Troubleshooting Sections: Procedural
troubleshooting is provided, as well as information on
dealing with Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that may
display on the CommandCenter.
RX32825,00000A5-19-21JUN22
Service Tasks Performed As Required

IMPORTANT: Perform service tasks when
instruments or tractor function indicates that RXA0180141—UN—15OCT20
they are required, even if at a time other than If Equipped
specified in Service Interval charts.
1. Pull hood release (A).
Occasionally, operating conditions may require a
scheduled service to be performed sooner than 2. Using hood handles (B), raise hood
indicated on Service Interval charts (for example, air JL41210,0000A92-19-21APR21
210-1
Open Hood (If Equipped) Remove Front Engine Side Shield

CAUTION: Avoid physical injury and equipment
damage:
● Never start engine with shields removed or
hood open.
● Always close and securely latch hood.
1.Open hood. See Open Hood in this Operators

Manual section.
RXA0163079—UN—27APR18
1. Open cover (A) and insert key into lock (B).
2. Turn key clockwise to unlock hood latch (C).
3. Pull hood latch and lift hood to open.
CAUTION: Avoid injury. Close and latch hood

securely before starting engine.
4. Close hood and turn key counterclockwise to lock

hood latch.
BH38674,0000D20-19-27APR18
Remove Engine Access Panel

damage: RXA0163065—UN—26APR18
● Never start engine with shields removed or 2.Push latch (A).

hood open. 3.Remove top of engine side shield (B) from magnet
● Always close and securely latch hood. (C).
4.Lift engine side shield from alignment posts (D).
BH38674,0000D1C-19-22APR21
Remove Rear Engine Side Shield

damage:
● Never start engine with shields removed or
hood open.
● Always close and securely latch hood.
1.Open hood. See Open Hood in this Operator’s

RXA0166820—UN—05MAR19
Manual section.
1. Insert key (A) into the panel lock (B). 2.Remove front engine side shield. See Remove Front
Engine Side Shield in the Operator’s Manual section.
2. Panel latch (C) opens.
3. Remove engine access panel (D).
BH38674,0000D1B-19-21APR21
210-2
1. Remove the four rear cab panel screws (A).

2. Remove the cab rear panel (B).
EC82310,0000F61-19-21APR21
Access Battery Compartment
RXA0141979—UN—03JUN14
RXA0185233—UN—27AUG21
1. Unlatch both battery box latches (B).
3.Remove cap screws (A) and (B).
4.Remove rear engine side shield (B). 2. Lift the battery box cover (C).
5.When reinstalling rear engine side shield torque bolts EC82310,0000F5A-19-23APR21
(A) to 37 N·m (37 lb·ft) and (B) to 25 N·m (18 lb·ft).
BH38674,0000D1D-19-27AUG21
Jack Up Tractor—Lifting Points and
Support Stand Placement (EU 1322/2014)
Remove Cab Rear Panel CAUTION: Use approved lifting equipment only.
Jack up tractor on firm, level ground only.
Before doing any further work on tractor,
secure it using suitable support stands.
Special John Deere tools shown can be used
for this purpose. Support stands are available
from your John Deere dealer.
Recommended lifting points for jacking up tractor. Use

appropriate and suitable lifting device.
RXA0170334—UN—06SEP19
210-3
RXA0162455—UN—08MAR18
Underside, Lifting Points
A— Raise rear of tractor (example: to remove or adjust

tracks)
B— Raise right-hand side of front support frame
(example: to remove or adjust right-hand track)
C— Raise left-hand side of front support frame
(example: to remove or adjust left-hand track)
CAUTION: Never attempt to lift tractor using

front weights, front weight support, or the
cooling package cleanout cover.
RXA0138268—UN—17JAN14 D— Raise front frame (example: to lift center of tractor

Front Lift Point to install support stands)
E— Front frame support stand placement
F— Rear axle housing support stand placement
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. See Service
Batteries and Connectors in Service—Electrical
CAUTION: Avoid personal injury. Always use

appropriate equipment to install, change, or
uninstall weights. If appropriate equipment is
not available, have job performed by your John
Deere dealer.
RXA0143913—UN—24JUL14
Rear Lift Point 2. Remove front weights.
3. Lift tractor until approximately 200 mm (8 in)
clearance exists between belt tread and ground.
210-4
RXA0162402—UN—01MAR18
4. Install JDG1277 Front Support Stands to front frame
support leaving M20 x 100 mm cap screws (H)
RXA0080095—UN—31MAR05
slightly loose.
STC fittings are used on steel lines, hose connections
and come in a variety of sizes. JDG1885 STC tool (A) is
designed as a spacer to move release ring (B) inward
which releases retaining ring (C). Purchase tool from
IMPORTANT: Do not use tool to pry fittings apart.

Prying with tool may damage fitting and tool.
NOTE: If retaining ring, back up ring (F) or O-ring (E) are

damaged. See your John Deere dealer for
replacement kit, and replace all three parts.
1. Insert correct STC tool between release ring and

RW76248—UN—12AUG99 fitting.
5. Install JDG1276 Rear Support Stands to rear of
tractor frame. 2. Remove hose or line from connector.
6. Install pins (G) in cone stands. 3. Before connecting STC fitting and mating check
surfaces for:
7. Tighten four attaching cap screws.
● Nicks
EC82310,0000515-19-11JUN21
● Scratches
● Flat spots
Service and Connect STC (Snap-to- 4. Check for wear or damage:
Connect) Fittings
● O-ring
CAUTION: Do not disconnect STC (Snap-to- ● Back up ring
Connect) fitting when under pressure. Failure to ● Retaining ring
relieve pressure before disconnecting fitting
may result in personal injury, damage to 5. Check for contaminates:
equipment or both.
● Female end (D)
● Male end (G)
6. Place release ring on male end fitting.

7. Push fitting halves together until a definite snap and
solid stop is felt.
8. Pull back on hose to make sure that fitting halves are
locked together.
RX32825,000175C-19-23JUN22
210-5
Transmission Calibration IMPORTANT: Do not operate tractor if oil level is

When to Calibrate below “Min Cold” mark (B) in sight gauge with
engine off.
Transmission calibration is recommended when:
NOTE: Reduce engine speed to slow idle, shut engine
● A clutch solenoid or valve is replaced.
OFF, and wait 5 minutes for oil to stabilize.
● Shift quality has degraded.
● Transmission filters are replaced. CAUTION: Perform transmission calibration
● Transmission hydraulic fluid is changed. with tractor in an open, outdoor area on flat
● Transmission system control unit (PTP) is replaced. ground. Do not permit others near tractor
● Transmission is removed for maintenance or during procedure.
replaced for any reason. Verify park brake is functioning properly.
Check Oil Level and Warm-Up Procedure Before While calibrating, remain in the operator's seat.
Calibration. Depending on transmission-hydraulic oil
temperature at start of procedure, calibration
typically takes 12-15 minutes.
IMPORTANT: Serious damage to transmission may

result if oil level is inadequate.
5. Make sure Efficiency Manager is disabled.
RXA0142195—UN—10JUN14
1. Check oil level sight gauge in hydraulic oil reservoir.
Oil level should be between Full Cold (A) and Min.
Cold (B) marks.
NOTE: Only calibrate transmission if shift

characteristics change after transmission oil and
RXA0142149—UN—10JUN14
filter change.
Do not perform oil check soon after transporting
tractor in 15th or a higher gear.
IMPORTANT: Poor shift quality or transmission

damage may occur if incorrect transmission-
hydraulic oil is used, see Transmission and
Hydraulic Oil in Other Lubricants section of this
2. Heat hydraulic oil, see Warm-Up Transmission-

Hydraulic System in Transmission—General
Information section of this Operator’s Manual. RXA0142150—UN—10JUN14
3. When oil is at 50°C (122°F), drive to a level surface. 6. Press Menu (A) and System tab (B).
7. Select Diagnostic Center icon (C).
NOTE: DO NOT depress brake pedal during this portion
of oil warming procedure. If brake pedal is
depressed, additional oil will flow to axles and result
in inaccurate oil level reading.
4. Shift transmission lever to PARK. Set engine speed

at 1800 rpm and run for 5 minutes.
210-6
RXA0174965—UN—11FEB20
12. When CAL (H) appears on CommandCenter
display, transmission calibration is ready to begin.
RXA0174962—UN—11FEB20 13. Adjust throttle to 1650 engine rpm.
8. Select Controllers tab (D).
9. Select Transmission-PST Control (PTP.001) (E) CAUTION: If “P” is NOT displayed on corner
from list. post display, do not proceed with calibration.
Leave shift lever in PARK. Lever movement to F
position will result in unintended tractor
movement. Return to Step 2.
14. Move shift lever to N position. P should be displayed

on the corner post PDU display.
15. Move shift lever to F position to start calibration.
16. If CLD appears, transmission oil temperature has
dropped to less than 50°C (122°F) PTP will halt
calibration until temperature has increased
sufficiently to allow calibration to restart. If oil
temperature (available in PTP Address 33) is more
RXA0174963—UN—11FEB20
than a few degrees below 50°C (122°F), manually
10. Select Address 025 (F) in drop-down menu. heat oil.
CAUTION: Leave shift lever in PARK. Placing NOTE: Once calibration begins, do not manually
shift lever in F or R results in tractor movement. change throttle position, move shift lever, or
depress clutch pedal. Calibration will be aborted.
NOTE: If calibration aborts due to a fault (for example:

no engine or transmission activity is heard for a
period of 30 seconds or longer), a three-letter fault
message is displayed. Record code. Another
calibration attempt may be made if desired, see
Abort Transmission Calibration in this section of
RXA0174964—UN—11FEB20
11. PTP should appear on CommandCenter display.
Press PTP (G).
IMPORTANT: Do not leave seat. Operator presence

must be detected in this step to allow
calibration to continue.
210-7
19. When END (J) appears, calibration is complete.
NOTE: Use correct calibration exit procedure to avoid

generating unnecessary Diagnostic Trouble Codes
(DTCs).
20. Move shift lever from F to PARK.

21. Throttle down.
22. Press Accept (K) to save and exit calibration.
NOTE: Display shows instructions for operator and

RXA0174966—UN—12FEB20 malfunctions that have occurred. If a malfunction is
17. When calibration starts, C1H (I) appears. C1H displayed during calibration, new data is not stored.
indicates Clutch 1 Hold calibration is in progress. As
calibration continues, clutch hold calculations for 23. Turn off the engine. PTP will store new calibration.
clutches C2, CR, CA, CB, CC, CL, CM, and CH
follows. Display indicates which step is being
performed during process.
18. When all nine clutch hold stage calibrations are
complete, C1F displays as next phase of calibration
begins. C1F indicates that Clutch 1 Fill time
calibration is in progress. As calibration continues,
clutch fill calculations for clutches C2, CR, CA, CB,
CC, CM, and CH follows. Display indicates which
step is being performed during process.
RXA0174967—UN—12FEB20
Calibration Fault Meaning Instruction

No action required. Wait for automatic warm-up to warm oil
Transmission oil is below 50°C (122°F). Automatic warm-up
CLD to 50°C (122°F). Calibration begins automatically once
is in progress.
temperature is reached.
Transmission oil temperature is below minimum Manually heat hydraulic oil to 50°C (122°F), see manual
OIL
temperature of 10°C (50°F) to begin automatic warm-up. Warm-up for Calibration at beginning of this section.
Engine speed is not within required range of 1600-1700 rpm
SPD Set engine speed to 1650 rpm.
to begin or continue calibration.
Clutch pedal is not UP or was depressed by operator during Make sure that clutch pedal is fully UP, and do not depress
CLU
calibration. during calibration.
NOP Operator is not in seat when calibration is initiated. Remain seated during transmission calibration.
Replace transmission filters. Retry calibration after filter
FLT Transmission oil filters are restricted.
replacement.
SV81855,0000256-19-12JUL22
210-8
Abort Transmission Calibration problem, and fuel system and filters are found to be
PTP aborts calibration, and makes no changes to stored correct - or if (even without a DTC present) tractor does
calibration values from last complete calibration if: not run correctly or fails to start, fuel injection system
may need to be bled of air.
● Significant tractor motion is detected
1. Turn key switch to run position. Electric fuel pump
● Address number is incremented or decremented by starts and bleeds air from the fuel system.
operator
● System detects problem during calibration 2. Allow pump to run for 30 seconds to 1 minute before
attempting to restart engine. If the problem persists,
● Shift lever is moved out of gear see your John Deere dealer.
● Engine speed moves above or below calibration
SV81855,00001F2-19-05MAR19
limits
If calibration aborts, transmission system reverts to last

good calibration. If recalibration is still required, a new Identify Zinc-Flake Coated Fasteners
calibration procedure must be started. Calibration
cannot be restarted from point at which it stopped.
SV81855,0000257-19-20JAN15
Do Not Modify Fuel System

IMPORTANT: Increasing horsepower, or altering any
aspect of fuel and air delivery on emissions
certified engines beyond factory rating, causes
emission levels beyond what is approved by
United States Environmental Protection Agency
(EPA) or equivalent agency. Violations of
RXA0073812—UN—03MAR04
regulations may result in substantial fines to
persons or companies committing such Standard cap screws (A) are of a reflective silver color.
violations. Zinc Plated cap screws (B) are of a reflective bright
Tractor warranty is void if power level is silver or gold color.
changed from factory specifications. Zinc-Flake Coated cap screws (C) are of a dull silver or
Do not attempt to service injection pump or fuel gold color.
injectors yourself. Special training and special
tools are required. See your John Deere dealer. NOTE: Zinc-Flake Coated fasteners are tightened to
lubricated specifications, unless otherwise noted.
RX32825,000175E-19-01AUG17 See Torque Value Charts in this Operator’s Manual
section.
RX32825,0001761-19-08NOV17
Bleed Fuel System
If Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) indicates fuel system
Metric Bolt and Screw Torque Values
4.8 8.8 9.8 10.9 12.9
4.8 8.8 9.8 10.9 12.9
210-9
Class 4.8 Class 8.8 or 9.8 Class 10.9 Class 12.9

Bolt or Screw Hex Heada Flange Hex Heada Flange Hex Heada Flange Hex Heada Flange
Size Headb Headb Headb Headb
N·m lb·in N·m lb·in N·m lb·in N·m lb·in N·m lb·in N·m lb·in N·m lb·in N·m lb·in
M6 3.6 31.9 3.9 34.5 6.7 59.3 7.3 64.6 9.8 86.7 10.8 95.6 11.5 102 12.6 112
N·m lb·ft N·m lb·ft N·m lb·ft N·m lb·ft
M8 8.6 76.1 9.4 83.2 16.2 143 17.6 156 23.8 17.6 25.9 19.1 27.8 20.5 30.3 22.3
N·m lb·ft N·m lb·ft N·m lb·ft
M10 16.9 150 18.4 13.6 31.9 23.5 34.7 25.6 46.8 34.5 51 37.6 55 40.6 60 44.3
N·m lb·ft
M12 — — — — 55 40.6 61 45 81 59.7 89 65.6 95 70.1 105 77.4
M14 — — — — 87 64.2 96 70.8 128 94.4 141 104 150 111 165 122
M16 — — — — 135 99.6 149 110 198 146 219 162 232 171 257 190
M18 — — — — 193 142 214 158 275 203 304 224 322 245 356 263
M20 — — — — 272 201 301 222 387 285 428 316 453 334 501 370
M22 — — — — 365 263 405 299 520 384 576 425 608 448 674 497
M24 — — — — 468 345 518 382 666 491 738 544 780 575 864 637
M27 — — — — 683 504 758 559 973 718 1080 797 1139 840 1263 932
M30 — — — — 932 687 1029 759 1327 979 1466 1081 1553 1145 1715 1265
M33 — — — — 1258 928 1398 1031 1788 1319 1986 1465 2092 1543 2324 1714
M36 — — — — 1617 1193 1789 1319 2303 1699 2548 1879 2695 1988 2982 2199
The nominal torque values listed are for general use only with the assumed Replace fasteners with the same or higher property class. If
wrenching accuracy of 20%, such as a manual torque wrench. higher property class fasteners are used, tighten these to the
DO NOT use these values if a different torque value or tightening procedure is strength of the original.
given for a specific application.
For lock nuts, for stainless steel fasteners, or for nuts on U-bolts, see the
tightening instructions for the specific application.
● Make sure that fastener threads are clean.
● Apply a thin coat of Hy-Gard or equivalent oil under the head and on the threads of the fastener, as shown in the following image.
● Be conservative with the amount of oil to reduce the potential for hydraulic lockup in blind holes due to excessive oil.
● Properly start thread engagement.
a
Hex head column values are valid for ISO 4014 and ISO 4017 hex head, ISO 4162 hex socket head, and ISO 4032 hex nuts.
b
Hex flange column values are valid for ASME B18.2.3.9M, ISO 4161, or EN 1665 hex flange products.
DX,TORQ2(T)-19-09MAY22
Unified Inch Bolt and Screw Torque Values
210-10
SAE Grade 1a SAE Grade 2b SAE Grade 5, 5.1 or 5.2 SAE Grade 8 or 8.2
c
Bolt or Screw Hex Head Flange Hex Headc Flange Hex Headc Flange Hex Headc Flange
Size Headd Headd Headd Headd
N·m lb·in N·m lb·in N·m lb·in N·m lb·in N·m lb·in N·m lb·in N·m lb·in N·m lb·in
1/4 3.1 27.3 3.2 28.4 5.1 45.5 5.3 47.3 7.9 70.2 8.3 73.1 11.2 99.2 11.6 103
N·m lb·ft N·m lb·ft
5/16 6.1 54.1 6.5 57.7 10.2 90.2 10.9 96.2 15.7 139 16.8 149 22.2 16.4 23.7 17.5
3/8 10.5 93.6 11.5 102 17.6 156 19.2 170 27.3 20.1 29.7 21.9 38.5 28.4 41.9 30.9
7/16 16.7 148 18.4 163 27.8 20.5 30.6 22.6 43 31.7 47.3 34.9 60.6 44.7 66.8 49.3
1/2 25.9 19.1 28.2 20.8 43.1 31.8 47 34.7 66.6 49.1 72.8 53.7 94 69.3 103 75.8
9/16 36.7 27.1 40.5 29.9 61.1 45.1 67.5 49.8 94.6 69.8 104 77 134 98.5 148 109
5/8 51 37.6 55.9 41.2 85 62.7 93.1 68.7 131 96.9 144 106 186 137 203 150
3/4 89.5 66 98 72.3 149 110 164 121 230 170 252 186 325 240 357 263
7/8 144 106 157 116 144 106 157 116 370 273 405 299 522 385 572 422
1 216 159 236 174 216 159 236 174 556 410 609 449 785 579 860 634
1-1/8 305 225 335 247 305 225 335 247 685 505 751 554 1110 819 1218 898
1-1/4 427 315 469 346 427 315 469 346 957 706 1051 775 1552 1145 1703 1256
1-3/8 564 416 618 456 564 416 618 456 1264 932 1386 1022 2050 1512 2248 1658
1-1/2 743 548 815 601 743 548 815 601 1665 1228 1826 1347 2699 1991 2962 2185
The nominal torque values listed are for general use only with the assumed Replace fasteners with the same or higher property class. If
wrenching accuracy of 20%, such as a manual torque wrench. higher property class fasteners are used, tighten these to the
DO NOT use these values if a different torque value or tightening procedure is strength of the original.
given for a specific application.
For lock nuts, for stainless steel fasteners, or for nuts on U-bolts, see the
tightening instructions for the specific application.
● Make sure that fastener threads are clean.
● Apply a thin coat of Hy-Gard or equivalent oil under the head and on the threads of the fastener, as shown in the following image.
● Be conservative with the amount of oil to reduce the potential for hydraulic lockup in blind holes due to excessive oil.
● Properly start thread engagement.
a
Grade 1 applies for hex cap screws over 6 in (152 mm) long, and for all other types of bolts and screws of any length.
b
Grade 2 applies for hex cap screws (not hex bolts) up to 6 in (152 mm) long.
c
Hex head column values are valid for ISO 4014 and ISO 4017 hex head, ISO 4162 hex socket head, and ISO 4032 hex nuts.
d
Hex flange column values are valid for ASME B18.2.3.9M, ISO 4161, or EN 1665 hex flange products.
DX,TORQ1(T)-19-09MAY22
210-11
Service—Break-In (100 Hours or Less)
Perform Break-In Services After service is performed, reset appropriate service
interval hours display to zero. See Service Intervals in
IMPORTANT: To confirm which engine your tractor the CommandCenter section of this Operator’s Manual.
is equipped with, see Engine Serial Number in
Identification Numbers section of this After the break-in period, use John Deere Plus-50 II or
Operator's Manual. other diesel engine oil as recommended in this manual.
EC82310,0000F52-19-29JUN22
Initial break-in service interval of a new or
rebuilt wet sleeve engine with John Deere
Break-In Plus must last at least 100 hours to
assure surface mating of rings and liners has Perform Track Systems Break-In
had an opportunity to occur. 100 hour minimum
applies to all new or rebuilt John Deere engines. Break-In Overview
Maximum service interval is the same as
service interval recommended for your engine IMPORTANT: Improper track break-in may cause
listed in Engine Oil and Filter Service Intervals damage or reduction of track component life.
for your engine. For subsequent oil changes, Damage caused by improper break-in is not
see Engine Oil and Filter Service Intervals in covered under machine warranty.
Engine Oil section of this Operator's Manual.
Track system break-in takes place during first season of
Engine is ready for normal operation. During first 100 use. Correct break-in helps reduce amount of initial
hours of operation: drive lug wear. During break-in, drive lugs and idlers
undergo a “polishing in” process which:
● Operate engine at heavy loads without reaching
sustained maximum load. ● Scours out excess rubber flash on rubber wheels.
● Avoid idling engine longer than 5 minutes. If engine ● Embeds fine dust particles in rubber surfaces to
will idle longer than 5 minutes, stop engine. remove tackiness of new rubber.
● Closely observe coolant temperature during ● Reduces frictional heating in track system.
operation.
Initial Break-In
● Check engine air intake system hoses and clamps.
See Service—Check Section of this Operator’s IMPORTANT: Avoid track and track system damage.
Manual. Do not road tractor for extended distances until
● Check for fluid leaks. break-in period is completed. Even after break-
● Tighten drive and idler wheel-to-hub cap screws after in period is completed, dry lubricant or soil is
3 hours, after 10 hours and daily for first week of required to prevent heat generated damage.
operation. See Service—Tighten section of this
Operator’s Manual. When operating with new or cleaned tracks or other
● Follow tracks systems break-in procedures. See frictional components, follow these operational
Perform Track Systems Break-In in this section of guidelines for first 100 hours:
this Operator’s Manual. DO:
● Use tractor in field with loose soil conditions.
Daily or 10 Hour Service
● Avoid transport and roading operations.
Perform normal daily or 10 hour services. See 10 Hour
or Daily Service in Service—Record Charts section of ● Apply dry lubricant to track system if transport is
this Operator’s Manual. required or if tractor is unable to be operated in
conditions with loose soil1.
For first 100 hours of tractor operation, also perform ● Apply dry lubricant to track system every 16 km (10
these additional services daily or every 10 hours: miles) if unable to avoid driving long distances (over
● Drain water separator. See Water Separator in 16 km (10 miles)).
Service—Check section of this Operator’s Manual. ● If unable to avoid driving long distances, reduce
● Check coolant level. See Service—Check section of speed by 6.5 km/h (4 mph)2.
this Operator’s Manual. ● Ensure that track is properly aligned.
● Lubricate hitch (if equipped) components. See
Service—Lubricate section of this Operator’s
Manual. 1
Dry lubricant may consist of: Soil, oil-dry, cat litter, talc powder, other
● Inspect tracks for any damage. See Perform Track clay based lubricants.
2
Systems Break-In in this section of this Operator’s Reduce 6.5 km/h (4 mph) from maximum speed shown on weight
Manual. chart in Tracks—General Information. Do not exceed maximum
recommended speed shown in implement Operator's Manual, if
towing implement
210A-1
Service—Break-In (100 Hours or Less)
DO NOT:
● Attempt long-distance transport (more than 16 km
(10 miles)).
● Exceed maximum transport speed shown in
implement Operator's Manual, if towing implement.
Most implements have max transport speed of 24-32
km/h (15-20 mph).
● Operate in environments where tractor is not
exposed to loose soil without adding dry lubricant
every 15 minutes.
● Operate with track on edge of road.
● Operate at speeds above those shown in Weight
Charts in Tracks—General Information section of this
Operators Manual.
After Break-In
IMPORTANT: After initial 100 hour break-in and

alignment, long-term break-in process (up to
400 hours) will likely occur. During this period,
maximize exposure of tracks to soft soil and
minimize high speed, heavily loaded transport
operation. See General Track Use Guidelines in
Tracks—General Information of this Operators
Manual.
TS36762,000034B-19-16JUN22
210A-2
Service—Record Charts
Service Record Chart Overview Service Interval Chart
The service record chart is provided to: Charts show which service tasks must be completed at
what engine operating hours or years. If a service task
● Record when services have been performed. indicates a year and an hourly interval, adhere to
● Document additional service details as needed. whichever interval occurs first. Perform service on items
at multiples of the original requirement.
Suggested Documentation
First word of each task title (For example: CHECK or
● Engine Oil and Filter Change: Indicate which oil was LUBRICATE) directs the person performing service to
used for refill and record date and hours of operation the appropriate Service Procedure section in this
at each service. Operator’s Manual. Upon completion of a service task,
● As Required Service: Record services and repairs verify that there are no additional tasks to perform at the
that are performed at other than regular service same time.
intervals.
Record service tasks when completed on the Service
● Yearly Service: The listed service tasks are Record Chart found in this section of this Operator’s
performed annually or at some multiple of years. Manual.
Record service date and hours.
Use the engine hour meter display to determine when
10-hour (Daily) and 50-hour Service Tasks service must be performed. The hour meter operates
whenever the engine is running and shows the
It is not recommended to record 10-hour (daily) and 50- accumulated hours of engine operation. Although the
hour service tasks on the service record chart. If hour meter is factory set to 250 hours, it can be reset to
desired, record the completion of these services in a any desired elapsed time. See Service Intervals in
separate notebook. CommandCenter section of this Operator’s Manual.
RX32825,0000022-19-05APR21
Operating Hours or Interval

Service Task As
Re- Daily
Year/s quired or 10 50 250 500 1000 1500 3000 5000 6000
CHECK engine oil level •
CHECK hydraulic system oil level •
DRAIN fuel water separator •
CHECK track wear and trash
•
buildup
CHECK drive and idler wheels and
•
mid-rollers
CHECK track alignment •
LUBRICATE heavy duty lift link pins •
[Ag]a
LUBRICATE hose support bracket •
[Scraper]
b
LUBRICATE rear hitch •
CLEAN AirCushion suspension
system air compressor pump and •
inlet filter and air bags
CHECK secondary brakec •
CHECK transmission PARK system •
CHECK AirCushion suspension
•
system
LUBRICATE track tension cylinder •
fittings
LUBRICATE PTO drive shaft [Ag]c •
CHANGE engine oil and filterd 1 •
CHANGE fuel filters •
CHANGE optional fuel water
•
separator
CHECK AirCushion suspension
•
system walking beam bumper stops
CHECK engine air intake system •
210B-1
Operating Hours or Interval

Service Task As
Re- Daily
Year/s quired or 10 50 250 500 1000 1500 3000 5000 6000
CHECK water pump weep hole •
TIGHTEN drive wheel nuts, idler
•
wheel, and mid-roller cap screws
TIGHTEN drawbar support cap
•
screws
CLEAN dual beam radar sensorc •
CHECK engine coolant freeze point 1 •
CHANGE cab recirculation air filter 1 •
CHANGE cab fresh air filter 1 •
CHANGE engine primary and 1 •
secondary air filters
CHANGE DEF dosing unit filtere 3 •
CALIBRATE transmission •
CHANGE fuel tank vent filter •
CHECK auxiliary drive belt and
•
drive belt tensioner
CHANGE hydraulic system oil and
•
filters
CHANGE transmission hydraulic
•
vent filter
CHANGE SCV pilot valve filter •
CHECK drive wheel, idler wheel
•
hub, and mid-roller oil level
e
CHANGE DEF tank vent filter •
CHANGE DEF in-line filtere 3 •
CHANGE engine crankshaft
•
damperf
f
CHECK engine brake •
CHANGE engine coolantg 6 •
CHECK Drawbar Sensor
1
Calibration [Scraper]f
ELECTRIC service batteries and
1
connections
CHECK seat belts 1
CHECK engine and exhaust
•
compartments for debris
a
If hitch is in use.
b
Normal lubrication is every 250 operating hours. If used daily, lubricate every 50 operating hours.
c
If equipped.
d
Service in accordance with information in appropriate Diesel Oil and Filter Service Intervals topic in Engine Oil section of this Operator’s Manual.
Record oil used in Service—Record Charts - Engine Oil and Filter
e
Final Tier 4/Stage V engine
f
See your John Deere dealer
g
INITIAL change interval is 6 years or 6000 operating hours, provided cooling system is topped off using only John Deere Cool-Gard II and premix.
SCHEDULED interval (2 years or 2000 operating hours) can be extended up to 6 years and 6000 operating hours, depending upon coolant being
used. See Drain Intervals for Diesel Engine Coolant in Engine Coolant section of this Operator’s Manual.
JL41210,0000A79-19-18JUL22
Service Record Chart Date Hours Notes
Record details of service intervals in the space

provided. If more space is required, use a separate
notebook.
210B-2
Date Hours Notes Date Hours Notes
210B-3
Date Hours Notes Date Hours Notes
EC82310,0000B12-19-05AUG20
210B-4
Service—Clean
Cleaning Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Tank concentration is 31.8% — 33.2%. See your
authorized dealer for more information.
CAUTION: Avoid contact with eyes. In case of
contact, immediately flush eyes with large 9. If DEF is not within specification, does not appear
amounts of water for a minimum of 15 minutes. clear, or does not have a slight ammonia smell,
Reference the Materials Safety Data Sheet contact your authorized dealer.
(MSDS) for additional information. DX,DEF,CLEANTANK-19-18SEP19
IMPORTANT: If DEF is spilled or contacts any

surface other than the storage tank,
immediately clean the surface with clear water. DEF Tank Filler Neck Filter
DEF is corrosive to painted and unpainted If DEF fill slows, clean tank filler neck filter.
metallic surfaces and can distort some plastic
and rubber components. 1. Place transmission in Park and shut off engine.
Spilled DEF, if left to dry or if only wiped away

with a cloth, leaves a white residue. Improperly
cleaned DEF spill can interfere with diagnosis
of Selective Catalytic Reduction (SCR) system
leakage problems.
If foreign material or fluid has been added to the DEF

tank, drain the DEF tank, flush, and fill with new DEF.
If DEF quality is in question, pull a sample out of the
DEF tank and place into a clear container. DEF should
be crystal clear with a light ammonia smell. If DEF
appears cloudy, has a colored tint, or has a profound
RXA0167615—UN—23APR19
ammonia smell, it is likely not within specification. DEF
in this condition should not be used. 2. Open DEF tank cap (A).
1. Remove drain plug (if equipped), and drain or siphon

bad DEF from DEF tank.
NOTE: Cleaning can take place with DEF tank installed

or removed.
2. Clean DEF tank with new DEF.

DEF must pass visual, smell, and concentration
checks before running the engine. See Diesel
Exhaust Fluid (DEF) – For Use In Selective Catalytic
Reduction (SCR) Equipped Engines in the Fuels,
Lubricants, and Coolants Section for more
RXA0180368—UN—04NOV20
information.
3. Turn filter retainer (B) counterclockwise until it
3. Drain or siphon DEF tank. unlocks, then pull straight out of DEF tank.
NOTE: Repeat steps 2—3 until DEF tank has been

cleaned.
4. Early version: Change DEF dosing unit filter and

DEF tank header suction screen.
Later version: Change DEF dosing unit filter and
DEF inline filter.
5. If removed, install DEF tank drain plug.
6. If removed, install DEF tank.
7. Fill DEF tank with new DEF.
RXA0180369—UN—04NOV20
8. Check DEF concentration with DEF refractometer,
4. Clean filler neck filter (C) with warm water to remove
such as JDG11594 or JDG11684. The correct DEF
any debris.
220A-1
Service—Clean
5. Install in reverse order. Clean Display

SV81855,000027F-19-31AUG21
IMPORTANT: Always clean display screen with
power off. Cleaning screen while operating
could result in unintended button selections.
Tractor Exterior
To clean display, power down and wipe screen with a
IMPORTANT: Avoid damage to the engine, soft cloth sprayed with a non-ammonia based cleaner,
components, and tractor exterior. such as John Deere glass or multipurpose cleaner.
● Never direct liquid spray to the engine air DX,PC,CLEAN,DISP-19-21OCT16
intake area. If water is sprayed into the
engine air intake, drain filter housing and
allow housing and filter to dry before starting
engine. Engine Cooling System—13.6 L Engine
● For high-pressure washer use: always use Turn engine off.
reduced pressure and spray at a 45—90°
angle. Never spray pressurized water directly
at:
- Electronic/electrical components and
connectors.
- Bearings and hydraulic seals.
- Fuel injection pumps.
- Exhaust outlet.
- Engine air intake.
- Fluid tanks’ fill openings and breathers.
- Any sensitive parts and components.
RXA0180466—UN—19NOV20
● Never use strong soaps, chemical
detergents, or cleaning agents containing Clean grille screen (A) using a brush or compressed air.
acids, caustics, or abrasives. It is best to use Clean trash from engine compartment shields.
commercially available non-detergent car
wash products which will not remove
protective wax, and which may be applied to
paint finish.
● Wash tractor regularly, particularly if it has been

exposed to herbicides, pesticides, road salt, or other
chemical agents.
● Never wash the tractor in direct sunlight.
● Rinse all cleaning agents away promptly. Never allow
them to dry on the painted surface.
● Waxing tractor occasionally is recommended to
remove residue from and further protect paint finish.
Never use waxes containing abrasive compounds.
● Inspect paint surface during washing or waxing for
chips and scratches. Repaint any areas where paint
RXA0160276—UN—21JUL17
has been damaged.
IMPORTANT: Use caution when oil-fuel cooler is
See your John Deere dealer for cleaners, waxes, and opened. Rubber hose may contact air
touch-up paints to help enhance paint finishes and conditioner line when cooler is at a 30° angle,
which are compatible with your equipment. and can cause damage to the line fitting if
extended too far.
RX32825,0001777-19-21APR21
Release hood latch and raise hood.
220A-2
Service—Clean
Dual Beam Radar Sensor

IMPORTANT: Inspect radar sensor horns for dirt or
debris build up, which affects accuracy
performance.
Avoid use of high-pressure washer nozzle
pointed directly at radar.
Avoid damage to radar and wiring harness
when using sharp tools to remove dirt or
packed mud around radar.
1.Check radar sensor for damage.

RXA0160274—UN—21JUL17
Release air conditioning condenser retaining clips (B) to
swing condenser forward for better cleaning access.
RXA0185238—UN—27AUG21
2.Clean radar sensor horns (A) with warm water and
mild soap.
RXA0160275—UN—07AUG17
3.Dry with clean soft cloth.
Use compressed air to clean air conditioning condenser
(C). JL41210,0000AD9-19-27AUG21
Optional Fuel Water Separator

1. Park machine on a flat, level surface.
2. Lower equipment to ground.
3. Shut off engine.
RXA0160277—UN—21JUL17
Release oil-fuel cooler retaining clips to swing cooler (E)
forward.
Use compressed air to clean radiator. Straighten any
bent radiator fins.
Close air conditioning condenser and oil cooler and lock
the retaining clips.
Gently lower hood and firmly close until hood latch is
locked.
SV81855,0000177-19-30AUG21
220A-3
Service—Clean
Filter is located under right-hand front side frame (A).
RXA0142143—UN—05JUN14
1. Remove filter (B).
IMPORTANT: Do not exceed 75 psi (500 kPa) (500

bar) compressed air pressure when cleaning.
2. Using compressed air, clean filter and clean area

RXA0168512—UN—03JUN19
around suspension air bag.
Priming button cap may differ
3. Remove all debris around compressor.
4. Thoroughly clean the exterior of the fuel filter and
4. Reinstall filter.
water separator assembly (A) and surrounding
area. SV81855,0000216-19-29JUN22
5. Place a suitable container under the drain hose.

6. Open drain valve (B). Implement Connector
7. Allow water and sediment to drain into a suitable
container. IMPORTANT: Inspect implement connector every
500 hours for dirt or debris buildup. Service
8. Close drain valve. may be required more often in some operating
conditions.
9. Dispose of waste properly.
Avoid damage to implement connector. Do not
10. Bleed fuel system. See Bleed Fuel System in the use compressed air or pressurized water to
Service—General Information section of this clean implement connector.
EC82310,0000982-19-21APR21 1.Locate the implement connector. See Implement
Connector in Accessories section of this Operator’s
Manual.
AirCushion Suspension System Air
Compressor Pump and Inlet Filter and Air
Bags
RXA0169781—UN—30JUL19
2.Open implement connector cover (A).
3.Clean implement connector with John Deere
Electronic Contact Cleaner.
JL41210,0000ABB-19-10MAY22
RXA0142139—UN—05JUN14
220A-4
Service—Check
Engine Coolant Level Shut off engine. Only remove cap when cool
Coolant level is monitored electrically. When coolant is enough to touch with bare hands. Slowly
low a diagnostic trouble code will appear on the loosen cap to first stop to relieve pressure
CommandCenter. before removing completely.
1. Open hood. See Open Hood in the Service—General Avoid personal injury. Do not remove fill cap
Information section of this Operator’s Manual. when engine is hot. Stop engine and wait until
engine has cooled.
IMPORTANT: Do not open de-aeration tank cap

when engine is warm. Doing so will add air to
coolant system.
NOTE: De-aeration tank will not be full of coolant when

cap is removed. When looking in tank, if coolant
tank is at least half full, do not add additional
coolant.
RXA0180388—UN—06NOV20
13.6 L Engine
2. Check coolant level on side of de-aeration tank.

Level should be at or above MIN COLD line (D). If
level is low, before adding coolant check for any
signs of leakage. Repair if necessary.
IMPORTANT: Do not open de-aeration tank cap (B)

when engine is warm. Doing so will add air to
coolant system.
RXA0180467—UN—18NOV20
NOTE: If coolant level is low, but there is no sign of an A—Cap
external leak, there may be an internal coolant leak. B—Max Cold Line
C—Min Cold Line
Contact your John Deere dealer.
2. Slowly turn de-aeration tank cap (A) to relieve
3. Wait until engine is cool. Remove de-aeration tank pressure. Remove cap (B).
cap (B) and add coolant as specified in Engine
Coolant section of this Operator’s Manual. Do not fill 3. Test coolant. A more precise test device is available
above MAX COLD line (C). Reinstall de-aeration from your John Deere dealer, see Testing Coolant
tank cap. Freeze Point in Engine Coolant section of this
4. Lower and secure hood.
4. Visually inspect tank cap gasket for sealing
EC82310,0000F51-19-29JUN22
effectiveness. No apparent scratches or leak paths
should be seen. Replace cap if problem is observed.
5. Install de-aeration tank cap and lower hood.
Engine Coolant Freeze Point
EC82310,0000F50-19-07FEB22
IMPORTANT: Test coolant system and add coolant
conditioner every 1000 hours, or annually -
whichever comes first.
Water Separator
1. Open hood. See Open Hood in the Service—General IMPORTANT: Water can damage fuel systems. If
Information section of this Operator’s Manual. excessive water is found, draining fuel tanks
may be required, see Fuel Tank Sump in this
CAUTION: Explosive release of fluids from section of this Operator’s Manual.
pressurized cooling system can cause serious
burns.
220B-1
Service—Check
Engine and Exhaust Compartments

IMPORTANT: Accumulated crop residue inside
engine compartment can reduce engine and
cooling system performance. If tractor has been
operated in field conditions which might have
caused debris accumulation, inspect and clean
engine compartment as necessary.
Directing pressurized water at electronic/
electrical components, connectors, bearings
and hydraulic seals, fuel injection pump, engine
air intake, or other sensitive parts and
RXA0180389—UN—06NOV20 components may cause product malfunctions.
13.6 L Engine Reduce pressure, and spray at a 45° to 90°
angle. See Tractor Exterior in Service—Clean
13.6 L engine: In addition to a Fuel Water Separator, section of this Operator’s Manual.
water can also be drained from fuel system through fuel
Directing pressurized air at electronic/electrical
filters. Turn drain valve nut (A) to release water from fuel
components or connectors, may cause buildup
filters.
of static electricity and product malfunctions.
On some filters, tabs (B) are visible and will drop when Never steam clean or pour cold water on an
drain valve nut is opened. Turn drain valve nut injection pump that is operating or hot. Pump
completely counterclockwise to drain water. could seize.
Optional Fuel/Water Separator
1. Shut off engine and allow time for engine to cool.
1. Shut off engine.
2. Remove front engine side shield. See Remove Front
Engine Side Shield in Service—General Information
3. Remove any crop or debris within engine and
exhaust compartments, especially around
turbocharger, exhaust manifold, and exhaust
4. Reinstall all engine side shields.
5. Close and securely latch hood.
TS36762,000012C-19-05APR21
RXA0185236—UN—27AUG21
2. Close fuel shut-off valve (A). Air Conditioning System
3. Open drain valve (B) to release any water from fuel
water separator.
4. Close drain valve and reopen fuel shut-off valve.
EC82310,0000F4F-19-02SEP21
Tracks
IMPORTANT: If light indicator on Corner Post
Display and DTC appear indicating tracks need
tensioning, see Track Detensioning or
Tensioning in Tracks and Track Tread Settings X9811—UN—23AUG88
CAUTION: Avoid possible injury. Improper
SV81855,00003BF-19-14FEB17
servicing may cause refrigerant to penetrate
eyes and skin or cause burns.
220B-2
Service—Check
IMPORTANT: R-134a refrigerant must be used in air Fuel Tank Sump

conditioning system. Service requires special
equipment and procedures. See your John NOTE: Drain fuel tank sump if fuel filters are replaced
Deere dealer. frequently or water in the fuel tank. Service may be
required more often under some conditions.
NOTE: Some oil seepage from compressor shaft seal is
normal. 1. Place a catch pan under the drain tee.
Perform following checks if air conditioning system does IMPORTANT: Use wrench to hold drain fitting while
not cool, or cooling is intermittent: opening or closing tee or damage to tank
threads can occur.
● Confirm that system does not function correctly.
Access HVAC page on CommandCenter. Set fan
speed to highest setting and temperature to coldest
setting. See HVAC Settings—Fan Speed in HVAC
section of this Operator’s Manual. Operate engine at
2000 rpm. Check air vents to confirm that cold air is
not present.
● Inspect and clean cab air filters. Replace filters if
necessary. See Cab Filters in Service—Change
● Clean grille and radiator. See Engine Cooling System
in Service—Clean section of this Operator’s Manual.
● Check air vents for cold air flow.
RXA0180464—UN—18NOV20
If problems persist, see your John Deere dealer. 2. Turn drain tree (A) by hand. Drain fuel until clean,
water free fuel appears.
TS36762,000012D-19-21JUN22
3. Tighten drain tree by hand to close.
JL41210,0000A9E-19-23NOV20
Engine Water Pump Weep Hole

1. Remove front engine side shield, see Remove Front
Engine Side Shield in Service—General Information Engine Oil Level
section of this Operator’s Manual. 1. Remove engine access panel, see Remove Engine
Access Panel in Service—General Information
NOTE: Most reliable oil level is determined before

starting engine, after tractor has been parked on
level ground for several hours or overnight.
RXA0180468—UN—18NOV20
2. Inspect weep hole (A) on under side of water pump
for oil or coolant leakage (indicates a damaged front
seal). If leakage is detected, see your John Deere
dealer.
3. Install front engine side shield, close and secure
hood. RXA0185141—UN—19AUG21
TO84419,00001CE-19-19APR22 2. Remove fill cap (A) and check oil level on dipstick (B)
with tractor on level ground.
220B-3
Service—Check
additional system oil. If possible, check oil level prior to

first start of day. Ambient temperature should be 7° C
(45° F) or above.
For implements and applications requiring high volumes
of oil transfer (for example - large air seeders or pulling
3 scrapers), hydraulic reservoir can be filled up to High
Volume Takeout Oil Mark (D). Additional capacity is 58.5
L (15.4 gal) above MIN COLD (C).
1. Check tractor and implement for leaks daily, before
start-up.
2. Park tractor on level ground with implement fully
RXA0185140—UN—20AUG21
lowered.
3. Oil level on dipstick is considered FULL when oil is
within cross-hatched area (D). 3. Place transmission shift lever in PARK.
4. Start engine and set engine speed set to 1200 rpm.
IMPORTANT: Do not operate engine with oil level
below cross-hatched area on dipstick. 5. Run engine for five minutes.
6. Shut off engine and wait five minutes for oil level to
4. If oil is required: stabilize.
● Remove fill cap.
● Add oil through fill tube (C), see Diesel Engine Oil IMPORTANT: Contaminated or overheated oil may
in Engine Oil section of this Operator’s Manual. cause damage to transmission-hydraulic
system components. Oil which is:
Tighten fill cap securely and install engine access panel. ● Milky or foamy may be contaminated with
RX32825,000062F-19-07FEB22
water. Change oil immediately.
● Discolored or smells burned may have been
overheated. See your John Deere dealer.
Hydraulic System Oil Level 7. Check hydraulic reservoir oil level using sight gauge
IMPORTANT: Poor shift quality or transmission located on right-hand side of gudgeon area.
damage may occur if incorrect oil is used, see Examine oil in sight gauge for milky or foamy
Transmission and Hydraulic Oil in Other appearance.
Lubricants section of this Operator’s Manual.
NOTE: As tractor and hydraulic system temperature
increases, oil level will rise in reservoir.
Oil level in reservoir fluctuates depending upon
volume of oil exchanged with an attached
implement. If low oil level results in hydraulic
pressure drop, a STOP engine light will come on.
8. Open hydraulic reservoir cap (A). Check for burned

oil odor.
9. If reservoir oil level is between FULL COLD (B) and
MIN COLD (C) marks, tractor can be used for
normal operation. Volume difference between MIN
RXA0185239—UN—27AUG21 COLD and FULL COLD marks is about 11.4 L (3
Transmission-Hydraulic Oil Sight Gauge gal).
10. If reservoir oil level is below MIN COLD mark,
Do not operate tractor if oil level is at or below MIN ensure oil levels are equalized between reservoir,
COLD mark (C) in sight gauge with engine off. transmission, and axle compartments. Heat up
transmission-hydraulic oil (see Warm-Up
If topping off oil in hydraulic reservoir, use sight gauge Transmission-Hydraulic System in Transmission—
marks to estimate volume and add to transmission fill General Information section of this Operator’s
tube. Manual) so oil temperature is > 50°C (125°F) and
Hydraulic oil reservoir does not hold all system hydraulic run tractor at 2100 rpm for five minutes. Stop engine
oil capacity. Transmission and front and rear axles hold and allow to settle for five minutes. Check hydraulic
reservoir level. If still below MIN COLD mark, add oil
220B-4
Service—Check
to hydraulic oil reservoir. See Hydraulic System Oil Track Tension

in Service—Change section of this Operator’s
Manual. Track Tensioning
JL41210,0000AD8-19-02SEP21 NOTE: Requires track tension hose kit, see your John
Deere dealer.
Track Alignment
CAUTION: Guide lug surface may be hot
enough to cause injury. Allow time to cool
before checking alignment.
IMPORTANT: Tractor must be on ground during

alignment procedure. Any adjustment made
while tractor is on stands will be incorrect.
Perform following procedure to check track

alignment:
1. Drive tractor forward on level ground in a straight line
with no steering or braking input at 5 km/h (3 mph) to
8 km/h (5 mph) for 50 meters (150 ft).
RXA0142311—UN—10JUN14
2. Place tractor in park and turn key switch off .
1. Remove hydraulic oil reservoir fill cap (A).
RXA0100963—UN—11MAR09
RXA0142576—UN—13JUN14
3. Use fabricated 102 mm (4 in) X 204 mm (8 in) X 6.35
mm (1/4 in) shim (A) to check alignment between 2. Remove cap from tension cyclinder receptacle and
front mid-roller and guide lug (B). attach tension hose coupler (B)
Slide shim in between mid-roller guide lugs so that it

bridges two guide lugs.
If the shim fits freely on both sides of guide lug,
alignment is correct.
If shim does not fit on one side, adjustment is
necessary.
4. Follow track alignment procedure in Check Track
Alignment in Tracks section of this Operator's
Manual.
SV81855,000026B-19-01AUG17
RXA0160120—UN—06JUL17
3. With the hose valve handle (C) closed, install other
end of tension hose into extend side of SCV I (D).
220B-5
Service—Check
RXA0168447—UN—30MAY19
4. Start engine and press SCV shortcut button on
Navigation Bar.
RXA0143583—UN—14JUL14
11. Exit tractor and open hose valve handle (A) on
tension hose.
12. Allow track to detension for six minutes.
13. Push SCV I lever back to neutral position
RXA0131602—UN—19AUG13 14. Stop engine.
5. Select SCV I (A) on SCV main page. 15. Close hose valve handle and disconnect hose from
tension cylinder receptacle.
16. Clean up any oil that may have spilled or leaked
during detension or tensioning process.
CAUTION: If any oil has spilled or bubbled out

of reservoir fill spout during tensioning
process, contact your John Deere dealer for
possible repair of track tensioning system.
17. Replace cap on hydraulic reservoir.

Track Detensioning
RXA0143723—UN—16JUL14
CAUTION: Escaping fluid under pressure can
6. Select Time tab (B).
penetrate skin and cause serious injury.
7. Press (+) (D) detent time button to increase detent Avoid hazard by relieving pressure before
time to continuous (E). disconnecting hydraulic or other lines. Tighten
all connections before applying pressure.
Search for leaks with a piece of cardboard.
Protect hands and body from high pressure
fluids.
If an accident occurs, see a doctor immediately.
Any fluid injected into skin must be surgically
removed within a few hours or gangrene may
result. Doctors unfamiliar with this type of
injury should reference a knowledgeable
medical source. Such information is available
from Deere & Company Medical Department in
Moline, Illinois, U.S.A.
RXA0160283—UN—24JUL17
8. Select Flow tab (C).
CAUTION: Avoid possible personal injury.
9. Press (+ or ++) (F) detent flow buttons to increase Tension kit valve should be in closed position
or (- or - -) (H) to decrease detent flow setting to when attaching either end of hose.
5.00 (G).
IMPORTANT: Foreign material can damage the
10. Pull SCV I control lever rearward to extend
hydraulic system. Keep hydraulic couplers free
position.
from debris.
220B-6
Service—Check
IMPORTANT: Track tensioning is best performed

when hydraulic oil in reservoir is less than 38 °C
(100 °F), and track tensioning components are RXA0168447—UN—30MAY19
at least 4.5 °C (40 °F). 4. Start engine and press SCV shortcut button on
Navigation Bar.
Use track tension or detension hose kit. See your John
Deere Dealer.
RXA0131602—UN—19AUG13
5. Select SCV I (A) on SCV main page.
RXA0142311—UN—10JUN14
1. Remove hydraulic oil reservoir fill cap (A).
RXA0143723—UN—16JUL14
6. Select Time tab (B).
7. Press (+) (D) detent time button to increase detent
time to continuous (E).
RXA0142576—UN—13JUN14
2. Remove cap from tension cylinder receptacle and
attach tension hose coupler (B).
RXA0160283—UN—24JUL17
8. Select Flow tab (C).
9. Press (+ or ++) (F) detent flow buttons to increase
RXA0160120—UN—06JUL17 or (- or - -) (H) to decrease detent flow setting to
3. With the hose valve handle (C) closed, install other 5.00 (G).
end of tension hose into SCV I extend side of (D).
10. Push SCV I control lever forward to retract
position.
220B-7
Service—Check
perform as intended. Typical wear patterns in the rubber

are numerous small nicks and chunks, some small
section with rubber loss, and slight amount of rubber
separation at edges. Check rubberized wheels for
embedded rocks, nails, or other sharp objects. Remove
if found. Embedded objects can cause internal damage
to track if left in place.
IMPORTANT: Inner and outer mid-rollers must be

within 30 mm circumference of each other.
Do not pair worn wheels with new wheels on the
same axle. Overloading of opposite side may
RXA0143583—UN—14JUL14 occur (mid-roller) or track alignment may be
11. Exit tractor and open hose valve handle (A) on affected (drive and idler wheels).
tension hose.
NOTE: Replace mid-rollers in sets if significant
12. Allow track to detension for six minutes.
thickness wear is seen on an opposite side wheel.
13. Pull SCV I lever back to neutral position
Wheels should not be replaced unless:
14. Stop engine.
● More than 1/3 of rubber width from either side is lost
15. Close hose valve handle and disconnect hose from
tension cylinder receptacle. ● Rubber loss extends across entire wheel width in any
area
16. Clean up any oil that may have spilled or leaked
● Rubberized wheel face begins to buildup with dirt
during detension or tensioning process.
due to lack of rubber thickness
CAUTION: If any oil has spilled or bubbled out ● Less than 5/16” of drive wheel tread depth remains
of reservoir fill spout during detensioning ● Mid-roller no longer turns freely
process, contact your John Deere dealer for
possible repair of track tensioning system.
Inspect drive and idler wheels for visible cracks around
bolt pattern or rim. If cracks are visible, contact your
17. Replace cap on hydraulic reservoir. John Deere dealer.
GH15097,000068C-19-12NOV19
GH15097,00006CB-19-21JUL17
Drive and Idler Wheels and Mid-Rollers Track Wear and Trash Buildup
IMPORTANT: Avoid operating tractor in grease, oil, Track Wear
or other petroleum chemicals. Avoid spilling
these materials on track and wheels during CAUTION: Trash buildup can cause fire from
servicing of tractor. increased friction. Remove trash from trash
buildup points between track and tractor frame.
Remove Trash Buildup.
IMPORTANT: Avoid operating tractor in grease, oil,

or other petroleum chemicals. Avoid spilling
these materials on track and wheels during
service.
Avoid damage to hydraulic components. Use
care around tension cylinder connections and
hydraulic lines.
Remove any embedded sharp objects from inside or

outside of tracks.
RXA0144017—UN—31JUL14
Inspect rubber coating for chunking, chipping, or
cracking on idler wheels (A), mid-rollers (B) and drive
wheels (C). Wheels typically see rubber wear at edges.
Significant edge wear may be evident, but wheel will still
220B-8
Service—Check
C
RXA0158651—UN—05APR17
Check for flex cracking (E). It is normal to see some flex
cracking develop during life of track.
Track Trash Buildup
IMPORTANT: Avoid grease, oil, or other petroleum

chemicals on tracks and wheels. Constant
B
exposure to petroleum-based chemicals may
RXA0147257—UN—17JUN15 damage rubber surfaces.
Check track for major operational problems. It is normal
to see cracking (A), uneven wear (B), or chipping or Trash buildup can cause fire from increased
chunking (C) on tracks during use. friction. Remove trash from trash buildup
points between track and tractor frame.
Check inside of track for any exposed cables. If any
loose ends are seen, cut off cable flush with track Undercarriage Inspection and Maintenance
surface. Then see your John Deere dealer.
1.Remove any debris or material buildup on top of
Check track for torn or missing treads. If tread has been frame reaction arms. Buildup can wear down rubber
damaged and part of tread is loose, trim loose portion on drive wheels and reduce their ability to transfer
off to avoid further damage to track carcass. power to track.
Check track inner guide or drive lugs for condition. Note 2.Check for material buildup between drive wheels and
if wear patterns have changed since the last inspection front idler wheels. Buildup can damage or crush
and if track alignment may need to be checked. If any guide lugs and can increase chances of derailing
guide or drive lugs are loose or missing, see your John track. If guide lug tip damage is seen, it may be due
Deere dealer. to material buildup.
3.Look over drive wheels and idlers for visible cracks
around bolt pattern or the rim. If seen, see your John
Deere dealer for best recommendation for repair or
replacement.
4.Remove any embedded rocks, nails, or other sharp
object in track belt or mid-rollers.
TS36762,000034E-19-02SEP21
Secondary Brake
1. Park tractor on incline. Incline should be steep
enough to allow tractor to roll easily when tractor is
placed in Neutral.
RXA0158650—UN—05APR17
Check for exposed plies (D) between tread. It is normal
during mid to end of life to see some exposed plies
between the treads. If large sections of the track
carcass are torn, loose, or missing, see your John
Deere dealer.
220B-9
Service—Check
AirCushion Suspension System
RXA0158486—UN—28MAR17
2. For e18, move transmission shift lever (A) to Neutral
RXA0142140—UN—05JUN14
position.
IMPORTANT: For satisfactory tie down stability
when shipping, it is recommended that the air
system be vented to allow the suspension to
lower to the stops. A manual vent valve (D) has
been provided for this function.
IMPORTANT: Press manual vent valve, located

above suspension axle, to lower air suspension
system to stops before securing tractor with tie
downs.
IMPORTANT: Do not drive tractor suspension

through water deeper than 1 m (3.2 ft).
RXA0143603—UN—23JUL14
3. Engage secondary brake (B). The air suspension compressor is located
approximately 1 m (3.2 ft) from ground and
If tractor does not hold with secondary brake compressor runs intermittently.
engaged, see your John Deere dealer.
If driven in this water level depth, the
SV81855,00002CE-19-24JUN22
compressor filter becomes soaked and dirt may
stick to filter. When filter dries it becomes caked
on filter which restricts air flow. Filter should be
Transmission PARK System relocated higher on tractor frame to prevent
filter damage.
CAUTION: Avoid physical injury, tractor
damage, or property damage:
● Verify that the tractor surroundings are clear
of people before testing.
● If the transmission PARK system does not
operate correctly, repair immediately. See
1. Position the tractor on a 20—30% slope with the front

of the tractor pointing down the slope.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
To verify the location of PARK on the transmission,
see Shift Transmission in the appropriate RXA0142139—UN—05JUN14
Transmission section of this Operator’s Manual. 1.Locate inlet filter (A).

3. If the tractor does not hold in a stationary position on 2.Clear debris from air compressor inlet filter (B), air
an incline with the transmission in the PARK position, compressor, solenoid vent valve screen (C), position
repair the transmission immediately. See your John sensor and manual vent valve.
Deere dealer.
EC82310,0000BA6-19-25NOV19
220B-10
Service—Check
CAUTION: Stay clear of moving suspension

parts because tractor will lower when manual
vent valve is pressed.
3.Depress and hold manual vent valve for 3 seconds to

vent moisture that may have collected.
RXA0142144—UN—05JUN14
A—Nut (2 used)
C—Right-Hand Upper Bumper Stop
RXA0142141—UN—05JUN14
Front Beam Air Bag
RXA0142145—UN—05JUN14
A—Nut (2 used)
D—Right-Hand Lower Bumper Stop
RXA0142142—UN—05JUN14
Rear Beam Air Bag
4.Visually inspect both front and rear beam air bag

compartments through lower expansion holes (E).
5.Flush air bags and shields with water or air as
necessary, depending on operating conditions to
remove fine dirt particles and small rocks.
AirCushion Suspension System Walking Beam

Bumper Stops RXA0142146—UN—05JUN14
A—Nut (2 used)
E—Left-Hand Upper Bumper Stop
Park tractor on level surface to inspect bumper stops.

Inspect each bumper stop for damage, excessive wear,
or if it is bent or deformed. Damage could be chunking,
chipping, or cracking of bumper. If any damage is found,
replace bumper stop, see Walking Beam Bumper Stops
in Service—Change section of this Operator’s Manual.
RX32825,00006B9-19-29JUN22
RXA0142147—UN—05JUN14
A—Nut (2 used)
B—Left-Hand Lower Bumper Stop
220B-11
Service—Check
Engine Air Intake System—13.6 L Final Tier CAUTION: If seat belt system, including
4/Stage V mounting hardware, buckle, belt, or retractor
shows any sign of damage such as cuts,
IMPORTANT: If tractor is operated with loose air fraying, extreme or unusual wear, discoloration
intake clamps, engine damage may result. or abrasion, the entire seat belt system should
be replaced immediately. Replace the belt
system only with replacement parts approved
for your machine.
RXA0180396—UN—10NOV20
RXA0174320—UN—28JAN20
Inspect seat belts (A) and mounting hardware. If seat
belts need to be replaced, see your John Deere dealer.
TS36762,0000146-19-28JAN20
Engine Auxiliary Drive Belt and Drive Belt

Tensioner
NOTE: Fan belt tensioner is only used on a Tier 2/Stage
RXA0180397—UN—10NOV20
II or Tier 3/Stage IIIA engine.
Check air intake system for loose clamps (A) or cap
screws. Pulley or dust shield can be serviced separately
from spring tensioner. Spring tensioner is serviced
Tighten air intake system clamps to 8 N·m (70 lb·in). as an assembly.
JL41210,0000A98-19-13NOV20 For clarity, alternator and other components are not
shown. Belt tensioner assembly remains on tractor
during tests.
Seat Belts
1. Remove front engine side shields. See Remove
Front Engine Side Shields in Service—General
Information section of this Operator’s Manual.
A
A
RXA0162898—UN—18APR18
2. Examine belt tensioner assembly. Replace
tensioner if:
220B-12
Service—Check
● A spring stop (A) is cracked or missing.

● Any part of tensioner assembly is cracked or
broken. G
If tensioner will not be replaced, go to step 3. F
If tensioner must be replaced, replace, and then go
to step 9.
B RXA0162900—UN—18APR18
8. Rotate tension arm slowly using 1/2 inch drive
ratchet or breaker bar. Replace tensioner if:
C ● Arm does not rotate smoothly between arm stops
(E).
● Metal to metal contact is present between arm
and spring case (F) or arm and end cap (G).
D
If tensioner will not be replaced, go to step 9.
If tensioner must be replaced, replace, and then go
to step 14.
9. If tensioner must be replaced, release tension on
belt and remove belt (if not already done).
E
E 10. Remove tensioner pivot cap screw.
RXA0162899—UN—18APR18 11. Replace tensioner assembly.
3. With belt installed, insert 1/2 inch drive ratchet or 12. Apply thread lock and sealer Loctite 242 to pivot cap
breaker bar (B) into the square hole (C) on belt screw.
tensioner arm.
13. Install cap screw and tighten to 70 N·m (51 lb·ft)
4. Twist tensioner arm (D) to reduce tension on belt. torque.
Twist as far as tensioner allows.
14. Install belt. Depending upon engine type, in Service
5. If belt is against free arm stops (E) replace belt. See —Change section of this Operator’s Manual, see:
step 13 for belt service procedure locations. After
replacing belt, go to step 5. Fan Belt—Tier 2/Stage II or Tier 3/Stage IIIA Engine
6. With belt tension released, examine belt tracking
(wear) mark on pulley. If tracking mark is 6.4 mm (1/ Engine Auxiliary Drive Belt
4 inch) or more wider than belt, replace tensioner
assembly. If tensioner assembly will: CAUTION: Never start engine without side
shields installed and hood securely closed and
Not be replaced, go to step 7. latched.
Be replaced, replace and then go to step 9.
15. Install front engine side shields.
7. Remove belt. See step 14 for belt service procedure
locations. 16. Close and securely latch hood.
RX32825,000066F-19-24JUN22
IMPORTANT: Do not pry between pulley and spring
case.
Drive Wheel Hub Housing, Mid-Rollers, and

Idler Wheel Hub Oil Level
Drive Wheel Hub Housing Oil Level
1. Park tractor on level surface with oil fill plug (A) on
drive wheel at three o’clock position.
2. Shut off engine and place tractor into PARK.
220B-13
Service—Check
2. Shut off tractor and put transmission into PARK.
RXA0162623—UN—28MAR18
3. Remove oil fill plug.
RXA0142037—UN—05JUN14
4. Check oil level. If oil level is: 3. Remove oil fill plug (A) on wheel hub.
a. Level with bottom of plug hole, go to step 6. 4. Check oil level. If oil level is:
b. Below bottom of plug hole, go to step 5. a. Level with bottom of plug hole, go to step 6.
5. Fill with John Deere Hy-Gard oil or equivalent to b. Below bottom of plug hole, go to step 5.
bottom of plug hole. See Transmission and Hydraulic
Oil in Other Lubricants section of this Operator’s 5. Fill with John Deere Hy-Gard oil or equivalent to
Manual. bottom of plug hole. See Transmission and Hydraulic
Oil in Other Lubricants section of this Operator’s
6. Reinstall plug and tighten to 34 N·m (24 lb·ft) torque. Manual.
7. Repeat procedure on opposite side of tractor. 6. Reinstall plugs and tighten to 34 N·m (24 lb·ft)
torque.
Mid-Rollers Oil Level
1. Park tractor on level surface. 7. Repeat procedure on opposite side of tractor.
SV81855,0000223-19-29JUN22
2. Shut off tractor and put transmission into PARK.
Engine Valve Clearance

NOTE: To confirm which engine your tractor is equipped
with, see Engine Serial Number in Identification
Numbers section of this Operator's Manual.
See your John Deere dealer.

TS36762,0000148-19-14DEC16
RXA0142036—UN—05JUN14
Drawbar Sensor Calibration [Scraper]
3. Remove oil fill plug (A) on each mid-roller. Calibration requires a drawbar sensor calibration plug.
4. Check oil levels.
1. Fully load the scraper.
5. If oil level is below bottom of a plug hole, fill to bottom
of plug hole with John Deere Hy-Gard oil or 2. Raise the scraper above the ground level.
equivalent. See Transmission and Hydraulic Oil in
3. Stop the tractor.
Other Lubricants section of this Operator’s Manual.
4. Place transmission into PARK.
6. Reinstall plugs and tighten to 34 N·m (24 lb·ft)
torque. 5. Turn off engine.
7. Repeat procedure on opposite side of tractor.
Idler Wheel Hub Oil Level
1. Park tractor on level surface.
220B-14
Service—Check
RXA0185235—UN—27AUG21 RXA0179145—UN—20AUG20
Draft Sensor Harness Connection 1. Check the diameter (A) of the pin (B).
6. Remove the dust cover (A) from the draft sensor

Hitch Pin Specification
harness connection. The draft sensor harness
connection is located to the left of the rear SCV Measurement
mm (in)
stack. Drawbar Category
Wear Limit or
Nominal Diameter
Minimum Diameter
4 50.80 (1.50) 47.60 (1.87)
5 70.00 (2.75) 65.60 (2.58)
RXA0185234—UN—27AUG21
Draft Sensor Calibration Plug
7. Install the draft sensor calibration plug into the draft

sensor harness connection. RXA0179146—UN—20AUG20
8. Start engine and run for a minimum of 15 seconds. 2. Check the diameter (C) at the top and bottom of the
pin receiver hole.
9. Turn off engine. Sensor calibration is complete.
10. Remove and store the draft sensor calibration plug. Top and Bottom Receiver Hole Specification
Nominal Diameter
11. Replace the dust cover.
Wear Limit or
EC82310,00009A1-19-30AUG21 Drawbar Category Measurementa Maximum
mm (in) Permissible
Diameterb
4 52.80 (2.07) 55.40 (2.18)
Drawbar Wear 5 72.75 (2.86) 76.30 (3.00)
a
CAUTION: Avoid equipment damage. Replace Measured in the direction of travel.
b
parts that have reached or exceeded their wear Oval
limit.
EC82310,0000F7A-19-18JAN22
Engine Brake
JL41210,0000A93-19-16OCT20
220B-15
Service—Tighten
Drive Wheel Nuts, Idler Wheel, and Mid-
Roller Cap Screws
IMPORTANT: If tractor is operated with loose cap
screws, they may become worn and it may be
necessary to replace them.
Retighten track cap screws after working 3 hours, and

daily or every 10 hours during the first week of
operation.
Inspect and tighten cap screws to specifications.
RXA0139206—UN—14FEB14
Wide Swing Drawbar Support
RXA0160284—UN—25JUL17
RXA0139451—UN—21MAR14
Fixed Drawbar Support
Inspect and tighten drawbar support M24 cap screws

(A) to 850 N·m (627 lb·ft) and M20 cap screws (B) to
450 N·m (332 lb·ft).
RX32825,00006B7-19-30APR18
RXA0160285—UN—25JUL17
Torque — Specification
M24 Idler Adapter Plate (A). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1050 N·m (774 lb·ft)
M20 Weight (B). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 610 N·m (450 lb·ft)
Idler Wheel (C). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1050 N·m (774 lb·ft)
Mid-Roller-to-Hub (D). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450 N·m (332 lb·ft)
Drive Wheel (E). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450 N·m (332 lb·ft)
SV81855,0000267-19-30NOV17
Drawbar Support Cap Screws

IMPORTANT: Check and torque drawbar support
bolts after first 10 hours, 50 hours and 100
hours of scraper operation. Normal service is
every 500 hours.
220C-1
Service—Change
Engine Auxiliary Drive Belt NOTE: The initial break-in service interval of a new or
1. Remove front engine side shield, see Remove Front rebuilt wet sleeve engine with Break-In Plus must
Engine Side Shield in Service - General section of go at least 100 hours to assure the surface mating
this Operator’s Manual. of the rings and liners has had an opportunity to
occur. The 100 hour minimum applies to all new or
IMPORTANT: Keep tension off belt during removal. rebuilt engines. The maximum service interval is
the same as the service interval recommendations
NOTE: Removal and installation of fan belt requires an listed in Engine Oil and Filter Service Intervals for
assistant. your engine. To confirm which engine your tractor is
equipped with, see Engine Serial Number in
Identification Numbers section of this Operator's
Manual.
For subsequent oil changes, see Engine Oil and
Filter Service Intervals for your engine located in
the Engine Oil section of this Operator's Manual.
1. Operate engine approximately 5 minutes to warm

oil.
2. Stop engine.
RXA0180387—UN—06NOV20
1/2 in Drive Socket Wrench
2. Insert 1/2 in drive socket wrench into square hole

(A) on tensioner arm (B).
3. Push down on wrench handle to relieve tension on
drive belt.
4. Have assistant remove auxiliary belt from alternator
pulley (C).
5. Remove belt from idler air conditioner pulley (D), RXA0185138—UN—19AUG21
crankshaft pulley (E), and water pump (F). 3. Turn crankcase drain fitting (A) to drain oil. Use
enough containers for 75.7 L (20.0 gal) and direct
6. Discard old belt. flow with attached valve hose.
7. Install new belt to water pump, crankshaft pulley, 4. Tighten fitting after oil is completely drained.
idler then air conditioner pulley.
8. Install belt on alternator pulley. Engine Side Shield in Service—General Information
9. Remove 1/2 in drive socket wrench and restore section of this Operator’s Manual.
tension on new belt.
10. Install front engine side shield and close hood.
BH38674,0000CC0-19-08FEB22
Engine Oil and Filter

IMPORTANT: Sulfur content should not exceed
0.10%. Sulfur content less than 0.10% is
preferred. Refer to Fuel, Lubricants, and
Coolant section for more information on oil
change intervals.
RXA0180469—UN—18NOV20
6. Remove filter (B) and remove old O-ring. Clean filter
mounting surface with clean dry cloth.
7. Apply a thin film of oil to new O-ring and install new
filter.
220D-1
Service—Change
8. Hand-tighten filter element, then turn filter element IMPORTANT: To determine which engine your
1/2 - 3/4 turn after gasket contact. Filter wrench is tractor is equipped with, see Engine Serial
required. Do not overtighten. Number in Identification Numbers section of
NOTE: Service may be required more often under some

conditions.
Drain fuel tank sump if fuel filters are replaced
frequently or water is in fuel tank. See Fuel Tank
Sump in Service—Check section of this Operator’s
Manual.

Engine Side Shield in Service—General section of
RXA0185248—UN—30AUG21 2. Thoroughly clean exterior of fuel filter/water
9. Remove engine oil fill cap (C) and refill crankcase separator assembly and surrounding area.
using fill tube. Use seasonal viscosity grade oil as
specified in Engine Oil section of this Operator’s
Manual. For crankcase capacity, see Capacities in
the Specifications section of this Operator's Manual.
10. Start and run engine for a two minutes. Then stop
engine and check for oil leaks.
NOTE: Engine oil level indicator is a dipstick with a

"crosshatched" area with a "safe" zone. Anywhere
in the dipstick crosshatched safe zone is
considered FULL.
RXA0185232—UN—27AUG21
3. Close fuel line shutoff valve (A) to stop fuel draining
from tanks.
NOTE: It is recommended to install a 6 ft, 5/16” fuel

hose to the bottom of the fuel filters to aid with
draining into a suitable container.
RXA0185140—UN—20AUG21
11. Recheck oil level with dipstick to ensure that level is
in crosshatched (D) “safe” zone area.
12. Reinstall front engine side shield and close hood.
RX32825,0000648-19-08FEB22
Fuel Filters—13.6 L Engine RXA0180430—UN—12NOV20

4. Drain water and contaminants from primary filter
CAUTION: Always shutoff engine and remove into suitable container by opening drain valve (B) on
key before performing maintenance work on bottom of separator.
fuel filter.
5. Disconnect the water-in-fuel sensor connector (C)
from primary filter.
220D-2
Service—Change
IMPORTANT: Always replace both filters at the same Optional Fuel Water Separator Filter
time. Element
1. Park machine on a flat, level surface.
6. Remove primary filter (D) and secondary filter (E)
and discard. 2. Lower equipment to ground.
3. Shut off engine.
IMPORTANT: DO NOT prefill either fuel filter with
fuel.
RXA0185335—UN—08SEP21
7. Lubricate gasket for primary fuel filter with fuel, and
install canister onto base. Align fuel filter slots (F) on
the fuel filter to the fuel filter header tabs (G) on the
fuel filter header. Tighten 1/2 turn after packing
contacts base.
8. Lubricate primary fuel filter water separator gasket RXA0168513—UN—03JUN19
with fuel and install onto filter canister. Tighten 1/2 Priming button cap may differ
of a full turn after gasket contacts the base.
4. Close fuel shutoff valve (A).
9. Lubricate gasket for secondary fuel filter with fuel,
and install filter onto base. Align fuel filter slots (F) 5. Thoroughly clean fuel filter assembly and
on the fuel filter to the fuel filter header tabs (G) on surrounding area to prevent dirt and debris from
the fuel filter header. Tighten 1/2 turn after packing entering the fuel system.
contacts base.
CAUTION: Fuel in filter is under high pressure.
10. Connect water separator sensor harness. Open drain valve on bottom of the fuel filter
11. Open fuel line shutoff valve. housing to relieve pressure before removing
filter.
IMPORTANT: Key must be turned to ON position for
2 minutes before starting engine to provide time NOTE: Catch fluids with an approved container and
to prefill fuel filters. Fuel system is self- dispose of according to employer and government
bleeding. guidelines.
Do not try to start engine until after 2 minute 6. Connect a fuel drain line to the filter drain valve (B)
time elapses or an air lock in the fuel system on bottom of the filter housing.
may occur.
7. Open filter drain valve.
12. Turn key switch to ON position for 2 minutes to 8. Drain all fuel.
allow transfer pump to prefill fuel filters.
9. Close drain valve.
13. Turn key switch clockwise to START position, and
run engine at 1200 rpm for 2 minutes. 10. Remove and retain water separator bowl (C) from
filter element.
JL41210,0000ADB-19-09SEP21
11. Remove and discard filter element (D).
12. Clean water separator bowl with compressed air.
13. Inspect filter housing and filter canister sealing
surfaces. Clean as required.
220D-3
Service—Change
14. Place new seal (E) on the water separator bowl. 4. Blow the fuel tank vent filter dry with compressed air.
15. Lubricate seal with clean diesel fuel. 5. Install the cleaned fuel tank vent filter.
16. Install water separator bowl onto new filter element. 6. Secure the fuel tank vent filter with the retaining
Tighten water separator bowl 1/2 of a turn after seal clamp.
contacts filter element.
7. Repeat the procedure for the remaining fuel tank
17. Lubricate new filter element seal (F) with clean vent filter.
diesel fuel. RX32825,00006BD-19-23APR21
18. Install filter element assembly to the filter housing

(G).
19. Tighten filter element 1/2—3/4 of a turn after seal Cab Filters
contacts filter housing. Cab Recirculation Air Filter
20. Open fuel shutoff valve.
CAUTION: Avoid personal injury. The cab
21. Bleed fuel system. See Bleed Fuel System in the recirculation air filter is not designed to filter
Service—General Information section of this out harmful chemicals. Before using
Operator’s Manual. agricultural chemicals, review and adhere to all
EC82310,0000983-19-21APR21
cautions and instructions located in the:
● Implement Operator’s Manual.
● Chemical Material Safety Data Sheets
Fuel Tank Vent Filters (MSDS).
IMPORTANT: Avoid damage to the cab air

recirculation system:
RXA0180432—UN—12NOV20
Fuel Tank Vent Filter (A)—Left-Hand Rear Cab Corner Post
RXA0172354—UN—03DEC19
● The cab air recirculation system creates
RXA0180429—UN—11NOV20 enough suction to pull lightweight material
Fuel Tank Vent Filter (B)—Right-Hand Rear Cab Corner onto the cab recirculation air intake cover.
Post
Keep the area directly in front of the cab
recirculation air intake (A) clear of
1. Release the retaining clamp from the fuel tank vent
lightweight material. Failure to do so can
filter.
cause reduced HVAC performance.
2. Remove the fuel tank vent filter from the hose. ● Replacement interval varies according to
3. Wash the fuel tank vent filter in a detergent solution. operating conditions. Normal service is 1000
hours or annually, whichever occurs first.
220D-4
Service—Change
1. Switch off the HVAC fan. NOTE: Filter cover latch has three positions; open,
latched, and locked. Cover is not locked when in
2. Locate the cab recirculation air intake behind the latched position.
operators seat on the lower left-hand side of the rear
cab wall.
3. Remove the cab recirculation air intake cover by
grasping handle (B) and pulling the intake cover
forward and up.
RXA0155037—UN—18OCT16
2. Turn knob fully counterclockwise (B) to unlatch cover.
RXA0172355—UN—19NOV19
4. Remove the cab recirculation air filter by grasping the
air filter handle (C) while pressing tab (D) and pull the
air filter forward.
5. Insert a new cab recirculation air filter.
6. Replace the cab recirculation air intake cover.
Cab Fresh Air Filter
CAUTION: Cab air filters are not designed to

filter out harmful chemicals. Follow instructions RXA0172403—UN—22NOV19
in implement Operator's Manual and those 3. Swing down (C) cover.

given by chemical manufacturer when using 4. Remove and discard old fresh air filter (D).
agricultural chemicals.
5. Wipe down inside and outside of filter cover with a
IMPORTANT: Replacement interval can vary clean cloth.
according to operating conditions. Normal
service is 1000 hours or annually, whichever 6. Install new filter.
occurs first.
RXA0155035—UN—18OCT16
7. Close cover and turn knob fully clockwise (E) to
securely lock latch.
RXA0099137—UN—19SEP08 TS36762,000014F-19-05MAY22
1. Support cover (A).
220D-5
Service—Change
Walking Beam Bumper Stops

1. Park tractor on level surface.
2. Inspect bumper stops.
RXA0142146—UN—05JUN14
Left-Hand Upper Bumper Stop
3. Remove nuts (A) and bumper stops (B, C, D, E).
RXA0142147—UN—05JUN14
4. Replace bumper stops with new ones.
Left-Hand Lower Bumper Stop
5. Install bumper stops and nuts.
SV81855,0000297-19-07FEB18
Engine Primary and Secondary Air Filters

IMPORTANT: When Engine Air Filter Restriction
Warning is activated, engine performance is
reduced. Service engine air filters immediately.
Service interval may vary due to operating
conditions. Replace secondary air filter every
second primary air filter change.
RXA0142144—UN—05JUN14
Right-Hand Upper Bumper Stop 1. Inspect filters and intake seals. Replace filter if seal
gap or damage is found.
2. Replace primary engine air filter if diagnostic trouble
code remains on.
RXA0142145—UN—05JUN14
Right-Hand Lower Bumper Stop
RXA0180370—UN—04NOV20
3. Unfasten straps (A) and remove air filter cover (B).
220D-6
Service—Change
RXA0180371—UN—04NOV20 RXA0180373—UN—04NOV20
4. Remove primary filter (C) from filter housing. 8. Clean debris and dirt from filter housing (F). Use
cloth dampened with water.
IMPORTANT: Do not attempt to clean engine air
filters. IMPORTANT: Incorrect installation of secondary
filter tab may result in engine damage.
5. Inspect filter for damage or waviness in pleats.
Such conditions may indicate overuse or contact 9. Replace secondary air filter.
with water. Replace filter if problem is found. 10. Push filter firmly back to properly seat in filter
housing.
IMPORTANT: Replace secondary filter every other
primary filter change. 11. Install primary filter.
12. Install air filter cover and fasten cover straps.
Install new secondary filter immediately to
RX32825,0000667-19-05NOV20
prevent dust from entering air intake system.
SCV Pilot Valve Filter
RXA0180372—UN—04NOV20
6. Pull on tab (D) to remove secondary filter (E).
7. Inspect filter for damage. Replace if necessary.
NOTE: A very small amount of dust coating interior RXA0152694—UN—11JUL16
surface of filter housing is not unusual. If larger 1. Remove cap screws (B).
debris or significant amount of dust or dirt is found,
check filters, filter housing, and air intake system for
leaks.
220D-7
Service—Change
Replace the DEF tank vent filter every 1500

hours of operation.
RXA0180428—UN—11NOV20
The DEF tank vent filter (A) is near the top of the left-hand
rear corner of the cab.
Remove and replace the DEF tank vent filter.

RXA0152693—UN—11JUL16
SV81855,000019E-19-23APR21
2. Remove SCV pilot filter cover (A) from SCV pilot filter
housing (G).
3. Remove old spring (D), SCV pilot filter (E), and O- Access Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) In-Line
ring (F).
Filter
4. Install new O-ring, SCV pilot filter, and spring.
IMPORTANT: Avoid damage to the emissions
5. Replace gasket (C) and SCV pilot filter cover. system:
6. Install cap screws and tighten to 6 N·m (53 lb·in) in ● Replace the in-line DEF filter every 3000
sequence (1, 4, 3, 2). hours or every 3 years, whichever occurs
TS36762,0000157-19-08NOV17
first.
● Do not begin service on the DEF in-line filter
until the light on the battery disconnect
switch has gone out. See Battery Disconnect
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Tank Vent Filter Switch in Engine Operation section of this
CAUTION: Avoid possible personal injury. In Operator’s Manual.
case of DEF contact, immediately flush eyes
with large amounts of water for a minimum of 15
minutes. Reference the Materials Safety Data
Sheet (MSDS) for additional information. Do not
ingest DEF. In the event DEF is ingested,
contact a physician immediately. Reference the
Materials Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for
IMPORTANT: Avoid corrosion of vehicle parts or

surfaces. If DEF is spilled or contacts any
immediately clean the surface with clear water.
RXA0185240—UN—26AUG21
metallic surfaces and can distort some plastic DEF in-line filter (A) is under the left-hand steps.
and rubber components. Spilled DEF, if left to
dry or if only wiped away with a cloth, will leave
To replace the DEF in-line filter, see Change Diesel
a white residue. Improperly cleaned DEF spill
Exhaust Fluid (DEF) In-Line Filter in this section of the
may interfere with diagnosis of Selective
Catalytic Reduction (SCR) system leakage
problems. AK08008,0000E0E-19-30AUG21
220D-8
Service—Change
Change Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) In-Line 1. Remove drain plug with O-ring (A) and discard.
Filter
NOTE: Container must be DEF compatible and hold at
CAUTION: Avoid possible personal injury. In least 300 mL (0.32 qt).
case of DEF contact, immediately flush eyes
with large amounts of water for a minimum of 15 2. Drain DEF into a proper container.
minutes. Reference the Materials Safety Data
Sheet (MSDS) for additional information. Do not
ingest DEF. In the event DEF is ingested,
contact a physician immediately. Reference the
Materials Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for
IMPORTANT: Avoid corrosion of vehicle parts or

surfaces. If DEF is spilled or contacts any
and rubber components. Spilled DEF, if left to
dry or if only wiped away with a cloth, will leave
a white residue. Improperly cleaned DEF spill
may interfere with diagnosis of Selective
Catalytic Reduction (SCR) system leakage
problems.
NOTE: See your John Deere equipment technical

manual or OEM manufacturer’s technical manual
for in-line DEF filter location. RG30727—UN—08AUG18
Filter Removal
IMPORTANT: Avoid system and filter damage. A—Filter Housing

Ensure that DEF system is not frozen before
changing filter. If system is frozen, operate 3. Rotate filter housing (A) counterclockwise and pull
engine until system has thawed completely. down.
4. Remove and discard filter from housing (A).
NOTE: If necessary, tap filter to loosen from filter

housing (A).
RG30728—UN—08AUG18
DEF Fluid Removal
A—Drain Plug with O-Ring
220D-9
Service—Change
A—Filter
B—Filter Housing
7. Install new filter (A) into filter housing (B).
RG30726—UN—08AUG18
Filter Housing Components
A—O-Ring
B—Foam Compensation Element
C—Filter Housing RG30727—UN—08AUG18
In-Line DEF Filter Housing Installation
5. Remove and discard O-ring (A) and foam
compensation element (B). A—Filter Housing
NOTE: Filter housing should be cleaned with clean DEF 8. Install filter housing (A) with O-ring, foam
before installing new components to remove any compensation element, and filter element.
sediment debris or contamination. 9. Rotate filter housing (A) clockwise and tighten to
specification.
6. Install new O-ring (A) and foam compensation
element (B) into filter housing (C). Specification
In-Line DEF Filter
Housing—Torque. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 N·m
(221 lb·in)
RG30725—UN—08AUG18
Filter Housing and Components Installation
220D-10
Service—Change
RXA0185241—UN—26AUG21
DEF dosing unit filter (B) is under the left-hand steps.
To replace the DEF dosing unit filter, see Change Diesel

Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Dosing Unit Filter in this Operator’s
Manual section.
AK08008,0000BFE-19-30AUG21
RG30728—UN—08AUG18
In-Line DEF Filter Drain Plug
Change Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Dosing
A—Drain Plug with O-Ring Unit Filter
10. Install new drain plug with O-ring (A). Tighten to
specification.
Specification
In-Line DEF Filter Drain
Plug—Torque. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 N·m
(35 lb·in)
DX,DEF,CHANGE,INLINE,FILT-19-15APR20
Access Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Dosing

Unit Filter RG22534—UN—21MAR13
DEF Dosing Unit Filter
IMPORTANT: Avoid damage to the emissions
system: A—DEF Dosing Unit Filter Cover
B—DEF Dosing Unit Filter Equalizing Element
● Replace the DEF dosing unit filter every 1500 C—DEF Dosing Unit Filter Tool (supplied with new filter)
hours or every 3 years, whichever occurs D—DEF Dosing Unit Filter
first.
● Do not begin service on the DEF dosing unit CAUTION: Avoid contact with eyes. In case of
filter until the light on the battery disconnect contact, immediately flush eyes with large
switch has gone out. See Battery Disconnect amounts of water for a minimum of 15 minutes.
Switch in Engine Operation section of this Reference the Materials Safety Data Sheet
Operator’s Manual. (MSDS) for additional information.
IMPORTANT: If DEF is spilled or contacts any

and rubber components.
220D-11
Service—Change
Spilled DEF, if left to dry or if only wiped away 1. Park tractor on level surface with drain plugs on
with a cloth, leaves a white residue. Improperly each wheel hub oriented downward.
cleaned DEF spill can interfere with diagnosis 2. Allow oil to cool for 15 minutes.
of Selective Catalytic Reduction (SCR) system
leakage problems. NOTE: Full system oil capacity is 310.9 L (82.1 gal).
Secure drain pan of sufficient capacity.
NOTE: See your John Deere equipment technical
manual or OEM manufacturer’s technical manual
for DEF dosing unit filter location.
IMPORTANT: Avoid system and filter damage.

Ensure that DEF system is not frozen before
changing filter. If system is frozen, operate
engine until system has thawed completely.
1. Remove DEF dosing unit filter cover (A).

2. Remove and discard DEF dosing unit filter equalizing
element (B).
NOTE: DEF dosing unit filter tool (C) is supplied with

replacement filter. RXA0141858—UN—02JUN14
3. Remove drain plug (A), located under hydraulic
3. Insert “Black” end of DEF dosing unit filter tool (C) reservoir, to drain oil from reservoir.
into DEF dosing unit filter (D) until CLICK is felt or
heard indicating DEF dosing unit filter tool is fully
engaged.
NOTE: A tool such as a screwdriver can be inserted into

DEF dosing unit filter tool slot to assist removal.
4. Pull DEF dosing unit filter tool and DEF dosing unit
filter from DEF dosing unit. Discard DEF dosing unit
filter and DEF dosing unit filter tool.
5. Clean DEF dosing unit threads and mating surfaces
with distilled water.
6. Lubricate DEF filter O-rings with clean DEF. Carefully RXA0142046—UN—03JUN14
insert DEF dosing unit filter into DEF dosing unit. 4. Remove PowerShift transmission drain plug (B).
7. Install new DEF dosing unit filter equalizing element
into DEF dosing unit filter.
8. Install DEF dosing unit filter cover and tighten to
specification.
Specification
DEF Dosing Unit Filter
Cover—Torque. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 N·m
(204 lb·in)
DX,DEF,CHANGE,FILT-19-31OCT19
RXA0142047—UN—03JUN14
Hydraulic System Oil and Filters Left-Hand Axle
IMPORTANT: Carefully follow drain and fill
procedure to prevent premature transmission
or axle failure.
220D-12
Service—Change
RXA0142048—UN—03JUN14 RXA0160289—UN—25JUL17
Right-Hand Axle PowerShift Transmission Rear
5. Remove three rear axle drain plugs (C). 9. Remove suction screen cover cap screws (F) and
remove cover (G).
RXA0158061—UN—01MAR17
6. Remove plug (D) from each outboard planetary. RXA0160290—UN—25JUL17
10. Remove O-ring (H) from in cover groove and
discard O-ring.
IMPORTANT: Inspect screen for damage or

contamination. Clean or replace as necessary.
11. Remove suction screen (I) from transmission

housing.
12. Clean suction screen with solvent and dry with
compressed air or clean cloth.
13. Reinstall suction screen into transmission housing.
RXA0160288—UN—25JUL17
14. Lubricate new cover O-ring with clean hydraulic oil
7. If equipped with PTO, remove PTO dropbox drain and place in cover O-ring groove.
plug (E) to drain oil. 15. Reinstall suction screen cover and tighten cap
8. Replace all removed drain plugs. Tighten screws to specification 55 N·m (40 lb·ft).
transmission and PTO drain plugs to 55 N·m (40
lb·ft) and rear axle and outboard planetary drain
plugs to 70 N·m (52 lb·ft).
NOTE: Parts removed to better show suction screen.
220D-13
Service—Change
RXA0160291—UN—25JUL17 RXA0160294—UN—25JUL17
16. Remove hoses (J). 24. Remove transmission oil filters (O) at rear of
transmission.
25. Install new filters and tighten one-half turn after
gasket contacts filter housing base.
RXA0180462—UN—18NOV20
17. Remove charge pump suction screen (K) and clean
with a solvent.
18. Remove steering pump suction screen (L) and RXA0160295—UN—25JUL17
clean with a solvent. 26. Remove and replace steering filter (P). Tighten filter
one half turn after seal contacts the base.
19. Remove axle lube suction screen (M) and clean
with a solvent.
20. Reinstall all three screens and tighten to 217 N·m
(160 lb·ft).
21. Reinstall hoses and tighten to 190 N·m (140 lb·ft).
IMPORTANT: Apply thin layer of oil to each filter

gasket before installation.
RXA0160296—UN—25JUL17
27. Remove and replace rear axle filter (Q). Tighten
filter.
28. Clean the hydraulic vent filter.
RXA0160293—UN—25JUL17
22. Remove and replace both hydraulic filters (N).
23. Tighten one half turn after seal contacts filter
housing base.
220D-14
Service—Change
RXA0160297—UN—25JUL17
29. Remove transmission prefill tube plug (R) in frame
opening on right-hand side of transmission.
IMPORTANT: Prevent transmission damage during

initial start-up. Pre-fill transmission with
transmission-hydraulic oil before starting
tractor.
To ensure proper shift quality or transmission RXA0160299—UN—25JUL17
damage, use only oil as specified in 35. Remove reservoir fill cap (U) next to cab entry
Transmission and Hydraulic Oil in Other steps.
36. Add remaining transmission-hydraulic oil volume to
NOTE: For Transmission-Hydraulic Oil System hydraulic reservoir.
Capacities (with Filters), see Capacities in 37. Start and run engine for five minutes to circulate oil
Specifications section of this Operator's Manual. through system.
30. Add 37.9 L (10 gal) of transmission-hydraulic oil 38. Shut off engine and wait five minutes to allow oil to
using transmission prefill tube. stabilize level within system.
39. Change transmission vent filter. See Change
Transmission Vent Filter in this Operator's Manual
section.
IMPORTANT: DO NOT start engine if oil level is

below MIN COLD mark. Add transmission-
hydraulic oil through hydraulic reservoir fill
cap.
40. Place transmission lever into PARK.

41. Start engine. Idle at 1200 rpm for five minutes.
42. Shut off engine and wait five minutes for system oil
RXA0160298—UN—25JUL17
level to stabilize.
31. Disconnect the SCV oil return hose (S) from rear
axle fitting (T). 43. Oil level should be between Full Cold (V) and Min
Cold (W) marks on sight gauge. Capacity between
32. Remove axle fitting from axle housing. Min "Cold" and Full "Cold" marks is 11.4 L (3 gal). If
33. With a funnel, add rear axle 160.9 L (42.5 gal) of oil level is visible between marks "Min Cold" and
transmission-hydraulic oil to rear axle after "Full Cold", tractor can be used for normal
transmission/hydraulic/axle systems are drained for operation.
service.
IMPORTANT: Reservoir oil level fluctuates
34. Install axle fitting in axle housing and attach return depending upon volume of oil exchanged with
hose connector. Tighten fitting to 190 N·m (140 lb·ft) an attached implement. A pressure sensor
and connector to 24 N·m (18 lb·ft). sends alert if pressure falls too low due to low
oil level. Stop tractor and fill with oil as
necessary.
220D-15
Service—Change
NOTE: Hydraulic oil reservoir does not hold all system AirCushion Suspension System Air
hydraulic oil capacity. If possible check oil level Compressor Air Inlet Fitler
prior to first start of day. Ambient temperature
should be 7°C. (45°F) or above. CAUTION: Stay clear of moving suspension
parts. Tractor will lower when air valve is
For implements and applications requiring high
pressed.
volumes of oil transfer (for example - large air
seeders or pulling three scrapers), hydraulic
reservoir can be filled up to High Oil Volume IMPORTANT: Do not drive tractor suspension
Takeout Oil Mark (X). 126.4 L (33.4 gal) above min through water deeper than 1 m (3.2 ft).
cold.
The air suspension compressor is located
As the tractor and hydraulic system warm, oil level approximately 1 m (3.2 ft) from ground and
rises (increase) in reservoir. compressor runs intermittently.
NOTE: Calibrate transmission if shift characteristics If driven in this water level depth, the
change after system oil and filter change. See compressor filter becomes soaked and dirt may
Transmission Calibration in Service—General stick to filter. When filter dries it becomes caked
Information section of this Operator's Manual. on filter which restricts air flow. Filter should be
relocated higher on tractor frame to prevent
filter damage.
IMPORTANT: Excess hydraulic oil can result in
decreased engine power and decrease fuel IMPORTANT: Prevent dirt or debris to enter
economy. compressor intake while replacing filter or
damage to compressor may result.
44. If oil level is above the Full Cold mark, remove oil to
bring it down to the Full Cold mark level.
To drain system oil, place suitable container under
reservoir drain plug. Open plug and drain necessary
amount of oil. Recheck oil level after adjustment.
Transmission Vent Filter
RXA0142148—UN—05JUN14
1.Remove dirt or debris around air compressor inlet
filter (A) before removing.
IMPORTANT: Do not clean or reuse filter element.
2.Replace air compressor inlet filter assembly.

RXA0185242—UN—26AUG21
GH15097,00006F3-19-29JUN22
The transmission is vented through a vent filter (A) at
right-hand rear of cab.
Release retaining clamp on hose to remove filter from
hose. Engine Coolant
Replace vent filter and attach to hose, secure with CAUTION: Explosive release of fluids from
retaining clamp. pressurized cooling system can cause serious
burns.
SV81855,00002C7-19-29JUN22
Shut off engine. Only remove cap when cool
enough to touch with bare hands. Slowly
loosen cap to first stop to relieve pressure
before removing completely.
220D-16
Service—Change
IMPORTANT: READ ENTIRE PROCEDURE BEFORE Shut off engine. Only remove cap when cool
BEGINNING. Special tools and other products enough to touch with bare hands. Slowly
are required to complete the procedure. loosen cap to first stop to relieve pressure
before removing completely.
Replace the thermostat, thermostat gasket, and
de-aeration tank cap whenever the system is
flushed.
See your John Deere dealer for
recommendations on cleaning solutions.
INITIAL change interval is 6 years or 6000 operating

hours, provided cooling system is topped off using only
John Deere Cool-Gard II and premix. SCHEDULED
interval (2 years or 2000 operating hours) can be
extended up to 6 years and 6000 operating hours,
depending upon coolant being used. See Drain Intervals
for Diesel Engine Coolant in Engine Coolant section of
RXA0184960—UN—10AUG21
NOTE: When service is performed on cooling system, 9. Place catch pan under radiator drain valve (A).
make sure to check coolant daily for the next three 10. Open radiator drain valve and drain coolant into
days of operation. The most effective way to check catch pan.
coolant level is when tractor engine is cool. If
coolant is low, fill de-aeration tank to mark on tank. 11. Place catch pan under engine drain valve.
1. Park the tractor.

2. Turn the key switch to OFF.
3. Allow the radiator to cool.
4. Open the hood. See Open Hood in the Service—
Manual.
5. Remove the front and rear engine side shields. See
Remove Front Engine Side Shield and Remove
Rear Engine Side Shield in Service—General
RXA0184961—UN—10AUG21
NOTE: To ensure that the fluids in the heating and air 12. Open engine drain valve (B) and drain coolant into
conditioning system are drained, maintain these catch pan.
settings throughout the entire procedure: 13. Allow radiator and engine to drain.
● Key switch in the RUN position.
● Temperature control set to the hottest setting.
6. Turn the key switch to RUN. See Key Switch in the

Front Console section of this Operator’s Manual.
7. Adjust the temperature control to the hottest setting.
See CommandARM Climate, Radio, and Lighting
Controls in the CommandARM Controls section of
8. Remove the de-aeration tank cap.
CAUTION: Explosive release of fluids from RXA0184962—UN—10AUG21

pressurized cooling system can cause serious 14. Remove clamp (A), radiator hose (B), and coolant
burns. return hose (C).
15. Remove cap screws (D) and thermostat housing
(E).
220D-17
Service—Change
CAUTION: Explosive release of fluids from

burns.
Only remove cap when cool enough to touch
with bare hands. Slowly loosen cap to first stop
to relieve pressure before removing completely.
27. Open hood, remove de-aeration cap, put drain pans

in place, then open radiator and engine drain
valves.
28. Allow cooling system to completely drain.
RXA0184963—UN—10AUG21
29. Close engine drain valve, and radiator drain valve.
16. Remove thermostat (A) and seal (B).
30. Dispose of cleaning solution in accordance with
17. Install new thermostat and seal. local laws and ordinances.
31. Fill high pressure coolant system at de-aeration
tank with clean water.
IMPORTANT: Never pour cold water or coolant into

hot engine.
32. Install de-aeration cap and close hood.
CAUTION: Make sure hood is closed before

starting engine.
33. Start engine and run at a minimum of 1500 rpm for

RXA0184962—UN—10AUG21 15 minutes.
18. Install thermostat housing (E), cap screws (D). 34. Shut off engine and allow water to cool.
Tighten cap screws to 50 N·m (39 lb·ft)
35. Make sure that temperature control is turned to
19. Install coolant return hose (C), radiator hose (B), hottest setting, then turn key switch to Run position.
and clamp (A).
20. Close engine drain valve, and radiator drain valve. CAUTION: Explosive release of fluids from
21. Dispose of old coolant in accordance with local laws burns.
and ordinances.
Only remove cap when cool enough to touch
IMPORTANT: Never pour cold water or coolant into with bare hands. Slowly loosen cap to first stop
hot engine. to relieve pressure before removing completely.
NOTE: See your John Deere dealer for 36. Open hood, remove de-aeration cap, put drain pans
recommendations on cleaning solutions. in place, then open radiator and engine drain
valves.
22. Fill high pressure coolant system at de-aeration 37. Allow radiator to drain.
tank with cooling system cleaning solution.
38. Close engine drain valve and radiator drain valve.
23. Install de-aeration cap and close hood.
39. Dispose of drain clean water in accordance with
CAUTION: Make sure hood is closed before local laws and ordinances.
starting engine.
40. Fill high pressure coolant system at de-aeration
tank with new coolant solution. For cooling system
24. Start engine and run at a minimum of 1500 rpm for capacity, see Capacities in Specifications section of
15 minutes. this Operator’s Manual.
25. Shut off engine and allow cleaning solution to cool.
CAUTION: Make sure hood is closed before
26. Make sure that temperature control is turned to starting engine.
hottest setting, then turn key switch to Run position.
220D-18
Service—Change
IMPORTANT: Never pour cold water or coolant into

hot engine.
NOTE: Coolant may seep out of the de-aeration tank

overflow vent as air is purged from the coolant
system.
Level may change when tractor is running or during
the next few cycles.
It is highly recommended the cooling system is
checked for leaks after draining, flushing and
refilling to ensure tractor performance. Consult your
John Deere Dealer for procedure and appropriate
tools.
41. Install de-aeration cap, Install engine side shields,

close hood, start engine, and run for a minimum of
1500 rpm for 15 minutes.
SV81855,0000341-19-12JUL22
Engine Crankshaft Damper

RW29387,00001BC-19-11FEB22
220D-19
Service—Lubricate
Rear Hitch
IMPORTANT: Normal service is every 250 hours. If
used daily, service every 50 hours.
RXA0158577—UN—29MAR17
Lubricate hitch lift link pins (A). Use John Deere SD
Polyurea grease or equivalent. See Grease in Other
RX32825,0000638-19-13JUL17
Lift Cylinders and Rockshaft

RXA0150422—UN—11NOV15
RXA0150423—UN—11NOV15 RXA0141976—UN—02JUN14
Lubricate center link (A), lift link (B), lift cylinders (C),
and rockshaft (D) hitch fittings.
Use John Deere SD Polyurea grease or equivalent. See
Grease in Other Lubricants section of this Operator’s
Manual.
RX32825,0000643-19-08NOV17
Heavy Duty Lift Link Pins (Optional)

IMPORTANT: Prevent damage to hitch pins. Grease
daily when hitch is in use.
RXA0141977—UN—20JUN14
Rockshaft Assembly
Lubricate lift cylinder pin fittings (B) on both sides of

tractor. Lubricate left-hand (A) and right-hand side
rockshaft fittings. See Grease in Other Lubricants
section of this Operator’s Manual for correct grease to
use.
TO84419,0000199-19-13JUL17
220E-1
Service—Lubricate
Track Tension Cylinder
RXA0141920—UN—02JUN14
RXA0141921—UN—02JUN14
Apply several shots of grease to tension cylinder grease
fittings (A) at each end of cylinder.
Use grease as specified in Grease in Other Lubricants
section of this Operator's Manual.
GH15097,00006CE-19-24JUL17
220E-2
Service—Electrical
Service—Electrical Overview Welding Near Electronic Control Units
In addition to fuses and relays mounted in fuse panels
(behind operator’s seat), tractors are also equipped with
solid state load centers located in two electronic control
units.
These solid-state load centers replace fused relay
circuits previously used. Their primary function is to
control the majority of high current loads such as rear
fender lights and horn. Load center circuitry monitors
loads and voltages providing fast reaction time and
ability to alert operator if a circuit overloads or if voltage
is out of specification, i.e. open circuit (undercurrent) or
short circuit (over-current).
If circuit is faulty and a diagnostic trouble code is
generated, circuit will stay OFF and diagnostic trouble IMPORTANT: Do not jump-start engines with arc
code will remain active until circuit is recycled by welding equipment. Currents and voltages are
operator. If circuit or one of its components is turned too high and may cause permanent damage.
back ON and problem is no longer present, system will
function normally. 1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery cable(s).
As an example, if a light circuit is determined to have an 2. Disconnect the positive (+) battery cable(s).
over-current condition, load center system will shut the
circuit off. If operator turns light switch off and back on, 3. Connect the positive and negative cables together.
and system senses zero amps when light controlled by Do not attach to vehicle frame.
the switch is off, system will turn system back on and 4. Clear or move any wiring harness sections away
normal operation will turn back on. from welding area.
If total current load of load center exceeds a preset 5. Connect welder ground close to welding point and
level, software will automatically shut down system, away from control units.
turning off one circuit at a time. Logic circuit will wait a
few seconds between circuit shutdowns to determine if 6. After welding, reverse Steps 1—5.
total controller current has fallen below preset level, or if DX,WW,ECU02-19-14AUG09
additional circuits should be turned off.
Solid state circuits are rated for a fixed value. If
additional electrical devices need to be added to tractor, Keep Electronic Control Unit Connectors
it is recommend to use a power strip or convenience
outlets in conjunction with an off/on switch. Splicing into
Clean
a wire in the wrong location could cause circuit to IMPORTANT: Do not open control unit and do not
overload and shut circuit down. clean with a high-pressure spray. Moisture, dirt,
If extra implement lights and controls, such as switches and other contaminants may cause permanent
are needed, contact your John Deere dealer. A dealer damage.
can provide information on correct method to tie in a
light switch with one of accessory wires located in 7 pin 1. Keep terminals clean and free of foreign debris.
terminal on back of tractor. Moisture, dirt, and other contaminants may cause the
terminals to erode over time and not make a good
TS36762,000015E-19-25MAR21
electrical connection.
2. If a connector is not in use, put on the proper dust
cap or an appropriate seal to protect it from foreign
debris and moisture.
3. Control units are not repairable.
4. Since control units are the components LEAST likely
to fail, isolate failure before replacing by completing a
diagnostic procedure. (See your John Deere dealer.)
5. The wiring harness terminals and connectors for
electronic control units are repairable.
DX,WW,ECU04-19-11JUN09
220F-1
Compressed Air Use IMPORTANT: Prevent damage to the tractor

emissions system. Never disconnect the
battery disconnect switch while the battery
disconnect switch light is illuminated. See
Battery Disconnect Switch in Engine Operation
TS36762,0000161-19-11FEB20
Service Batteries and Connections

CAUTION: It can cause a buildup of static
charge leading to potential injury.
RW56455—UN—30JUN97
Battery gas can explode. Keep sparks and
IMPORTANT: Directing pressurized air at electronic/ flames away from batteries. Use flashlight to
electrical components or connectors, may check battery electrolyte level.
cause buildup of static electricity and product
malfunctions. Never check the battery charge by placing a
metal object across the posts. Use a voltmeter
TO84419,0000228-19-25JUL17
or hydrometer.
Always remove battery ground cables before
positive battery cables and connect them last.
Do not let disconnected ground terminal touch
High-Pressure Washer Use metal surface.
WARNING: Battery posts, terminals, and related

accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after
handling.
CAUTION: Avoid contact with poisonous

sulfuric acid in battery electrolyte. Battery acid
can burn skin, damage clothing, and cause
blindness if splashed into eyes.
NOTE: Although this battery is a maintenance free

T6642EJ—UN—18OCT88
battery, conditions such as long periods of
IMPORTANT: Directing pressurized water at operation at high ambient temperatures and
electronic/electrical components or excessive engine cranking may require adding
connectors, bearings and hydraulic seals, fuel water. See label on battery.
injection pumps, exhaust outlet or other For optimum battery performance, keep battery
sensitive parts and components may cause terminals clean and tight. For replacement
product malfunctions. Reduce pressure, and batteries, follow manufacturer's recommendations.
spray at a 45 to 90 degree angle. When washing
do not direct any water towards the exhaust or
any fill tank openings. IMPORTANT: Prevent damage to tractor:
● Emissions system. Never disconnect the
TO84419,0000215-19-20JAN17
Battery Disconnect Switch in the Engine
Disconnect Battery Operations section of this Operator’s
Manual.
CAUTION: Avoid injury or damage to tractor ● Electrical system. Ensure that the key switch
systems from inadvertent contact with is in the OFF position before servicing the
electrical power. Disconnect battery when batteries and connections.
directed.
1. Turn off the battery disconnect switch. See Battery
220F-2
Disconnect Switch in the Engine Operation section b. Negative battery cables.

10. Apply a thin coating of grease to cable ends.
11. Connect the single point ground cable to the tractor
frame.
12. Close the battery compartment cover.
13. Turn on the battery disconnect switch on.
SV81855,000021A-19-31AUG21
Load Center—Cab
IMPORTANT: Prevent damage to the tractor:
RXA0185277—UN—30AUG21 ● Emissions system. Never disconnect the
Engine Left-hand Side
2. Disconnect the single point ground cable (A). Battery Disconnect Switch in Engine
3. Open the battery compartment cover. See Access Operation section of this Operator’s Manual.
Battery Compartment in the Service—General ● Electrical system.
- Ensure that the key switch is in the OFF
position before changing fuses.
- Replacement fuse must be the same rating
as the original fuse.
Access Cab Load Center
RXA0185278—UN—30AUG21
4. Disconnect the: negative battery cables (C), then
positive battery cables (B).
IMPORTANT: Never use compressed air to clean

batteries.
RXA0167377—UN—05APR19
5. Remove any corrosion with a terminal brush, then The cab load center is behind the side panel (A) at lower
clean terminals and battery posts using a baking right of the operator's seat.
soda and water solution.
Remove the side panel to access the cab load center.
6. Rinse the batteries with clean water and air dry.
7. If the batteries have been removed for service, slide Cab Load Center—Relay/Fuse Identification
batteries back into compartment.
K—Relay
8. Install the battery retaining clamp. F—Fuse
9. Connect the:
a. Positive battery cables.
220F-3
1 2 3 4 5 6
11 12
7 8 9 10
13 14
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38
39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46
RXA0173765—UN—13JAN20
1—K2: Ignition 24—F07: MTG JDLink Controller, Ethernet Switch, and GPS
2—K18: HVAC Blowers Receiver (10A)
3—Not Used 25—F09: CommandCenter Server (10A)
4—K4: Trailer Accessory Lighting 26—F10: Trailer Flood (30A)
5—K20: Seat 27—Spare (15A)
6—K6: Accessory 28—F27: Convenience Outlets (30A)
7—K9: 2-Track Suspension 29—F31: Power Mirrors; Trailering Lights (If Equipped) (20A)
8—K8: Trailer Flood 30—F54: Auxiliary Outlets (30A)
9—K9: Buzzer 31—F11: Trailer Lighting (30A)
10—Not Used 32—F08: Armrest Controller (15A)
11—F35: Active Seat (If equipped) (40A) 33—F13: Steering Controller (15A)
12—F40: DC-AC Inverter (40A) 34—Spare (05A)
13—F33: Accessory (70A) 35—F32: Come Home (10A)
14—F37: HVAC Blowers (40A) 36—F19: Seat Suspension (20A)
15—F15: Convenience, Lighter, and CB (30A) 37—F41: Seat Top (20A)
16—F01: Key/Switch Battery (05A) 38—F42: Seat Top (30A)
17—F02: Operator Presence Switch (10A) 39—F18: Primary Display Unit (05A)
18—F03: Automatic Temperature Control (10A) 40—F47: Cab Front Console Controller (15A)
19—F17: USB Power Armrest (05A) 41—F16: 2-Track Suspension Motor (30A)
20—F20: Radio ACC Power (10A) 42—Spare (10A)
21—F24: Cameras (10A) 43—Come Home Use Only
22—F23: CB, Refrigerator (30A) 44—Come Home Use Only
23—F05: Radio (10A) 45—F49: Accessory (Low current), Subwoofer (20A)
46—F46: USB Power C-Post (05A)
SV81855,0000352-19-29JUN22
Load Center—Front - Replacement fuse must be the same rating

as the original fuse.
IMPORTANT: Prevent damage to the tractor:
● Emissions system. Never disconnect the Access Front Load Center
battery disconnect switch while the light is 1. Open the hood. See Open Hood in Service—General
illuminated. See Battery Disconnect Switch Information section of this Operator’s Manual.
in Engine Operation section of this
● Electrical system.
- Ensure that the key switch is in the OFF

position before changing fuses.
220F-4
engine attached to the bottom of the cooling system de-

aeration tank.
2. To release the load center cover and access the load

center:
a. Gently slide the yellow locking tabs (B) towards
the load center cover front face.
b. Squeeze the four black tabs (C) inward towards
the load center cover.
3. Replace the load center cover when the service is
complete.
RXA0180445—UN—13NOV20
The front load center (A) is at the rear left-hand side of the 4. Close the hood.
Front Load Center—Relay/Fuse Identification
25 49 1 7 13 19
K
A D H
B E F I
67 68
C G J
69 70
30 54 6 12 18 24
RXA0180446—UN—13NOV20
KE—Relay
FE—Fuse
Relay/Fuse
Location Engine Size Description Pin Number
Identification
Rear 2 Controller
A FE28 13.6 L 10A 25, 26
Power
B FE101 13.6 L 10A Rear Aux Light 27, 28
C KE14 13.6 L Relay Auto-ether 29, 30, 35, 36
D FE13 13.6 L 2A VBATT 31, 32
E FE14 13.6 L 15A Ether 33, 34
F FE07 13.6 L 10A Fused AB-COM 45, 46
G FE08 13.6 L 15A TBBA Power 47, 48
H FE01 13.6 L 20A ECU Power 1 49, 50
I FE02 13.6 L 25A ECU Power 2 51, 52
J FE03 13.6 L 25A ECU Power 3 53, 54
K FE100 13.6 L 60A Implement Power 63, 64
L FE30 13.6 L 30A ECU Relay Power 65, 66
220F-5
EC82310,0000F53-19-15MAR22
Access Master Fuses

CAUTION: Disconnect both negative and
positive battery connections from both
batteries prior to fuse inspection or
replacement.
IMPORTANT: Prevent damage to tractor:

● Emissions system. Never disconnect the
Battery Disconnect Switch in the Engine RXA0180460—UN—17NOV20
Operations section of this Operator’s The master fuses panel (D) is at the left-hand rear side of
Manual. the lower hood support.
● Electrical system. Ensure that the key switch

6. Remove the bolts and the master fuse panel cover.
is in the OFF position before servicing the
batteries and connections. The master fuses are:
● Do not attempt to disassemble the master
fuses unless instructed by your John Deere
dealer. Replacement fuses must be the same
rating as original.
To access the master fuses:

1. Turn the key switch to the OFF position.
2. Turn off the battery disconnect switch. See Battery
Disconnect Switch in the Engine Operation section of
3. Access the battery compartment. See Access
Battery Compartment in the Service—General RXA0180456—UN—17NOV20
Information section of this Operator’s Manual. Master Fuse
4. Disconnect the battery ground (-) cable. A—Master Fuse (300A)

B—Alternator Battery Fuse (300A)
NOTE: The master fuse is connected across both posts C—Backup Hydraulic Pump Fuse (175A)
of the junction box.
SV81855,0000296-19-23APR21
5. Open the hood. See Open Hood in the Service—

Manual. Access Implement Power Relay Module
Relays
IMPORTANT: Prevent damage to the tractor
electrical system. Ensure that the key switch is
in the OFF position before replacing the
implement power relay module relays.
To access the implement power relay module relays,

remove the cab rear panel. See Remove Cab Rear
Panel in the Service—General Information section of
220F-6
RXA0180458—UN—17NOV20 H39474—UN—30JUN00
The implement power relay module relays are in the upper
right-hand corner of the cab back panel. CAUTION: Halogen bulbs (A) contain gas under
pressure. Handling a bulb improperly could
A—KE01 ISOBUS Control Unit Power cause it to shatter into flying fragments. To
B—KE100 ISOBUS Implement Power
avoid possible injury:
Replace the Relays ● Turn light switch off and allow bulbs to cool
before changing. Leave switch off until bulb
NOTE: The associated fuses are on the front load change is done.
center. To replace the associated fuses, see Load ● Wear eye protection.
Center-Front in this Operator’s Manual section.
● Handle bulb by its base. Keep bulb oil free;
wear gloves to avoid touching glass.
To replace the relays:
● Do not drop or scratch bulb. Keep moisture
1. Disconnect the wiring harness from the relay. away.
2. Remove the old relay. ● Place used bulb in the new bulb carton and
dispose of properly. Keep out of reach of
3. Attach the new relay. children.
4. Connect the wiring harness to the relay.
TS36762,0000165-19-05SEP17
TO84419,00001DA-19-16MAR22
Change Halogen Bulbs

Handle Halogen Light Bulbs Safely
1. Disconnect wiring harness plug by lifting retaining tab
(B).
220F-7
Adjust Front Grille Lights

To adjust front grille lights:
For Low Beam Headlights:
RXA0169633—UN—15JUL19
1. To lower low beam aim, turn low beam adjustment
screw (A) clockwise.
RXA0173828—UN—03FEB20
Right-Hand Side Shown
2. Rotate halogen headlight (A) counterclockwise with

1/4 of a turn and remove.
3. Replace halogen light assembly (C).
TS36762,0000167-19-13MAY20
Change Front HID/LED Light Assembly

1. Raise hood.
RXA0142138—UN—05JUN14
To raise and tilt out low beam headlights, turn low beam
adjustment screw (E) clockwise.
To raise and tilt in low beam headlights, turn low
beam adjustment screw (F) clockwise.
For High Beam Headlights:
2. To lower high beam aim, turn high beam adjustment
screw (B) clockwise.
To raise and tilt out high beam, turn high beam
adjustment screw (C) clockwise.
To raise and tilt in high beam, turn high beam
RXA0158062—UN—03MAR17 adjustment screw (D) clockwise.
Right-Hand Side Shown
3. Repeat for opposite side of tractor.
2. Disconnect harness connector (A). SV81855,00002B7-19-17JUL19
3. Remove screws (B) and light assembly (C).

4. Replace light assembly.
Aim Headlights
5. Install new light assembly in reverse order of
removal. CAUTION: Avoid unacceptable lighting display.
As adjustments are made, observe local
6. Close and secure hood. requirements and regulations.
SV81855,00001FA-19-20JUL17
Lighting options provide different combinations and
220F-8
locations of light. See Light Identification in Lights

section of this Operator's Manual to identify which lights
are high- and low-beam headlights.
High- and low-beam headlights are adjustable to
provide desired lighting coverage. In some options
packages, LED high- and low-beam headlights are H
mounted together and cannot be adjusted separately. In
others the high- and low-beam lights are mounted
separately and must be adjusted individually.
G
All halogen high- and low-beam headlights can be
adjusted individually.
Before aiming headlights, adjust the tractor to duplicate
transport conditions. Adjust tire pressures to correct F
values. Neutralize front axle suspension system (if
equipped). E
NOTE: Diagrams are not drawn to scale.
RXA0172852—UN—02JAN20
3. On the tractor, measure the vertical distance (E)
from the ground to the horizontal center of the light
to be adjusted (F).
D
A 4. Multiply light vertical height by the appropriate
C height adjustment factor. Height adjustment factor:
● High Beam = 0.95
● Low Beam = 0.75
A Example: High-beam light center line height from
floor (F) is 1.52 m (60 in). Multiplying times 0.95
B equals 1.45 m (57 in) height for the wall high-beam
horizontal center line (G).
5. Mark a horizontal line (I) on wall at the height
calculated in step 4 (J).
K
RXA0172851—UN—19DEC19 C
1. Park the tractor on a level surface with the low- D
beam headlight lenses (A) 7.5 meters (25 ft) (B)
L
from a flat, straight, and vertical wall. Tractor must
be perpendicular to the wall. I
2. Mark a vertical line on the wall (C) corresponding to I

the tractor vertical center line (D).
NOTE: If tractor is equipped with LED headlights without

separate low-beam headlights, both high and low
beams are adjusted with the low-beam adjustment
screws. Use low-beam aiming and adjustment
procedures. I
RXA0172853—UN—02JAN20
220F-9
6. Measure the distance (I) from the hood vertical Change Cab Roof Light
center (D) to the vertical center (L) of the desired
right-hand light lens.
7. Place left-hand (K) and right-hand (J) vertical center
lines on the wall. Position lines on either side of the
tractor center line (C) at the distance (I) measured in
step 3.
8. Cover left-hand light.
9. Turn on desired lights.
L RXA0172759—UN—03DEC19
Cab Roof Light—LED Light Option Shown
L N
1. Gently pry light out the light assembly using a flat tip
screwdriver in slot (A).
M
2. The cab roof light is equipped with either an LED
assembly or a halogen bulb. To replace the cab roof
K light if the light assembly contains:
K ● An LED assembly:
a. Disconnect the harness connector.
2 b. Replace the LED assembly.
1 c. Reconnect the harness connector.
d. Insert the cab roof light assembly into the cab
roof until it snaps into place.
● A halogen bulb:
RXA0172854—UN—19DEC19 a. Remove the halogen bulb base from the light

Right-Hand Headlight Adjustment assembly.
b. Remove and replace the halogen bulb from the
1—High-Beam Headlight
2—Low-Beam Headlight
halogen bulb base.
c. Insert the halogen bulb base into the light
10. Adjust brightest point of the light beam (hot spot) (K) assembly.
so that it shines in the correct position. Center the d. Insert the cab roof light assembly into the cab
hot spots on the light vertical center lines (L). High roof until it snaps into place.
beams are centered on the high-beam light
EC82310,0000B84-19-14MAY20
horizontal center line (M).
Adjust low beams so that the top of the hot spot (K)
is on the low-beam light horizontal center line (N).
Change Rear Fender Light—Rear Indicator
See appropriate adjustment information in this
11. Transfer the cover from the left-hand light to right-
hand light.
12. Repeat adjustment procedure with the left-hand
light.
13. To adjust other lights, return to step 3.
RX32825,00000B4-19-05AUG21
RXA0172762—UN—04DEC19
1. Remove bolts (A).
220F-10
Change Cab Dome Light
RXA0172765—UN—03DEC19
2. Remove bolts holding cover (B).
3. Disconnect the harness connector (C).
4. Remove and replace with a new light assembly. RXA0172763—UN—03DEC19
5. Reassemble in the reverse order. 1. Remove screws (A).

ZZASX1U,0000068-19-23APR21
Change Extremity Light—Cab
RXA0172768—UN—03DEC19 RXA0172764—UN—05DEC19
Extremity Light—Example 2. Disconnect wiring harness (B).
3. Remove screws (C) holding the light assembly.
1. Remove screws (A). Some extremity light arms have
more screws than shown. 4. Replace with new light assembly.
EC82310,0000B8A-19-12DEC19
RXA0172769—UN—03DEC19
2. Remove screws (B).
3. Disconnect the light assembly (C).
4. Replace with new light assembly.
EC82310,0000B89-19-20FEB20
220F-11
Troubleshooting—Procedures
Troubleshooting Features regions. See your John Deere dealer for unresolved
Some features listed in this Operator’s Manual section product issues.
may not be applicable to all tractor configurations and KD34109,0000944-19-19JUL21
Electrical System
Low Battery Voltage (key switch on and engine off)
Problem Solution
Check that battery voltage is 12.0—14.5 V.
Defective battery.
Low charging voltage with engine running. See your John Deere dealer.
High resistance in charging circuit. See your John Deere dealer.
Low Charging Voltage (engine running)
Problem Solution
Low engine speed. Increase engine speed.
Auxiliary drive belt slips and is not fully powering the alternator. Check the auxiliary drive belt tension.
Defective battery.
Defective alternator. See your John Deere dealer.
Decrease electrical load.
Excessive electrical load.
Loose or corroded connections. Clean and tighten connections.
Sulfated or worn-out batteries.
Check the auxiliary belt tension.
Loose or defective alternator belt.
Replace belt.
Excessive Charging Voltage (engine running)
Problem Solution
Faulty connection to the alternator. Check wiring connections.
Defective regulator. See your John Deere dealer.
Starter Inoperative
Problem Solution
Faulty starter or starter solenoid. See your John Deere dealer.
Loose or corroded connections. Clean and tighten loose connections.
Low battery output. See your John Deere dealer.
Check fuses. See Center Load—Front in Service—Electrical section of
this Operator's Manual.
Failed fuse.
Check the alternator/battery relay fuse. See Access Master Fuses in
Service—Electrical section of this Operator's Manual.
Failed relay. See your John Deere dealer.
To protect the starter, the ECU may prevent starting if several crank/no
Excessive cranking attempts.
start events have occurred. Wait 2 minutes and attempt starting again.
Starter Turns Over Slowly
Problem Solution
Low battery output.
Use the correct viscosity oil. See Engine Oil section of this Operator’s
Crankcase oil is too heavy.
Manual.
300A-1
Problem Solution
Loose or corroded connections. Clean and tighten loose connections.
Ensure SCVs are in neutral and disconnect the implement hose in the
Excessive hydraulic load.
rear load sense port (if used).
Entire Electrical System Does Not Function
Problem Solution
Faulty battery connection. Clean and tighten connections.
Battery disconnect system switch in the off position. Turn the battery disconnect switch to the on position.
Sulfated or worn out batteries.
Check the master fuse. See Access Master Fuses in Service—
Failed master fuse.
Electrical section of this Operator's Manual.
KD34109,000093A-19-16MAR22
Engine
Engine Is Hard to Start or Does Not Start
Problem Solution
Incorrect starting procedure. Review the starting procedure.
Check the relay. See Load Center—Cab in Service—Electrical section
Failed relay.
Check the fuses. See Load Center—Front in Service—Electrical section
Failed fuse.
No fuel. Check the fuel tank.
Bleed the fuel line. With the engine off, turn the key to the run position
Air in the fuel line.
for 60 seconds.
Check the ether can and other cold-weather starting aids. See Cold
Cold weather.
Weather Operation section of this Operator’s Manual.
See Starter Turns Over Slowly in Electrical System in this Operator’s
Slow starter speed.
Manual section.
Use the correct viscosity oil. See Engine Oil section of this Operator’s
Crankcase oil is too heavy.
Manual.
Use the correct fuel type for the operating conditions. Consult the fuel
Incorrect type of fuel.
supplier to determine if necessary.
Drain, flush, fill, and bleed the system. See Service—General
Water, dirt, or air in the fuel system.
Replace the filter elements. See Service—Change section of this
Clogged fuel filter.
Dirty or faulty injectors. See your John Deere dealer.
Ensure SCVs are in neutral and disconnect the implement hose in the
Excessive hydraulic load.
rear load sense port (if used).
Engine Knocks
Problem Solution
Insufficient oil. Add oil. See Engine Oil section of this Operator’s Manual.
During warm-up, the pilot injection system activates and deactivates It is normal for the pilot injection system to activate and deactivate
depending on the engine operating temperature. depending on the engine operating temperature.
Replace the thermostats. See Service—Change section of this
Low engine coolant temperature.
Engine overheats. See Engine Overheats later in Engine Troubleshooting.
300A-2
Engine Runs Irregularly or Stalls Frequently
Problem Solution
Replace the thermostats. See Service—Change section of this
Low coolant temperature.
Replace the filter elements. See Service—Change section of this
Clogged fuel filters.
Drain, flush, fill, and bleed the system. See Service—General
Water, dirt, or air in the fuel system.
See Fuel Tank Sump in Service—Check section of this Operator’s
Water in the fuel system.
Manual.
Clean the vent. Check the vent lines for restrictions.
Fuel tank vent is obstructed. Replace the vent filter. See Service—Change section of this Operator’s
Manual.
Below Normal Engine Temperature
Problem Solution
Replace the thermostat. See Service—Change section of this
Defective thermostat.
Defective temperature gauge or sender. See your John Deere dealer.
Fan Drive Speed Surges at a Low Engine Speed
Problem Solution
Fan drive problem. See your John Deere dealer.
Throttle Does Not Allow Full Engine Speed
Problem Solution
Maximum Set Speed is on and limiting maximum engine rpm. Adjust Maximum Set Speed to maximum rpm.
Warm up the transmission-hydraulic oil.
Cold oil can limit the engine speed to 1500 rpm.
Check the CommandCenter for diagnostic trouble codes. See
Engine derate is active. Troubleshooting—Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC) section of this
Lack of Power
Problem Solution
Engine is overloaded. Reduce load or shift to a lower gear.
Adjust or turn off the Max Engine Speed setting.
Set IVT/AutoPowr or EVT/eAutoPowr correctly. Check the applicable
Low or high idle speed.
transmission section of this Operator’s Manual.
Service the air cleaner. See Service—Check section of this Operator’s
Intake air restriction.
Manual.
Replace the fuel filter elements. See Service—Change section of this
Clogged fuel filters.
See Fuel Tank Sump in Service—Check section of this Operator’s
Water in the fuel system.
Manual.
Use the correct fuel. See the appropriate fuel information in Fuel section
Engine is overheated. See Engine Overheats later in Engine Troubleshooting.
Check the thermostat. See Service—Change section of this Operator’s
Below normal engine temperature.
Manual.
Incorrect valve clearance. See your John Deere dealer.
300A-3
Problem Solution
Turbocharger does not function. See your John Deere dealer.
Leaking exhaust manifold gasket. See your John Deere dealer.
Implement adjusted incorrectly. See implement Operator's Manual.
Clean or replace the fuel line. See Service—Change section of this
Restricted fuel inlet.
Adjust the ballast to load. See Performance Ballasting section of this
Incorrect ballast.
Low Oil Pressure
Problem Solution
Low oil level. Add oil. See Engine Oil section of this Operator’s Manual.
Drain and refill the crankcase with the correct quality and viscosity of oil.
Incorrect type of oil.
See Engine Oil section of this Operator’s Manual.
High Oil Consumption
Problem Solution
Use the correct viscosity oil. See the appropriate engine oil information
Crankcase oil is too light.
in Engine Oil section of this Operator's Manual.
Oil leakage. Check for leaks in the lines and around the gaskets and the drain plug.
Defective turbocharger. See your John Deere dealer.
Restricted engine breather tube. Clean the engine breather tube.
Engine Emits Smoke
Problem Solution
Use the correct fuel. See the appropriate fuel information in Fuel section
Clogged or dirty air cleaner. Service the air cleaner.
Engine is overloaded. Reduce the load or shift to a lower gear.
Injection nozzles are dirty. See your John Deere dealer.
Turbocharger does not function. See your John Deere dealer.
Engine Overheats
Problem Solution
Remove all trash and clean the coolers. See Service—Check section of
Dirty radiator core, oil cooler, or grille screens.
Check the oil level and add oil as required. See Engine Oil section of this
Low engine oil level.
Fill the de-aeration tank to the correct level.
Low coolant level.
Check the radiator and hoses for loose connections or leaks.
Faulty radiator cap. Replace the radiator cap.
Fan drive malfunction. See your John Deere dealer.
Flush the cooling system. See Service—Clean section of this Operator’s
Cooling system blockage. Manual.
Replace the thermostat. See Service—Change section of this
Defective thermostat.
Defective temperature gauge or sender. See your John Deere dealer.
300A-4
High Fuel Consumption
Problem Solution
Service the air cleaner. See Service—Check section of this Operator’s
Clogged or dirty air cleaner.
Manual.
Injection nozzles are dirty. See your John Deere dealer.
Implement is incorrectly adjusted. See implement Operator's Manual.
Adjust the ballast to load. See Performance Ballasting section of this
Excessive ballast.
KD34109,000093B-19-21JUN22
Hitch
Insufficient Transport Clearance
Problem Solution
Center link is too short. Adjust the center link.
Put the hitch center link in the correct hole. See Rear Hitch section of
Center link is in the wrong position.
Lift links are too short. Adjust the lift links.
Implement is not level. Level the implement.
Implement is not adjusted correctly. See implement Operator's Manual.
Upper Limit is not set correctly. Adjust Upper Limit in the CommandCenter.
Suspension (if equipped) leveling does not function correctly or extends
Refer to suspension information in this Operator’s Manual.
above level.
Hitch Fails to Follow the Lever
Problem Solution
Malfunction in the lever position sensor circuit or hitch position sensor. See your John Deere dealer.
Poor Position Control
Problem Solution
Hitch Load Depth is not set correctly. Adjust Load Depth in the CommandCenter.
Malfunction in the lever position sensor circuit or hitch position sensor. See your John Deere dealer.
Suspension (if equipped) leveling does not function correctly during
Refer to suspension information in this Operator’s Manual.
large draft changes.
Hitch Drops Slowly
Problem Solution
Adjust Drop Rate in the CommandCenter.
Hitch Drop Rate is not set correctly.
See Rear Hitch section of this Operator’s Manual.
Hitch Fails to Lift or Lifts Slowly
Problem Solution
Excessive load on the hitch. Reduce load.
Center link is in the wrong position. Put the hitch center link in the correct hole.
Hitch valve leaks. See your John Deere dealer.
Hitch Upper Limit setting limits lift height. Adjust Upper Limit in the CommandCenter.
300A-5
Problem Solution
Lubricate the hitch mechanisms. See Service—Lubricate section of this
Lack of lubrication.
See Hitch Manual Lowering in Rear Hitch section of this Operator’s
Manual hitch drain is open.
Manual. Ensure that the screw is not in the open position.
Cold hydraulic oil. Allow the oil to heat up to the operating temperature.
Implement Not Operating at the Desired Depth
Problem Solution
Lift links are too short. Adjust the lift links.
Lack of soil penetration. See implement Operator's Manual.
Draft sensor fails. See your John Deere dealer.
Implement is not level. See implement Operator's Manual.
Insufficient or No Hitch Response to Draft Load
Problem Solution
Hitch Load Depth is not set correctly. Adjust Load Depth in the CommandCenter.
Hitch Drop Rate is too slow. Adjust Drop Rate in the CommandCenter.
Hitch Too Responsive
Problem Solution
Adjust Load Depth in the CommandCenter.
Hitch Load Depth is not set correctly.
See Rear Hitch section of this Operator’s Manual.
Hitch Settles Too Fast after Tractor Is Parked and Engine Is Shut Off
Problem Solution
Internal leakage. See your John Deere dealer.
See Hitch Manual Lowering in Rear Hitch section of this Operator’s
Manual hitch drain is open.
Manual. Ensure that the screw is not in the open position.
Hitch Does Not Move (controls not working, including rear raise/lower switch)
Problem Solution
Replace the fuse. See Load Center—Cab in Service—Electrical section
Failed fuse.
Hitch does not move with an intact fuse. Troubleshooting—Diagnostic Trouble Codes section of this Operator’s
Manual.
External Raise/Lower Switch Does Not Move the Hitch
Problem Solution
Failure of the raise/lower switch, connector, or wiring harness. See your John Deere dealer.
Lever is in transport lock. Move the lever out of transport. Unlock it in the CommandCenter.
Pickup Hitch Operates Incorrectly
Problem Solution
Adjust the pickup hitch. See Rear Hitch section of this Operator’s
Pickup hitch does not latch.
Manual.
300A-6
Excessive Implement Movement
Problem Solution
Adjust the sway blocks to minimize hitch movement. See Rear Hitch
Hitch sways too much.
KD34109,000093C-19-21JUN22
Hydraulic System
Entire Hydraulic System Fails to Function
Problem Solution
Low oil supply. Check the transmission-hydraulic oil level.
Replace the transmission-hydraulic oil filters. See Service—Change
Clogged hydraulic filter.
Clean the screen. See Service—Clean section of this Operator’s
Clogged hydraulic oil suction screen.
Manual.
Oil cooler air passages are clogged. Clean the oil cooler.
High-pressure internal leak. See your John Deere dealer.
Hydraulic Oil Overheats
Problem Solution
Check the transmission-hydraulic oil level. See Service—Change
Low or high oil supply.
Clogged oil cooler air passages. Clean the oil cooler and condenser in the front cooling module.
Internal leaks. See your John Deere dealer.
See Hydraulic Connections section of this Operator’s Manual.
Implement hydraulic load is not matched to the tractor or not properly
See implement Operator’s Manual.
routed back into the tractor hydraulic system.
Clean the filter screen. See Service—Change section of this Operator's
Clogged transmission oil screen. Manual.
KD34109,000093D-19-05MAY22
Operator’s Station
Excessive Dust Enters Cab
Problem Solution
Check the condition of the seals.
Defective seal around the cab filter element, door seal, or window seal. Check that the filter installation is correct. See Service—Change
Section of this Operator’s Manual.
Check the cab recirculation air filter and cab fresh air filter.
Defective cab filter.
See Service—Change Section of this Operator’s Manual.
See Blower Air Flow Too Low later in Operator’s Station
Inadequate blower air flow.
Troubleshooting.
Blower Air Flow Too Low
Problem Solution
Inspect the cab recirculation and cab fresh air filters and the screen for
Clogged filter or air intake screen.
blockage. See Service—Change section of this Operator’s Manual.
Clogged heater core or evaporator core. Clean the heater core or evaporator core.
300A-7
Problem Solution
Thaw the heater core.
Frozen heater core.
Blower Malfunctioning
Problem Solution
Troubleshooting—Diagnostic Trouble Codes section of this Operator’s
Blower does not work.
Manual.
Check the air conditioner fuses. See Load Center—Cab in Service—
Failed fuse.
Check the air conditioning relay. See Load Center—Cab in Service—
Failed relay.
Heater Does Not Switch Off
Problem Solution
Heater hoses are connected incorrectly. See your John Deere dealer.
Failed water valve actuator. See your John Deere dealer.
Air Conditioner Not Cooling
Problem Solution
Low refrigerant. See your John Deere dealer.
Debris blocks the condenser. Clean the condenser.
Check the belt tension. See Service—Check section of this Operator’s
Belt slips.
Manual.
Set the air conditioning to ON in the CommandCenter. See HVAC
CommandCenter air conditioning is set to OFF on the HVAC page.
Settings in HVAC section of this Operator’s Manual.
Seat Suspension Not Working
Problem Solution
Check the seat fuses. See Load Center—Cab in Service—Electrical
Failed fuse.
Radio Does Not Function
Problem Solution
Check the radio fuses. See Load Center—Cab in Service—Electrical
Failed fuse.
Radio cutting in and out. Check the antenna and ground connection.
KD34109,000093F-19-21JUN22
Selective Control Valve (SCV)

Remote Cylinder Does Not Lift a Load
Problem Solution
Cycle the SCV levers.
Flow blockage (worn hydraulic tips).
Replace the hydraulic tips and check the connections.
Excessive load. Reduce load.
SCV lever or joystick is not assigned to the expected SCV. Change the SCV hose to the desired SCV.
300A-8
Problem Solution
Reassign the SCV lever or joystick control to the desired SCV.
See Selective Control Valves section of this Operator’s Manual.
Hoses are notj installed correctly. Install the hoses correctly and firmly into SCV.
Use the correct cylinder size. See Hydraulic Connections section of this
Incorrect remote cylinder size.
SCV control lever lock is engaged. Release the SCV control lever lock.
Incorrect or damaged hose tips. Replace the hose tips.
Remote Cylinder Rate of Travel Too Fast or Too Slow
Problem Solution
Incorrect flow rate. Adjust the Flow setting.
Direction of Remote Cylinder Travel Is Reversed
Problem Solution
Incorrect hose connections. Reverse the hose connections.
Hoses Do Not Couple
Problem Solution
Incorrect hose male connectors. Replace the hose tips with ISO-5675 fittings.
Too much system pressure. Release pressure from the implement or tractor.
Detent Does Not Hold or Releases Too Soon
Problem Solution
Detent Time set incorrectly. Set the correct detent Time.
Return the SCV lever to the center after being in the detent position for
SCV lever is not released to neutral soon enough.
more than 0.8 seconds.
SCV Lever Does Not Release
Problem Solution
SCV is unexpectedly in float mode. Do not push the lever down when in the forward position.
Lever mechanism failed. See your John Deere dealer.
Flow control or detent release setting incorrect. Adjust the detent relief setting.
Implement Does Not Operate or Does Not Operate Correctly
Problem Solution
See implement Operator's Manual.
Incorrect hose connections.
Feedback from Top SCVs or Hydraulic Pump
Problem Solution
Make sure that continuous flow oil is not returning to a pressure-free
Hydraulic pump is making noise. port.
See Hydraulic Connections section of this Operator’s Manual.
300A-9
SCV Is Unresponsive
Problem Solution
SCV is not operating correctly.
Manual.
Verify that transport lock is off.
KD34109,0000940-19-21JUN22
Steering System
Difficult or No Steering
Problem Solution
Electrical or hydraulic malfunction.
Manual.
Tractor is over-ballasted or the front axle is overloaded. See Performance Ballasting section of this Operator’s Manual.
Tractor Turning Radius Larger than Desired or Tractor Difficult to Turn when Under Load
Problem Solution
Raise the implement.
Slow down during a turn or execute a turn by doing a series of brief
short turns.
Implement causes side-loading greater than the steering system can
Let the drawbar swing.
overcome when attempting to turn.
Add ballast. See Performance Ballasting section of this Operator’s
Manual.
See Drawbar section of this Operator’s Manual.
Manual.
Tractor Drifts or Pulls to One Side
Problem Solution
Adjust the implement to eliminate any side draft.
Let the drawbar swing.
Widen the rear wheels out to the stops or add duals. See Rear Wheels
Implement causing side load on the tractor. and Tires section of this Operator’s Manual.
Add ballast. See Performance Ballasting section of this Operator’s
Manual.
See Drawbar section of this Operator’s Manual.
Tractor Turning Radius Larger than Desired with No Load
Problem Solution
Manual.
Maintain forward or reverse motion while turning.
Increase vehicle speed and/or hold the steering wheel against the stop
Attempting to turn while stopped (loose soil, heavy ballast); steering load
for a couple of seconds to allow greater steering force.
exceeds the system capacity.
Check the steering stops. See Steering Stop, Fender, and Tread
Settings section of this Operator’s Manual.
300A-10
Tractor Turning Radius Larger than Desired with the Tractor in High Gear or with Low Engine Speed
Problem Solution
Utilize the turn brakes for a narrower turning radius.
Shift down before the turn. See the appropriate transmission section of
Minimum turn radius is greater in high gears and at a higher speed.
Reduce vehicle speed before a turn to reduce oversteering.
Maximum steering pump oil flow is less at a lower engine speed,
Increase engine speed before a turn.
reducing the power available to make the turn.
KD34109,0000941-19-21JUN22
Tractor Operation
Tractor Bounces or Jumps
Problem Solution
Power hop or wheel hop. See Performance Ballasting section of this Operator’s Manual.
Tighten the hardware to the correct specification. See Service—Tighten
Loose wheel hardware.
Wheel slip. Check the CommandCenter for the wheel slip percentage.
ILS (if equipped) malfunction. Refer to ILS in this Operator’s Manual section.
KD34109,0000942-19-21JUN22
Transmission
Hydraulic Oil Leak between Transmission and Engine
Problem Solution
Clean the vent screen. See the appropriate Transmission section of this
Clogged transmission vent screen. Operator’s Manual.
Transmission Shifts Slowly and Tractor Steers Hard
Problem Solution
See Transmission—General Information section of this Operator’s
Cold oil.
Manual.
Transmission Slips, Shifts Roughly or Abruptly after Oil Change
Problem Solution
Recalibrate the transmission. See your John Deere dealer.
Transmission Starts Out Too Quickly or Slowly
Problem Solution
Change the start-up gear through CommandCenter settings (16-speed
PST and e23 only). See the appropriate Transmission section of this
No identifiable problem. Adjust the CommandPRO settings (if equipped). See CommandPRO
Joystick—Acceleration/Deceleration Response in IVT-AutoPowr
Transmission with CommandPRO Joystick section of this Operator’s
Manual.
300A-11
AutoClutch Engages Too Quickly or Too Slowly when Pressing Brake Pedals
Problem Solution
Verify that the brake pedals are latched together.
No identifiable problem. Adjust the AutoClutch sensitivity settings. See Transmission—General
Tractor Will Not Achieve Maximum Speed
Problem Solution
Ensure that the brake pedals are latched together. See Brakes section
Brake pedals unlocked.
Incorrect Wheel Speed Displayed
Problem Solution
Complete the radar and wheel slip calibrations. See CommmandCenter
Incorrect tire size calibration or wheel slip value.
KD34109,0000943-19-21JUN22
300A-12
Troubleshooting—Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC)
STOP, Service, and Information Alerts on operate in a different manner), a significant reduction in
CommandCenter performance and/or damage to machine will occur.
CommandCenter alert overlays display control unit,
diagnostic trouble code (DTC), system, and solution. If
condition is out of range, the control unit followed by an
industry standard number displays. Numbers to the left
of the decimal indicate the system and numbers to the
right of decimal indicate the condition.
Some alert indicators can be acknowledged by pressing
OK. If condition still exists, diagnostic trouble code may RXA0167780—UN—06MAY19
reappear later. Follow solution on CommandCenter. If STOP Alert Overlay

situation cannot be corrected, contact your John Deere
dealer. For more information on DTCs, refer to STOP Alert — light flashes and an alarm pattern
Diagnostics Center. For access information, see Access sounds continuously. A serious malfunction requiring
Diagnostic Trouble Codes in this Operator’s Manual immediate attention has occurred. If situation allows,
section. stop operations immediately, reduce engine speed to
idle, and shut down engine. Turn key to run position to
IMPORTANT: Engine will shut down automatically if observe CommandCenter display for problem
STOP signal is received when operator is out of identification and solution. It may be necessary to
the seat for longer than 3 seconds and the access the stored codes. See Access Diagnostic
transmission control is in PARK. Trouble Codes in this Operator’s Manual section.
CommandCenter display can be reset by Correct problem before restarting. If ignored, damage to
cycling key switch. machine will occur.
TS36762,0000281-19-21JUN22
Access Diagnostic Trouble Codes

NOTE: If problem is not resolved after cycling power to
tractor or following solution on CommandCenter
page, see your John Deere dealer.
RXA0167778—UN—06MAY19
Information Alert Overlay
Not all active DTCs are displayed. Follow steps to
retrieve stored DTCs.
Information Alert — in some situations, information
(INFO) indicator light comes on continuously and alarm
pattern sounds for 2 seconds, indicating a fault
condition. Tractor operations can continue without
damage but performance of some functions may be RXA0133360—UN—26JUL13
degraded. Operating in a different manner may correct 1. Select Menu.
and clear an out-of-range condition.
2. Select System tab.
3. Select Diagnostics Center icon.
4. Select Trouble Codes tab.
RXA0167779—UN—06MAY19
Service Alert Overlay
Service Alert — light flashes and an alarm pattern

sounds five times. A performance or operational
problem has been detected and must be resolved as
soon as possible. Continued operations can cause a
service alert to escalate into a STOP alert. If appropriate
corrective action is not taken soon (service, repair,
RXA0166979—UN—14MAR19
300B-1
Troubleshooting—Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC)
5. Select desired diagnostic trouble code from list (A).

Use arrow keys (B) to access additional diagnostic
trouble codes in the list.
Additional Features on Trouble Codes Page
Sort by: (C) — select to sort list by Code, Controller,
Count, Status, or Type.
Refresh (D) — select to display the most up-to-date list
of codes and counts. Page automatically refreshes upon
entry.
Clear All Codes (E) — select to clear inactive DTCs and
reset counts to zero. A message displays to verify action
since it cannot be undone.
TS36762,0000283-19-21JUN22
300B-2
Service—Storage
Place Tractor in Storage 8. Remove and store batteries in a cool, dry location.
Keep batteries charged.1
IMPORTANT: If tractor will not be used for more than
three months, the following recommendations 9. Coat all exposed (machined) metal surfaces such
for storage and removal from storage will as lift cylinders and steering cylinder rods with light
minimize corrosion and deterioration. coat of grease.
10. Lubricate all grease fittings.
NOTE: Whenever possible store tractor in a building or
under a roof to avoid damage resulting from If tractor must be stored outside, follow these
prolonged exposure to the elements. additional precautions:
1. Cover instrument panel, control levers, and seat with
1. Lower hitch. sheets of material or cardboard to protect against
2. Change engine oil and replace filter (if required). sun rays.
2. Thoroughly clean the tractor exterior. See Tractor
NOTE: Do not add BioDiesel fuel if placing tractor in Exterior in the Service—Clean section of this
storage. Operator’s Manual.
3. Drain fuel tank and add back approximately 19 L (5 3. Wax or cover entire tractor with waterproof material.
gal) of fuel. 4. Raise tires or tracks off the ground and/or cover them
to protect from heat and sunlight.
IMPORTANT: Final Tier 4/Stage V Engines Only: To
determine tractor engine type, see Engine TS36762,0000284-19-06JUL22
Serial Number in Identification Numbers

section of this Operator’s Manual. Long-term
storage of Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) in vehicle Remove Tractor from Storage
(over six months) is not recommended. If long-
term storage is necessary, periodic testing of 1. Remove all coverings placed in or on tractor while
DEF is recommended to ensure that urea preparing for storage.
concentration does not fall out of specification.
IMPORTANT: To avoid engine damage, unseal
crankcase vent tube.
4. Final Tier 4 and Stage V tractors: Diesel Exhaust
Fluid (DEF) has a limited shelf life, but may be
stored in vehicle for as long as six months, 2. Unseal all openings sealed during storage.
depending upon storage conditions, see Storing 3. Remove any accumulated trash or debris,
DEF in Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) section of this especially around engine and inside engine
Operator’s Manual. If draining DEF tank is compartment.
necessary, see Draining DEF Tank in Fuel,
Lubricants, and Coolant section of this Operator’s IMPORTANT: If air conditioning compressor is
Manual for proper procedure. locked up, engine operation with compressor
5. Using plastic bags and either tape or tie-bands, seal clutch engaged may damage drive belt or
air inlets and exhaust, crankcase vent tube, radiator compressor.
overflow hose, and transmission-hydraulic system
fill cap. 4. Rotate air conditioner compressor pulley several
turns. If pulley does not turn freely, compressor
IMPORTANT: Prevent damage to the tractor components may be seized, see your John Deere
emissions system. Never disconnect the dealer.
battery disconnect switch while the battery 5. Check auxiliary drive belt for cracking and, if
disconnect switch light is illuminated or serviceable, install auxiliary drive belt on air
blinking. See Battery Disconnect Switch in conditioning compressor pulley.
Engine Operation section of this Operator’s
Manual. 6. Check under and around tractor for any evidence of
fluid leaks.
6. Turn off the battery disconnect switch.
7. Disconnect batteries. See Service Batteries and
Connections in Service—Electrical section of this
1
Disconnect battery ground cable for short-term storage periods (20
to 90 days).
400-1
Service—Storage
IMPORTANT: If transmission-hydraulic oil level was 16. Start and operate engine at low idle for several
correct at time of storage, and there is no minutes.
evidence of hydraulic oil leaks, there should be
no concern starting tractor even if 17. Check tractor functions and systems, including air
transmission-hydraulic oil sight glass level is conditioning.
low. Over a period of storage, hydraulic oil may 18. Warm up tractor before putting tractor under load.
drain into transmission, causing sight glass to
RX32825,00000FE-19-06JAN22
read low even when adequate amount of oil is
available. If there are indications of oil leaks, do
not start tractor until the source has been
determined and repairs made. If there are no
leakage indications, but there is any doubt
about oil level at time of storage, check
hydraulic oil level as soon as possible after
starting tractor.
7. Check transmission-hydraulic oil level. Add oil as

required.
8. Check all other fluid levels. Fill as required.
9. Fill fuel tank.
IMPORTANT: To confirm which engine your tractor

is equipped with, see Engine Serial Number in
Identification Numbers section of this
10. (Final Tier 4 and Stage V engines) If Diesel Exhaust

Fluid (DEF) tank has not been drained, test urea
concentration, see Testing Diesel Exhaust Fluid
(DEF) in Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) section of this
Operator’s Manual. If concentration is not within
specifications, drain and replace with new or good
DEF. If DEF tank has been drained, fill tank, see
Refilling Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Tank in Diesel
Exhaust Fluid (DEF) section of this Operator’s
Manual for appropriate procedures.
11. Inspect tires or tacks. To check:
● Tires: Inspect tires and check inflation pressures.
See Front or Rear Wheels and Tires sections of
● Tracks: Inspect tracks for wear or damage. See
Track Wear in the Service—Check section of this
12. Perform all Daily or 10 Hour services and any other

scheduled services as required, see 10 Hour or
Daily Service in Service—Record Charts section of
13. Install batteries and connect cables.
14. Turn battery disconnect switch on.
15. Turn key switch to RUN position for one minute to
allow fuel system to prime.
NOTE: While operating engine at low idle, visually

check all instruments and indicators to ensure they
function properly.
400-2
Specifications
Engine
9RT
[Ag]
470 520 570
POWER
Rated Engine Power PSa (hp ISO) 346 kW 382 kW 419 kW
at 2100 Engine rpm (ECE-R120) (470 hp) (520 hp) (570 hp)
Rated PTO Power (hp SAE) at
329 hp (245 kW)
Rated PTO Speed (1895 erpm)bc
Constant Power Range (rpm) 1550
ENGINE
Manufacturer John Deere PowerTech 13.6 L Diesel Engine / JD14X
Dual Series Turbocharger with Fixed Geometry First Stage, Wastegated Second Stage, Air-to-Air
Aspiration
Aftercooling, and Cooled Exhaust Gas Recirculation
Rated Speed (rpm) 2100
Type Diesel, In-Line, 6-Cylinder, Wet-Sleeve Cylinder Liners with 4 Valves-In-Head
Filter, Engine Air Dual Stage with Exhaust Aspiration
Displacement 13.6 L (827 in3)
Bore and Stroke 132 x 165 mm (5.20 x 6.50 in)
Compression Ratio 15.9:1
Lubrication Full-Pressure, Full-Flow Filtration with Bypass
Filter, Oil Replaceable Spin-On Style Oil Filter
FUEL SYSTEM
Type Electronically Controlled, High-Pressure Common Rail with Electric Fuel Transfer Pump (self-priming)
Filter System Two-Stage with Water Separator and Service Indicator Light
Filter, Primary 10 Micron Replaceable Cartridge with Water Indication Sensor and Drain
Filter, Secondary 2 Micron Spin-On Element
Required Fuel Type Ultra-Low Sulfur Diesel (B8 diesel compatible)
a
German term for horse power in which one PS is equivalent to 0.9863 horse power.
b
Does not include optional equipment losses.
c
80% factory observed MOE value.
9RT
[Scraper]
470 520 570
POWER
Constant Power Range (rpm) 1550
ENGINE
Manufacturer John Deere PowerTech 13.6 L Diesel Engine / JD14X
Dual Series Turbocharger with Fixed Geometry First Stage, Wastegated Second Stage, Air-to-Air
Aspiration
Aftercooling, and Cooled Exhaust Gas Recirculation
Rated Speed (rpm) 2100
Type Diesel, In-Line, 6-Cylinder, Wet-Sleeve Cylinder Liners with 4 Valves-In-Head
Filter, Engine Air Dual Stage with Exhaust Aspiration
Displacement 13.6 L (827 in3)
Bore and Stroke 132 x 165 mm (5.20 x 6.50 in)
Compression Ratio 15.9:1
Lubrication Full-Pressure, Full-Flow Filtration with Bypass
500A-1
Specifications
9RT
[Scraper]
470 520 570
Filter, Oil Replaceable Spin-On Style Oil Filter
FUEL SYSTEM
Type Electronically Controlled, High-Pressure Common Rail with Electric Fuel Transfer Pump (self-priming)
Filter System Two-Stage with Water Separator and Service Indicator Light
Filter, Primary 10 Micron Replaceable Cartridge with Water Indication Sensor and Drain
Filter, Secondary 2 Micron Spin-On Element
Required Fuel Type Ultra-Low Sulfur Diesel (B8 diesel compatible)
a
German term for horse power in which one PS is equivalent to 0.9863 horse power.
AK08008,0000C78-19-29JUN22
Capacities
9RT
[Ag]
470 520 570
Fuel Tank 1324.0 L (350.0 gal)
DEF Tank 93.9 L (24.8 gal)
Cooling Systema 56.5 L (14.9 gal)
Crankcase Oil Volumeb 64 L (16.9 gal)
Hydraulic-Transmission-Axle Oil:
● Without 3-Point Rear Hitch and PTO 330.8 L (87.4 gal)
● With 3-Point Rear Hitch and PTO 338.4 L (89.4 gal)
Hydraulic Reservoir Reference Marks:
● FULL COLD Mark 90.3 L (23.9 gal)
● MIN COLD Mark 79.0 L (20.9 gal)
● High Volume Take Out Oil Mark (dot on

126.3 L (33.4 gal)
sight gauge)
● Reservoir Volume Between MIN COLD and

11.4 L (3.0 gal)
FULL COLD Marks
a
Includes deaeration tank capacity.
b
Includes filter.
9RT
[Scraper]
470 520 570
Fuel Tank 1324.0 L (350.0 gal)
DEF Tank 93.9 L (24.8 gal)
Cooling Systema 56.5 L (14.9 gal)
Crankcase Oil Volumeb 64 L (16.9 gal)
Hydraulic-Transmission-Axle Oil 330.8 L (87.4 gal)
Hydraulic Reservoir Reference Marks:
● FULL COLD Mark 90.3 L (23.9 gal)
● MIN COLD Mark 79.0 L (20.9 gal)

a
Includes deaeration tank capacity.
b
Includes filter.
AK08008,0000C7A-19-10FEB22
500A-2
Specifications
Fluorinated Greenhouse Gas—13.6 L Air Conditioner System contains Fluorinated Greenhouse Gas
Engine (F-Gas)
Global Warming Potential
1430
(GWP):
Air Conditioner System contains Fluorinated Greenhouse Gas
(F-Gas)
NOTE: Cab refrigerator (if equipped) contains
Type of F-Gas: R-134a approximately 0.040 kg of refrigerant.
F-Gas Mass (kg): 1.93
CO2 Equivalent (tonnes): 2.76 AK08008,0000C7C-19-20APR21
Hydraulic System
9RT
[Ag]
470 520 570
Type Axial Piston, Closed-Center, Pressure/Flow Compensated, Charged System
Selective Control Valves Electro-Hydraulic: Standard—4; Optional—5, 6, 7, and 8
Maximum Pressure 20000 kPa (2900 psi)
PUMP FLOW—MAXIMUM
Single Hydraulic Pump 208 L/min (55 gal/min)
Dual Hydraulic Pump 416 L/min (110 gal/min)
PUMP FLOW—AVAILABLEa
Single Hydraulic Pump at One 1/2-Inch
132 L/min (35 gal/min)
Coupler
Dual Hydraulic Pump at One 3/4-Inch
Coupler
a
Approximate flow values @ 2100 engine rpm.
9RT
[Scraper]
470 520 570
Type Axial Piston, Closed-Center, Pressure/Flow Compensated, Charged System
Selective Control Valves Electro-Hydraulic: Standard—4; Optional—6
Maximum Pressure 20000 kPa (2900 psi)
PUMP FLOW—MAXIMUM
Dual Hydraulic Pump 416 L/min (110 gal/min)
PUMP FLOW—AVAILABLEa
Dual Hydraulic Pump at One 3/4-Inch
Coupler
a
Approximate flow values @ 2100 engine rpm.
AK08008,0000C7D-19-07JUN22
Transmission and Drivetrain

9RT
[Ag]
470 520 570
TRANSMISSION
e18 PowerShift (18F/6R) 40 km/h
Standard
(25.0 mph) a
FINAL DRIVES Outboard Planetary
TRACKS
500A-3
Specifications
9RT
[Ag]
470 520 570
Type Camoplast DURABUILT 4500 and 6500 Series Tracks
Width:
● 762 mm (30 in) Standard
● 914 mm (36 in) Optional
SUSPENSION SYSTEM
Type AirCushion
Suspension Travel at Front Idlers 340 mm (13.4 in)
STEERING
Type Speed-Sensitive, Hydrostatic, Differential
Heavy-Duty Steering Pump—130 cc Standard
BRAKES
Hydraulic Power, Wet-Disc, Self-
Standard
Adjusting
Hydraulic Trailer Brakes Optional
a
For ground speed data, see Ground Speeds—e18 PowerShift Transmission in this Operator’s Manual section.
9RT
[Scraper]
470 520 570
TRANSMISSION
e18 PowerShift (18F/6R) 40 km/h
Standard
(25.0 mph) a
FINAL DRIVES Outboard Planetary
TRACKS
Type Camoplast DURABUILT Scraper Special Track
Width:
● 762 mm (30 in) Standard
SUSPENSION SYSTEM
Type AirCushion
Suspension Travel at Front Idlers 340 mm (13.4 in)
STEERING
Type Speed-Sensitive, Hydrostatic, Differential
Heavy-Duty Steering Pump—130 cc Standard
BRAKES
Hydraulic Power, Wet-Disc, Self-
Standard
Adjusting
Hydraulic Trailer Brakes Optional
a
For ground speed data, see Ground Speeds—e18 PowerShift Transmission in this Operator’s Manual section.
AK08008,0000C7E-19-29JUN22
500A-4
Specifications
PTO [Ag], Hitch [Ag], and Drawbar

9RT
[Ag]
470 520 570
HITCH
Rear 3-Point Hitch—Category 4N/3 with Quick Coupler (electric-hydraulic with draft sensing):
● 6804 kg (15000 lb) Lift Capacity Optional —
● 9072 kg (20000 lb) Lift Capacity Optional —
Rear 3-Point Hitch—Category 4/4N with Quick Coupler (electric-hydraulic with draft sensing):
● 6804 kg (15000 lb) Lift Capacity Optional
● 9072 kg (20000 lb) Lift Capacity Optional
DRAWBAR
For Drawbar Load Limitations, see Drawbar Load Limitations [Ag] in Drawbar section of this Operator’s Manual.
PTO
Rear—Independent:
● 1 3/4-Inch, 20-Spline, 1000 rpm Optional
9RT
[Scraper]
470 520 570
DRAWBAR
For drawbar load limitations, see Scraper Applications [Scraper] in the Drawbar section of this Operator’s Manual.
AK08008,0000C7F-19-27JUN22
Electrical System
Type Three Batteries in Parallel
Alternator/Battery Standard—250A/12V; Optional—330A/12V
Total Cold Cranking Amps 2775 (3-925 CCA group 31 batteries)
AK08008,0000465-19-17MAR22
Integrated Technology
AutoTrac Ready Standard
Includes Integrated Cab Wiring Harness, Antenna, JDLink Modem (MTG), and Ethernet
Connectivity Hardware
Harnessesa
b
Connectivity Subscription JDLink Connectivity can be Enabled in John Deere Operations Center
ISOBUS Implement Connection Standard (ISO 11783)
CommandCenter:
● 213 mm (8.4 in) Video with 4200 Processor Availability Dependent Upon Destination
500A-5
Specifications
● 254 mm (10.0 in) Video with 4600 Processor Availability Dependent Upon Destination
a
Ethernet harnesses may vary per configuration.
b
Connectivity service is subject to country availability.
AK08008,0000F09-19-27JUN22
Overall Dimensions
RXA0183322—UN—21MAY21
9RT
[Ag]
470 520 570
LENGTH
With Hitch and Front Weights (A) 7415 mm (291.9 in)
Track Length on Ground (B) 2956 mm (116.4 in)
Wheelbase (C) 2956 mm (116.4 in)
WIDTH (D)
762 mm (30 in) Track 3454 mm (136 in)
914 mm (36 in) Track 3607 mm (142 in)
With Frame Weightsa 3962 mm (156 in)
HEIGHT (E)
Top of Roof 3633 mm (143.0 in)
With StarFire Receiver Bracket 3651 mm (143.7 in)
With Integrated StarFire Receiver 3668 mm (144.4 in)
With Universal StarFire Receiver 3787 mm (149.1 in)
Top of Exhaust 3916 mm (154.2 in)
CLEARANCE
Drawbarb 329 mm (13 in)
a
Tractor design for 16 weights
b
Ground to bottom of drawbar support.
500A-6
Specifications
RXA0183323—UN—21MAY21
9RT
[Scraper]
470 520 570
LENGTH
With Front Weights and Drawbara (A) 7051 mm (277.6 in)
Track Length on Ground (B) 2956 mm (116.4 in)
Wheelbase (C) 2956 mm (116.4 in)
WIDTH (D)
762 mm (30 in) Track 3454 mm (136 in)
914 mm (36 in) Track 3607 mm (142 in)
With Frame Weightsb 3962 mm (156 in)
HEIGHT (E)
Top of Roof 3650 mm (143.7 in)
With StarFire Receiver Bracket 3651 mm (143.7 in)
With Integrated StarFire Receiver 3668 mm (144.4 in)
With Universal StarFire Receiver 3787 mm (149.1 in)
Top of Exhaust 3916 mm (154.2 in)
CLEARANCE
Drawbarc 329 mm (13 in)
a
Category 5 drawbar in farthest back position.
b
Tractor design for 16 weights
c
Ground to bottom of drawbar support.
AK08008,0000C82-19-07JUL22
Tractor Loads/Weights
Maximum Permissible Static Vertical Load
● Maximum Permissible Load: 24500 kg (5400 lb) For drawbar loads, see Drawbar Load Limitations in the
● Average Contact Pressure (at technically permissible Drawbar [Ag] section or Scraper Applications [Scraper]
maximum mass): 306 kPa (44.4 psi) in the Drawbar section of this Operator’s Manual.
500A-7
Specifications
Tractor Weights
9RT
[Ag]
470 520 570
a
ESTIMATED SHIPPING WEIGHT 21621 kg (47666 lb)
b
MAXIMUM BALLAST LEVEL 24500 kg (54000 lb)
a
Tractor equipped with 30-inch standard tracks, unladen, a full fuel tank, no PTO, and no 3-point hitch.
b
For specific ballast instructions, see Performance Ballasting Section of this Operator’s Manual.
9RT
[Scraper]
470 520 570
a
ESTIMATED SHIPPING WEIGHT 21888 kg (48255 lb)
b
MAXIMUM BALLAST LEVEL 24500 kg (54000 lb)
a
Tractor equipped with 30-inch standard tracks, unladen, and a full fuel tank.
b
For specific ballast instructions, see Performance Ballasting Section of this Operator’s Manual.
AK08008,0000C83-19-07JUL22
Sound Level (EU 1322/2014) Categories 1—4 are used for classification and
specified on a label inside the cab.
Maximum sound level at operator's eara: 86 dB Replace the label if missing or damaged. See your John
a
Measurement method in accordance with regulation (EU) 1322/2014, Deere dealer.
annex XIII, test method 2
NOTE: EU and EAEU-compliant tractors are only
equipped with a Category 1 cab.
NOTE: Sound level at operator ear is below the directive
requirement of 86 dB with cab windows and doors
closed. Category 1—Cab does not offer any protection against
substances that are harmful to health.
AK08008,0000C86-19-15NOV19
Category 2—Cab offers protection against solid
airborne particles such as dust but not
against aerosols and vapors.
Cab Classification According to EN 15695-1 Category 3—Cab offers protection against dust and
(for Application of Crop Protection aerosols (liquid airborne substances such
as spray) but not against vapors.
Chemicals and Liquid Fertilizer) (EU 1322/ Category 4—Cab offers protection against dust,
2014) aerosols, and vapors.
CAUTION: Before working in an environment
containing hazardous substances (for example:
when using pesticides), check whether the cab
offers sufficient protection. Refer to the
spraying liquid manufacturer’s product data
sheets specifying the required cab category.
In case of Category 3 and 4 cabs, determine
whether the installed filters have been checked
according to EN 15695-2:2009 and whether they
are suitable for the chemical being used (refer
to the manufacturer's information) before
working in an environment containing
RXA0186207—UN—01DEC21 hazardous substances.
Label Shown for Illustration Purposes Only (may not
indicate the category of the cab installed) Cab fresh air and recirculation air filters must
be serviced as specified. Change filters every
Cab classification according to EN 15695-1 provides 1000 hours or annually, whichever occurs first.
information on the effectiveness of protection against See Cab Filters in Service—Change section of
harmful substances offered by the cab. this Operator's Manual.
500A-8
Specifications
Refer to product data sheets and product Ground Speedsa

Gear
km/h (mph)
identification of the crop protection chemicals.
9 10.5 (6.5)
These contain important information on how to
avoid hazards. 10 11.7 (7.3)
11 12.9 (8.0)
The following requirements must be met to offer the best 12 14.2 (8.8)
protection: 13 15.9 (9.9)
1.All seals (on door, windows, and roof) are in good 14 17.5 (10.9)
condition. 15 21.6 (13.4)
2.Doors, windows, and roof closed. 25.0 (15.5)bc

16
26.7 (16.6)b
3.Grommets for cables in the cab sealed properly.
25.0 (15.5)bc
4.Fan on. 17
32.7 (20.3)b
5.Cab air filters are in good condition. 25.0 (15.5)b @ 1304 erpmc
18
KD34109,0000754-19-18JAN22
40.0 (25.0)b @ 2087 erpmc
a
Ground speeds are at a rated engine speed of 2100 erpm (unless
otherwise noted).
b
If equipped.
c
Ground Speeds—e18 PowerShift Engine speed is electronically limited.
Transmission
Reverse Speeds
Forward Speeds
Ground Speeds
Ground Speedsa Gear
Gear km/h (mph)
km/h (mph)
R1 4.1 (2.5)
1 4.1 (2.5)
R2 5.6 (3.5)
2 5.1 (3.2)
R3 6.3 (3.9)
3 5.6 (3.5)
R4 8.5 (5.3)
4 6.3 (3.9)
R5 9.5 (5.9)
5 6.9 (4.3)
R6 12.9 (8.0)
6 7.7 (4.8)
7 8.5 (5.3) KD34109,0000946-19-29JUN22
8 9.5 (5.9)
Required Emission-Related Information

Service Provider
A qualified repair shop or person of the owner's choosing may maintain, replace, or repair emission control devices and systems with original or
equivalent replacement parts. However, warranty, recall, and all other services paid for by John Deere must be performed at an authorized John
Deere service center.
DX,EMISSIONS,REQINFO-19-12JUN15
500A-9
Specifications
Carbon Dioxide Emissions (CO₂)
RG33429—UN—04FEB21
SAMPLE - Engine Emissions Label
To identify the carbon dioxide (CO₂) output, locate the Third-Party Software Notifications and
engine emissions label. Find the appropriate family on Licenses
the emissions label and reference the chart.
The copyrights for certain portions of the Software on
NOTE: The first letter of the family number is not utilized this machine may be owned or licensed by other third
for family identification on the chart. parties (“Third Party Software”) and is used and
distributed under those licenses. The License
Agreement link in the System Information section of the
Emissions Label Family CO₂ Result
CommandCenter Software Manager includes the
acknowledgements, notices and licenses for such Third
_JDXL02.9323 952 g/kW-hr
Party Software. The Third Party Software notices are
_JDXL02.9327 784 g/kW-hr included with the distribution of this License Agreement.
_JDXL04.5337 819 g/kW-hr If you are unable to locate these Third Party Software
_JDXL04.5338 682 g/kW-hr notices, please write to the address included below. The
_JDXL04.5304 1004 g/kW-hr Third Party Software is licensed according to the
_JDXN04.5174 792 g/kW-hr applicable Third Party Software license notwithstanding
_JDXL06.8324 720 g/kW-hr anything to the contrary in this Agreement. If the Third
Party Software contains copyrighted software that is
_JDXL06.8328 683 g/kW-hr
licensed under the GPL/LGPL or other copyleft licenses,
_JDXL06.8336 701 g/kW-hr
copies of those licenses are included in the Third Party
_JDXN06.8175 771 g/kW-hr Notices. You may obtain the complete corresponding
_JDXL09.0319 646 g/kW-hr source code for such Third Party Software from Deere
_JDXL09.0325 695 g/kW-hr for a period of three years after our last shipment of the
_JDXL09.0329 657 g/kW-hr Software by sending a request to:
_JDXL09.0333 650 g/kW-hr
_JDXL13.5326 684 g/kW-hr Deere Open Source Compliance Team
_JDXL13.6320 651 g/kW-hr P.O. Box 1202
Moline, IL 61266-1202
_JDXL13.5340 632 g/kW-hr USA
_JDXL18.0341 683 g/kW-hr
F28 870 g/kW-hr Please include name of the product and the version
F32 710 g/kW-hr number of the software in the request letter. This offer is
F33 677 g/kW-hr valid to anyone in receipt of this information.
EC82310,0000F7B-19-21JUN22
This CO₂ measurement results from testing over a fixed
test cycle under laboratory conditions a(n) (parent)
engine representative of the engine type (engine family)
and shall not imply or express any guarantee of the
performance of a particular engine.
DX,EMISSIONS,CO2-19-20JUL21
500A-10
Identification Numbers
Identification Plates
Each tractor is equipped with the identification plates 1. Vehicle category including the subcategory and the
shown in this section. The complete series of letters and speed index:
numbers stamped on the plates: - C4.2 = Extra-Wide Track-Laying Tractor
● Identify a component or assembly. - a = below or equal to 40 km/h speed index
● Are required when ordering parts or identifying a - b = above 40km/h speed index
tractor or component for any John Deere product 2. EU-type approval number
support program. 3. Product Identification Number (PIN)
- Position 8: Trim and Series Code
For each identification plate, accurately record the - Position 10: Character designating calendar
identification numbers in the space provided. year of manufacture
RW29387,00003B7-19-04MAR20 - Position 11: Transmission and Configuration
Option Code
Product Identification Number Position 8

Series Code
Trim Code
2 4 6
* __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ *
R D M S
Record the PIN in the Space Provided
Position 10
Code M N P R S
Year 2021 2022 2023 2024 2025
Position 11
Code Transmission and Configuration
[Ag] [Scraper] Option
E G e18 Powershift
RXA0185269—UN—30AUG21
PIN Plate (A) is on the Right-Hand Side of the Tractor Frame 4. Technically permissible maximum laden mass of
the vehicle
5. Track information
a. Technically permissible maximum mass per set
DEERE & COMPANY
of track trains
JOHN DEERE
1 b. Average contact pressure on the ground for track
2 vehicles
3 6. Unbraked tractor technically permissible towable
4 mass with:
5a 5b a. Drawbar style attachment
b. Rigid drawbar style attachment
T-1 T-2 T-3 c. Center axle drawbar style attachment
B-1 kg 6a 6b 6c 7. Inertia-braked tractor technically permissible
B-2 kg 7a 7b 7c towable mass with:
B-3 kg 8a 8b 8c
a. Drawbar style attachment
B-4 kg 9a 9b 9c
10 c. Center axle drawbar style attachment
MOLINE, ILLINOIS, USA 8. Hydraulic-braked tractor technically permissible
11 towable mass with:
a. Drawbar style attachment
RXA0158291—UN—14MAR17
PIN Plate
500B-1
c. Center axle drawbar style attachment Position 7

9. Pneumatic-braked tractor technically permissible Code
Engine Emission
towable mass with: Configuration
a. Drawbar style attachment U Final Tier 4/Stage V

GH15097,0000759-19-09JUN21
c. Center axle drawbar style attachment
10. Product Identification Number Bar Code
11. Country of Origin Cab Serial Number
EC82310,000050C-19-29JUN22
*–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––*
Record the Serial Number in the Space Provided
Engine Serial Number
John Deere Engine
*–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––*
RXA0179149—UN—18AUG20
Cab Serial Number Plate (A) is Underneath the Cab Floor
Mat at the Cab Door
EC82310,000006F-19-22OCT20
RXA0160356—UN—03AUG17
Engine Serial Number Plate (A) is on the Left-Hand Side of
the Engine Near the Starter (Parts Removed For Clarity) Transmission Serial Number
*–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––*
RXA0184055—UN—10JUN21
Engine Serial Number Plate Example
Position 7—Engine emission configuration code (B)

RXA0142107—UN—05JUN14
Transmission Serial Number (A) is on the Right-Hand Rear
of the Transmission Case (Near the Transmission Filters)
TO84419,000021F-19-22OCT20
500B-2
Axle Serial Number
*–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––*
RXA0160134—UN—06JUL17
PTO Drop Box Serial Number (A) is on the PTO Drop Box at
the Rear of the Tractor
RW29387,00001BB-19-26OCT20
RXA0142510—UN—12JUN14
Axle Serial Number Plate (A) is on the Rear Axle Housing
Track Serial Numbers
GH15097,000075C-19-26OCT20
* ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ *
Record the Left Track Serial Number in the Space Provided
PTO Clutch Serial Number [Ag]

* ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ *
*–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––* Record the Right Track Serial Number in the Space Provided
Track identification numbers consists of:
RXA0142511—UN—16JUN14
RXA0145009—UN—23SEP14
PTO Clutch Serial Number (A) is on the Rear of the PTO
Clutch ● Camso manufacturer serial number (A) is made up of
a combination of ten numbers and letters on track
GH15097,000075D-19-26OCT20 edges.
● Camso track manufacturer date (B): four digits
indicating date of manufacture. Example: 0314
PTO Drop Box Serial Number [Ag] (March 2014).
● Five to six digits indicate track serial number (C).
*–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––* ● John Deere part number (D) is a letter followed by six
numbers. Example: R123456.
RW29387,00003BD-19-27OCT20
500B-3
Keep Proof of Ownership 6.Notify your John Deere dealer of any losses.
DX,SECURE2-19-18NOV03
1.Maintain in a secure location an up-to-date inventory
of all product and component serial numbers.
2.Regularly verify that identification plates have not
been removed. Report any evidence of tampering to
law enforcement agencies and order duplicate
plates.
3.Other steps you can take:
- Mark your machine with your own numbering

system
- Take color photographs from several angles of
each machine
DX,SECURE1-19-18NOV03
Keep Machines Secure
1.Install vandal-proof devices.
2.When machine is in storage:
- Lower equipment to the ground
- Set wheels to widest position to make loading
more difficult
- Remove any keys and batteries
3.When parking indoors, put large equipment in front of
exits and lock your storage buildings.
4.When parking outdoors, store in a well-lighted and
fenced area.
5.Make note of suspicious activity and report any thefts
immediately to law enforcement agencies.
500B-4
Change of Ownership
Subsequent Ownership
Second Owner
Serial Number: Tractor Model:
Engine Number: Registration Number:
Previous Owner: New Owner:
Address: Address:
......................................... .........................................
......................................... .........................................
Purchase Date: Dealer's Stamp (only if sold through a dealer)
Hours at Purchase:
Third Owner
Serial Number: Tractor Model:
Engine Number: Registration Number:
Previous Owner: New Owner:
Address: Address:
......................................... .........................................
......................................... .........................................
Purchase Date: Dealer's Stamp (only if sold through a dealer)
Hours at Purchase:
TS36762,000029B-19-23NOV16
600A-1
Predelivery
Predelivery Checklist ⃞ 17. Transmission, hydraulic, and axle oil leaks.
NOTE: Make a copy of this checklist and complete while Complete the Following Checks Inside the Cab
performing.
⃞ 1. Check for diagnostic trouble codes. If diagnostic
Some listed options are not available on specific trouble codes are present, record the codes and see
tractors. Service ADVISOR to resolve and repair as needed.
Clear all the codes.
The following inspection, adjustment, and service work ⃞ 2. All brake systems operate correctly:
were performed before delivery of this machine.
- Service brakes.
Complete the Air Conditioning Pre-Run Procedure - Hydraulic and air trailer brakes.
IMPORTANT: Reduce chance of air conditioner - Parking brake.
compressor damage. Complete pre-run - Secondary brake.
procedure when the tractor: ⃞ 3. Transmission operates correctly (including PARK
● Arrives at the dealership. position).
● Has not been run for over 29 days. ⃞ 4. Neutral start switch operates correctly.
⃞ 5. SCVs operate correctly.
⃞ 1. Complete the pre-start checks. ⃞ 6. Hitch operates correctly.
⃞ 2. Start tractor and run the engine at a low idle. ⃞ 7. PTO operates correctly.
⃞ 3. Switch the air conditioning system to high. ⃞ 8. Warning system lights and instrument displays
⃞ 4. Run the tractor for at least three minutes. and gauges operate correctly.
⃞ 5. Shut off the tractor. ⃞ 9. All lights operate correctly in all switch positions.
⃞ 10. Engine high and low idle are set correctly.
Complete the Following Pre-Start Checks Before ⃞ 11. Seat can be adjusted properly.
Operating the Tractor
⃞ 12. Check seat belt integrity. Seat belt latches
⃞ 1. Engine oil level is between Low and Full marks. function correctly.
⃞ 2. Coolant level is correct. ⃞ 13. Doors operate correctly.
⃞ 3. Air cleaner elements are installed correctly. ⃞ 14. Cab is clean and upholstery appearance neat.
⃞ 4. Air intake system clamps are tight. ⃞ 15. Premium radio region code set for location.
⃞ 5. Transmission-hydraulic and axle oil levels are ⃞ 16. Radio operates correctly.
correct.
⃞ 17. Washers and wipers operate correctly.
⃞ 6. Lubrication fittings are greased.
⃞ 18. Heater, ventilation, and air conditioning system
⃞ 7. Shields, guards, handrails, and steps are installed operate correctly. For details, see separate
correctly. information leaflet in tractor cab.
⃞ 8. Paint is free of defects. ⃞ 19. All optional equipment is installed and operates
⃞ 9. Exterior and interior labels are smooth and neat. correctly.
⃞ 10. Protective plastic film removed from seats and Complete These Dealer Services Before Delivery to
panels. the Customer
Start the tractor before continuing the checks. IMPORTANT: Avoid drivetrain damage. Operate
⃞ 11. Start and run tractor at a low idle for at least three tractor at low speeds (below 10 mph (16km/h))
minutes. for first 6 hours.
IMPORTANT: Determine if the air conditioning pre- ⃞ 1. Thoroughly wash the tractor.
run procedure is needed. Run if necessary. ⃞ 2. Charge the battery and set the battery date code.
⃞ 12. Complete the air conditioning pre-run procedure. IMPORTANT: Muffler extension and radio antenna
⃞ 13. Shut off the tractor. increase tractor height. Be aware of clearance
restrictions when transporting tractor.
Inspect the tractor for: ⃞ 3. Replace the transport rain cap with the muffler
⃞ 14. Coolant leaks. extension.
⃞ 15. Engine oil leaks. ⃞ 4. Install the AM/FM radio antenna if necessary.1
⃞ 16. Fuel leaks. 1
Located in the cab.
700-1
Predelivery
⃞ 5. Check and adjust the tire pressure. together with customer. See CCMS Solution 206001
⃞ 6. Adjust the wheel spacings for the customer needs: for details.
⃞ If equipped with dual tires with John Deere ⃞ 20. Perform a test drive. Verify correct function of all
CTIS, see R572695 installation instructions. systems, including transmission, brakes, and
⃞ If equipped with front dual tires without John steering.
Deere CTIS, see R572069 installation ⃞ 21. Calibrate the radar.
instructions for the front extension. ⃞ 22. Check for diagnostic trouble codes. If codes are
⃞ 7. Check track tread settings and track alignment. present, record codes and see Service ADVISOR to
⃞ 8. Check and adjust the steering stops.2 resolve and repair as needed. Clear all codes.
⃞ 23. Install RTK antenna (if equipped). See Mount
IMPORTANT: Failure to follow track tractor road RTK (Real-Time Kinematic) Radio in Accessories
transport recommendations can void the section of this Operator’s Manual.
tractor warranty. See Transport section and ⃞ 24. Check the ExactRate tractor tanks for leaks (if
General Track Use Guidelines in Tracks— equipped):
Manual. a. Fill the ExactRate tanks with 38 L (10 gal) of
water. See Fill the Tanks in the ExactRate
⃞ 9. Perform the track system break-in procedure. See Tractor Tanks section of this Operator’s Manual.
Perform Track Systems Break-In in Service—Break- b. Drive the tractor for 5 to 10 minutes with the
In (100 Hours or Less) section of this Operator’s ExactRate pump on and circulating water.
Manual. c. Check the system for leaks.
CAUTION: Avoid the possibility of personal d. Drain the ExactRate tanks. See Drain the
injury. Never operate the tractor with loose System in the ExactRate Tractor Tanks section
wheel or wheel weight bolts. Failure to follow of this Operator’s Manual.
torquing procedure can result in personal e. Tighten the ExactRate tank straps. See Tank
injury. Wheel and wheel weight bolts are critical Straps in the Service—Tighten section of this
and require repeated torquing to assure secure Operator’s Manual.
tightness.
IMPORTANT: Failure to follow correct tightening

procedure could result in equipment damage.
Retighten bolts after working 3 hours, 10 hours,
and daily during the first week of operation.
Date and Signature of Dealer/Service Technician
⃞ 10. Tighten wheels and weights to specifications KD34109,00005B8-19-23JUN22
(even if no adjustments are made).
⃞ 11. Tighten the track drive (sprocket) wheel, drive
(sprocket) wheel sleeve, idler wheel, and mid-roller
fasteners to specifications (even if no adjustments
are made).
⃞ 12. Reposition all components from shipping to
operating positions (i.e. mirrors).
⃞ 13. Adjust all lights, including extremity warning
lights and beacon light. Check all lights for
compliance with local regulations.
⃞ 14. Adjust the hitch components and lock in position.
⃞ 15. Install the Slow Moving Vehicle emblem (if
necessary).
⃞ 16. Set up the display to customer preference.
⃞ 17. Activate the Automatic Exhaust Cleaning Mode
in CommandCenter.
⃞ 18. Install the StarFire receiver.
⃞ 19. Perform the Connected Machine Setup Process
2
To avoid equipment damage on tractors equipped with ILS and group
43 or larger tires remove both transport steering stops and adjust
tread settings.
700-2
Predelivery
Delivery Checklist and Certificate

Make two copies of this form. Complete one copy for customer and retain a second copy for dealer records.
⃞ Customer Copy ⃞ Dealer Copy
Delivery Checklist
At the Dealer: At Delivery Area with Customer: Demonstrated operating procedures:
□ Predelivery inspection completed (shown and explained) □ Engine—throttle, starting and
□ All necessary forms and literature available □ All warning labels on machine stopping
□ Labels installed □ Location of all serial numbers on □ Transmission
□ Customer specified attachments and options are installed or machine □ Steering
available □ Operator's Manual □ Brakes
□ Help Text access and function □ Hitch and SCVs
CAUTION: Avoid the possibility of personal injury. □ Lubrication and service points on □ Differential lock
Never operate tractor with loose wheel or wheel weight machine and attachments □ PTO
bolts. Failure to follow torquing procedure may result in □ Tire or track maintenance and care □ Three-point hitch adjustment
personal injury. Wheel and wheel weight bolts are □ Use of lubrication and maintenance □ iTEC system
critical and require repeated torquing to assure secure schedules □ Lights
tightness. □ Break-in service procedures □ Wipers
□ Warranty coverage and procedure □ Heater
□ Air conditioning
IMPORTANT: Failure to follow correct tightening procedure
□ CommandCenter display and
could result in equipment damage. Retighten wheel
controls
bolts after working 3 hours, 10 hours, and daily during
□ Operator's seat
first week of operation.
□ Check hardware is tight on frame, drawbar support, wheels, and

wheel weights or track system component
Delivery Certificate
Serial number: Vehicle Model:
____________________________________________ ______________________________________________
OM Number: Issue: Registration No.:
____________________________ ______________ ______________________________________________

Engine No.: Delivery Date:
____________________________________________ ______________________________________________
Owner's Name: Delivery Hours:
____________________________________________ ______________________________________________
Street Address: Dealership:
____________________________________________ ______________________________________________
City/State: Dealer's Stamp:
____________________________________________
ZIP/Postal Code/Country:
____________________________________________
700-3
Predelivery
I hereby confirm receiving the tractor in complete and good condition. I have received the Operator’s Manual. All necessary work upon
delivery has been carried out and I have been informed of the safe method of operation and the mandatory daily maintenance work as
per the Delivery Checklist.
Customer’s Signature: _____________________________________ Dealership Instructor’s Signature: ____________________________
Date: ___________________________________________________ Date: ___________________________________________________
BH38674,0000D3E-19-23JUN22
700-4
Index
A Belts . .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 220D-1
AC Compressor Belt Biodiesel fuel . ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 200A-2
Replacing . ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 220D-1 Bolt and screw torque values
Activating Independent Mode Metric .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 210-9
SCV . .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 70A-6 Unified inch... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 210-10
Aftertreatment indicators overview. . .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 20B-1 Bracket Mounts
Aftertreatment system Monitor . .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 90D-4
Restored operation option .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 20B-5 Brake warning indicators. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 30A-1
Air compressor inlet filter Brakes. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 50A-3
Filter. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. . 220D-16 Secondary brake .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 220B-9
Air Conditioning Trailer
Checking.. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 220B-2 Hydraulic .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 50A-4
Air Conditioning (A/C) . .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 90E-3 Break-in engine oil
Air Flow Mode.. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 90E-3 Interim tier 4, final tier 4, stage IIIB, stage IV, and
Alternator Belt stage V . ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 200C-1
Replacing . ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 220D-1 Bumper Stops
Annual Inspect . .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .220B-10
Checking seat belts .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. 220B-12 Business band and antenna
Applications Installing . .. ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 90D-5
Control Setup . .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 30C-7
Assignment C
SCV . .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 70A-6 Cab
AutoLoad Classification . .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 500A-8
Harness Connector. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 90D-8 Cab Air Filters
AutoLoad Settings Inspecting or replacing... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 220D-4
Access .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 70E-3 Cab Classification
Advanced . ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 70E-7 (EU 1322/2014) .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 500A-8
Average Draft . .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 70E-7 Camso track serial numbers
Initial Draft ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 70E-6 Identification numbers. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 500B-3
Main Page ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 70E-4 Carbon Dioxide Emissions . .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .500A-10
Scraper Dimensions.. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 70E-7 Carging Ports
Scraper Position .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 70E-6 USB .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 90D-3
Scraper Status .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 70E-5 Category 5 to 4 drawbar pin
Automation Drawbar pin adapter .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 60F-3
SCV . .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 70A-6 Chain Box .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 90D-8
AUX Input Change starting fluid canister .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 20A-1
Radio.. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 90D-1 Check
Auxiliary fuel filter and water separator Drive wheel hub housing oil level
Check and drain .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 220A-3 Mid roller oil level
Avoid static electricity risk when fueling .. .. .. .. .. .. 05-3 Idler wheel oil level .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .220B-13
Check track alignment
B Daily or 10 Hour . .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 220B-5
Backup alarm Check track tensioning
Volume control .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 50B-4 Track tensioning
Ballast Tensioning. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 220B-2
Determining ballasted Checking
Required tire inflation pressures.. ... .. .. .. .. . 100-6 Seat Belts . ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .220B-12
Tractor axle loads . .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 100-6 Track alignment.. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 220B-5
Tractor weight.. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 100-6 Tracks, drive wheels, mid-rollers and idler wheels .
Tractor weight split .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 100-6 220B-8
Battery Handling, Safety Weep hole . ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 220B-3
Safety, Battery Handling .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 05-11 Clean dual beam radar sensor
Belt 500 hour service
Tensioner Dual beam radar . .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 220A-3
Belt tensioner Clean oil-fuel cooler, A/C condenser
Check belt tensioner .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. 220B-12 Cooler-A/C condenser ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 220A-2
Index-1
Index
Cleaning Ethernet.. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 90D-2

Engine Exhaust Filter .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 20-4 GreenStar Display . .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 90D-2
Suspension compressor filter Implement
Compressor ISO 11783 . .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 90D-7
Suspension air bag . .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 220A-4 ISO 11783 . ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 90D-1
Climate controls.. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 30B-2 ISO 11786 . ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 90D-2
Cold weather starting Control Setup ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 30C-7
Engine Coolant
With starting aid . .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 20A-1 Diesel engine
CommandARM Engine with wet sleeve cylinder liners . .. .. 200D-1
Climate controls. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 30B-2 Disposing .. ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 200D-3
Example .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 30B-1 John deere COOL-GARD II coolant extender . ... ..
Hitch controls . .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 30B-1 200D-1
Left side controls . .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 30B-4 Mixing with concentrate, water quality .. .. .. .. 200D-2
Lighting controls .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 30B-2 Testing freeze point . .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 200D-2
Navigation bar .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 30B-6 Warm temperature climates . .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 200D-2
Position, adjusting .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 30B-7 Corner Post Display .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 30A-1
PTO control levers . .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 30B-2
Radio controls. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 30B-2 D
Right-Hand Reverser DEF
e18 Transmission . .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 50G-1 Disposal . .. ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 200B-3
SCV control levers . .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 30B-2 Dosing unit filter, change .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 220D-11
Secondary brake lever . ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 30B-6 In-line filter, change . .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 220D-9
Speed Adjustment Wheel Storing . .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 200B-2
e18 Transmission . .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 50G-1 Tank, cleaning.. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 220A-1
CommandCenter. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 30C-5 Tank, refilling . .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 200B-1
Access Lights . .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 90C-1 Testing . .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 200B-3
Advanced Lighting Settings .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 90C-3 Use in SCR equipped engines.. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 200B-2
Calibration DEF dosing unit filter
Slip . .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 30C-5 Change .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 220D-11
Calibrations DEF in-line filter
Radar .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 30C-5 Change .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 220D-9
Camera . .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 30C-8 DEF tank
Compatible Displays . .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 30C-4 Cleaning . .. ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 220A-1
Field lights presets . .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 90C-3 Depth set point
Hood/belt line lights .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 90C-3 Rear hitch . ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 60E-8
Input Fields .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 30C-4 Diagnostic Trouble Codes
iTEC Accessing.. ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 300B-1
Abort conditions . .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. . 40-3, 40-4 Diesel engine oil
Cancel conditions . .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. . 40-3, 40-4 Interim tier 4, final tier 4, stage IIIB, stage IV, and
CommandCenter functions .. .. .. .. ... .. . 40-1, 40-2 stage V . ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 200C-1
Control functions .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 40-1 Service interval for operation at high altitude 200C-1
Inhibit conditions. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. . 40-3, 40-4 Diesel engines, cold weather effect . .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 200-1
Interrupt conditions .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. . 40-3, 40-4 Diesel Exhaust Fluid
Perform sequence. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 40-5 DEF
Set Assignments .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 40-4 Filler neck filter . .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 220A-1
Light identification .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 90C-1 Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF)
Lights settings main page .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 90C-2 Fill DEF Tank-Final Tier 4/Stage V Engine . .. 200B-1
Machine settings menu ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 30C-1 Diesel fuel .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 200A-1
Power on/off. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 30C-4 Supplemental additives .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 200A-1
Shortcut buttons .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 30B-6 Diesel fuel, testing .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 200A-4
Video display capability ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 30C-8 Differential Lock
Compressed air .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 220F-2 Floor Switch .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. . 30-4
Connector
Diagnostic ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 90D-1
Display .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 90D-2
Index-2
Index
Disconnect Battery With starting aid .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 20A-1

Purgw DEF Lines Crankshaft damper .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. 220D-19
DEF, Purgie Lines Emissions certification ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. . 20-9
Battery, Disconnect . .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 220F-2 Operating .. ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. . 20-9
Draft control Reduce Fuel Consumption .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 20-11
Rear hitch ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 60E-6 Restarting when Out of Fuel .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 20-11
Draft response Engine Access Panel, Remove .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 210-2
Rear hitch ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 60E-4 Engine auxiliary drive belt .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 220D-1
Draining Engine Brake
Fuel Filters .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 220B-1 5000 hour service . .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .220B-15
Fuel tank sump . .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 220B-3 Engine coolant
Drawbar .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 60F-2 Disposing of .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 200D-3
Calculate Static Vertical Load .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 60F-4 Engine coolant heater .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 20A-1
Calculate Vertical Load Distance Behind Rear Axle Engine oil . .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 200-1
60F-4 Break-In
Tow cable. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 60F-7 Interim tier 4, final tier 4, stage IIIB, stage IV, and
Drawbar heavy-duty stage V . .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 200C-1
Category 5 load limitations . .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 60F-8 Diesel
Drive Wheel Interim tier 4, final tier 4, stage IIIB, stage IV, and
500 Hour Service Re-Torque. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 220C-1 stage V . .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 200C-1
Drive Wheel Hub Housing Oil Level Service interval for operation at high altitude .. ..
Check . .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. 220B-13 200C-1
Drop rate Engine oil and filter service intervals
Rear hitch ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 60E-3 Interim tier 4, final tier 4, stage IIIB, stage IV, and
stage V
E 0.12 L/kW or greater oil pan . .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 200C-2
e18 Transmission Operation at high altitude.. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 200C-1
Operate . .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 50G-1 Engine Operation
Set Speeds and Efficiency Manager ... .. .. .. .. 50G-3 Battery Booster or Battery Charger ... .. .. .. .. .. 20-12
Shift . .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 50G-1 Battery Disconnect Switch. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. . 20-9
e18 Transmission Settings .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 50G-4 Start the Engine . .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. . 20-9
Access .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 50G-4 Engine Settings
Custom . .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 50G-6 Access . .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. . 20-1
Droop . .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 50G-6 Advanced .. ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. . 20-7
ECO . .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 50G-7 AUTO Exhaust Filter Cleaning .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. . 20-5
Max Speeds. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 50G-7 Automatic Engine Braking . .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. . 20-7
Mode .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 50G-6 Decelerator ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. . 20-7
Effect of cold weather on diesel engines . .. .. .. .. . 200-1 Disable AUTO Exhaust Filter Cleaning . .. .. .. .. . 20-5
Electrical system Exhaust Filter Cleaning Overview .. ... .. .. .. .. .. . 20-4
Introduction .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 220F-1 Main Page . ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. . 20-1
Emergency Exit .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 90D-4 Max Speeds.. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. . 20-3
Emissions Parked Filter Cleaning ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. . 20-6
Required language Power .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. . 20-3
EPA .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 500A-9 Engine Speed
Emissions Equipment PTO .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 60A-6
DPF Service. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 20B-4 Engine Valve Clearance
Emissions Performance 2000 hour service . .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .220B-14
Tampering ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. ... . 2 Exhaust Filter, Safety
Engine Safety, Exhaust Filter . ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 05-13
Air filters External Switches
Inspect . ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 220D-6 Hitch.. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 60E-9
Change starting fluid canister .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 20A-1 PTO .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 60A-5
Check engine and exhaust compartments
Check for debris . .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 220B-2 F
Cold weather starting Fan Speed.. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 90E-3
Change starting fluid canister. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 20A-1
Index-3
Index
Feature Mode Grease

SCV . .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 70A-4 Multipurpose Extreme Pressure (EP) . .. .. .. .. 200E-1
Filter Ground Speed .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 30A-1
Fuel (water separator), auxiliary, check and drain . Ground Speeds
220A-3 e18 PowerShift Transmission . .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 500A-9
Hydraulic oil . .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. . 220D-12
Steering pump .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. . 220D-12 H
Transmission/Axle - PowerShift.. .. .. ... .. .. . 220D-12 Halogen light bulbs
Filters Handling . .. ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 220F-7
Cab air Handling
Inspecting or replacing. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 220D-4 Halogen light bulbs .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 220F-7
Cab recirculation Hardware torque values
Replacing. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 220D-4 Metric .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 210-9
Fuel . .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 220D-2 Unified inch... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 210-10
Filters, Oil High-pressure washer use.. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 220A-2
Oil Filters . ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 200-2 High-pressure washers .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 220F-2
Flow Adjustment Hinge pins .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 220E-1
SCV . .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 70A-4 Hitch
Determine .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 70A-9 Adjust Implement Level .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 60E-10
Flow Adjustment Sensitivity Adjust Lateral Float.. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 60E-11
SCV . .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 70A-7 Adjust Sway Blocks . .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 60E-9
Flow Sharing Components.. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 60E-8
SCV . .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 70A-10 Convertible Quick-Hitch Upper Hook
Fluorinated greenhouse gas, specifications .. .. . 500A-3 Category 4N/3 .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 60E-13
Freeing a Mired Tractor External Switches . .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 60E-9
Transport . ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 110-7 Quick-Hitch
Front console Attach Implement. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 60E-10
Example .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 30-1 Detach Implement .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 60E-11
Front Engine Side Shield, Remove. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 210-2 Hitch (Rear)
Front grille lights Convertible Quick-Hitch Lower Hooks
Adjusting.. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 220F-8 Category 4N/3 .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 60E-12
Fuel Float Operation .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 60E-8
Biodiesel .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 200A-2 Manual Lowering .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 60E-9
Diesel . .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 200A-1 Hitch control lever
Filters . .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 220D-2 Adjustments .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 60E-7
Handling and storing . .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 200A-3 Hitch controls. ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 30B-1
Lubricity. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 200A-3 Hitch Conversion
System .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 20-9 Category 4/4N/3 . .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 60E-11
Tank . .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 200A-3 Hood, Open .. ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 210-1
Tank sump... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 220B-3 Horn
Fuel filter Operate .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. . 30-1
Water separator, auxiliary, check and drain . . 220A-3 HVAC
Fuel Filters Settings
Filters, Fuel.. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 200A-4 Access .. ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 90E-1
Fuel system Air Conditioning. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 90E-3
Bleeding .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 210-9 Air Flow Mode .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 90E-3
Do not modify . .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 210-9 Climate Control Automation .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 90E-2
Fan Speed .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 90E-3
G Main page . .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 90E-1
Gauges. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 30A-1 Set Temperature.. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 90E-2
Glossary . .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 00-1 Hydraulic
GPS Trailer brakes .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 50A-4
Configure Tractor . .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 50B-1 Warm-up . .. ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 50B-3
GPS Data Hydraulic Connection
RS232 Serial Communication Connection .. .. 90D-7 Implement Connection Example [Ag] 70B-8, 70B-10,
70B-12, 70B-13
Index-4
Index
Implement Connection Example [Scraper] .. . 70B-15 iTEC

Hydraulic Connections Functions
Component Identification [Ag].. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 70B-4 Efficiency manager transmission ... .. .. .. .. .. . 40-6
Component Identification [Scraper].. ... .. .. .. . 70B-13 iTEC station description.. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. . 40-1
Connect/Disconnect Hydraulic Hoses.. .. .. .. .. 70B-1
Implements Requiring Large Volumes of Hydraulc J
Oil .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 70B-2 Jack up tractor .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 210-3
Using Hydraulic Spray Pumps [Ag] . ... .. .. .. .. 70B-7
Hydraulic oil . ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 200E-1
Hydraulic System K
Load Sense Key switch .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. . 30-2
Power-Beyond . .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 70B-2
L
I Lateral Float .. ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 60E-11
Identification Number Lifting points for jacking up . .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 210-3
Cab Serial Number . .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 500B-2 Lighting controls .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 30B-2
Identification Plates. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 500B-1 Lights
Track Serial Numbers .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 500B-3 7-Pin Outlet .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 90C-4
Idler Wheel Access Settings.. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 90C-1
500 Hour Service Re-Torque. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 220C-1 Adjusting front grille lights . .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 220F-8
Idler, front .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 220B-8 Aim headlights
Implement Connector Headlights . .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 220F-8
Clean Implement connector .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 220A-4 Daytime running lights setting .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 90C-3
ISO 11783 ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 90D-7 Engine off delayed lighting setting.. ... .. .. .. .. . 90C-3
Independent Mode Entrance/exit lights setting .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 90C-3
SCV . .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 70A-3 Extremity warning lights . .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 90C-4
Indicators Field lights presets settings . .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 90C-3
Alert . .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 30A-1 Front grille flood light bulbs
Digital . .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 30A-1 Replacing.. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. . 220F-7, 220F-8
Information .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 300B-1 Hazard lights . .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 90C-4
Service alert. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 300B-1 Hood/belt line settings .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 90C-3
STOP . .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 300B-1 Identification.. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 90C-1
Warning . .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 30A-1 Light identification . .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 220F-10, 220F-11
Indicators overview .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 20B-1 Main page . ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 90C-2
Inspect air intake system-13.6 l final tier 4 Operate .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. . 30-3
Air intake system . .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. 220B-12 Rotary beacon light.. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 90C-4
Inspect drawbar support and cap screws Load depth
Drawbar support Rear hitch . ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 60E-4
Cap screws .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 220C-1 Lubricant
Inspecting Mixing .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 200E-2
Or replacing cab air filters .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 220D-4 Lubricant Storage
Or replacing recirculation filter . .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 220D-4 Storage, Lubricant . .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 200E-2
Intelligent Total Equipment Control (iTEC) Lubricants, safety . .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 200E-2
Abort conditions .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. . 40-3, 40-4 Lubricate lift cylinders and rockshaft .. ... .. .. .. .. 220E-1
Cancel conditions. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. . 40-3, 40-4 Lubrication and maintenance
CommandARM control functions .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 40-1 As required
CommandCenter description . .. .. .. .. ... .. . 40-1, 40-2 Cleaning DEF tank . ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 220A-1
Inhibit conditions .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. . 40-3, 40-4 Lubricity of diesel fuel .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 200A-3
Interrupt conditions . .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. . 40-3, 40-4
Perform sequence .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 40-5 M
Recommendations (AutoLearn).. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 40-5 Machine stop warning, required . .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. . 20-8
Set Assignments.. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 40-4 Maximum Permissible Static Vertical Load
Set up a sequence . .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 40-2 Specifications .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 500A-7
Introduction to Metric bolt and screw torque values .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 210-9
Electrical system.. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 220F-1 Mid-Roller
500 Hour Service Re-Torque.. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 220C-1
Index-5
Index
Mid-rollers . .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 220B-8 Psotion

Mirrors Rear hitch . ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 60E-5
Adjust . .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 90A-1 Psotion control
Mixing lubricants . .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 200E-2 Rear hitch . ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 60E-6
Multipurpose Extreme Pressure (EP) grease . 200E-1 PTO
Correct Engine Speed ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 60A-6
N External Switches . .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 60A-5
Navigating Generation 4 CommandCenter . .. .. .. 30C-3 Operate .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 60A-5
Navigation bar.. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 30B-6 Settings
Access .. ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 60A-1
Advanced.. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 60A-2
O Engagement Rate .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 60A-3
Oil Main Page. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 60A-1
Engine .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 200-1 PTO Out-of-Seat . .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 60A-3
Interim tier 4, final tier 4, stage IIIB, stage IV, and Rear PTO Speed Limit . .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 60A-3
stage V .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 200C-1 PTO control levers.. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 30B-2
Filters . .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. . 220D-12
Hydraulic.. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 200E-1
Transmission .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 200E-1 Q
Onscreen Help . .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 30C-1 Quick-Hitch . .. ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 60E-11
Operator Station
Business Band or CB, Install. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 90D-5 R
Optional Fuel Water Separator Filter Element (30 Radar
Micron) Configure Tractor .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 50B-1
Service—Change . .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 220D-3 Radar Calibration . .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 30C-5
Other Lubricants Radiator
Transmission and Hydraulic Oil Use ... .. .. .. . 200E-1 Clean. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 220A-2
Outlet Radio controls... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 30B-2
12V Accessory .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 90D-1, 90D-3 Raise rate
AC (Alternating Current) .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 90D-2 Rear hitch . ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 60E-3
Rear Engine Side Shield, Remove .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 210-2
P Rear hitch
Paint care.. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 220A-2 Depth set point. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 60E-8
Passenger seat .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 90-6 Lubricate rear hitch.. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 220E-1
Pedals.. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 30-2 Rear Hitch [Ag]
Performance Ballasting Hitch Lift Capacities . .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 60E-1
Ballast Options.. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 100-2 Rear hitch settings
Ballast Recommendations.. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 100-2 Access . .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 60E-1
Ballasting Recommendations with Implements .. .. . Draft control .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 60E-6
100-3 Drop rate .. ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 60E-3
General Ballasting Information. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 100-1 Load depth ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 60E-4
General Guidelines . .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 100-1 Main Page . ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 60E-1
Idler Weight Use .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 100-5 Position .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 60E-5
Implement Guidelines .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 100-6 Position control .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 60E-6
Measure Slip .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 100-4 Raise rate . ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 60E-3
Quik-Tatch Weight Use ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 100-4 Slip sensitivity .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 60E-4
Unballasted Tractor Weight Chart . .. ... .. .. .. .. . 100-8 Upper limit . ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 60E-3
Wheel Weight Holding Wrench (JDG10958) . 100-6 Recirculation Air Filter
Worksheet to Calculate Ballast Changes.. .. . 100-10 Inspecting or replacing... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 220D-4
PowerShift Record
Calibration ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 210-6 Product identification number . .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 500B-1
Predelivery Record axle serial number
Predelivery Checklist . .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 700-1 Axle serial number .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 500B-3
Product identification .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 500B-1 Record engine serial number
Product Identification Number Engine serial number . ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 500B-2
Serial Number, Tractor . ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 500B-1
Index-6
Index
Record pto clutch serial number SCV Control Lever

PTO clutch serial number .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 500B-3 Adjustments .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 70A-7
Record pto dropbox serial number SCV control levers.. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 30B-2
PTO dropbos serial number.. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 500B-3 SCV Settings . ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 70A-1
Record transmission serial number .. .. ... .. .. .. . 500B-2 Access . .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 70A-1
Refrigerator .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 90D-3 Activating Independent Mode . .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 70A-6
Refueling, avoid static electricity risk. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 05-3 Advanced .. ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 70A-5
Remove tractor from storage Assignment ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 70A-6
Remove tractor storage... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 400-1 Automation ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 70A-6
Replace front suspension air compressor inlet filter Feature Mode .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 70A-4
Front suspension . .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. . 220D-16 Flow Adjustment . .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 70A-4
Required machine stop warning .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 20-8 Flow Adjustment Sensitivity . .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 70A-7
Restarting when Out of Fuel .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 20-11 Flow Assist ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 70A-7
Restored operation option ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 20B-5 Independent Mode .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 70A-3
RS232 Serial Communication Connection.. .. .. .. 90D-7 Standard Mode .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 70A-3
RTK Receiver Time Adjustment. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 70A-5
Installation ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 90D-6 TouchSet Depth Control . .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 70A-4
Running engine .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 20-11 Seat
ActiveSeat II.. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. . 90-3
S Air Seat .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. . 90-1
Safety Operator Presence Sensor .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. . 90-5
Handling Halogen light bulbs. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 220F-7 Seat Belts
Passenger seat . .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 05-8 Checking. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .220B-12
Protect against noise. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 05-2 Serial numbers .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 500B-1
Rotating drivelines, stay clear.. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 05-4 Service
Safe maintenance, practice .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 05-13 10 hour or daily
Tires, service safely .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 05-16 Draining water from fuel filters
Tractor, operating safely .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 05-6 Optional fuel water separator . ... .. .. .. .. 220B-1
Trailers/implements, towing safely. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 05-8 10 hour or Daily
Use caution on slopes, uneven terrain, and rough Checking track, drive wheels, mid-rollers and idler
ground . ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 05-9 wheels
Vibration .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 05-5 Track trash buildup. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 220B-8
Safety chains ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 110-3 500 hours
Safety Lights and Devices Draining fuel tank sump .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 220B-3
Rotary Beacon Light . .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 90C-4 1000 hours
Safety, Avoid High-Pressure Fluids Inspecting recirculation filter . .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 220D-4
Avoid High-Pressure Fluids .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 05-17 1000 hours
Safety, Fire Prevention Inspecting cab air filters .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 220D-4
Fire Prevention. . .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 05-2 2000 hours
Safety, Forestry Operations Check engine valve clearance. .. ... .. .. .. .220B-14
Limited Use in Forestry Operation .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 05-7 Annual
Safety, Handle Fuel Safely, Avoid Fires Checking seat belts ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .220B-12
Avoid Fires, Handle Fuel Safely . .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 05-2 As required
Safety, lubricants. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 200E-2 Cleaning DEF tank . ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 220A-1
Safety, Steps and Handholds Check drive wheel hub housing oil level . .. .220B-13
Use Steps and Handholds Correctly ... .. .. .. .. .. 05-5 Tracks.. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. . 80-1
Safety, Tightening Wheel Retaining Bolts/Nuts Service
Tightening Wheel Retaining Bolts/Nuts .. .. .. .. . 05-16 1500 hours
SCR SCV Pilot Filter . .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 220D-7
Restored operation option .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 20B-5 Service—Break-In (100 Hours or Less)
System overview . .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 20B-3 Perform Break-In Services .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 210A-1
Scraper Applications .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 60F-3 Service—Change
Scraper Information Access Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Dosing Unit
Connect AutoLoad Harness .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 70E-3 Filter. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 220D-11
Scraper Information [Scraper] Access Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) In-Line Filter ..
Scraper Operation Cycle . .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 70E-1 220D-8
Index-7
Index
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Tank Vent Filter 220D-8 Steering

Engine Coolant . .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. . 220D-16 Emergency brake.. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 110-4
Engine Oil and Filter . .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 220D-1 Steering fault indicator . .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 30A-1
Fuel Tank Vent Filters.. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 220D-4 Steering pump filter. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. 220D-12
Optional Fuel Water Separator Filter Element (30 Steering Settings
Micron). ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 220D-3 Access . .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 30C-6
Service—Check Main Page . ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 30C-6
Drawbar Sensor Calibration [Scraper] . .. .. .. 220B-14 Manual Steering Sensitivity . .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 30C-7
Drawbar Wear .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. 220B-15 Steering wheel and column
Engine Coolant Level .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 220B-1 Adjust .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. . 30-1
Engine Oil Level .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 220B-3 Stop bumpers
Service—Clean Walking beam
Tractor Exterior . .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 220A-2 Inspect .. ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 220D-6
Service—Electrical Stopping engine. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 20-11
Access Implement Power Relay Module Relays .. . Storage
220F-6 Chain Box . ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 90D-8
Access Master Fuses .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 220F-6 Cool Box. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 90D-3
Change Rear Fender Light-Rear Indicator .. 220F-10 Fender . .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 90D-4
Load Center-Cab . .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 220F-3 Operator's Manual . .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 90D-4
Load Center-Front .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 220F-4 Overhead .. ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 90D-4
Service Batteries and Connections.. ... .. .. .. . 220F-2 Removal From . .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 400-1
Service—General Information . .. .. .. .. .. ... 210-1, 210-2 Storing fuel . .. ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 200A-3
Access Battery Compartment .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 210-3 Sunshade . .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 90D-4
Remove Cab Rear Panel . .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 210-3 Sway Blocks.. ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 60E-9
ServiceADVISOR .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 30C-5
Servicing and Connecting Snap to Connect Fittings . . T
210-5 Tachometer . .. ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 30A-1
Set Speed . .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 30A-1 Tank, fuel . .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 200A-3
Short drawbar Temperature .. ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 90E-2
Scraper drawbar conversion . .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 60F-6 Tension cylinder pins
Short drawbar support Lubricate. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 220E-2
Short drawbar Test coolant freeze point. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 220B-1
Quick-attach drawbar .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 60F-5 Testing diesel fuel .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 200A-4
Signal words, understand. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 05-1 Theft Deterrent Systems
Slip Calibration . .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 30C-5 CESAR Datatag . .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 20-10
Slip sensitivity Immobilizer Keys .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 20-10
Rear hitch ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 60E-4 Time Adjustment
Snap to Connect Fitting (STC) SCV .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 70A-5
STC . .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 210-5 Tires, service safely .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 05-16
Sound Level . ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 500A-8 Torque charts
Specifications Metric .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 210-9
Capacities ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 500A-2 Unified inch... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 210-10
Electrical System . .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 500A-5 TouchSet Depth Control
Engine .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 500A-1 Connect/Disconnect the Implement Position
Ground Speeds: e18 PowerShift Transmission .. .. . Connector . .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 70C-1
500A-9 Settings .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 70A-4
Hitch, Drawbar, and PTO . .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 500A-5 Settings and Adjustments . .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 70C-1
Hydraulic System . .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 500A-3 Tow Mode—Engine Will Not Start . .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 110-4
Integrated Technology . ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 500A-5 Tow Mode—Engine Will Start .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 110-3
Overall Dimensions. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 500A-6 Towable loads ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 110-1
Sound Level. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 500A-8 Towed mass .. ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 110-1
Transmission and Drivetrain . .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 500A-3 Towing
Standard Mode All Wheels on Ground
SCV . .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 70A-3 Engine Will Not Start.. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 110-4
StarFire Reciever Engine Will Start.. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 110-3
Installation ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 90D-6 Releasing Park Brake. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 110-4
Index-8
Index
Track Main Page

Track Use e18 .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 50G-4
Guidelines .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 80-1 Max Speeds
Track detension or tension .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 220B-5 e18 .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 50G-7
Track systems break-in . .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 210A-1 Mode
Tracks e18 .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 50G-6
Service .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 80-1 Transmission vent filter, replace . .. .. .. ... .. .. .. 220D-12
Tracks, Drive Wheels, Mid-Rollers and Idlers Transmission/Axle oil
Checking.. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 220B-8 Filters .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. 220D-12
Tractor Transmission/Hydraulic Reservoir/Axle oil
Storage Oil change . ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. 220D-12
Preparation For .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 400-1 Transmission/hydraulic reservoir/axles
Tractor storage . .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 400-1 Oil level check . .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 220B-4
Tractor-Implement Automation (TIA) Transport
Activate . .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 40A-1 Emergency brake steering .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 110-4
Introduction .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 40A-1 Freeing a Mired Tractor.. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 110-7
Operate . .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 40A-1 Tow Points. ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 110-3
PowerShift Transmission Requirements . .. .. .. 40A-2 Towed Loads and Transport with Ballast . .. .. .. 110-1
Requirements for AutoTrac. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 40A-2 Transporting
Requirements for E-SCVs .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 40A-2 Driving on roads . .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 110-1
Requirements for PTO . ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 40A-2 Tow Mode—Engine Will Not Start .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 110-4
Requirements for rear hitch .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 40A-3 Tow Mode—Engine Will Start . .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 110-3
Tractor, operating safely .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 05-6 Turn signals
Trailer Brake System Settings Operate .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. . 30-2
Access .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 50A-1
Advanced . ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 50A-3 U
Brake Gain .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 50A-2 Unified inch bolt and screw torque values. .. .. .. 210-10
Main Page ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 50A-1 Upper limit
Pre-Brake Offset .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 50A-2 Rear hitch . ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 60E-3
Trailer Brake Test. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 50A-3 USB Input
Trailer brakes CommandCenter .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 90D-1
Hydraulic.. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 50A-4 Radio. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 90D-1
Transmission
Abort calibration .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 210-9
Access Advanced Settings . .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 50B-1 W
Advanced Settings . .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 50B-1 Walking beam suspension
Operate Air suspension compressor . .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .220B-10
e18 . .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 50G-1 Water separator
Park position .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. 220B-10 Auxiliary, check and drain . .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 220A-3
PowerShift Weep hole
Calibration .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 210-6 Checking. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 220B-3
Set Speeds and Efficiency Manager Wheels, drive. ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 220B-8
e18 . .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 50G-3 Wide-swing drawbar.. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 60F-5
Shift Wipers and Washers
e18 . .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 50G-1 Operate .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. . 30-1
Warm-up .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 50B-3
Transmission oil.. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. . 200E-1 Z
Transmission Settings Zinc-Flake
Access Coated Fasteners . .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 210-9
e18 . .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 50G-4
Custom
e18 . .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 50G-6
Droop
e18 . .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 50G-6
ECO
e18 . .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. 50G-7
Index-9
John Deere Service Literature Available
Technical Information
Technical information can be purchased from John
Deere. Publications are available in print or CD-ROM
format.
Orders can be made using one of the following:
● John Deere Technical Information Store: www.
JohnDeere.com/TechInfoStore
● Call 1-800-522-7448
● Contact your John Deere dealer
Available information includes: TS224—UN—17JAN89

TECHNICAL MANUALS outlining service information
for your machine. Included are specifications, illustrated
assembly and disassembly procedures, hydraulic oil
flow diagrams, and wiring diagrams. Some products
have separate manuals for repair and diagnostic
information. Some components, such as engines, are
available in a separate component technical manual.
TS189—UN—17JAN89
PARTS CATALOGS list service parts available for your
machine with exploded view illustrations to help you
identify the correct parts. It is also useful in assembling
and disassembling.
TS1663—UN—10OCT97
EDUCATIONAL CURRICULUM including five
comprehensive series of books detailing basic
information regardless of manufacturer:
● Agricultural Primer series covers technology in
farming and ranching.
● Farm Business Management series examines “real-
world” problems and offers practical solutions in the
areas of marketing, financing, equipment selection,
and compliance.
TS191—UN—02DEC88 ● Fundamentals of Services manuals show you how to
OPERATOR’S MANUALS providing safety, operating, repair and maintain off-road equipment.
maintenance, and service information. ● Fundamentals of Machine Operation manuals
explain machine capacities and adjustments, how to
improve machine performance, and how to eliminate
unnecessary field operations.
● Fundamentals of Compact Equipment manuals
provide instruction in servicing and maintaining
equipment up to 40 PTO horsepower.
DX,SERVLIT-19-07DEC16
SLIT-1
John Deere Service Keeps You On The Job
John Deere Parts School is never out for John Deere service technicians.
Training schools are held regularly to be sure our
personnel know your equipment and how to maintain it.
Result?
Experience you can count on!
DX,IBC,C-19-04JUN90
Prompt Service
We help minimize downtime by putting genuine John
Deere parts in your hands in a hurry.
That’s why we maintain a large and varied inventory—to
stay a jump ahead of your needs.
DX,IBC,A-19-04JUN90
The Right Tools

Our goal is to provide prompt, efficient care when you
want it and where you want it.
We can make repairs at your place or at ours,
depending on the circumstances: see us, depend on us.
JOHN DEERE SERVICE SUPERIORITY: We'll be
around when you need us.
DX,IBC,D-19-04JUN90
Precision tools and testing equipment enable our
Service Department to locate and correct troubles
quickly . . . to save you time and money.
DX,IBC,B-19-04JUN90
Well-Trained Technicians
IBC-1
Notes

OMTR129420

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

OMTR129420

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

OMTR129420

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What is the manual about?

What is the manual about?

What are some of the safety precautions mentioned?

What are some of the safety precautions mentioned?

*DCY*

9RT Tractors (Serial No. 926001-)

9RT Tractors (Serial No. 926001-)

John Deere Waterloo Works

and repaired only by persons familiar with all its

Glossary Avoid High-Pressure Fluids .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 05-17

Continued on next page

Original Instructions. All information, illustrations and specifications in this

Emissions Equipment Perform Sequence . .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. . 40-5

Corner Post Display Brakes

Rear Hitch [Ag] SCV Settings—Automation .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . 70A-6

Hydraulics—General Information Scraper Information [Scraper]

Tracks—General Information Wheel Weight Holding Wrench(JDG10958) .. .. .. 100-6

Service—Electrical Ground Speeds—e18 PowerShift

Wear Protective Clothing Handle Fuel Safely—Avoid Fires

TS207—UN—23AUG88 Fire Prevention

CAUTION: Avoid personal injury.

Stop machine immediately at the first sign of fire. Fire

Use Foldable ROPS and Seat Belt Properly

PTO Type Diameter Splines n ± 5 mm (0.20 in.)

Use Steps and Handholds Correctly TS1729—UN—24MAY13

Avoid Backover Accidents

Keep Riders Off Machine Use Safety Lights and Devices

Towing Trailers/Implements Safely

Trailer/Implement Brake System Top Speed

Use Caution on Slopes, Uneven Terrain,

Avoid Contact with Agricultural Chemicals

● Do not smoke or eat while applying chemicals.

Handling Batteries Safely

If acid is spilled on skin or in eyes:

Do not use a chlorinated solvent in areas where welding

Handle Electronic Components and

Avoid potentially toxic fumes and dust.

Practice Safe Maintenance Avoid Hot Exhaust

Clean Exhaust Filter Safely

Keep hands, feet, and clothing away from power-driven

Prevent Machine Runaway

Park Machine Safely

● Disconnect the battery ground strap.

TS281—UN—15APR13 Service Front-Wheel Drive Tractor Safely

Tightening Wheel Retaining Bolts/Nuts

Store Attachments Safely

Do Not Open High-Pressure Fuel System

● Release stored energy by lowering suspended

CAUTION: Avoid the risk of injury. Use seat belt properly.

CAUTION: Avoid crushing injury or death

Passenger Seat Rear Hitch Remote Switch (If Equipped)

Park Brake (Stored Energy) Track Accumulators

CAUTION: Avoid injury from sudden release of

Park brake contains spring under load. Remove park

CAUTION: Avoid crushing and fluid injection.

Releasing pressure may cause machine movement and

Rear SCVs—With Hitch [Ag] Rear SCVs—Without Hitch and with

Rear SCVs—Without Hitch and with Wide-

CAUTION: Avoid contact with hot surfaces.

Components of the hydraulic system may become hot.

DCY